Petroleum Experts

User Manual

IPM
GAP
Version 8.5
February 2011
 GAP
IPM - Multiphase Production Optimisation OVERVIEW
by Petroleum Experts Limited

GAP is a multiphase optimiser of the surface network which links with PROSPER and
MBAL to model entire reservoir and productions systems. GAP can model production
systems containing oil, gas and condensate, in addition to gas or water injection systems.

GAP has the most powerful and fastest optimisation engine in the industry. Wellhead
chokes can be set, compressors and pumps optimised, and Gas for gas lifted wells,
allocated to maximise Oil Production or Revenue while honouring constraints at any level.
With MBAL field production forecast can be run.

GAP is part of the IPM suite, which allows the engineer to build complete system models,
including the reservoirs, wells and surface system.

APPLICATIONS

• Full field surface network design

• Field Optimisation studies with mixed systems (ESP, GL, Naturally Flowing)
• Multi-phase Looped Network Optimisation
• Advises on wellhead chokes settings to meet reservoir management targets
• Field Gas Lift Optimisation
• Models full field injection system performance, using MBAL reservoir
tank models
• Compressor and Pump system modelling
• Production forecasting
• Programmable elements
• Rigorous Compositional modeling from the Reservoir to the Process side
• Fast and robust Optimisation algorithm using Sequential Quadratic
Programming SQP
• Easy to use graphical interface for drawing system network (using
icons for separators, compressors, pipelines, manifolds and wells,
inline chokes and reservoir tanks)
• GAP is unique in being able to model, optimise and run predictions of
the entire production system, with MBAL and PROSPER
• Naturally flowing, gas lift and ESP wells can all be included in the same
production system model
• GAP links to PROSPER (well model) and MBAL (tank model) to allow
entire production systems to be modelled and optimised over the life
of the field
• GAP optimisation technique is much more robust than iterative
methods and is simpler to use.
 3

Copyright Notice
The copyright in this manual and the associated computer program are the property of Petroleum Experts
Ltd. All rights reserved. Both, this manual and the computer program have been provided pursuant to a
Licence Agreement containing restriction of use.

No part of this manual may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or
translated into any language, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical or
otherwise, or disclose to third parties without prior written consent from Petroleum Experts Ltd., Petex House,
10 Logie Mill, Edinburgh, EH7 4HG, Scotland, UK.

© Petroleum Experts Ltd. All rights reserved.

IPM Suite, GAP, PROSPER, MBAL, PVTP, REVEAL, RESOLVE, IFM and OpenServer are trademarks of
Petroleum Experts Ltd.

Microsoft (Windows), Windows (2000) and Windows (XP) are registered trademarks of the Microsoft
Corporation

The software described in this manual is furnished under a licence agreement. The software may be used
or copied only in accordance with the terms of the agreement. It is against the law to copy the software on
any medium except as specifically allowed in the license agreement. No part of this documentation may be
reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying,
recording, or information storage and retrieval systems for any purpose other than the purchaser's personal
use, unless express written consent has been given by Petroleum Experts Limited.

Address:

Petroleum Experts Limited

Petex House
10 Logie Mill
Edinburgh, Scotland
EH7 4HG

Tel : (44 131) 474 7030

Fax : (44 131) 474 7031

email: edinburgh@petex.com
Internet: www.petex.com

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 I GAP

Table of Contents
0

Chapter 1 Technical Overview 2

1 Field Optimisation
................................................................................................................................... 4
2 Field Planning
................................................................................................................................... 5
3 Fluid modelling
...................................................................................................................................
(PVT) 6
Introduction
..........................................................................................................................................................
to Lumping/Delumping 6
4 Reservoir
...................................................................................................................................
Modelling 10
5 Flow assurance
...................................................................................................................................
and advanced thermal modelling options 11
6 Artificial
...................................................................................................................................
Lift 12
7 Complex
...................................................................................................................................
Well Geometry 13
8 Automation
................................................................................................................................... 14
9 The Core
...................................................................................................................................
GAP Technique 15
About the..........................................................................................................................................................
Network Solver 15
About the..........................................................................................................................................................
Optimiser 16
Considerations
..........................................................................................................................................................
on Optimisation 17
10 Examples
...................................................................................................................................
Index 24
11 What's...................................................................................................................................
New 26

Chapter 2 User Guide 38

1 What is
...................................................................................................................................
in this guide? 38
2 Introduction
................................................................................................................................... 39
How to Use
..........................................................................................................................................................
This Guide 41
GAP Glossary
..........................................................................................................................................................
of Terms 42
3 Getting
...................................................................................................................................
Started with GAP 44
The GAP..........................................................................................................................................................
User Interface 44
Opening
.........................................................................................................................................................
a File 46
Saving
.........................................................................................................................................................
a File 46
The System
.........................................................................................................................................................
Window 47
The Toolbar
......................................................................................................................................................... 50
The Navigator
.........................................................................................................................................................
Window 54
Drawing
.........................................................................................................................................................
the System 56
The Preferences
.........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog 59
Defining
.........................................................................................................................................................
User Correlations 61
Edit Ini
.........................................................................................................................................................
File 62
Defining
.........................................................................................................................................................
the Working Directory 62
Printing
.........................................................................................................................................................
from GAP 62
Exiting
.........................................................................................................................................................
GAP 63
Project Archiving
.......................................................................................................................................................... 64
Archive
.........................................................................................................................................................
Creation 64
Archive
.........................................................................................................................................................
Extraction 67
The Options
..........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 70
Method
......................................................................................................................................................... 70
Edit Injection
.........................................................................................................................................................
Fluids 76
 Contents II

Edit Tax
.........................................................................................................................................................
Regimes 77
Edit Emulsion
.........................................................................................................................................................
Models 78
Edit Default
.........................................................................................................................................................
Settings 82
Edit System
.........................................................................................................................................................
Summary 84
View.........................................................................................................................................................
System Statistics 85
Disable
.........................................................................................................................................................
Options 85
The View..........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 87
Draw.........................................................................................................................................................
Options 88
Highlight
.........................................................................................................................................................
Options 88
Highlight TVD
.........................................................................................................................................
Differences 88
Highlight Violated
.........................................................................................................................................
and Limiting Constraints 91
Window
.........................................................................................................................................................
Aspect and Drawing Options 92
Select Info Displayed
......................................................................................................................................... 92
Select Default
.........................................................................................................................................
Icon Label Position 92
Colours ......................................................................................................................................... 93
Icon Sizes ......................................................................................................................................... 94
Fonts ......................................................................................................................................... 94
Grid ......................................................................................................................................... 94
Network
.........................................................................................................................................................
Drawing Position 95
Normalize Equipment
.........................................................................................................................................
Icons Position and Snap to Grid 95
The Edit ..........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 95
Undo.........................................................................................................................................................
Options 96
Select
.........................................................................................................................................................
Options 97
Selected
.........................................................................................................................................................
Equipment Options 98
Selected Items
......................................................................................................................................... 99
Selected Wells
.........................................................................................................................................
and Inflows 101
Selected Pipes
......................................................................................................................................... 102
Selected Tanks
......................................................................................................................................... 103
Selected Groups
......................................................................................................................................... 104
Find.........................................................................................................................................................
Equipment on System Window 104
Edit.........................................................................................................................................................
Options 106
Edit Equipment
.........................................................................................................................................
Controls 106
Edit Project.........................................................................................................................................
Paths 107
Transfer
.........................................................................................................................................................
and Import Options 108
Transfer Well
.........................................................................................................................................
Data from MBAL Models 108
Initialise IPRs
.........................................................................................................................................
from Tank Simulations 110
Import Compositions
......................................................................................................................................... 111
Lump/Delump
.........................................................................................................................................
Compositions 111
Transfer Options
.........................................................................................................................................
for Gas Lift Injection 112
Execute
.........................................................................................................................................................
OpenServer Statement 112
Importing
.........................................................................................................................................................
GAP models in an existing project 113
The Constraints
..........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 118
System
.........................................................................................................................................................
Constraints 119
Binding
.........................................................................................................................................................
(Yes/No) 121
Edit.........................................................................................................................................................
Constraints Table 121
Edit.........................................................................................................................................................
Abandonment Constraints Table 123
4 Describing
...................................................................................................................................
the PVT 124
Black Oil
.......................................................................................................................................................... 126
Compositional
..........................................................................................................................................................
Options 128
EoS.........................................................................................................................................................
Model Setup 129
More Lumping
......................................................................................................................................... 135
Setting
.........................................................................................................................................................
up a Compositional model 139
Tracking
......................................................................................................................................................... 142
Fully
.........................................................................................................................................................
Compositional 143

February, 2011 GAP User Guide

II
III GAP

Black
.........................................................................................................................................................
Oil Compositional Lumping/Delumping 144
Viewing
.........................................................................................................................................................
Compositional Results 145
5 Equipment
...................................................................................................................................
Data 149
Introduction
.......................................................................................................................................................... 149
Equipment
..........................................................................................................................................................
Data Entry Screen Format 149
The.........................................................................................................................................................
Navigator - Equipment list 150
Section
.........................................................................................................................................................
Buttons 152
Summary ......................................................................................................................................... 152
Input Button
......................................................................................................................................... 152
Results Button
......................................................................................................................................... 153
Action
.........................................................................................................................................................
Buttons 154
Wells .......................................................................................................................................................... 156
Well.........................................................................................................................................................
Summary Screen 157
Calculate
......................................................................................................................................................... 161
Well.........................................................................................................................................................
Input Screens 165
Tank Connections
......................................................................................................................................... 166
Multi-Layer...................................................................................................................................
Case 167
IPR Input ......................................................................................................................................... 167
Ipr Layer input
...................................................................................................................................
data 169
Composition
................................................................................................................................... 174
Action Buttons
...................................................................................................................................
in IPR Input Screens. 174
More Layer...................................................................................................................................
Data 177
Production...................................................................................................................................
Data 180
Tight Gas ...................................................................................................................................
IPR 182
Grid View ................................................................................................................................... 185
Abandonment
...................................................................................................................................
Section 186
Note on water
...................................................................................................................................
injector's IPR 188
VLP Input ......................................................................................................................................... 189
Inspection...................................................................................................................................
of VLP Data 193
Well Constraints
......................................................................................................................................... 195
General Constraints
................................................................................................................................... 195
Gas Lifted...................................................................................................................................
Wells Constraints 197
Diluent Injection
...................................................................................................................................
Wells Constraints 197
ESP, HSP,
...................................................................................................................................
PCP and Jet Pump Wells Constraints 198
Abandonment
...................................................................................................................................
Constraints 200
Symbols ................................................................................................................................... 201
Notes on Constraints
................................................................................................................................... 201
Controls ......................................................................................................................................... 202
Symbols ................................................................................................................................... 202
dP Control................................................................................................................................... 203
Gas Lift Control
................................................................................................................................... 204
ESP Control
................................................................................................................................... 205
Diluent Control
................................................................................................................................... 206
HSP Control
................................................................................................................................... 207
Jet Pump Control
................................................................................................................................... 208
PCP Control
................................................................................................................................... 209
Fluids Property
...................................................................................................................................
Setup 209
PC Data ......................................................................................................................................... 210
PC Generation
................................................................................................................................... 211
Downtime ......................................................................................................................................... 212
Coning (For.........................................................................................................................................
Oil Producers Only) 212
Schedule (ONLY
.........................................................................................................................................
for Prediction) 214
Outflow
.........................................................................................................................................................
Only Well 216
Outflow Only
.........................................................................................................................................
- VLP 218
 Contents IV

Outflow Only
.........................................................................................................................................
- PROSPER 219
Importing the
...................................................................................................................................
equipment data from PROSPER 220
Entering The
...................................................................................................................................
Equipment in GAP Directly 225
Completing...................................................................................................................................
the Outflow Only Well - Inflow Performance Setup 225
Well.........................................................................................................................................................
Results Screen 226
Gradient Results
......................................................................................................................................... 227
Well Layer.........................................................................................................................................
Results 228
Reporting Results
......................................................................................................................................... 229
Separators
..........................................................................................................................................................
(Production / Injection) 230
Separator
.........................................................................................................................................................
Summary Screen 232
Separator
.........................................................................................................................................................
Input Screens 234
Separator Constraints
......................................................................................................................................... 234
Separation.........................................................................................................................................
(PRODUCTION Separators ONLY) 237
Injection
.........................................................................................................................................................
Fluid Details (INJECTION Man.Only) 237
Schedule (PREDICTION
.........................................................................................................................................
Cases ONLY) 239
Steam Stream
......................................................................................................................................... 240
Oil Injection.........................................................................................................................................
manifold 246
Joints .......................................................................................................................................................... 247
Joint
.........................................................................................................................................................
Summary Screen 247
Joint
.........................................................................................................................................................
Input Screen 248
Joint
.........................................................................................................................................................
Constraints 249
Schedule
......................................................................................................................................................... 250
Pipelines
.......................................................................................................................................................... 251
Pipeline
.........................................................................................................................................................
Summary Screen 252
GAP
.........................................................................................................................................................
Internal Correlations 254
Pipe Input Data
......................................................................................................................................... 255
Pipe Environment
................................................................................................................................... 255
Pipe Description
................................................................................................................................... 256
Pipe Entry...................................................................................................................................
Example 262
Pipeline Pressure
...................................................................................................................................
Matching 265
Entering Pipe
...................................................................................................................................
Match Data 265
The Match...................................................................................................................................
Calculation 266
Constraints
................................................................................................................................... 269
Schedule (ONLY
...................................................................................................................................
for Prediction) 269
Pressure/Temperature
.........................................................................................................................................
gradient result 271
Using
.........................................................................................................................................................
Lift Curves for the Pipeline Pressure Drops 274
External ......................................................................................................................................... 275
GAP Internal
.........................................................................................................................................
Correlations 276
PROSPER.........................................................................................................................................
on line 280
PROSPER.........................................................................................................................................
file 282
PROSPER
.........................................................................................................................................................
On Line Pressure Drops 283
Edit Pipe entry
......................................................................................................................................... 284
Rough Approximation
................................................................................................................................... 286
Enthalpy Balance
................................................................................................................................... 287
Improved Approximation
................................................................................................................................... 293
Gradient
.........................................................................................................................................................
Calculation 295
Bottlenecks
......................................................................................................................................................... 298
Emulsion
.........................................................................................................................................................
correction 299
Wax
.........................................................................................................................................................
or Hydrate Risk 303
Tanks .......................................................................................................................................................... 304
Tank
.........................................................................................................................................................
Summary Screen 306
Tank
.........................................................................................................................................................
Input Data (Material Balance Tank) 308
Constraints......................................................................................................................................... 308
Wells ......................................................................................................................................... 309

February, 2011 GAP User Guide

IV
V GAP

Injection ......................................................................................................................................... 310

Tank Schedule
......................................................................................................................................... 311
Tank Results
......................................................................................................................................... 311
Tank
.........................................................................................................................................................
Input Data (Decline Curve Tank) 311
Tank Production
.........................................................................................................................................
Data 312
Compressibility
......................................................................................................................................... 313
Flares and
..........................................................................................................................................................
Vents 314
Summary
.........................................................................................................................................................
and Input 314
Results
......................................................................................................................................................... 314
Pumps .......................................................................................................................................................... 315
Pump
.........................................................................................................................................................
Summary Data 316
Pump
.........................................................................................................................................................
Input Data 318
Jet .........................................................................................................................................................
Pumps Option 320
Pump
.........................................................................................................................................................
Calculate Button 322
Pump
.........................................................................................................................................................
Control 324
Pump
.........................................................................................................................................................
Schedule (ONLY for prediction) 325
Compressors
.......................................................................................................................................................... 326
Compressor
.........................................................................................................................................................
Summary Data 326
Input
.........................................................................................................................................................
Data for Compressor (Full Model) 327
Input
.........................................................................................................................................................
Data for Fixed dP Compressor 334
Input
.........................................................................................................................................................
Data for Fixed Power Compressor 335
Input
.........................................................................................................................................................
Data for Reciprocating Compressor 337
Compressor
.........................................................................................................................................................
Control (Full Model Only) 338
Compressor
.........................................................................................................................................................
Schedule (ONLY for Prediction) 338
Compressor
.........................................................................................................................................................
Calculate Button 339
Operating
.........................................................................................................................................................
point in Plot 339
Surge
.........................................................................................................................................................
and Choke 340
Efficiency
.........................................................................................................................................................
vs rate 340
Sources..........................................................................................................................................................
/ Sink 341
Source
......................................................................................................................................................... 341
Source Data
.........................................................................................................................................
Entry 343
Source Summary
...................................................................................................................................
Data 343
Source Data
...................................................................................................................................
Input 345
Source Schedule
...................................................................................................................................
(ONLY for Prediction) 346
Steam Stream
................................................................................................................................... 346
Sink......................................................................................................................................................... 346
Sink Data Entry
......................................................................................................................................... 347
Sink Summary
.........................................................................................................................................
Data 347
Sink Input Data
......................................................................................................................................... 348
Sink Schedule
...................................................................................................................................
(ONLY for Prediction) 348
Inline Elements
.......................................................................................................................................................... 348
Inline
.........................................................................................................................................................
Gate Valve 349
Inline gate .........................................................................................................................................
Valve Data Summary Screen 350
Input Data .........................................................................................................................................
/ Schedule ( ONLY for prediction) 350
Inline
.........................................................................................................................................................
Check Valve 351
Inline Check
.........................................................................................................................................
Valve Data Summary Screen 351
Input Data .........................................................................................................................................
/ Schedule ( ONLY for prediction) 352
Inline
.........................................................................................................................................................
Separation 352
Inline Separation
.........................................................................................................................................
Data Summary Screen 352
Inline Separation
.........................................................................................................................................
Data Input Screen 353
Input Data .........................................................................................................................................
/ Schedule (ONLY for prediction) 353
Inline
.........................................................................................................................................................
Choke 353
Inline Choke
.........................................................................................................................................
Data Summary Screen 354
Inline Choke
.........................................................................................................................................
dP Control 355
 Contents VI

Input Data .........................................................................................................................................

/ Schedule (ONLY for prediction) 357
Inline
.........................................................................................................................................................
Injection 357
Inline Injection
.........................................................................................................................................
Data Summary Screen 357
Inline Injection
.........................................................................................................................................
Data Input Screen 358
Defining the
...................................................................................................................................
Injection Rate 358
Defining the
...................................................................................................................................
Injection Fluid PVT 360
Schedule (ONLY
.........................................................................................................................................
for prediction) 360
Inline
.........................................................................................................................................................
General 360
Notes on Inline
.........................................................................................................................................
General Elements 361
Inline General
.........................................................................................................................................
Input Data (Script) Screen 362
Inline General
.........................................................................................................................................
Script Variables 362
Schedule (ONLY
.........................................................................................................................................
for prediction) 363
Inline Element
.........................................................................................................................................
Variables 363
Control Variables
......................................................................................................................................... 365
Temporary .........................................................................................................................................
Variables 366
Results Variables
......................................................................................................................................... 366
Tax Regime
.........................................................................................................................................
Variables 367
FLOW and.........................................................................................................................................
COMP Structure Variables 367
PVT Calculator
.........................................................................................................................................
- Black Oil 370
PVT Calculator
.........................................................................................................................................
- Compositional 372
Logging Messages
......................................................................................................................................... 374
Mathematical
.........................................................................................................................................
Functions 375
Control Structures
......................................................................................................................................... 376
Example Script
......................................................................................................................................... 377
Inflow Icon
.......................................................................................................................................................... 378
Inflow
.........................................................................................................................................................
Summary Screen 378
Input
......................................................................................................................................................... 379
Grouping
.......................................................................................................................................................... 379
Grouping
.........................................................................................................................................................
Data Entry 380
Constraints......................................................................................................................................... 380
Schedule ......................................................................................................................................... 381
Grouping ......................................................................................................................................... 382
Flowsheets
.......................................................................................................................................................... 384
Summary,
.........................................................................................................................................................
Input, Results 388
Notes on
..........................................................................................................................................................
Constraints 388
6 VLP/IPR
...................................................................................................................................
Generation 388
A well model
..........................................................................................................................................................
in GAP 389
IPR......................................................................................................................................................... 390
VLP......................................................................................................................................................... 390
Importance
.........................................................................................................................................................
of VLP Data Ranges 390
Batch Generation
..........................................................................................................................................................
of IPR’s 390
Single
.........................................................................................................................................................
layer wells 390
Multilayer
.........................................................................................................................................................
wells 394
Batch Generation
..........................................................................................................................................................
of Well and Pipe VLPs 402
Batch
.........................................................................................................................................................
Generation of VLPs 402
Values
.........................................................................................................................................................
to use for VLP Generation 408
Generating
.........................................................................................................................................................
Well VLP on a well-by-well basis 412
Batch
.........................................................................................................................................................
Generation of VLPs with Mass flow rates 414
Batch
.........................................................................................................................................................
Generation of Pipe VLPs 418
Batch Generation
..........................................................................................................................................................
of Well Performance Curves 420
7 Model...................................................................................................................................
Validation 425
Well Model
..........................................................................................................................................................
Validation 425
Checking
..........................................................................................................................................................
Wells Calibration 425

February, 2011 GAP User Guide

VI
VII GAP

Running
.........................................................................................................................................................
Model Validation / Quality Check 426
Checking
.........................................................................................................................................................
the Quality of Individual Wells Graphically 430
8 Network
...................................................................................................................................
Solver and Optimiser 434
The Solver
.......................................................................................................................................................... 434
The Optimiser
.......................................................................................................................................................... 434
Constraints
..........................................................................................................................................................
and Equipment Control Screen 434
Constraints
......................................................................................................................................................... 434
Equipment
.........................................................................................................................................................
Control Screen 435
Optimisation
.........................................................................................................................................................
Objective Function 437
Solving..........................................................................................................................................................
the Network 440
Solver Modes
.......................................................................................................................................................... 441
No Optimisation
......................................................................................................................................................... 442
Optimise
.........................................................................................................................................................
with all constraints 443
Optimise
.........................................................................................................................................................
with potential constraints only 444
The Solver
..........................................................................................................................................................
/ Optimiser Settings 444
Calculation
..........................................................................................................................................................
Results 451
9 Prediction
................................................................................................................................... 453
Prediction
..........................................................................................................................................................
- Basics 455
Forecast
.........................................................................................................................................................
Workflow 455
Linking
.........................................................................................................................................................
MBAL files to GAP 456
Prediction
.........................................................................................................................................................
Execution and Results 457
Notes
.........................................................................................................................................................
on Constraints 463
Linking
.........................................................................................................................................................
Production / Injection Forecasting 464
Prediction
..........................................................................................................................................................
Options 467
Run.........................................................................................................................................................
Prediction 468
View
.........................................................................................................................................................
Prediction Log 468
Save
.........................................................................................................................................................
Prediction Results as 469
Reload
.........................................................................................................................................................
Prediction Snapshot 472
Prediction
.........................................................................................................................................................
Script Options 473
Edit.........................................................................................................................................................
System Constraints Schedule 474
Notes on Constraints
......................................................................................................................................... 475
Edit.........................................................................................................................................................
Separator and Joint Schedules 476
Edit.........................................................................................................................................................
Equipment Schedule 479
Edit.........................................................................................................................................................
Tank Schedule 482
Edit.........................................................................................................................................................
Gas lift Schedule 484
Edit.........................................................................................................................................................
DCQ Schedule 486
Edit.........................................................................................................................................................
Schedule Event Groups 487
Apply
.........................................................................................................................................................
Schedule to 489
Purge
.........................................................................................................................................................
Results 490
Plot.........................................................................................................................................................
and View the Prediction Results 490
Plot Nodes.........................................................................................................................................
Prediction Results 491
Plot Tanks .........................................................................................................................................
Prediction Results 493
Plot Emissions
.........................................................................................................................................
Prediction Results 493
View DCQ .........................................................................................................................................
Prediction Results 493
10 Results
...................................................................................................................................
and Reports 494
Results ..........................................................................................................................................................
Menu 495
Detailed
.........................................................................................................................................................
Results 495
Summary
.........................................................................................................................................................
Results 496
Total
.........................................................................................................................................................
System Results 498
System
.........................................................................................................................................................
Emissions 499
Plot.........................................................................................................................................................
Performance Curves... 501
Plot.........................................................................................................................................................
Options 502
Reports.......................................................................................................................................................... 508
 Contents VIII

11 History
...................................................................................................................................
Matching an IPM Model 510
Introduction
.......................................................................................................................................................... 511
Procedure
..........................................................................................................................................................
for History Matching 511
Running
.........................................................................................................................................................
the model and comparing to history 512
History
.........................................................................................................................................................
matching each element independently 512
12 Prediction
...................................................................................................................................
Script 520
Introduction
.......................................................................................................................................................... 520
Functions
.......................................................................................................................................................... 521
Example
.......................................................................................................................................................... 522
13 Defining
...................................................................................................................................
System Units 525
Defining..........................................................................................................................................................
the Global Unit System 525
Setting ..........................................................................................................................................................
the Input / Output Unit System 526
The Control
..........................................................................................................................................................
Database 527
Defining..........................................................................................................................................................
Units at a Variable Level (Dynamic Unit Conversions) 528

Chapter 3 Examples Guide 531

1 Examples
...................................................................................................................................
Index 531
Extracting
..........................................................................................................................................................
a GAP Archive file (.GAR) 533
2 Example
...................................................................................................................................
1 - Gas Field Network modelling with GAP 535
Objectives
.......................................................................................................................................................... 535
Data available
.......................................................................................................................................................... 536
Build the
..........................................................................................................................................................
GAP model 537
Draw
.........................................................................................................................................................
the GAP Network 537
Define
.........................................................................................................................................................
the Reservoir 545
Define
.........................................................................................................................................................
the Wells 547
Generate
.........................................................................................................................................................
Well IPRs 549
Generate
.........................................................................................................................................................
Well VLPs 552
Define
.........................................................................................................................................................
the Pipelines 554
Setting
.........................................................................................................................................................
Schedules, Constraints and Well Controls 564
Running..........................................................................................................................................................
the Prediction 567
Results
......................................................................................................................................................... 570
3 Example
...................................................................................................................................
2 - Oil Production Network 574
Objectives
.......................................................................................................................................................... 574
Data available
.......................................................................................................................................................... 575
Build the
..........................................................................................................................................................
GAP model 577
Draw
.........................................................................................................................................................
the GAP Network 577
Define
.........................................................................................................................................................
the Reservoirs 583
Define
.........................................................................................................................................................
the Wells 584
Generate
.........................................................................................................................................................
Well IPRs 585
Generate
.........................................................................................................................................................
Well VLPs 587
Model
.........................................................................................................................................................
Validation to QC the wells 589
Define
.........................................................................................................................................................
the Pipelines 590
Question
..........................................................................................................................................................
1 - Solution 596
Initialise
.........................................................................................................................................................
IPRs from Tank Simulations 596
Solve
.........................................................................................................................................................
network for wells fully open 598
Question
..........................................................................................................................................................
2 - Solution 601
Entering
.........................................................................................................................................................
the Constraint 601
Setting
.........................................................................................................................................................
Well Controls 601
Solve
.........................................................................................................................................................
Network with Optimisation 602
Question
..........................................................................................................................................................
3 - Solution 605
Run.........................................................................................................................................................
Prediction with Optimisation 605
Saving
.........................................................................................................................................................
the Prediction results 609

February, 2011 GAP User Guide

VIII
IX GAP

Question
..........................................................................................................................................................
4 - Solution 610
Setting
.........................................................................................................................................................
a Schedule 610
Run.........................................................................................................................................................
Prediction with Optimisation 611
Comparing.........................................................................................................................................
scenarios 615
4 Example
...................................................................................................................................
3 - Pipeline detailed results 619
Objectives
.......................................................................................................................................................... 619
Data available
.......................................................................................................................................................... 619
Run Solve
..........................................................................................................................................................
Network 619
Pipeline..........................................................................................................................................................
detailed results 621
Note on..........................................................................................................................................................
pipeline results 624
Convert
.........................................................................................................................................................
the pipeline to PROSPER on line 625
5 Example
...................................................................................................................................
4 - Gas Lift Optimisation 628
Objectives
.......................................................................................................................................................... 628
Data Available
.......................................................................................................................................................... 629
Build the
..........................................................................................................................................................
GAP Network 630
Draw
.........................................................................................................................................................
the GAP Network 631
Define
.........................................................................................................................................................
the wells 636
Generate
.........................................................................................................................................................
Well IPRs 639
Generate
.........................................................................................................................................................
Well VLPs 641
Define
.........................................................................................................................................................
the Pipelines 643
Scenario
..........................................................................................................................................................
with fixed allocation 646
Enter
.........................................................................................................................................................
current gas lift allocation 647
Solve
.........................................................................................................................................................
Network with No Optimisation 649
Solve Network
..........................................................................................................................................................
with optimised gas lift allocation 651
Set.........................................................................................................................................................
gas lift Controls 651
Solve
.........................................................................................................................................................
Network with Optimisation 651
6 Example
...................................................................................................................................
5 - Gas Lift Injection Network 654
Objectives
.......................................................................................................................................................... 654
Data Available
.......................................................................................................................................................... 655
Modify the
..........................................................................................................................................................
production network 656
Generate
.........................................................................................................................................................
the well VLPs in PROSPER 657
Setting
.........................................................................................................................................................
well Controls in GAP 660
Build the
..........................................................................................................................................................
Gas Lift Injection Network 662
Draw
.........................................................................................................................................................
the GAP Network 662
Define
.........................................................................................................................................................
the Wellheads 668
Define
.........................................................................................................................................................
Pipelines and surface equipment 669
Link the..........................................................................................................................................................
production to the gas injection network 671
Solve Network
..........................................................................................................................................................
with Optimisation including Gas Lift Injection Network 673
7 Example
...................................................................................................................................
6 - Electric Submersible Pump - Model Calibration 678
Objectives
.......................................................................................................................................................... 678
Data Available
.......................................................................................................................................................... 679
Build the
..........................................................................................................................................................
GAP model 680
Draw
.........................................................................................................................................................
the GAP Network 680
Define
.........................................................................................................................................................
the Wells 686
Generate
.........................................................................................................................................................
Well IPRs 688
Import
.........................................................................................................................................................
Well VLPs 690
Model
.........................................................................................................................................................
validation to QC wells 691
Define
.........................................................................................................................................................
the Pipelines 694
Present..........................................................................................................................................................
production 698
Well.........................................................................................................................................................
Controls 698
Solve
.........................................................................................................................................................
Network without Optimisation 699
Optimising
..........................................................................................................................................................
production 702
Constraint
.........................................................................................................................................................
on maximum power 702
 Contents X

Well.........................................................................................................................................................
Controls 703
Solve
.........................................................................................................................................................
Network with Optimisation 705
8 Example
...................................................................................................................................
7 - Associated Water Injection System 709
Objectives
.......................................................................................................................................................... 709
Data available
.......................................................................................................................................................... 710
Prediction
..........................................................................................................................................................
to determine water injection requirement 710
Determine
..........................................................................................................................................................
number fo injection wells 713
Associate
..........................................................................................................................................................
production to water injection model 716
Run Prediction
..........................................................................................................................................................
with coupled models 718
9 Example
...................................................................................................................................
8 - Prosper On-line Pipeline 724
Objectives
.......................................................................................................................................................... 724
Data Available
.......................................................................................................................................................... 725
Convert..........................................................................................................................................................
the pipe to PROSPER on line 725
Run calculation
..........................................................................................................................................................
and read results 728
Importing
..........................................................................................................................................................
an existing PROSPER model 734
10 Example
...................................................................................................................................
9 - Programmable inline element 737
Objectives
.......................................................................................................................................................... 737
Data available
.......................................................................................................................................................... 738
Define the
..........................................................................................................................................................
Inline Programmable 738
Run calculation
..........................................................................................................................................................
and view results 741
11 Example
...................................................................................................................................
10 - Smart Well Modelling in GAP 743
Objectives
.......................................................................................................................................................... 743
Data Available
.......................................................................................................................................................... 744
Build the
..........................................................................................................................................................
GAP Network 744
Draw
.........................................................................................................................................................
the GAP Network 746
Define
.........................................................................................................................................................
the IPR elements 749
Define
.........................................................................................................................................................
the Pipe CD 752
Define
.........................................................................................................................................................
the Outflow AB 753
Making
.........................................................................................................................................................
the gas inflow controllable 755
Solve Network
..........................................................................................................................................................
with no Optimisation 756
Solve Network
..........................................................................................................................................................
with Optimisation 758
12 Example
...................................................................................................................................
11 - GAP Fully Compositional 761
Objectives
.......................................................................................................................................................... 761
Data Available
.......................................................................................................................................................... 763
Build the
..........................................................................................................................................................
GAP model 764
Draw
.........................................................................................................................................................
the GAP network 764
Define
.........................................................................................................................................................
the Reservoir 767
Setting
.........................................................................................................................................................
up MBAL as compositional 768
Entering compositional
.........................................................................................................................................
PVT Data 770
Define
.........................................................................................................................................................
the Wells 775
Generate
.........................................................................................................................................................
Well IPRs 777
Import
.........................................................................................................................................................
VLPs 777
Import
.........................................................................................................................................................
EoS Composition in GAP 778
Define
.........................................................................................................................................................
the Pipelines 781
Completing
.........................................................................................................................................................
the model 782
Solve Network
..........................................................................................................................................................
and viewing results 783
Viewing
.........................................................................................................................................................
the detailed compositional results 786
Prediction
..........................................................................................................................................................
and viewing results 790
13 Example
...................................................................................................................................
12 - Compositional Lumping/Delumping 795
Objectives
.......................................................................................................................................................... 795
Data Available
.......................................................................................................................................................... 796
Create and
..........................................................................................................................................................
export the Lumped and the De-lumped compositions 796

February, 2011 GAP User Guide

X
XI GAP

Enter
.........................................................................................................................................................
the lumped/de-lumped composition in MBAL 802
Enter
.........................................................................................................................................................
the lumped/de-lumped composition in GAP 806
Prediction
..........................................................................................................................................................
and viewing the results 811
14 Example
...................................................................................................................................
13 - Black Oil Compositional Lumping-Delumping 816
Objectives
.......................................................................................................................................................... 816
Data Available
.......................................................................................................................................................... 817
Set up GAP
..........................................................................................................................................................
as Black Oil compositional Lumping/Delumping 817
Solve Network
..........................................................................................................................................................
and results 820
Prediction
..........................................................................................................................................................
and viewing the results 822
Black Oil
..........................................................................................................................................................
- Lumping/Delumping 825
Chapter

1
 2 GAP

1 Technical Overview
PETROLEUM EXPERTS GAP (General Allocation Package) is a multiphase flow simulator that
is able to model and optimise production and injection networks. The concept of network is
here intended as general, therefore both surface and downhole.

GAP is part of the IPM Suite, and allows the engineer to build complete system models,
including the reservoirs, wells and surface network.

GAP can be linked directly to PROSPER and MBAL to model entire reservoir and productions
systems and to reservoir numerical simulators (REVEAL, Eclipse, Imex, GEM, etc.), process
simulators (Hysys, Unisim) and spreadsheets through Petroleum Experts controller RESOLVE
.

GAP can model production and injection systems where any type of fluid can be present: oil,
dry and wet gas, gas retrograde condensate, steam and user-defined, in addition to gas or
water injection systems.
The fluid phase behaviour can be modelled using black oil formulation or Equation of State
compositional modelling. The rigorous compositional modelling capabilities of GAP enable to
perform studies where the determination of the fluid composition is crucial (for example, for
environmental restrictions or in order to satisfy the requirements at process level), or
necessary to determine the conditions at which there is precipitation of solids for Flow
Assurance (wax and hydrate deposition).

Calculation can be performed for the status of the system at a specific point in time (Solve
Network) or along the time (Prediction), making us of the connected reservoir simulator (
MBAL or any numerical simulator) to model the reservoir depletion.

GAP allows to model and optimise surface and downhole networks. Its powerful calculation
engines allow to model and optimise very complex networks, composed by thousands of
elements: wells, pipelines, compressors, pumps, heat exchangers, etc, connected in any
possible way (i.e. complex loops).

GAP has the most powerful and fastest optimisation engine in the industry, as it is based on
non-linear SQP technique 17 (Sequential Quadratic Programming).

The GAP optimiser allows to optimise the system, which means:

- To Maximise a certain objective function (for example: oil production or both oil and gas
production)
- and, at the same time, to Honour any constraint set in the system

The GAP optimiser allows to determine how wellhead chokes need to be set, compressors
and pumps operated, and gas allocated for gas lifted wells, to maximise Production or
Revenue while honouring constraints at any level.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Technical Overview 3

GAP is characterised by a fully open architecture (OPENSERVER), which enables the user to
access all the features of the software from a third party application (Excel macros, Visual
Basic, C, etc.). OPENSERVER allows to automatise tasks like updating the models, running
sensitivities and also to enhance greatly the capabilities of the model itself by allowing the
implementation of complex workflows executed using the model.

MAIN APPLICATIONS

The fields of applications of GAP can be divided in the following groups:

Field Optimisation 4

Field Planning 5

Fluid modelling (PVT) 6

Reservoir modelling 10

Flow assurance and advanced thermal modelling options 11

Artificial lift 12

Complex well geometry 13

Automation 14

Examples Index 24

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 4 GAP

1.1 Field Optimisation

GAP features the fastest and most efficient optimiser in the industry, based at its core on the
non-linear SQP 17 technique.

The Optimisation feature allows the user to determine the best settings to apply in the field
(wellhead chokes, inline chokes, gas lift allocation, etc.) in order to maximise a certain
objective function (for example, oil production) and at the same time honour constraints
entered in the system.

Some applications of the Optimisation feature are:

Full field Optimisation studies with mixed systems (ESP, GL, Naturally Flowing)
Field management
Field Gas Lift Optimisation
Advises on wellhead chokes settings to meet reservoir management targets
Multi-phase Looped Network Optimisation
GAP links to PROSPER (well model) and MBAL (tank model) to allow entire production
systems to be modelled and optimised over the life of the field
Injection system optimisation - studies of pressure support

Back to Overview 2

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Technical Overview 5

1.2 Field Planning

The unique forecasting and optimisation capabilities of GAP allow top achieve several
objectives in the scope of Field Planning:

Production forecasts using reservoir models (MBAL directly in GAP or numerical simulators
through RESOLVE)
Full field forecasting optimisation
Field Management
Day to day field operation optimisation
Optimisation of injection strategies - pressure support studies

Back to Overview 2

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 6 GAP

1.3 Fluid modelling (PVT)

Modelling accurately the fluid behaviour has become more and more important as the
Integrated Production Modeling approach has been extended to more disciplines (see below
6 ).

In GAP various options are available to accurately model the fluid PVT properties, depending
on the objectives and the available data:

Black oil
Black oil model is used for the calculation.

Tracking
This method is based on a combination of black oil model and full compositional model
(equation of state or EOS):
- Black oil model is used for the main pressure drop calculations
- The EOS is then used as a post calculation to determine the composition in any part of the
system by performing compositional blends and flashes whenever necessary.
If a black oil reservoir simulator (like for example MBAL), the compositional tracking provides
with the unique capability to recombine the initial composition in order to match the GOR of
the fluid produced.

Fully Compositional
This method allows to run all the calculations using an equation of state, which gives the
compositions as well as the fluid PVT properties in any point of the network.
NEW!!! This option allows also to perform Lumping/Delumping of an initial EOS, which
empowers the user with the possibility to decide if running the calculations using an extended
composition, or a using a composition with a reduced number of components (lumped).

Black Oil Compositional Lumping/Delumping NEW!!!

To speed-up calculations, the Black Oil Lumping/Delumping method tracks the composition of
the fluids throughout the network at each iteration of the solver, but performs pipeline,
compressor, pump, choke, ... calculations using the Black Oil PVT correlations based on the
black oil standard condition properties calculated by the equation of state.

Black Oil Lumping/Delumping may use the full or the lumped compositions.

Back to Overview 2

1.3.1 Introduction to Lumping/Delumping

Today the technology available (IPM RESOLVE) allows to integrate and optimise reservoir
simulation models (REVEAL, Eclipse and other third party simulators, etc.) to production and
injection network models (GAP) up to process models (Hysys, Unisim).
With regards to the PVT modelling, each application has got its own requirements, which are

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Technical Overview 7

dictated on one side by the objectives of the application itself and on the other by the
calculation speed.
The figure below summarises the main requirements for the three main classes of simulators:

Reservoir numerical simulators are generally focused more on volumetric properties and the
phase behaviour. PVT modelling can be carried out by means of black oil or compositional
(EOS). In case of EOS modelling, the number of components has to be limited to a very few
to avoid the model to run too slow (with exception of thermal simulators like REVEAL, where
a larger number of components is required to guarantee accurate thermal calculations)
Surface network simulators can work in black oil or compositional too and are focused
mainly on densities and viscosities, as these affect mostly the pressure losses. As far as the
EOS is concerned, the number of components has to be decided on the basis of the model
objectives: if it only to determine the pressure drops, a small number of components can be
suitable and can reduce the run time. However, if the objective is to perform detailed flow
assurance studies (temperature estimations, hydrates, etc.), an extended composition will
be necessary.
Process simulators, on their side, focus more on thermal properties calculations, therefore
they require compositional modelling and the composition needs to have a large number of
components. This is because the thermal properties can be accurately estimated only by
specifying in detail the composition. Density is by default determined on the basis of a
correlation (Costald)

In general, when connecting different model together, the common factor among them is the
fluid. In other words, it is necessary to be able to use a PVT characterisation that is
consistently valid throughout the system.

Based on the information above, whenever a composition is required - because a process

simulator is connected, or because detailed studies need to be performed - it is required to be
able to pass from a small number of components to a large one (or viceversa) whenever
desired/necessary, and to make sure that the fluid characterisation is representative of the
actual fluid throughout.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 8 GAP

The idea behind compositional Lumping/De-lumping is to have a methodology that is able to

pass from an extended composition (de-lumped or "full" in the following) to a reduced one
(lumped or grouped) and vice-versa consistently, that is to say, preserving the quality of the
characterisation.
This means that at any point in time the full and the lumped compositions will be equivalent and
representative of the real fluid. In general when creating two characterisations of the same
fluid, by definition they will not give the same answers. However, lumping/de-lumping has to
make sure that the important properties are consistent, so that calculation speed and
accuracy are both satisfactory.

In GAP this is achieved by means of the so-called "Lumping Rule", which is a piece of logic
that defines the mechanisms to pass from the full to the lumped composition. The Lumping
Rule is created at the stage of building the EOS model using Petroleum Experts' PVT
package PVTP.
PVTP has all the facilities to create and quality check the couple full/lumped compositions and
to create the Lumping Rule.
An example of a possible Lumping Rule is reported below:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Technical Overview 9

In GAP it is possible to import a Lumping Rule, which is then used to generate the lumped (or
the full) composition when desired, and (if required) the pair full / lumped compositions. It is
then possible to decide if to run the calculations with the full or with the lumped composition.

The following example illustrates one of the possible applications:

Extended composition is required because thermal studies on the pipelines need to be
carried out
Reservoir simulator - PVT is defined with EOS with 5 components (lumped)
Surface network model (GAP) - full composition is required because detailed thermal
properties are required
In this case GAP will run using the full composition, which is determined on the basis of the
lumped composition coming from the simulator.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 10 GAP

1.4 Reservoir Modelling

GAP allows to model and optimise the whole production and injection system by integrating
reservoir models to well models to the model of the pipeline/surface gathering network.

The reservoir can be modelled by importing directly in GAP material balance models (MBAL)
or by linking GAP to the reservoir simulator using IPM controller RESOLVE.

Back to Overview 2

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Technical Overview 11

1.5 Flow assurance and advanced thermal modelling

options
GAP allows to accurately model at the same time well and pipeline hydraulics and surface
facilities (compressors, pumps, etc.
The pipeline network can be characterised by very complex topology (with hundreds or
thousands of elements and pipe loops).

This allows to perform studies for:

Full field surface network design
Flow assurance: detailed pipeline studies 271 , temperature modelling, erosion onset, hydrate
formation, waxes deposition, condensed water vapour, etc.
Process facilities design (for example, design of slug catchers and separators)
Artificial lift optimisation and operation
Compressor and Pump system design
Use the "Improved Approximation" temperature model for improved temperature
calculations.

Note: The temperature model "improved approximation" is to be selected in the system

options screen under |Options | Method.
Once the improved approximation is selected, the user can enter a pipe depth dependent U-
value. In the event the pipe-depth dependent U-value is missing, GAP uses the U-value
entered on the pipe environment description screen.

Features:
PROSPER on line for advanced temperature modelling (Enthalpy Balance, Improved
Approximation)
Improved approximation available with GAP Internal Correlations pressure drop model
Programmable elements allowing modelling of even complex equipment

Back to Overview 2

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 12 GAP

1.6 Artificial Lift

In GAP modelling and artificial lift optimisation can be carried out:
Gas lift (Continuous)
Electrical Submersible Pump (ESP)
Hydraulic Submersible Pump (HSP)
Jet Pump
Progressive Cavity Pump (PCP)
Diluent Injection

Features:
Full field Optimisation studies where naturally flowing, gas lift and ESP wells can all be
included in the same production system model
Modelling of Gas Lift Network along with production network (NEW!!!)
Detailed reporting of pump results (head, power consumption, etc.)

Back to Overview 2

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Technical Overview 13

1.7 Complex Well Geometry

GAP has a number of modelling facilities that are able to replicate accurately even very
complex well geometries (smart wells, multilateral wells, wells with Inflow controllable devices)
and even to optimise them.
One typical example is horizontal completions with ICVs, where one wants to understand how
to set the downhole valves in order to maximise production on one side and prevent gas
coning on the other.
Main features:
Well inflow and outflow elements to decompose the wellbore
Pipeline elements can have tubing or annular flow patterns
PROSPER on line allowing the use of rigorous temperature models

Back to Overview 2

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 14 GAP

1.8 Automation
GAP features OPENSERVER, which allows to access all of the capabilities of GAP from a
external applications: macros, VB, C, etc.
This allows the user to automatise many of the tasks that can be performed by operating the
program GUI and to code His/Her own workflows.
Along the years this feature has been applied to achieve a vast variety of objectives. These
are only a few examples of those applications:

Model validation and update

Interfaced to data sources to run scenarios
Field management
Well routing policies
Field planning
Building interfaces to the GAP model to run customised calculations (deployed directly on
the field)
Interfacing GAP to specialised tools to perform special studies (for example, corrosion
studies)

Back to Overview 2

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Technical Overview 15

1.9 The Core GAP Technique

Production and Injections systems include producing / injecting elements (wells) that are
connected via common manifolds and pipelines to a fixed system pressure called separator in
GAP.

The separator in GAP does not have to be the physical separator in the field; it is simply a
point of fixed pressure in the network.

Nodes are connections or calculation points.

The core GAP technique has 2 levels:

Level 1: Solving the network
Level 2: Optimising the network response

1.9.1 About the Network Solver

In the figure below, the fluid contribution can be from wells or sources:

For each node, one can write:

C = Constant

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 16 GAP

There are as many equations as unknowns.

This set of equations is solved numerically. It is the “natural” response of the network.

1.9.2 About the Optimiser

The solution that is generated by the solver i.e. the “natural" response of the system may not
be the optimum. The network may be capable of higher production rates, by altering certain
conditions, like:

Back pressure of wells by applying wellhead chokes.

Gas-lift gas allocated to individual gas lifted wells.
Frequency of operation of ESP fitted wells
Frequency of operation of pumps / compressors.
Inline choke sizes

The optimiser of GAP can do this task. Apart from boundary conditions i.e. fixed pressure
values (separator pressures) in the system the optimiser can also honour various constraints
such as:

Maximum oil / gas production

System constraints (min water production, max pressure constraint, velocity constraints,
etc.).

The optimiser will achieve the maximum hydrocarbon production using the rate of change of
the production rate with respect to the rate of change controllable variables, e.g. of the
injected lift gas rate for gas lifted wells.

GAP handles naturally flowing, gas lifted and ESP equipped producing wells in addition to
water and gas injectors.

Optimisation can be based on

Gross revenue
Maximum oil production

There is no upper limit on the number of wells and/or platforms

that can be entered.
Constraints can be considered at all levels e.g. well, joint,
separator and total system.
Production Forecast models can also consider constraints at
the reservoir tank level.
The key element of this method is the quality of the well
models.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Technical Overview 17

1.9.3 Considerations on Optimisation

There are several methods for optimisation available in the literature, some of them simple
(like Simplex (Linear Programming) and Equal Slope), others much more complex, like SQP
(Sequential Quadratic Programming). This section will provide a brief conceptual description of
these methods and explain why GAP uses SQP, which is the most difficult and sophisticated
optimisation technique to implement.

This explanation will concentrate on a Gas Lifted system as it is the best system to explain the
non-linearity of a field and how it can be addressed from an optimisation point of view.

Consider the following very simple function:

This has a clear maximum in the X region we are looking into, indicated by the red arrow on
the plot above.

In a linear system, two methods can be applied to determine the maximum of this function:

Bracketing

Derivatives

The first Method is based upon trying different guesses of X and calculating Y. After
trying a number of X guesses, the maximum is “Bracketed” and reached. The following
diagram shows the approach:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 18 GAP

The derivatives approach works on the basis of Gradients:

The derivative of Y is calculated with respect to X and then set to 0. This will allow
calculation of all (X,Y) points which are maxima, minima or points of inflection.

The second derivative of the function can then be used to determine the nature of each
calculated point and the maximum determined.

Both of these methods work very well for linear problems where Y can be described as
a direct function of X.

In the context of a field, this is the case of a dry gas field with no water production in
which pressure at every point is a direct function of the flowrate.

A non linear system will not behave in the same way. By the very nature of it, each time
a guess of X is taken in order to calculate the corresponding Y, the Y function itself
changes as it may be dependent on other variables affected by the choice of X.

The following diagram will show how the function will behave for a choice of X:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Technical Overview 19

This, in effect, represents a moving target and trying to determine the optimum with Linear
Programming techniques will not succeed.

Consider now the case of a Gas Lift Injection network (shown in a simplified diagram below):

This is made up of two gas lifted wells and the objective is to determine what is the optimum
gas lift injection rate to inject in each in order to achieve maximum production from the system.

Linear Programming techniques will work based on the response of the well. The Performance
curve of the well on the right (with one fixed WHP) will be:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 20 GAP

In the quest for the Optimum Gas Lift Injection Rate, a guess for Injection Rate is taken (as
shown on the diagram above) and the corresponding Liquid Rate calculated from the well
response.

This rate will then be used to calculate the response of the surface pipelines that will return a
new Well Head Pressure, based on the pressure drops in the system. A new Performance
Curve will then be constructed for the well (again based on the new WHP kept constant):

The iterations are then repeated in order to converge to the solution:

Even in this simple system, things will not behave in this way in reality. Each time a guess on
Gas Lift Injection rate is taken, the pressure drops in the pipeline will cause the back pressure
on the other well to be different.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Technical Overview 21

This system is by nature Non Linear and is conceptually similar to the function described
earlier.

Linear programming techniques will not be able to see the impact that gas injected in one well
will have on the other due to the pressure drop in the surface lines. The true response on a
well is shown below:

This response can only be captured by the NLP method.

SQP (Sequential Quadratic Programming) techniques work by calculating the response of

every element in the system, not only on how pressures will change with changing flowrates,
but also how the gas lift gas injection rate will impact the pressures.

As these responses are inbuilt in the calculations, the actual behaviour for the wells can be
constructed and the optimum solution found as shown in the last figure.

NLP will always result in higher rates with less gas injection compared to Linear Programming.

PRODUCTION OPTIMISATION USING GAP

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 22 GAP

About This Guide

The guide generally assumes that the user is familiar with basic Windows operations and
terminology; if the user is new to the Windows system; refer to the operating system user’s
Guide.

GAP, along with other Petroleum Experts software, can comfortably be used under Windows
98, Windows ME, Windows NT, Windows 2000 and Windows XP operating systems.
The screen displays in this guide are created using a Windows XP interface.

The screen displays used in this guide are taken from the examples provided with the
software as well as models from clients (with permission). On occasion, the data files may
vary from the examples shown as updates to the program are issued. Where major
amendments or changes to the program require further explanation, the corresponding

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Technical Overview 23

documentation will be issued.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 24 GAP

1.10 Examples Index

The following table can be used as reference for the example included in this Guide.

Application area Topic Examples Guide

Setting up a network model for a gas
Gas field Modelling and
field, entering constraints and Example 1 535
Optimisation
Schedules, running Predictions
Setting up a network model for an oil
field, Model Validation to QC the well
models, using "Initialise IPRs from
Oil field Optimisation and Tank Simulations" to update the
Example 2 574
Forecasting model to a certain time, setting
constraints, running Solve Network,
entering schedules and running
Predictions
Viewing details of the pressure drop
Detailed results for
calculation in GAP using PROSPER on Example 3 619
pipelines
line feature
Setting up a network model with gas
lifted wells, pipeline pressure drop
Artificial Lift Modelling and
matching, gas lift optimisation using Example 4 628
Optimisation
GAP Optimisation feature, use of the
well Controls
Generating lift curves for gas lift wells
with casing head pressure, setting up
a network model for the gas lift
Gas lift injection network
injection network, linking the Example 5 654
optimisation
production network to the injection
network and optimising the two
coupled network models
Setting up network model with ESP
lifted wells, Model Validation to QC
well models, Pipeline Matching to
Artificial lift Optimisation -
validate pipeline pressure drops, Example 6 678
Model QC
running Optimisation to honour
constraints on maximum power
available
Setting up network model for water
injection system, linking it to the main
Pressure support with
production model and running Example 7 709
water injection
Prediction with the two coupled
models
Using PROSPER on line to run
Flow assurance studies on
advanced temperature modelling in Example 8 724
pipelines
pipelines, importing PROSPER

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Technical Overview 25

pipeline models in GAP

Modelling de-hydration and heat
Modelling surface
exchangers with the Inline General (or Example 9 737
equipment
Programmable) element
Smart well completions Setting up a network model for a
multi-layered well completion with
inflow controllable valves, optimising Example 10 743
the two layers to maximise oil
production
Setting up a GAP network model for
PVT Compositional a gas retrograde condensate field
using the fully compositional method, Example 11 761
modelling
running predictions and evaluating the
changes of composition
PVT Compositional Exporting the lumped and de-lumped
Lumping/Delumping compositions from PVTP, setting up a
GAP model with compositional Example 12 795
lumping/delumping, running model and
viewing the results
PVT Black Oil Setting up GAP to work with Black Oil
Compositional Lumping/ Compositional Lumping/Delumping, Example 13 816
Delumping running model and viewing the results

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 26 GAP

1.11 What's New

Version 8.5
The main new developments implemented in GAP version 8.5 are:

PVT Modeling

Gas viscosity correlations (Lee et al. and Carr et al.) selectable for pressure drop
calculations

Pipeline Modeling

Advanced temperature modeling (Improved Approximation) available along with

the default GAP Internal Correlations pipeline modeling

Modeling of condensed water vapour in pipelines with GAP Internal Correlations

pipeline modeling

Well Modeling

Liquid injector well type to model for example polymer injection

HSP wells VLP format with sensitivity on pump speed

Well Control

∆T through dynamic well control choke is now accounted for

Displaying Constraints Violations

Setting option to report violated/limiting constraints when running with no

optimisation

Program Interface

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Technical Overview 27

Possibility to select all the elements belonging to a Group

PVT Model displayed in tanks

Version 8
The main new developments implemented in GAP version 8 are:

Fluid Modeling - Compositional an Black oil modeling

Lumping/Delumping methodology
– Compositional Lumping/Delumping
– Black Oil Lumping/Delumping

Speeding up of fully compositional models

Process independent VLP's and IPR's with MW and Mass

Al-Marhoun correlation for Pb, Rs & Bo

Egbogah et al (heavy oil) correlation for viscosity

Import .PRP composition file for multiple wells, main PVT and Gaslift PVT

Modeling

Gas Lift Injection Network

Generation of IPRs from PROSPER for Multi-Layers wells or Inflows

Automatic setup of MultiLayer wells from a PROSPER files

Model flare and vent in GAP and capture in reports as "emissions", with different
revenue and separate category in Reports

Option to turn wells off if the intersection of VLP/IPR is left of the minimum.

Performance curve points increased to 20

Add outputs of energy, for production and cumulative production, to get output in
units of kilo-watt hours (heating value x mass)

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 28 GAP

State the correlation used to generate pipeline VLPs on the VLP page

Option to switch on / switch off pressure drops in pipelines (e.g. bypass on

pipelines)

Automatic transfer of the latest well test data on Matching screen from PROSPER
into GAP Model Validation screen

Option to use Lookup tables for fractional flow instead of relative permeability
curves

Option to populate decline curve tanks and related wells production data tables
from prediction results.

Oil injection manifolds

Oil rate abandonment constraints

Option to use WGR in tight gas wells

Program Interface

Different icons for dp control and artificial lift control

Different colour coding for constraints and abandonment constraints

Schedule clock icon visible for masked items

Display GOR, WCT, CGR, WGR, dP and dT in Tooltip box

Display current operating point on compressor performance curves plot

Default Unit System can be set up in preferences

Version 7.0
The main new developments implemented in GAP version 7 are:

Modeling

Internal steam calculator

Improvements in the inflow performance models

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Technical Overview 29

Gravel Pack modeling

Ability to model a well with layers having different fluid types

Tight Gas Wells

Well modeling: Include WGR for gas injectors

Pipeline modeling:
Annular flow calculation
Improved Approximation temperature model for Steam
Specify Black Oil Correlation for each Pipe Element

Compressor modeling: reciprocating compressors

Simultaneous Water And Gas Injection modelling

Prediction:
DCQ contract type: gas rate, gross heating value...
DCQ prediction
New event schedule, such as ESP frequency...
Schedule Event Grouping
OPENSERVER access variable scheduling
New constraints, such as temperature constraints, tank withdrawal
constraints...

Program Interface

The GAP user interface has been updated significantly.

Edit/Undo button

Copy, Cut and Paste of selected network items

Flowsheets (sub-models)

GAP archive - option to create a new folder

Display pipeline gradient calculation's results

Permit models to be run minimized on a PC

Allow user to add comments on main GAP screen

Enable facility to plot multiple scenarios

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 30 GAP

Add plot to total field system recovery factor

More consistency between screen buttons (i.e. "main", "done"...)

OPENSERVER: wildcard option "@", i.e. Well[{@W*}]

Visualization of limiting/violated constraints

Ability to view schedules of equipment at same time

Ability to cross check well definition in PROSPER

Allow user to move element name in GAP graphical view

Ability to view Solver Log or Prediction Log directly

Ability to add elements to a Group using the 'Add Link/Pipe' Option

user can now specify flow correlation to be used when generating Lift Curves for
Pipes.

user can now view all elements linked to a GROUP from the same screen.

Version 6.0
GAP Fully Compositional

All PVT calculations are performed using EOS models.

In this version the fluid can be described using EOS and the calculation are based on the
individual EOS response.

Better modeling of fluid such as Retrograde Condensate and critical fluids.

Account for condensate dropping out of gas.
Three Levels of optimization to speed up the calculations.
Major improvements in speed of EOS calculations
The process is shared with MBAL and PROSPER
Now the entire field response can be modelled using EOS model in the three programs /
GAP / PROSPER /MBAL

Modeling

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Technical Overview 31

Diluents Injection in wells and pipelines.

HSP and Jet Pump lifted wells.
Surface Jet Pump in pipelines.

These models have the following characteristics

Injected fluid is modelled through tables

Choice of fixed or optimized injection rates
Well modelled with lift curves or PROSPER online

Other General enhacements

IPR includes the bubble point as part of the data for matching the IPR
Now if the bubble point of a test is available it can be used with the matching information
to adjust the IPR.

Fitting available for pipeline description

Different fitting elements such as valves, conections , elbows etc can be modelled in the
pipes as an equivalent length and be accounted for pressure drop calculations.

Increase to 100 segments for pipeline description

Under the pipe description up 100 hundres rows are now available to describe pipe
geometry. The number of fields for pipe description is not longer limited to 25.

Allow CGR and WGR input in gas fluid calculations

When a gas is defined as a new fluid under the fluid injection screen now there is the
possibility of specify the CGR and CGR .

A new overall equipment control screen

a new summary screen equipment controls had been introduced. This will allow from a
centralized screen evaluate all the equipment that have been controlled in the system

New Open server commands

Version 5.0
Program internal structure

Memory Management Enhancement

This release uses on average nine times less memory by avoiding any memory wastage.
All tables use dynamic memory allocation, creating records only if required.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 32 GAP

Structure Enhancements
There is no program limit to the number of pieces of equipment contained in a model.
The number of ipr's in a well is not longer limited to 30.

Enhanced validations
Data validation routines have been enhanced to trap data input errors before calculation
starts. Invalid fields are highlighted in red in the screens.

Network TVD validation

The program highlights the joints where TVD inconsistencies occur. If necessary, this
feature can be turned off using the 'View', 'Highlight TVD differences' menu option.

Enhanced Open Server support

The program supports enhanced open server expressions such as GAP.MOD[{PROD}].
WELL[$].DPControl where the $ sign means ALL ( see the Open Server manual for
more details). For example, to set the dp control of all the wells to 'Calculated' the
following open server statement can be used : GAP.MOD[{PROD}].WELL[$].DPControl
= CALCULATED. To set the dp control all the wells of all the models use the following
statement GAP.MOD[$].WELL[$].DPControl = CALCULATED.

Prediction results are saved to disk

All prediction results are saved to disk while the prediction is running. This makes the
program memory requirement independent of the number of prediction steps.

Purge of prediction snapshots and results

All prediction results can be cleared to reduce the data file size through the 'Prediction',
'Purge All Prediction Results' menu option.

Program interface

Internal solver and prediction message log sorted by type

The messages generated by the solver and the prediction runs are saved to disk and
sorted by type i.e. Log, Errors, Constraints, Events, ...

Internal OPENSERVER editor

An OPENSERVER command editor is available under the 'Edit', 'Execute Open Server
Statement' menu option. This allows the user to send OPENSERVER messages to the
application without the need of an external application. For example to make all the wells
controllable, the GAP.MOD[{PROD}].WELL[$].DPControl = CALCULATED command
can be executed from within GAP.

Customisable dialog size

Dialogues with the 'sizeable window' pattern in the bottom right corner of the window can
be resized by the user to fit their screen resolution. Holding the Shift key down while

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Technical Overview 33

opening the dialogue will reset its size to its original value.

Convert well into inflow or split well into inflow and outflow
Existing wells can be split into an outflow only well (VLP) and inflow pieces of
equipment.

Main screen equipment locator while editing

While editing the pieces of equipment, double click on an icon on the main screen to edit
that piece of equipment.

Main screen information displayed customisable

The 'View', 'Select Info Displayed' allows the user to select one parameter that will be
displayed along with the label on the main screen graph.

Modeling

Downhole Networks
Outflow only well and inflow pieces of equipment allow the modeling of 'smart' wells. Any
piece of equipment (joints, pumps, separators, pipes or completions ...) can be inserted
between the inflows and the wells.

Outflow only wells (smart wells) with VLP or PROSPER online

Outflow only well can be modelled using lift tables or PROSPER online.

New ways of modeling pipelines - VLP and PROSPER online

Pipelines can be modelled using GAP internal correlations, lift tables or PROSPER online.

Internal lift curve generator for pipeline

GAP includes an internal lift curves generator for pipelines. GAP uses its own internal
flow correlation or the PROSPER online model to generate the lift curves.

PCP lifted wells

Progressive Cavity Pumps lifted wells can be modelled. The motor speed is available has
optimisation variable.

PVT impurities from composition

When run enabling the compositional tracking option, the black oil pvt impurities mirror
the composition impurities

IPR permeability correction due to compaction

Pemeability correction for compaction effect is available in the ipr description screen.

Revenue, Cost and Tax Regimes

The user can define multiple 'Tax regimes' (i.e. revenue and cost prices) and assign them
to wells, inflows and sources.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 34 GAP

Equipment Grouping
Individual pieces off equipment can be assign to one or several groups even if these
pieces of equipment are not related or connected together. The groups can then be
assigned rate constraints

Computation

Faster and more robust Solver and Optimiser

Potential calculation in solver and prediction runs

When requested to do so, the program will compute the field potential by removing all
the constraints and running an optimisation.

Optimisation on revenue

Riser gaslift gas included in revenue calculation

More robust compositional tracking

Prediction

Material balance and decline curve prediction types have been merged
Decline curves and material balance reservoir models can be associated in the a
prediction run.

Internal prediction Visual Basic script

Under the 'Prediction', 'Edit Prediction Script' menu option, an internal visual basic script
is available to dynamically control the prediction run.

IPR WCT or GOR versus cumulative production for decline curve tank
WCT and GOR profiles can be entered versus cumulative production or reservoir
pressure.

Prediction results and network snapshots are saved during prediction runs
through OPENSERVER

Note: The GAP sample files are distributed as archives (which contain all the files necessary

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Technical Overview 35

to run the models). For a quick description of how to extract the sample files, click here.

Note on Open Server

GAP can be operated or automated from other applications, for example through the writing
of spreadsheet scripts in Excel or Access.
The potential uses range from
Simple importing and exporting macros through
Interfacing GAP to other modeling applications such as reservoir and facilities
simulators.

A powerful feature is the ability to perform predictions in a step-by-step mode, allowing Data
Server macros to be run at each timestep. This can be used to implement, for example, event
driven scheduling (changing IPR during a prediction, changing constraints with time, overriding
the GAP optimiser, scheduling compressors...)

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 36 GAP

GAP User Guide February, 2011

Chapter

2
 38 GAP

2 User Guide

2.1 What is in this guide?

A flow chart which outlines the basic procedures required to carry out a full field network
optimisation study using GAP is shown on the last figure. The organisation of the manual
adheres to the GAP processing logic as outlined by the flowchart as much as possible.

Introduction 39 Introductory information on GAP and the user Guide

Getting Started 44 General information on the usage of GAP
with GAP 44
Describing 124 This section describes the PVT modelling options available in GAP
the PVT 124
Equipment Data 149 This describes the interface used for entering equipment data, and
describes in detail the data entry screens for all elements
VLP/PR 39 This section shows how to generate VLP/IPR using PROSPER for
Generation 39 inclusion in the GAP system model
Model Validation 425 This section introduces the user to the Model Validation menu option
in GAP, which allows efficient quality checking of the well models in
GAP
Network Solver 434 This section describes how to solve network and check that model
and Optimiser 434 production matches actual production
Prediction 453 This section describes the coupling of reservoir tank models to GAP
for production forecasting
Results and 494 This explains how to prepare, print and plot the results
Reporting 494
History Matching 510 General steps to follow to make sure that the model is calibrated and
an IPM Model 510 representing reality
Prediction Script 520 Section describing the scripting features present in GAP
Defining 525 This section describes how to set up Unit systems in GAP
System Units 525

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 39

2.2 Introduction
Petroleum Experts General Allocation Package (GAP) is an extremely powerful and useful
tool offered to the Petroleum Engineering community. Some of the tasks GAP can achieve
are:

Complete Surface Production / Injection Network modeling.

Optimisation
GAP has a powerful optimiser that is capable of handling a variety of wells in the same
network
Naturally flowing oil wells
Gas-lifted wells
ESP operated wells
Condensate or gas producers
Water producers
Water or gas injectors
PCP wells
HSP wells

The Optimiser controls production rates using wellhead chokes, ESP operating frequencies or
allocating lift gas to maximise the hydrocarbon production while honouring constraints at
the gathering system, well and reservoir levels.

Allocation of Production
Predictions (Production Forecast).
GAP models both production and injection systems simultaneously, containing oil, gas,
condensate and/or water wells to generate production profiles.

GAP’s powerful optimisation engine can, for example, allocate

gas for gas lifted wells, alter the frequency of ESP pumps or
sets wellhead chokes for naturally flowing wells to maximise
Revenue or Oil Production while honouring constraints at any
level.

GAP can also model and optimise injection networks associated

with the production system (both together).

Production Forecasting

GAP calculates full field production forecasts including

gas or water injection volumes required to meet reservoir
unit pressure constraints.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 40 GAP

Reservoir pressures are obtained from decline curves,

material balance or simulation models.

The associated injection systems can be modelled and

optimised so as to achieve injection targets for pressure
maintenance programmes.

Link to third party tools via OPENSERVER

GAP has an Open Architecture that allows

Third party software to exchange data with GAP.
Run and control GAP via the OPENSERVER technology
developed by Petroleum Experts

Link to MBAL

Reservoir performance for production forecasting is provided

by links to Petroleum Experts’ MBAL material balance
program.
Fully coupled production and injection (gas and water)
models can be solved by GAP with optimisation of
production and calculation of injection pressures at every
time step.

Link to PROSPER

Well performances for production forecasting are provided by

links to Petroleum Experts’ PROSPER, the single well model
package within the IPM Suite. PROSPER can be run in a batch
mode from GAP for generation of well performance and lift
curves for simulation.

Fully Compositional or Compositional Tracking Modes

GAP can calculate the PVT fully compositionally and track

compositions from the well/source level through to the
separators. In a prediction, GAP can take compositions
calculated by MBAL and record the evolution of compositions
throughout the system with time.

The compositional tracking can be done as in previous versions

using the BO model.
Lumping/delumping of compositions can be performed in both
the fully compositional and black oil cases

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 41

2.2.1 How to Use This Guide

Depending on the modelling needs and the amount of time the user wants to spend becoming
familiar with the program, the user guide can be used in the following ways:

Beginning-to-end
If the user is new to Windows applications, we recommend to read this document from
beginning to end to become familiar with the program features, menus, and options. This is
the slow approach, but will cover all is necessary to know about the program.

Selected tasks
Use this approach only if the user is already familiar with the basic functionality of the
program.

Worked examples
If the user has limited time and want to sample the program features quickly, follow the
instructions provided with in the examples. The examples can be found in the Examples Guide
531 . The examples show how to build a network, run sensitivities and perform a prediction run

with a reservoir model attached to the surface network.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 42 GAP

2.2.2 GAP Glossary of Terms

The following table introduces some key terms in network modeling using GAP.

Term Application
Abandonment For Prediction runs only. Minimum rates, maximum
Value GOR etc. can be set to turn wells off.
Actual Evaluation of well models for specified top node
(wellhead) pressure, GOR and water cut. Used to
quality control well models by comparing model and
actual measured test rates.
Compositional The tracking of fluid components/compositions from
Tracking 142 the well bore to the top (separator) node.
Constraint Constraints are used to direct the GAP optimiser to
honour process limitations, limit well production
rates. Minimum constraints can give a flow stream
priority when optimising. Constraints always refer
to GAP optimiser. Well abandonment rates are set
elsewhere.
Element A well, joint, pipe, separator, tank etc. used to
construct either production or injection systems.
Generate The process of calculating and importing well
parameters like
IPR
VLP
GOR Gas / Oil Ratio. In GAP this is the Producing GOR
including solution and free gas, but excluding gaslift
injection.
Icon Graphical symbol used to represent a system
element.
IPR Inflow performance relation. Function relating
pressure drop across reservoir and production rate.
IPR s can be generated directly from PROSPER.
Node Point where one or more production elements
connect to another system element.
Performance Curve representing the well response as pressure
Curve (PC) downstream the well (or manifold pressure) vs rate
produced. The PCs can be generated from VLP/IPR
by sensitizing on well manifold pressure for a given
reservoir pressure and content of water and gas
(respectively, water cut and GOR)

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 43

Pipe Pipes connect joints together to form a gathering

system. Pipes in GAP have a length, elevation,
inside diameter and roughness.
Prediction Calculation of (optimised or not optimised) future
production and injection rates using pressure decline
curves or reservoir models (MBAL for instance).
Production Use of systems analysis models in GAP to calculate
Allocation field and well production rates for specified reservoir
and surface pressures given the current water cut
and GOR.
Production Process of maximising oil/gas production (or
Optimisation revenue) by adjusting wellhead pressure/gaslift
injection/ESP frequency while simultaneously
honouring constraints at various points in the
system.
Solve Network The process of calculating the combined production
(optimised) response for the entire production system.This can
be coupled with the optimisation process, allocating
the gas lift gas and the power available to optimise
the overall system production or injection.
Tank A reservoir unit.
It can be modelled rigorously with MBAL.
It can also be represented by a table, relating
pressure and cumulative oil production (decline
curve option).
VLP Vertical lift performance. Expression relating
surface well pressure and bottom hole
pressure.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 44 GAP

2.3 Getting Started with GAP

For first time users, this chapter covers the essential features of data management and
setting up the calculation options of GAP; in essence, everything one needs to get started on
a GAP project. The chapter starts with a description of the user interface. A step-by-step
guide to starting a GAP project from scratch follows this.

Menu options will be considered in this Chapter, although

some will be discussed in more detail in later chapters when
their use will be put in context of an actual model.

2.3.1 The GAP User Interface

The main screen of GAP has the following structure:

The user interface consists of a framework window that contains several child windows, as
well as the menu and toolbar from which GAP commands are issued. The child windows

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 45

include the system windows that contain the system network drawing, and the navigator
window that can assist in the viewing of large networks.

The interface consists of four parts, as indicated in the figure above:

System window the window on which the system network is drawn

Navigator window contains a full schematic which can be used to help navigation about
large systems
Toolbar contains menu accelerators, icons for selecting and manipulating system
equipment, and icons for zooming or un-zooming on the system window
Menu usual menu for issuing commands to GAP

Menu functions are discussed in the following chapter. The other three parts of the interface
as listed above are described in the sections below.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 46 GAP

2.3.1.1 Opening a File

When GAP is opened, if the preferences have not been set up to open the last file accessed,
there will be a blank system view. To open a GAP file at any time during any GAP session,
select File Open. The following screen will be displayed:

This is the standard Windows file browser, which may be

familiar with from other Windows applications.
The dialogue box lists the files that match the selection criteria
on the left-hand side.
The files in the default working directory are automatically
shown first.

Double-click on the file name required and this will be opened by GAP.

The Open as read only option enables to open a file as a read-only file, which can therefore
be consulted but not modified.

2.3.1.2 Saving a File

When files are opened in GAP, a copy of the selected file is stored in computer memory.
Any changes to the file are made to the copy in memory. In case of a power failure or a
computer hanging up, these changes are completely lost. To maintain the present work, we
recommend to save the data on a regular basis. This simple procedure could potentially
prevent hours of work and analysis being lost.

To save a file, choose either File Save or File Save As. The Save command stores changes
made to the current active file, overwriting the previous data. By default, the Save command
saves a file under its original name and to the drive and directory last selected.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 47

2.3.1.3 The System Window

The system window is the main window on which the GAP network is displayed. More than
one system window can be displayed in GAP at one time; this means that different views of
the same system or production and injection systems can be viewed simultaneously.
An empty system view window is shown below:

The system window is used to draw, edit, and view the system. Coloured icons represent the
equipment nodes. The different actions that can be performed on this window are obtained by
clicking the right hand mouse button within the area of the system window. This brings up a
menu, as shown on the screenshot above. Alternatively, the same set of actions can be
performed using the toolbar or the menu, which are described below.

Addition of Network To add an item to the system, activate the required equipment type
Equipment from the toolbar or use the right hand mouse button. The cursor
appearance on the screen will change to indicate that an equipment
selection has been made. Click on the screen at the point where the
equipment is to be inserted. A network node will be created, and a label
dialog will appear prompting to name the new equipment.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 48 GAP

Zoom In / Out To zoom in or zoom out, first select the appropriate icon from the
toolbar or from the right hand mouse menu described above. To zoom in
on an area, hold the left-hand mouse button while sweeping the mouse
cursor over the area of interest. Alternatively, one may click once at a
point in the system, and GAP will zoom or un-zoom on that point using a
fixed scaling factor (which may be adjusted using the Preferences
dialog).

To revert to a full system view at any time, double-click the left-hand

mouse button at any point in the window (except on an equipment
node). The view will rescale to show the whole of the system.
Selection of Items To select an item or items, first select the select icon from the toolbar or
from the right hand mouse popup menu. Click on the item to select, and
its colour will reverse accordingly. Alternatively, dragging the left-hand
mouse button over an area can make group selections.
Masking / To mask or unmask an item or items, first select the Select icon from
Unmasking of Items the toolbar or from the right hand mouse menu. Click on an item to mask
or unmask it: if equipment is masked, all child items will also be masked.
If a piece of equipment is unmasked, parent items will be unmasked to
allow a production path to the top node. To mask or unmask a group of
nodes, the left hand mouse button may be dragged over an area of the
system view.

Deletion of itemsSelect the delete icon from the toolbar or from the right hand mouse
menu. Groups of items may be deleted as above.
Right hand Mouse Utility menus will appear when the right hand mouse button is clicked
Button Actions anywhere in the system view. The normal menu is displayed above, and
appears when the button is clicked over an empty space. If it is clicked
over an equipment node, a shorter menu will appear with a number of
equipment specific functions, such as delete, mask, or select.
Panning To move the view around the system, simply click on the main window
and hold the left mouse button down. Shift the mouse and the network
will be moved following the direction of the mouse movement.
Popup Status As the mouse is moved over equipment nodes, a small window will
Information appear. This contains basic status information for the node in question
and allows the status of a piece of equipment to be checked without
entering the data entry screen. This is optional: to switch this function off
go to the Preferences screen and un-tick the “Enable Flyover Status
Information”.
Changing Icon These functions are also available from the right hand mouse menu as
Sizes / System well as from the main menu under Options. See below for more
Fonts information.
Title Bar This indicates whether a production or injection system is being viewed.
Opening a New It is possible to open a new GAP window specifically focused on one
GAP Window area of the network. To do so, zoom on the system region to consider
and click the Shift key after the zoom region as been specified. A new

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 49

GAP window will then be opened.

Windows® specific Minimise: Click this button to minimise the window in the GAP
Actions workspace.
Maximise: Click this button to maximise the window to fill the GAP
workspace. Following this, if GAP is shut down and restarted, it will
automatically bring up the new window in a maximised state.
Close: Click this button to remove the window from the workspace.
Restore: This restore the default system window

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 50 GAP

2.3.1.4 The Toolbar

The toolbar is located below the main menu at the top of the main window. It consists of a
row of icons (described below) which act as accelerators to common menu functions, or allow
the addition or manipulation of network icons in the system window.

The functions of the various buttons are described below.

File/Interface Functions

Accelerator for File | New. Clears the current system and

initialises a new one. A warning will be displayed if there are
any unsaved changes in the old system.
Accelerator for File | Open. This will prompt for a new file
name. If the file can be opened successfully, the old file will
be cleared and the new file opened in a new window.
Accelerator for File | Save. By default, this will override the
currently saved version of the file. Use File | Save As to save
the file to a different location.
Accelerator for Window | New Window. This will open a new
full system view of the current file.

System Functions

Accelerator for Equipment Control / Model Validation screen

Accelerator for Network Solver.

Accelerator to access script

Accelerator for Prediction | Material Balance Forecast. This

initialises a material balance or decline curve prediction,
depending on the system mode as set up in the Method

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 51

screen.

Equipment Set-up
When an equipment button is selected, click once on the system window to create a new node
of the required type at the chosen point. A label dialog will appear to allow equipment to be
labelled immediately.

Add a separator. This is the final solution node and is located

at the "top" of the system, i.e. furthest from the wells. GAP
will optimise the entire system connected to all separators.
The separator does not have to be an actual one. In GAP,
separator is a convenient way of describing a point of known
pressure in the network. For injection systems, this button will
add an Injection Manifold.
Add a joint. This represents a network node. A joint is a
solution point in the system.
Add a link. Note that this can become a pipeline, a well-tank
connection, or a pump connection depending on the context
of the connection being made.
Add a well. The default well type is oil well, gas lifted (unless
in an injection system). The well type can be changed from
the main data entry screen. When drawing well icons, it is
suggested that they are arranged around the connection
point. This simplifies the drawing of the pipeline connections.
Add a tank. This represents a reservoir source. Tanks are
only required when running predictions.
Add a flare or vent. This element withdraws from the system
a fixed rate of fluid
Add a pump. A pump is associated with a joint or separator.
If associated with a joint, it is in line with the joint, between
the joint and the pipeline connecting the joint to the next level.
Add a compressor. A compressor is associated with a joint.
If associated with a joint, it is in line with the joint, between
the joint and the pipeline connecting the joint to the next level.
Add a source/sink. A source/since is created and should be
described. A source/sink can be at fixed rate or a
programmable element.
Add an inline element is created. This can be an Inline Gate
Valve, an Inline Check Valve, an Inline Separation, an Inline
Choke or an Inline programmable.
Add inflow, when this option is selected, it will contain similar
data as the well except that do not include the VLP’s. This

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 52 GAP

icon is used essentially for downhole networks.

Add group, using this option the same constraint can be
applied to certain groups of wells.
Add flowsheet, creates sub-flowsheets that can be attached
to the main GAP flowsheet
Zoom in/out. When 'zoom in' is selected, a zoom can be
achieved either by clicking the mouse on the system window,
which will zoom in a fixed amount and set the centre of the
view to the position clicked, or by sweeping an area with the
mouse which GAP will then view. The aspect ratio will be
retained when an area zoom is performed.
Mask / unmask. When either of these are selected, clicking
on an equipment item in the system window with mask or
unmask the item as directed. For short-term removals of
equipment, this is to be preferred to deletion, which removes
the equipment permanently. When masking, all child nodes
will also be masked. When unmasking, parent nodes will be
unmasked so as to clear a passage to the top-most node.
From GAP version 4.0 onwards, any masked item will be
brought online by Schedule during prediction. To exclude any
item from prediction (irrespective of what is set in the
Schedule), use Disable / Enable.
This Icon will disable completely any item in the production /
injection system during the production forecast or solver
network calculations although the item is set to run with
certain schedule.
This Icon will enable any element in the production / injection
system.
Delete. After this is selected, it is possible to delete a node
by clicking on the item in the system window or delete a
whole section of network by dragging a box around it. The
icon automatically becomes unselected following a deletion to
prevent accidental deletion of further nodes.
Move a node. After this is selected, a node may be moved by
clicking on the item in the system window and then, with the
mouse button depressed, dragging the item to the new
position.
Select a node. After this is pressed, a node may be selected
by clicking on the item in the system window. The item will
reverse its colour to indicate selection. One can select any
item on the window system for further actions: set wells to
controllable, move items, delete items…

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 53

Unselect all items.

Find/locate equipment on the System window. Use this option
to locate equipment on the system window. This may be
useful in large systems in which the icons are close together
and whose labels are therefore difficult to read.
Help Index/Accelerator. Use this option to access the online
help index. A database will allow to make guided searches by
entering keywords in the provided screen.
Undo button. This button allows to undo the actions taken
when building/modifying the model

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 54 GAP

2.3.1.5 The Navigator Window

To activate the navigator window select |Window |Toggle Navigator Display (see hiding/
showing the navigator described below). This window can be used to aid in navigation about a
large system. It will always consist of a system schematic that is independent of any zooming
on a system window. In addition to the network, it contains a tracking rectangle that encloses
the portion of the system currently under view in the system window. Other functions are
possible, as described below.

Tracking This has two functions. If the focus is currently on a system window, this
Rectangle rectangle surrounds the area of the system that view is displaying.
Alternatively, the rectangle may be used to create new views of the system if
the navigator window is currently in focus. When the mouse is moved over the
rectangle, the cursor changes to allow to stretch or resize the rectangle. In
this way the window may be moved over an area of the system of interest.
Double-clicking the left hand mouse button in the area will create a new
system view displaying the area that has been selected. This is resized to
preserve a sensible aspect ratio
Hiding/ The navigator may be removed from the workspace by clicking on the cross
Showing the button at the top right hand corner of the window. Alternatively, the Window
Navigator menu item of the main menu contains a function to do this. Once removed, the
navigator will not appear in subsequent GAP sessions until reopened. This can
be done by clicking on |Window |Toggle Navigator Display as below

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 55

Right Hand Clicking the right hand mouse button within the navigator window will produce
Mouse Button a utility menu. This contains the following functions
Menu
Navigator on By default, the navigator is always on top of all system views. This can be
Top changed by selecting this item from the menu
Hide Window A different way of hiding the navigator
New Window A different way of producing a new view (see above)
Icon Sizes Invokes the Icon Sizes dialog (see below)
File Options In this section, the user defines certain parameters, which control the normal
Windows functionality of the program as well as preferences

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 56 GAP

2.3.1.6 Drawing the System

The following section describes the procedures required to define a system network topology.
This is done by manipulating graphical icons to draw a system schematic diagram. Once
the basics of drawing a system is understood, building a GAP network model will take very
little time. The GAP system network is based on a series of elements accessible from the
program Toolbar.

The Tool Bar

The GAP tool bar contains a button for each element that can be added to a system network.
An element can be placed anywhere on the screen, and its position on the screen does not
affect the program calculations. To select an element, press the appropriate button to activate
the object. To draw the element, position the mouse pointer anywhere on the system view
and click. A 'Label' dialogue box appears to name or identify the icon. Data for each element
can be entered as the system is built, or once the entire system have been finished.

When the data is entered while building the system, double-click the appropriate icon to
access the main data entry screen.

The following tool buttons are used to draw a system:

Separator Adds a production separator. This is a point in the system whose pressure is
known and fixed.
This is the final solution node and is located at the "top" of the system i.e.
furthest from the wells. GAP will optimise the entire system connected to all
separators.
Joint Adds a manifold joint or connecting point in the system. A joint is a solution
point in the system. Connecting two joints creates a pipeline
Add Link/Pipe Creates pipelines between manifold joints and other joints and links between
separators and joints manifolds to wells, tanks to wells and joints or
separators to pumps. Short flowlines are best modeled as part of the well
rather than as a pipeline. The type of link produced is decided from the
context of the link.
To link two items, activate the link icon. Click on the first item in the system
view, and drag the mouse to the second item with the mouse button
depressed. When the button is released a link will be produced if the context
is valid
Well Adds a well in the system network. When drawing well icons, it is suggested
they be arranged around the connection point. This simplifies the drawing of
pipeline connections
Tank Adds a tank in the system network. These may be modeled separately using
the MBAL software which can be supplied by Petroleum Experts
Flares and Adds a sink at constant rate of pressure and the amount of fluid collected by
Vents them is accounted for in the emissions results
Pump Adds a pump in the system network
Compressor Adds a compressor in the system network

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 57

Source/Sink Adds a source or a sink that injects/withdraws a fixed amount of fluid of a

user-defined fluid
Inline Adds a choke, inline separator, valve and virtually any piece of equipment that
elements can be described by a script
Inflow Adds an inflow element (IPR), which can be used to model complex well
geometries by decomposing the well into inflows and outflow
Group Adds a group element, which is used to report or impose constraints to
groups of elements in the GAP network (for example, clusters of wells can be
grouped together)
Flowsheet Allows to place whole sub-sections of the main model into different
flowsheets. Particularly useful in the case of big models, where the
flowsheets allow to simplify the model view

Drawing elements
The first thing to consider before drawing a system is its layout. For instance, the number of
elements to include can determine how to design the structure. A brief outline or sketch of the
network may help deciding how to plan the model.

Since the key solution point in the network is the separator, one way to proceed is starting at
the top with the separator(s) and working down through the manifold joints (incoming
connection pipes) to the wells.

1. To draw an element on the screen, the appropriate object on the tool bar must be
selected. Positioning the pointer on the screen and clicking the Left mouse button will
place the element on the desired position. (When drawing a system from scratch, start at
the top and centre of the screen and work down and outward is suggested

2. When the element is placed on the screen, a dialogue box will automatically appear
where the label of the element can be entered. Labeling is optional, however typing in a
short name or abbreviation to identify the element icon is suggested. Click the OK button
or press Enter to return the screen display

3. Select the next element to draw by clicking the relevant button on the tool bar.
Position the pointer on the screen where you want to place the element and click. A
dialogue box will appear prompting to label the element again. Follow these steps for
each required element

4. It is recommended to build a system gradually until a grouping of elements provides

the basic framework. To begin, it is not necessary to have a definite layout in mind as the
program easily allows modifying or add elements to the system

5. When all the elements have been set on the screen, select the Add Link/Pipe tool and
connect the element by dragging and dropping a line between each couple of elements
starting from the element that is upstream the flow direction. This will create pipelines
(when linking two joints) and connections

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 58 GAP

New elements to the network can be added until the created a system reflects the actual
conditions or have adapted the structure to suit the particular requirements of the project.

Entering data
Once the icons had been placed and labeled, the data for each item need to be entered.
The properties of an item can be entered as they are added to the system, or later when the
complete network model has been graphically laid out. To enter data, double-click on the
corresponding icon to be edited. The main data entry screen for the element will appear. From
this screen, other elements in the system for data entry can be selected.

Duplicating items
GAP includes a utility that allows copying element items. This facility is useful if adding many
elements of similar properties (e.g. wells), as it can save time entering data when editing the
item(s). When copying an icon, the program makes an exact duplicate of the item, which
includes the PROSPER file name, data and icon label. To duplicate icons two ways are
available:
1. Point the element to copy, right click of the mouse and select "Copy". Point the location
where the new element is to be created and then right click again and select "Paste"
2. First draw or add a new element icon. Do not label the new icon. Next, copy the data from
the original element icon to the destination unnamed icon. To copy, hold down the 'Ctrl' key,
while clicking and dragging the original icon into the new unnamed icon.

Data from one element cannot be copied into another element type. That is, the data of a
Separator icon cannot be copied into a Joints icon.

For more information on the user interface and its use, see The GAP user Interface.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 59

2.3.1.7 The Preferences Dialog

The preferences dialog allows a set of user-interface variables to be customized for
subsequent GAP sessions. Some of these options are self-explanatory so a limited
description is given below.

Enable Flyover If this is checked then it will be possible to see a status box appear as
Status Information the mouse pointer goes over the equipment icons
Auto-repeat delay When panning, one may hold the left-hand mouse button down to ‘auto-
when panning repeat’ the action. The value given in this field represents the time (in ms)
before the auto-repeat action starts from when clicking the mouse button
Zoom/UnZoom A single click in a system window while the zoom or un-zoom icons are
factor active results in a fixed scaling to be applied to the view, while the centre

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 60 GAP

of the view is changed to the position in which the mouse was clicked.
The value entered in this field is the fixed scaling factor, and as such
should be greater than zero
Open server When GAP is run using the open server functionality, there is the option
Monitoring of displaying the results of all the open server commands in the Open
Window server Monitor Window. The option allows this window to be shown /
Hidden
Background The bitmap that is displayed on the background of the main window may
be changed (i.e. by default this is a PE logo with contact information).
Select the required bitmap by pressing the browse button to the right of
the field. The bitmap will be loaded when GAP is restarted
Recent file list This is the number of files that are retained at the bottom of the File
length menu
Reload last project Check this to load the last file that was working on when GAP is started
at start-up
Display “Alter If checked, GAP will check all files paths once a file is opened and will
Project Paths” allow the user to correct these if needed
prompt at load
time
License Handling – With the “PROSPER on line” options added to GAP for Version 5.0 or
VERY IMPORTANT later, licenses of PROSPER and/or MBAL may be used by GAP
depending on the options chosen when building a model. It is
recommended to keep these options to the default. Please consult with
the person in the organisation responsible for license handling
before changing any of these options
Default Input (and This option allows to set the default units systems for GAP model for
Output) Unit either input or output variables. This unit system will be used whenever a
System new GAP model is built
Always Use Ticking this box will force the unit system to be the same as the default
Default Unit one. If a GAP model contains different units to the default, when opening
System the file, GAP will change the units to default

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 61

2.3.1.8 Defining User Correlations

GAP has the facility to use externally programmed pipeline flow correlations. Before they can
be accessed, they must first be linked into GAP. To use external correlations, click File user
correlations | Flow Correlation.
The following screen will be presented:

Click Add and select the required .COR correlation file from the browser. The Info button can
be used to examine details of the selected correlation. Click OK to return to GAP. The
external correlation will now be available for calculating pipeline/tubing pressure drops.

Please contact Petroleum Experts to obtain more details about the multiphase DLL
format required to create the *.COR files.

The Remove button removes the selected correlation from GAP. It is not possible to remove
the GAP internal correlations.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 62 GAP

2.3.1.9 Edit Ini File

The Ini file is a text file in which all the preferences for GAP are stored. Some of these are
the directory preferences, colours, tolerances etc.

It is recommended not to modify this file manually, as it is automatically updated

based on the selections made from the relevant windows in GAP.

2.3.1.10 Defining the Working Directory

In this option the location of the working directories can be defined:

Whenever a file is open, closed or created, the program automatically selects

the files or saves to the data directory defined in these menus.
It is recommended to keep data files separate from other program files in a
related sub-directory (e.g.: C:\PROJECT\GAPDATA).
MBAL executable needs to be defined if reservoir tanks are modelled with
MBAL.
PROSPER executable location is needed since PROSPER is used to generate
well IPR and VLP curves for well models in GAP or used in the PROSPER on
line mode.

NEW!!! Application startup timeout time can be entered, after which the
program will flag that the MBAL and PROSPER licenses cannot be found.

2.3.1.11 Printing from GAP

Printer Set Up This will prompt the standard Windows Printer Set-Up window. Use this to

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 63

select the preferred printing device

Printing the To print out a current network drawing, select Print from under the File
Network menu. It is possible to print to a hardcopy device, to the clipboard, or to a
Drawing windows metafile (.WMF). There are options to print in colour, monochrome,
or greyscale.

The current menu options are:

Hard Copy ( the currently selected printer/plotter).

Clipboard for subsequent pasting into a word processor or painting
package (press <shift> <insert> to paste the picture).
Windows MetaFile for subsequent use in a drawing package

For each option the colour choices are

monochrome
grey scale
colour

2.3.1.12 Exiting GAP

To exit from GAP, the File | Exit command can be selected. If the file has not already been
saved, the program will prompt a screen allowing the user to save the current file.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 64 GAP

2.3.2 Project Archiving

When storing or sending GAP files, this option offers the capability of creating an Archive of
the whole project. It is in a sense a ZIP file that includes all the associated files required when
running the model.

2.3.2.1 Archive Creation

To create an Archive, the File | Archive | Create option needs to be selected.

The user will be asked to select a file name for the archive from a file browser: the default
extension for GAP archives is .GAR.

Once entered the file name and saved, the User will be presented with a Project Creation
screen with the following options:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 65

Main features
The screen contains the following features:

Project This is a hierarchical listing of all the files in the project, as also seen from the
Edit Project menu option. Select the files that to archive in this list: by
default, all valid file paths are highlighted. To select all files, click on the All
button. It is possible to double-click on an item in the project list or the
baggage list (below) to obtain the basic properties of the file in question
Baggage It is possible to Add other files that are not directly associated with the
project to the archive (for example, Excel spreadsheets or Word documents).
To add a file to the archive baggage, type in the file path in the Baggage File
field below the Baggage listing (or browse to it using the file browser
provided), and press the Add button. The file will then appear in the list box.
Duplicate file names are added to the archive only once
Project This field can be used to enter comments describing the project. This will
Comment appear whenever one wants to extract the files from the archive, and can
help recall the contents of a particular archive.
Select the “Write” button to create the .GAR file
Add Assoc This adds associated files to the baggage list. For example, if one clicks on a
.vlp file in the project list and then click on Add Assoc, GAP will look in the

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 66 GAP

same directory as the .vlp file and, if they are present, also add the .tpd and/
or .mbv files to the baggage list. Multiple selections in the project list are
possible. The following gives the associated file types for project file types:

Well model files (.out, .sin, .anl)

Lift curves (.vlp, .tpd, .mbv lift curve import
formats)
Tank model files (.mbi.mbr (results file))

Action Buttons

All/None Selects all/no valid files in the project listing

Add Adds a file to the baggage list
Remove Deletes the currently highlighted file(s) in the baggage list from the project archive
Write Creates the archive

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 67

2.3.2.2 Archive Extraction

To extract the files from an existing archive (*.GAR file), the File | Archive | Extract option
needs to be selected from the main menu.

The file can then be selected:

and then GAP will enter the archive extraction screen as follows:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 68 GAP

Main features
The screen contains the following features:

Project This is a listing of all the files that comprise the original GAP project. All files are
Listing selected by default.
Those files that were in the project but the archiver chose not to include in the
archive are displayed in light grey. It is possible to double-click on a file to obtain
its basic properties. Select from the list those files that to extract: click All Project
to highlight all the available files. All files are selected by default
Baggage This lists the baggage files that the user chose to add when the archive was
Listing created. As with the project listing, the User may double-click on an item to view
its properties. Select the file to extract: by default all are highlighted. To select all
the files, click on All Baggage
Extract Browse to the directory to which one would like to extract the archive files. If the
user wants to keep the original directory structure of the archive within the
extraction directory, click on Retain Directory Structure and new directories will be
created if necessary
Comment This displays the comment that was supplied with the original archive

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 69

Action Buttons

All Project Selects all files in the project listing

All Baggage Selects all files in the baggage listing
Extract Extracts archive files to the directory supplied

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 70 GAP

2.3.3 The Options Menu

In the following sections, discuss those menu options found under the Options item of the main
menu:

2.3.3.1 Method
This section allows setting up overall system parameters, including the type of system
(production or injection), the prediction mode, and various options on the optimisation process.

SYSTEM TYPE:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 71

This section defines the type of network that can be modeled in GAP.

Production Production systems can contain oil wells (e.g. naturally flowing, gas lifted or
ESP wells), gas, or condensate wells
Water The injection manifold takes the place of the production separator at the top
Injection level of the system
Gas This defines the model as a gas injection network, with the injection manifold
Injection taking the place of the production separator at the top level of the system
Gas Lift This allows to model the gas lift injection distribution network in detail and to
Injection link the gas lift injection network to the main production network model
NEW!!!

OPTIMISATION METHOD:

This section defines the objective function used by GAP to optimise the system.

Production This option optimises the production rate of the primary fluid (in an oil system
this is the oil for example). GAP will calculate the maximum rate that can be
achieved while honouring production constraints
Revenue This option optimises on the revenue generated by sales of oil and gas
produced after taking into account the cost of processing water and injecting
gas. If this option is selected, then prices need to be defined for each fluid in
the system (see below).
The currency can be defined by selecting "Currency Setup".
The following additional data is required to be entered in |Options |Tax
Regimes:
Revenue from oil sales
Revenue from gas sales
Cost of water processing
Cost of injection gas
Cost of power
Cost of steam

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 72 GAP

Up to 32 different Tax Regimes can be set.

The Tax Regime to be used by the system during optimisation can be
selected in any well summary screen.
The default Tax Regime is selected in |Options |Default Settings.
Oil rate only / Those methods are used when the objective is to maximize only the Oil rate,
Water rate the Gas Rate or the Water rate
only
Gas + Oil This method allows to maximise at the same time oil and gas production
rate rate only rates and honour constraints
Gross This option maximises the gross heating value produced by the field. This
Heating Value option is mainly used in the case of gas fields where one would like to
maximise the gas heating value of the delivered gas.
If the GAP model contains various streams of gas that will contain different
compositions and hence gravities, the optimizer will control the system in
order to provide at the delivery point a blend of gas that can have the highest
possible heating value. In black oil mode, the program will use a correlation
to associate the heating value to the gravity of the gas (Figure 4.82 in the
Handbook of Natural Gas Engineering published by McGraw-Hill).

PREDICTION

This option needs to be on “ON” so that GAP can allow the user to carry out a prediction.

PVT MODEL

This option menu allows to define which PVT model to adopt for the system.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 73

Four options are available:

Black oil Black oil model is used for the calculation

Tracking This method is based on a combination of black oil model and full
compositional model (equation of state or EOS):
Black oil model is used for the main pressure drop calculations
The EOS is then used as a post calculation to determine the composition in
any part of the system by performing compositional blends and flashes
whenever necessary.
If a black oil reservoir simulator (like for example MBAL), the compositional
tracking provides with the unique capability to recombined one initial
composition in order to match the GOR of the fluid produced
Fully This method allows to run all the calculations using an equation of state,
Compositional which gives the compositions as well as the fluid PVT properties in any point
of the network.
NEW!!! This option allows also to perform Lumping/Delumping of an initial
EOS, which empowers the user with the possibility to decide if running the
calculations using an extended composition, or a using a composition with a
reduced number of components (lumped)
Black Oil To speed-up calculations, the Black Oil Lumping/Delumping method tracks
Compositional the composition of the fluids throughout the network at each iteration of the
Lumping/ solver, but performs pipeline, compressor, pump, choke, ... calculations
Delumping using the Black Oil PVT correlations based on the black oil standard
NEW!!! condition properties calculated by the equation of state. This options makes
sure that the black oil model is at any point in time consistent with the EOS.
Black Oil Lumping/Delumping may use the full or the lumped compositions

Details about the PVT model options can be found further in the manual ( click here 124 to
view).

Note on the EOS: The EOS as models are not predictive, unless
matched to measured lab data. Care has to be taken in order to
make sure that the EOS has been matched and is applicable for
the range of Pressures and Temperatures to be investigated.

Black Oil Compositional Lumping/Delumping is the recommended

option whenever one wants to speed up the calculations, but still
keep them accurate and at the same time provide a consistent
composition

IMPORTANT NOTE:
When modeling gas lifted systems (or any artificial lift systems where a
hydrocarbon fluid is mixed to the main fluid) in compositional mode, it is strongly
recommended to use the compositional Tracking mode.
This is because when using Fully Compositional or Black Oil Compositional modes, a full

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 74 GAP

Equation of State model is used to determine the fluid composition and PVT properties.
The assumption the EOS model takes is that if two fluids are blended, immediate and
perfect mixing occurs and a new fluid is generated. This means that after the mixing it is
not possible to physically differentiate between the gas lift gas and the reservoir fluid
and separate the gas lift gas from the reservoir fluid, hence it is not possible to have a
consistent reporting of the gas lift injected throughout the network, nor to use the gas lift
gas rate as a constraint.
Compositional Tracking is recommended for gas lifted systems, as it is based on the
black oil assumption that the various phases are kept separate throughout the system,
hence it is possible to determine and report consistently the amount of gas lift gas at any
point in the system and use it for constraint purpose.
The black oil assumption behind the Tracking model, though considering separation of
the various phases, has been found to be quite reliable, also related to the physical fact
that at the relatively low pressure and temperature conditions occurring in pipeline
networks mixing of fluids becomes possibly unlikely.

Prediction Method

This option defines whether temperature calculations in pipelines are performed or not

Pressure Only Temperature changes along the flow lines are not calculated but instead
fixed by the user
Pressure and (recommended) GAP calculates both the pressure and temperature losses
Temperature along the flow lines, using either a simple temperature model or the more
advanced Enthalpy Balance option available through the PROSPER on Line
option in the pipe description

Wax or Hydrate Warning

This option can be used to predict the presence of Wax or Hydrates at any point in the
system. The Wax or Hydrate Warning is only available when the compositional details of the
fluid are available i.e. when the Compositional Model is set to 'Tracking' or 'Fully
Compositional'. By switching this option to ON, if GAP encounters a wax or hydrate risk in the
model, it will raise a flag to this effect.

WATER VAPOUR (NEW!!!)

This option allows to enable/disable the calculation of condensed water vapour in pipelines.

No Water is accounted for as liquid phase by default, unless the pipelines are
Calculations modeled with PROSPER on line and the Calculate Condensed Water vapour is
enabled in the PROSPER on line options
Calculate This option allows to account for vaporization/condensation of water with

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 75

Condensed changing pressure and temperature conditions along the pipelines

Water Vapour

TEMPERATURE MODEL: (NEW!!!)

In previous versions of GAP rigorous temperature modeling with Enthalpy Balance or

Improved Approximation could be achieved by modeling the pipelines with PROSPER on line
option.
Advanced temperature model can now be enabled and used along with the default pipeline
modeling option GAP Internal Correlations.

Rough This is a heat balance model that calculates the heat loss from the well to the
Approximation surroundings based on an overall heat transfer coefficient, the temperature
difference between the fluids and the surroundings and the average heat
capacity of the well fluids.
The Rough Approximation temperature model requires calibration using
measured temperature data. It is not accurate in a predictive mode
Improved This is a rigorous thermodynamic model that is based on a full enthalpy
Approximation balance model considering all the components of energy (enthalpy, potential
energy, kinetic energy and heat transfer between fluid and surroundings).
The term of the enthalpy balance concerning the heat exchange with the
surroundings is simplified by a heat loss term characterized by an overall
heat exchange coefficient.
For this reason data related to the completion hardware and thermal
properties are not necessary.
As an enthalpy balance model, Joule-Thomson Effect is also accounted for.
These characteristics make this model particularly useful when an accurate
calculation of temperature is sought after and only a few data on the
completion are available.
The Improved Approximation temperature model requires calibration using
measured temperature data

CALCULATE WELL CHOKE DELTA_T

A choke can be placed on the well directly, rather than to explicitly define a choke in the
system. By having this option set to YES, GAP will calculate the temperature drop in the fluid
as it flows through that choke. If set to NO, temperature drop is not accounted for.

BACKGROUND BITMAP

The user has the option of adding a picture on the background of the GAP model. This could
be a map of the area or an aerial photograph so that the position of the icons on the screen
coincides with their real geographical position. Simply select the path pointing to a *.bmp file
and this will appear in the main screen as soon as "OK" is selected.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 76 GAP

ASSOCIATED INJECTION MODELS

If along with the production network system there are a gas injection and/or a water injection
and/or a gas lift injeciton network, it is possible to link them to the main production model by
means of this option.

The associated injection model(s) for the field can be specified here. Select the check box to
indicate that an associated injection model exists, then specify the model file using the
button.

If no associated injection model exists, GAP will still calculate the injection volumes necessary
for the desired injection policy, but will simply assume that these volumes can be injected (not
taking into account how they will be injected).

2.3.3.2 Edit Injection Fluids

In case the system consists of Gas-lifted wells, Gas Injectors, Water injectors or sources, the
properties of the injection fluids need to be defined.

The list of injection fluids can be edited from the Options | Injection Fluids screen shown
below:

For each source:

Enter a unique label.
The source Type (Gas, Water, Oil, Steam, Other, Polymer)
The source type can be Steam, in which case the default quality need to be entered in
this table. The quality is recalculated wherever steam is present in the system, to make

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 77

sure it is consistent with the steam thermodynamics.

GAP uses the Steam Calculation Module from PVTP
The source PVT properties
Gas gravity and the impurity levels (in terms of mole percentage for the gas).
Water salinity for water sources.
GOR, API, gas gravity, water salinity and water cut for oil sources
If GAP is run using the compositional options, the composition for each source needs to
be defined by clicking on the Edit button (the Edit button will only be visible if the
composition tracking is chosen).

When a new file is created, the list will contain two default items
Gas source – Gas01.
Water source – Water01

Note about Gas Lifted Wells

When gas lifted wells are created, they will (by default) be assumed to be
using gas from the first source (Gas01) in the list.
The user can change the gas associated with gas lifted wells to another gas
source in the list (explained in Gas Lift Control topic 204 ).
Note that when a GAP Generate | VLP is performed, the values of the lift gas
properties used by PROSPER to generate the lift curves for each well will be
taken from the properties of the gas source associated with the well in GAP.
The gas lift source data in GAP takes precedence over the current value gas
lift gas properties in PROSPER file.
The original PROSPER files are changed by GAP, when generating VLP data
and gas lift properties section of PROSPER is updated.
2.3.3.3 Edit Tax Regimes
When the Optimisation method is set to “Revenue”, the user can define different tax regimes
so that different value can be assigned to different fluids in the system.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 78 GAP

Each well in the system can then be assigned either the same or different tax regimes, thus
letting the program know the value of e.g. oil coming out of one well as opposed to oil coming
from another. The optimiser will then calculate the maximum amount of revenue that can be
achieved by the system.

The Gas Sales Revenue per BTU switch at the bottom of the screen enables to choose the
units in which the gas sales price is described.

Cost of steam is part of the variables.

2.3.3.4 Edit Emulsion Models
Allows the user to setup and match to measured data different emulsion models to be used to
model emulsion behaviour in the GAP network.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 79

GAP can model the effect of Oil/Water emulsions on mixture viscosity.

The behaviour of emulsions in producing equipment is not well understood. Emulsion PVT in
GAP provides a means to assess possible effects of increased emulsion viscosity by curve
fitting experimentally determined data. It must be emphasised that the method is empirical
and does not represent any rigorous model of emulsion behaviour.

In the laboratory, stable emulsions can be prepared from many crude oil / water systems.
Field experience shows that the effect of emulsions is usually less than predicted by
laboratory tests. Emulsion PVT should be used with caution and only when it is certain that
emulsions are present and it is necessary to evaluate their effect on calculated pressures.

Emulsion viscosity will replace the mixture viscosity for selected elements of the production
system. Experimental or empirical emulsion viscosity data can be entered and curve-fitted
using non-linear regression. The fitted curve is used to optionally replace the oil/water mixture
viscosity in pressure drop and pump calculations. When selected, emulsion viscosity for the
user-entered value of water cut will be substituted for the fluid mixture viscosity.

Emulsion viscosity is modelled as a function of water cut in 3 stages:

Sharp increase at low water cut

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 80 GAP

Plateau with a constant maximum viscosity for intermediate water cuts

‘Tail’ that declines to the viscosity of water after the plateau
The parameters Left and Right Water Cut for Maximum Viscosity define the maximum plateau
region. To calculate emulsion viscosity:
- Enter pairs of water cut and emulsion viscosity data points in the Emulsion Data table.
- Click the Match button.

When the regression has stopped, click Plot to display the matched mixture viscosity.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 81

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 82 GAP

2.3.3.5 Edit Default Settings

Allows the user to set the default settings for:
Injection Fluids
Emulsion Model
Tax Regime
PVT correlations for pipeline calculations
Volume Correction Factors
Pipe Line

These can be also changed later for each well, source, pipeline, etc. in the model,
allowing to use different selections (for example, PVT correlations) in different areas of
the system, to reflect the actual situation in the field.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 83

Injection This is the default choice for the water injection and gas injection.
Fluids Edit Fluid List allows to modify the list of fluids used in the model
Emulsion This is the default choice for the emulsion model.
Model Edit Emulsions allows to modify the list of emulsion models used in the model
Tax Regimes This is the default choice for the Tax Regimes.
Edit Tax Regimes allows to modify the list of Tax Regimes that can be used in
the various wells in the system
Default PVT This is the default choice for the Oil Pb, Rs, Bo correlation, the Oil Viscosity
Correlation and the Gas Viscosity (NEW!!!) correlations
Volume When GAP is reporting production rates it calculates Bo and Bg using its own
Correction PVT calculator and a ‘virtual process’ occurring at the separator. When
Factors interfacing GAP with a process simulator one may wish to apply a correction
to the Bo and Bg calculated by GAP to match that calculated by the simulator,
which may be using an Equation of State rather than a black oil model.
In the fields provided in this screen, one can enter the correction factors to Bo
and Bg. Note that these are corrections to the volume ratios, and not the
volume ratios themselves. GAP will perform the calculation based on the new
values of Bo and Bg
Pipe Line This field represents the defaults used when creating a new pipe
Default pipe This is the default roughness that will appear as soon as a
roughness pipeline element is created. As mentioned above, if
required, each pipeline segment can have its own
roughness value to represent the actual field configuration
Gas/Liquid This cut-off parameter specifies the GOR at which the fluid
pipe GOR definition will switch from a liquid to a gas. This triggers the
Cutoff condensate to be treated as an equivalent gas in the
pipelines as opposed to a liquid. It is recommended to
keep this value at default. One can also select the
correlation for viscosity based on the one that matches the
fluid in the system
Water vapour This parameter specifies the value of the GOR above which
GOR Cutoff the water vapour calculations are performed.
(NEW!!!) Below the cutoff water is considered to be in liquid phase,
whilst above the cutoff presence of vapourized water is
accounted for.
This option is enabled when the water vapour calculations
are enabled in the main program Options 74

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 84 GAP

2.3.3.6 Edit System Summary

This option is used to enter the GAP title and some comments.
Title and comments can be displayed on the GAP network, by selecting "Draw Network Title"
and "Draw Network Comments" from the View Menu.

The Title and Comments can be moved all over the network window, by
simply dragging them while the "Shift" key is pressed:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 85

2.3.3.7 View System Statistics

This option allows to visualize a summary of the GAP model, containing the option selected
and the number of equipment per type:

2.3.3.8 Disable Options

These options switch on/off network data and interface validation.

Disable When selecting this option, the Automatic Masking is disabled. This means
Automatic that if a well is disabled/masked, the pipe downstream the well will not be
Masking greyed out, but will appear on the screen in full colour
Disable System Before accessing any calculation area, the program validates if there are

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 86 GAP

Validation missing/invalid items in the network and will activate a flag highlighting the
invalid item.
This option disables that validation flag
Disable Label The program sets a flag on any item that has an invalid label (for example,
Validation two wells with the same name). This option disables that validation flag flag
Disable This option (when enabled) allows identifying any inconsistency between the
PROSPER/GAP GAP well model type [Oil producer (ESP lifted) for instance] and the well
Well Type definition of the PROSPER file associated. In case of inconsistency, the well
Validation turns "invalid"

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 87

2.3.4 The View Menu

The options under the view menu govern the appearance of the network drawing and activate
some validation checks on the individual equipment on the drawing. These can be activated or
de-activated as described below:

These options allow to view or not connection lines, masked items, equipment labels, the
grid, etc.

One important point the users are urged to consider is to leave the system validation
options switched on at all times. These will highlight areas at which the model can be
improved or corrected.

The View menu is divided in these fields:

Draw Options 88
Highlight Options 88
Window Aspect and Drawing Options
Network Drawing Position 95

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 88 GAP

2.3.4.1 Draw Options

A series of options are available to modify the view of the GAP network model.
The options allow to toggle on/off the visualisation of solid and dotted line connections, tank-
tank connections, IPR icons, groups and group connections, labels, grid, etc.

2.3.4.2 Highlight Options

These options enable/disable the visualisation of specific flags that are usually displayed by
the program in the main screen as result of a check of the model status or as a result of a
Solve Network calculation.
The options available enable/disable:
Invalid items (usually highlighted by a thick red circle)
Bottle necked pipes (highlighted by a purple colour)
TVD differences (see below 88 )
Solver pressure and mass imbalances and
Limiting and violated constraints (see below 91 ).
2.3.4.2.1 Highlight TVD Differences
This option is used to "highlight" any inconsistence in the pipelines' TVD. An orange circle is
displayed around the node where a TVD inconsistency arises.

For instance, considering the system below, one can see a TVD inconsistency highlighted on
the node "Riserbase":

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 89

Indeed:
the TVD of the most downstream point of the pipeline situated upstream of the node
"Riserbase" is 0m.
the TVD of the most upstream point of the pipeline situated downstream of the node
"Riserbase" is 100m.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 90 GAP

Those discrepancies will lead to erroneous pressure drop calculations across the pipelines.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 91

2.3.4.2.2 Highlight Violated and Limiting Constraints

The option to Highlight Violated and Limiting constraints allows to visualise directly on the
network after the network is solved is a constraint is violated or is the constraint is limiting the
production of a particular element:

Violated
constraint

This flag indicates that at the end of the Solve Network calculation the constraints
could not be honoured. When that happens, it is recommended to review both the
model and the constraints themselves, in case there is an inconsistency in the
system that causes the constraints to be not achievable (infeasible).
Limiting
constraints

This flag indicates that the piece of equipment (in the case above, a separator) is
limiting the production. In other words, the element could produce more, but
constraints imposed on the equipment itself limit the production.

These flags can be displayed on any type of equipment where constraints have been set up.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 92 GAP

2.3.4.3 Window Aspect and Drawing Options

These options allow the User to modify the aspect of the program window and of the network
model drawing, in terms of colours, fonts icon sizes, etc.
2.3.4.3.1 Select Info Displayed
Use this option to select what information to display on the main GAP network, in along with
each icon.

The section is divided in two main fields:

Icon Label This is the information that appears in the main screen along with each element.
The default setting is each icon's "label only".
Select "Liquid Rate" for instance to display the liquid rate results of the last
network solver, along with each icon
Icon This is the information that is displayed in the small "fly-over" window that is
Tooltip activated when passing the mouse through each element

2.3.4.3.2 Select Default Icon Label Position

This option defines the position of each icon label with respect to the icon itself.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 93

Click on the correspondent position and then OK to change the label position.
2.3.4.3.3 Colours
From the View | Colours menu item the user may change the colours of the system drawing
and the GAP windows.

To change the customised colour, use the RGB scrollbars on the right hand side of the
dialogue. Each colour can be varied from a value of 0 (off) to 255 (full on). The Sample field
of the dialogue gives the colour that is obtained by mixing the primary colours in the ratio
given.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 94 GAP

There is also a choice of colour schemes, gained by toggling the radio boxes at the top of the
dialogue, i.e.:

Colour allows full selection of any of the (255 x 255 x 255) colours
Grey scale forces the RGB values to be equal, so that only 255 shades of grey are
available
Monochrome forces the RGB values to be either on or off, giving a choice of two colours
(black or white)

Select the drawing component whose colour to alter by highlighting it in the list box on the left.

Select from the list box on the left-hand side the element that is to be changed. Select an
appropriate colour using the colour-mixing palette on the right. To save the current set of
colours for future GAP sessions, click on the ‘Save as user default’ button.

2.3.4.3.4 Icon Sizes

The sizes of the icons used to represent the equipment in GAP can be changed. Select the
Icon Sizes option from the View menu item, or from the menu obtained following a right hand
mouse button click in the system window. The following dialog will appear:

The dialog consists of a slider with a data entry field, which contains the current icon size (this
defaults to 60 out of an arbitrary 0 – 100 range for a new file). Change the icon sizes by
adjusting the slider or entering a new size in the entry field. Check the Automatic Update box
to update the system window with the new size when moving the slider.
2.3.4.3.5 Fonts
The fonts used in the network drawing may be changed. To do this, select the Fonts option
from the View menu item or from the menu obtained following a right hand mouse button click
in the system window. This will bring up a font selection dialog. Select the font size and style
required and then OK. The new font will be applied to all system drawings.
Fonts for the Items' labels, the Network Title and the Comments can be entered.
2.3.4.3.6 Grid
A background grid can be implemented in the GAP model. The settings of this grid can be
modified using the Grid option of the View menu.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 95

The dialog consists of a two sliders with corresponding data entry fields, which contains the
horizontal and vertical spacing of the grid lines. Change these spacings by adjusting the sliders
or entering a new size in the entry field.
The line type and colour used for drawing the grid can be modified as well.
Check the Automatic Update box to update the system window with the new grid dimensions
when moving the slider.
2.3.4.4 Network Drawing Position
These options allow to modify the placement of the icons in the main program window.
2.3.4.4.1 Normalize Equipment Icons Position and Snap to Grid
The objective of these options is to modify the aspect of the network.

Normalize Resets the system of coordinates used by the program. This is particularly
Equipment useful when merging different models created according to different zoom
Icons scales: at the time of merging the models, this option will reset both models to
Position work with the same scale, allowing to place the systems correctly together
Snap to Grid When the Grid is active (Draw Grid options enabled), this option places each
element in the closest grid corner.
This feature is useful to create tidy (squared) network drawings

2.3.5 The Edit Menu

In this section, the program allows selection and manipulation of various items on the network
for operations such as deleting or in the case of wells, generating lift curves.
This section will concentrate on the options which are used for important operations to the
model.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 96 GAP

These are the options available in the Edit menu:

Undo Options 96
Select Options 97
Selected Equipment Options 98
Find Equipment 104
Edit Options 106
Transfer and Import Options 108
Execute OpenServer Command
2.3.5.1 Undo Options
These options allow to undo an operation is performed on the network system drawing.
Every time the network drawing is modified, the program will record the action taken. These
are the options available:

Undo This will undo the last operation made

Undo All This will undo all the operations done on the network drawing
Clear Undo This will clear the list of changes made on the network
list

Note that the Undo options are available only for actions
done on the network drawing and not on the input data
entered in the equipment data entry screens or in the
various input menus

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 97

2.3.5.2 Select Options

These options allow to select items in the GAP network model. The items can be selected one
by one or by the same type (all wells, all joints, etc.).
The selection options available are:

Select All This option allows to select all the equipment in the network model
Items
Select All This option allows to select all the elements of the same type, like wells, pipes,
tanks, etc., as well as all items that have been disabled, masked, bypassed, etc.
To select the type of item to select, choose from the sub-menu:

Dialogue This option opens up a selection window where one can select the items one by
Select one:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 98 GAP

Unselect This option unselects all the selected items. The option is active only when there
All Items are selected items in the system

Selected items are highlighted by a cyan circle around

them, as shown in the figure below:

2.3.5.3 Selected Equipment Options

This section of the Edit menu allows to perform operations on multiple selected elements and
elements belonging to the same type that have been previously selected.
The options available are:
Selected Items

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 99

Selected Wells and Inflows

Selected Pipes
Selected Tanks

2.3.5.3.1 Selected Items

This menu allows to perform bulk operations on all the selected pieces of equipment. For
example, after selecting a series of valves, it is possible to bypass all of them at once by
using this option.

These are the main options:

Disable/Enable This option closes/opens an element. The closing action is irreversible, that
is to say, even if during the prediction a scheduled event sets to open the
element, this will be kept closed
Mask/Unmask This option closes/opens an element. The closing action is reversible, that is
to say, if during the prediction a scheduled event sets to open the element,
this will opened
Bypass / This bypass/unbypass option is applied to inline elements (chokes, valves,
Un-bypass inline separators, etc.)
Remove This option allows to delete an inline element and to re-establish the
(NEW!!!) connection between the upstream of the inline element and the downstream.
The objective is to eliminate inline elements from the system without having
to re-draw all the connections again.
This is the effect of Remove:

Initially an inline element is present in the system (in this case, an inline
choke):

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 100 GAP

After selecting the element with the selection tool applying the Edit/
Selected Items/Remove, this is the effect:

The inline element has been removed and the connection between the well
and the pipeline joint created.
Show Gradient This option allows to plot the pressure gradient along all the selected
pipelines
Copy/Cut/ Options to duplicate, cut and delete selected items
Delete
Extract to GAP This option allows to create a copy of the network or part of it, which can
Partial File (. then imported in another GAP project (see below 113 for further details)
gpp)
Snap to Grid This option snaps the selected elements to grid (see above 95 )
Change Icon This option changes the elements' icon label position
Label Position

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 101

2.3.5.3.2 Selected Wells and Inflows

This option can be used to perform specific tasks on well icons, for example, setting well head
chokes for optimisation:

Set dP Control This option allow to set the wellhead choke to None (choke switched
off), Fixed pressure drop or Calculated (choke set by the optimiser
to maximise production and honor constraints)
Set Casing Pressure This option allows to switch the Casing pressure control to a fixed
Control value or controlled by the optimiser
Set Use Casing This option is to switch on/off the casing pressure option
Pressure
Set Well model This option allows to change the well modeling for the selected wells
to: VLP/IPR Intersection, PC Interpolation, Outflow Only - VLP and
Outflow only - PROSPER on line. Refer to the Well description 157 for
further details
Set IPR Rate model This option allows to specify if the IPR is defined in terms of
volumetric flow rates of mass flow rates
Set IPR Use OriginalWhen running calculations in compositional mode the original
Composition composition entered in the model may be changed based on the

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 102 GAP

input from the reservoir model (for example when the produced GOR
changes as the reservoir pressure decreases below the bubble
point). The new composition is called "Working".
This option will reset the IPR composition to be the original one
initially entered in the model
When Composition This option is enabled when one of the compositional models is in
Changes use, as well as the lumping/Delumping option enabled.
The options available are: Do Nothing (if the composition changes,
then use the composition coming from the upstream reservoir
simulator as such), Lump (lump the composition of from the
simulator) and Delump (delump the composition from the simulator)
Refit PC curves This option regenerates the selected wells' performance curves
Reset dP chokes This option resets the values of the fixed dP choke applied to the
selected wells. Note that the fixed dP choke is the one used when
running with no optimisation or with optimisation when Fixed dP
Control is selected
Turn off if unstable The well outflow features are described in the VLP input section 189 .
Allow left hand VLP/ The options here have the objective to switch on/off these features
IPR intersection
Enable Safe VLP/IPR
intersection mode
Convert to inflow This option converts the selected wells to inflows eliminating de facto
the well outflow from the model
Split into This option converts the selected wells into its components inflow
inflow and outflow and outflow. The application of this feature is in the modeling of
complex well geometries (see example on Smart wells 743 )
2.3.5.3.3 Selected Pipes
This menu allows to change the description of the selected pipes by means of these options:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 103

Toggle Pipe It switches the direction of the pipe, in case the pipe was incorrectly
Description defined
Pipe Model This allows to change the mode used to calculate the pipeline dP (
GAP Internal Correlations, Lift Curves, PROSPER Online)
Lumping Calculation In Lumping/Delumping mode (one of the compositional PVT options
Model. NEW!!! has to be selected in Options/Method), this option allows to decide if
running the dP calculation using the lumped or the full composition
Convert to PROSPER This option converts the pipeline (initially modelled as GAP Internal
Online Correlations) to PROSPER Online

2.3.5.3.4 Selected Tanks

When a prediction has been performed using MBAL tank models or external simulation
models, it is possible to switch them to decline curves.
The Selected Tanks will allow to import in the decline curve tanks from the production
obtained in the initial run by the pre-existing tank model, or from the production obtained by
the inflow elements linked to the tank itself.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 104 GAP

2.3.5.3.5 Selected Groups

(NEW!!!)
Show members as selected
This feature allows to highlight as selected all the elements that belong to the selected groups.
After selecting the group:

and choosing the Show members as selected option the elements that are part of the group
are selected:

2.3.5.4 Find Equipment on System Window

In large systems made up of with hundreds of elements, it may sometimes be difficult locating
individual items in the drawing, especially in big models where the icons are close together
and whose labels are therefore difficult to read.
This option pinpoints the location of an item for the user.
The top list in the dialog gives the different equipment types available as GAP nodes. When
the dialog is invoked, all equipment types are selected. The lower list displays all the system
equipment of the selected types, sorted by equipment type and alphabetically. To locate a

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 105

piece of equipment on the system window, double-click on an entry in the lower list (or select
a piece of equipment and then press Locate). A pink rectangle will appear around the icon
representing the node in all system views. The rectangle will disappear when leaving the
screen.

In the above screenshot, the Separator element called “Separator” will be located on the
network by selecting Locate as shown. The requested item will then be highlighted on the
main window and on the navigator window if selected.

Note that whenever a selection is made in the 'equipment type' list, the list of equipment in the
lower list changes to reflect the new selection.

Action Buttons

All Selects all the equipment types in the upper list

Invert Inverts the selection of the upper list
None Un-selects all the items
Locate Locates the currently selected piece of equipment in the system views
(equivalent to double-clicking on an item)
Edit This invokes the Data Entry screen for the currently selected piece of
equipment
Select This selected the highlighted item
OK Clears the screen

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 106 GAP

2.3.5.5 Edit Options

This sub-menu allows to modify the equipment control set up (for example chokes, gas lift
allocation, etc.) and to modify the paths of the files connected by the GAP model.
2.3.5.5.1 Edit Equipment Controls
This option has been added in GAP so that users can easily access all the control
mechanisms available in the model. In this manner well head chokes, gas lift injection rates,
pump power and frequency can be set (prior to a calculation) or viewed (following a
calculation) from the same screen:

As an example, consider a situation that the performance of a gas-lifted model needs to be

compared to reality. Then the same gas lift injection rates as were injected in reality need to
be specified in the model. These can be set from the “Equipment Controls” screen directly as
shown above. GAP will then use these injection rates during the unoptimized solve network
calculation.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 107

The “Edit” buttons will lead directly to the Control page of the individual well models. This can
be used to set minimum and maximum constraints for instance.

The “Display” and “Control Type” buttons enable to filter the wells to display depending on the
control parameter considered or the status of the optimiser for these wells.
A specific layout setup can be kept in memory using the “Save Layout as” button.
2.3.5.5.2 Edit Project Paths
This option allows all items and associated files in a GAP project to be viewed on a single
screen and shows the directory location of the associated files to the GAP network.
The paths of the files can be adjusted if required.

This option is useful when having copied a GAP file from one machine to another and the
associated file paths are no longer valid. Selecting “All” and “Alter Paths” can allow the user to
define the new directory where the associated PROSPER, MBAL etc. files now reside.

A typical GAP project is displayed in the example above. The production system file is
displayed at the top with any associated well or tank files. Injection system files are listed in a
similar fashion below this. If a prediction history file is present this will be displayed at the

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 108 GAP

bottom.
The list icons are colour coded by type; for example well files are represented by a green
icon, tank files by a yellow icon. In addition, a tick or a cross indicates whether the file is a
valid file of the required type.

From this screen the user may view or alter the properties of associated files, or change the
paths of a group of files.

Action Buttons

Alter Paths This is used to change the paths for a group of files. The files to be altered
can be selected with the mouse or the Select button as described below.
When this button is invoked, a directory browser appears. Navigate to the new
directory and press OK. The file list will be updated accordingly
View This is only active when a single selection is made in the file list. When invoked
Details the File Properties screen appears, allowing the viewing of the file properties or
the changing of the file path.
The same action is obtained by double-clicking the left hand mouse button on a
file list entry
OK Clears the dialog, saving any changes
Cancel Clears the dialog, ignoring any changes
Apply This saves any changes without clearing the dialog. This is useful if an injection
file name has changed: this will load the new file and display its contents in the
list
Help Invokes this screen
Select Multiple selections from the file list can be made in the usual ways with the
mouse. Alternatively, all items might select of a particular type using this
button. Choose from the drop-down list the category of file to select. The
following choices are possible:
All well files
All tank files
All item model files (tanks and wells)
Injection system files (associated gas/water injection systems)
Prediction history file

When Select is pressed the files of the given type will be highlighted

2.3.5.6 Transfer and Import Options

This submenu allows to import in GAP information from various sources, like MBAL Material
Balance data, compositional data, gas lift injection input data, etc.
2.3.5.6.1 Transfer Well Data from MBAL Models
This screen is used to transfer well data from an established material balance file within
MBAL to this GAP model.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 109

Various categories of data can be transferred as detailed below.

On this screen two lists are shown: on the left is a listing of the components (tanks and wells)
of the MBAL model, on the right are the wells of the GAP model. Valid layers are displayed in
the GAP well list; transfers to invalid layers can be accomplished by transferring the required
data to the well icon itself and then specifying the layer number in the resulting query screen.

To transfer data, click on an item in the MBAL list and a destination in the GAP list. Click on a
button in the middle to transfer data of the required type. The actual data transferred will
depend on the type of the item selected in the MBAL list (for example, tank IPR data will
include the tank starting pressure and PVT data, whereas well IPR data includes the PI). In
addition, it is not possible to transfer, for example, VLP data from an MBAL tank.

Action Buttons

IPR This transfers IPR data from the MBAL item to the GAP target. The data
transferred is as follows:
From a tank:
Starting pressure,
Starting temperature,
Impurity data (% H2S, water salinity),
Gas gravity,
Oil/condensate gravity,
GOR/CGR.
From a well:
PI (Darcy coefficients, C and n),
Layer type,
PI Relative permeability correction (oil layers only),
Perforation depths,
Breakthrough constraints,
Match data,
Test water cut / layer pressure
VLP Transfers lift curve data to the well in question. This is only possible if the
data has been imported into the MBAL well model
Rel Perm Transfers either the tank or the well relative permeability depending on the
source type. If the MBAL well model is set to 'Use Tank Rel Perm', then
this will return the tank relative permeability anyway
New Model This will load in an additional MBAL model file (extension .mbi) and display
File the contents in the list. Choose the required file from the file selection box
displayed. Data can then be transferred from the new elements as above.

Note that new files are not stored when the screen is cleared and must be reloaded when
going into the screen on subsequent occasions.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 110 GAP

2.3.5.6.2 Initialise IPRs from Tank Simulations

This option is particularly useful when history matching a full GAP model. The IPR screens of
wells can be initialised with reservoir pressure data and saturations from associated MBAL
models at any point of the historical period. This allows checking production from the system
at particular points in time rather than running the whole model for the full historical period.
It is important to notice that when using this feature, an MBAL simulation will be run up to the
initialisation date. The fluid saturations in the reservoir at this point in time will be used along
with the set of relative permeabilities defined in the MBAL model in order to obtain the WC/
GOR or WGR/CGR corresponding to this specific date.

As with the previous option, more details are provided in the History Matching chapter 510 which
deals specifically with History Matching.

This screen allows to initialise a well IPR from a tank model (decline curve or material
balance). When one invokes the Edit | Initialise IPRs from Tanks menu item, a list of wells
appears; select the wells that to initialise and press OK.

The list of tanks that are connected to the selected wells appear in a list in the Tank Name
column.

In order to evaluate the tank pressure and PVT the tank models must have a history in the
case of MBAL models or, in the case of decline curve models, production data. These are the
options available:

MBAL Start For MBAL models only - the start date of the tank history
Date
MBAL End For MBAL models only - the end date of the tank history
Date
Start For Decline Curve models - the cumulative production at which the
Cumulative pressure and PVT data are to be evaluated
Production
Pressure Displays the pressure following a Calculate
Start Date For all MBAL tanks, this is the date at which the pressure and PVT
should be evaluated

Action Buttons

Calculate Evaluates the tank pressure and PVT at the specified date/cumulative
production, and displays this in the Pressure column
Continue Calculates the PVT and pressure data at the required conditions, and
places this in the IPR data of those wells that were selected initially
Cancel Clears the screen, ignoring any changes

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 111

2.3.5.6.3 Import Compositions

NEW!!!
This option allows to automatize the import of Equation of State (EOS) in GAP.
When the model is in compositional mode, the Import Compositions feature allows to import in
one go EOS for multiple wells.
Select from the list of wells the wells to import the EOS for:

Two selection boxes are available to import the Lumping Rules - in case Lumping/Delumping is
activated in the main program options, under EOS Model Set up - and the EOS Options - in
case the imported EOS file contains different options that need to be taken into account, like
different volume shift set up, different path to standard, etc.
Then Continue and recall the .PRP file containing the required EOS: the EOS will be
automatically imported in the wells' IPR input section.
2.3.5.6.4 Lump/Delump Compositions
NEW!!!
This option allows to apply a lumping rule in batch model to multiple wells.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 112 GAP

2.3.5.6.5 Transfer Options for Gas Lift Injection

NEW!!!
When Gas Lift Injection network model is associated to the Production network model, three
options are available:

Transfer Well Gas Lift gas When a Solve Network calculation (for example, an
rates to Injection System optimisation) is performed in the Production system, the
Sinks gas lift rates used by each well can be passed to the
Gas Lift Injection system, which can then be used to
calculate the pressure required to flow the gas
Transfer Injection System When a Solve Network calculation (for example, an
Sink pressures to Gaslifted optimisation) is performed in the Gas Lift Injection
Wells casing pressure system, the pressure calculated for each well (casing
head pressure) can be passed to the Production system,
which can then be used to calculate the production that
can be obtained applying those casing pressures
Transfer Production System
Separator pressures to This option transfers the Production separator pressures
Gaslift System Injection to the GasLift Injeciton Manifolds
Manifolds

2.3.5.7 Execute OpenServer Statement

This feature allows to perform the basic OpenServer operations on any element of the GAP
model.
The basic operations are:

DoGet To retrieve values of input data or results

DoSet To input data in the system
DoCommand To perform actions (like masking items or run calculations)

Examples of applications are: masking multiple elements at the same time, or reading the
result of a particular element.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 113

To use the feature enter the OpenServer string (and the value, if using DoSet to input data in
the model) and then select the Mode and then Evaluate to execute the command.
In the Returned value and message the program will highlight if the command has been
successfully executed.

Using the wildcard $ in the place of the equipment label or index will
allow to access all the items of the same type in one go. For example:
DoCmd("GAP.MOD[{PROD}].WELL[$].MASK()")
will mask all the wells in the system.
This feature can be used to change in one go parameters like pipe
diameters or rest the input of all the elements of the same type.

2.3.5.8 Importing GAP models in an existing project

GAP allows to build and match entire production sub-systems independently and to then
combine them to Build the overall system model prior to doing the gas allocation. This section
explains how to save .GPP files for sub-systems and recall them later to assemble a complete
system model.

Saving a .GPP File

Once a sub-system model is set up (for example a platform in a multi-platform gathering
system), select all the items in this model by selecting the menu Edit / Select All Items:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 114 GAP

The model will then be selected (cyan circles will indicate the selected items):

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 115

Note that the section to export can be also selected manually using the cyan arrow selection
tool from the button toolbar. This allows to select sections of the system.

It is now possible to save the selected section of network as a GAP Partial file (.GPP) by
selecting the menu Edit / Selected Items / Extract to GAP partial fil (.GPP):

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 116 GAP

and then save the .GPP file:

GAP saves a .GPP file that contains all the data for the system elements below.

Recalling a .GPP File

In the destination model, it is possible to import the just saved GAP model by right-clicking on
the main screen of the GAP model and selecting the option to import the .GPP file:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 117

This will allow to import the already saved .GPP file into this system and connect it as
appropriate:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 118 GAP

In this manner, the entire system can be built up from sub-systems that have been
independently prepared and matched.
2.3.6 The Constraints Menu
This menu provides access to the constraints applied on the entire system or to the
constraints applied on each of the system equipment.

The excessive use of constraints within GAP is

discouraged. Constraints should never be used during the
matching phase of the model building process. Once a
system model has been successfully validated against actual
measured rates, the minimum number of constraints should

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 119

then be introduced to make selected system elements

behave as desired during the optimisation phase.

General constraints (as opposed to abandonment constraints) are displayed with two RED
arrows pointing towards the element that is constrained.

Abandonment constraints are displayed with two BLUE arrows pointing towards the element
that is constrained (NEW!!!).
2.3.6.1 System Constraints
The GAP system is defined as the total production from all separators. System constraints
can be used to model, for example, pipeline export capacity for a platform with several
separation trains.

GAP constraints are used to direct the Optimiser algorithm and should not be confused with
well limits used in prediction runs to shut in high GOR wells (for example).

In this screen one can enter the global constraints that apply to the system. These constraints
are independent of the constraints that can be applied to each item in the system.

To set the total system constraints such as maximum water, gas, liquid and oil throughput,
choose “System Constraints”.
The following screen appears:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 120 GAP

These parameters are used to define the maximum and minimum production levels for the
system, where appropriate. When left blank, the program will assume no constraint for a
particular variable.

The Unscheduled Production Deferment constraint enables to take into account the
effects on the production of any non-scheduled events. The influence of these events will be
taken into account statistically as an overall percentage of production.
Therefore, if an unscheduled production deferment value of 5% is specified in the system
constraints section, the entire field will only produce 95% of the total production calculated by
the solver. This deferment is applied to all average and cumulative rates, but not on the
instantaneous rates.
It is important to notice that this constraint, if used, will overwrite any downtime applied at well
level.

The excessive use of constraints within GAP is discouraged.

Constraints should never be used during the matching phase
of the model building process. Once a system model has
been successfully validated against actual measured rates,
the minimum number of constraints should then be
introduced to make selected system elements behave as
desired during the optimisation phase.

Field Tabs

Value Enter in this screen the value of the constraint to be set in any
element of the model
Binding Selects which constraints are binding or not. The optimiser will
(Yes/No) always try to honour all the constraints set in the model, however
when constraints are set to binding Yes the optimiser will iterate until
the constraints is honoured (provided it is feasible) whilst in the case
on NO binding if the constraint can not be achieved (because
physically infeasible) it will be neglected
Potential Enables to include the constraints in the potential calculation. Those
(Yes/No) constraints set to NO will not be considered in the Potential
calculation

Enter the levels of production for each item. Constraints should not be required in the matching
phase of the GAP processing.

Action Buttons

OK Use this button to leave the system constraints entry screen and
save all changes that have been made
Cancel Use this button to leave the system constraints entry screen and
ignore all changes that have been made

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 121

Report Use this button to produce a report of the data. Reports can be
written to a file, the Windows clipboard, the screen, or a hardcopy
device. See the Reports menu item for more information
Help Use this button to access this screen

2.3.6.2 Binding (Yes/No)

Binding (Yes/No)
Selects which constraints are binding or not. The optimiser will always try to honour all the
constraints set in the model, however when constraints are set to binding Yes the optimiser
will iterate until the constraints is honoured (provided it is feasible) whilst in the case on NO
binding if the constraint can not be achieved (because physically infeasible) it will be neglected

2.3.6.3 Edit Constraints Table

In GAP it is possible to set constraints on production or injection at every level of the system.
This option allows viewing, checking or editing the specific constraints of a group of selected
element items in a single edit session. When the option is invoked, a constraints screen will be
produced for the first equipment item in the selection list. This screen contains Next and
Previous buttons for navigation through the list. For each element, enter the required
constraints into the dialog.

This option provides a single table from which all the constraints in the system, as well as the
system constraints, can be viewed and edited.
An example of the dialog produced is as follows:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 122 GAP

The “Type” and “Sub Type” selection menus enable to filter the constraint tables as a function
of the type of element considered.
There are three screens that allow the user to enter the values for constraints, whether they
are binding or not and whether they should be included in the potential calculations or not.

When setting a constraint as Binding or Not Binding, the program

will in both cases try to honour the constraint, with the difference
that in the case of the binding constraint the program will iterate
until the constraint is honoured (if it is feasible), whilst in the
case of not binding constraint, if this cannot be respected, it will
be neglected.
In general constraints like maximum rate or also NO-CLOSE
Minimum Gas Injection Rate should be set as binding, because in
most cases these are feasible and we want the optimiser to try to
honour them.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 123

When any element of the system has been constrained, two

arrows pointing towards the element appear.
The arrows are red if the constraint is a "General" constraint
The arrows are blue if the constraint is a "Abandonment"
constraint (NEW!!!)

Field Tabs

Value Enter in this screen the value of the constraint to be set in any
element of the model
Binding Selects which constraints are binding or not. The optimiser will
(Yes/No) always try to honour all the constraints set in the model, however
when constraints are set to binding Yes the optimiser will iterate until
the constraints is honoured (provided it is feasible) whilst in the case
on NO binding if the constraint can not be achieved (because
physically infeasible) it will be neglected
Potential Enables to include the constraints in the potential calculation. Those
(Yes/No) constraints set to NO will not be considered in the Potential
calculation

Action Buttons:

OK Removes the dialogue and saves any changes made

Cancel Removes the dialogue and ignores any changes made

Help Displays this screen

2.3.6.4 Edit Abandonment Constraints Table

This option allows viewing, checking or editing the specific abandonment constraints of a
group of selected element items in a single edit session.

(NEW!!!) Abandonment constraints are displayed with two BLUE arrows pointing towards the
element that has the constraint.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 124 GAP

2.4 Describing the PVT

The following paragraphs summarise the steps to be taken in setting up the PVT options in
GAP based on the objectives and amount of PVT information available.
Under the system Options/Method four main options are available to model the fluid PVT:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 125

Black oil Black oil model is used for the calculation

Tracking This method is based on a combination of black oil model and full
compositional model (equation of state or EOS):
Black oil model is used for the main pressure drop
calculations
The EOS is then used as a post calculation to determine the
composition in any part of the system by performing
compositional blends and flashes whenever necessary.
If a black oil reservoir simulator (like for example MBAL), the
compositional tracking provides with the unique capability to
recombined one initial composition in order to match the GOR of the
fluid produced
Fully This method allows to run all the calculations using an equation of
Compositional state, which gives the compositions as well as the fluid PVT
properties in any point of the network.
NEW!!! This option allows also to perform Lumping/Delumping of an
initial EOS, which empowers the user with the possibility to decide if
running the calculations using an extended composition, or a using a
composition with a reduced number of components (lumped)
Black Oil To speed-up calculations, the Black Oil Lumping/Delumping method
Compositional tracks the composition of the fluids throughout the network at each
Lumping/ iteration of the solver, but performs pipeline, compressor, pump,
Delumping NEW!!! choke, ... calculations using the Black Oil PVT correlations based on
the black oil standard condition properties calculated by the equation

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 126 GAP

of state. This options makes sure that the black oil model is at any
point in time consistent with the EOS.
Black Oil Lumping/Delumping may use the full or the lumped
compositions

In the case where Tracking or Fully Compositional or Black Oil Compositional Lumping/
Delumping is selected, as shown below, then an Equation of State will be required to be set
up in order to either track the compositions in the system or get the PVT directly from the
EOS.

This section describes more in detail the various options available in GAP for both black oil
and compositional modelling.

IMPORTANT NOTE:
When modeling gas lifted systems (or any artificial lift systems where a
hydrocarbon fluid is mixed to the main fluid) in compositional mode, it is strongly
recommended to use the compositional Tracking mode.
This is because when using Fully Compositional or Black Oil Compositional Lumping/
Delumping modes, a full Equation of State model is used to determine the fluid
composition and PVT properties. The assumption the EOS model takes is that if two
fluids are blended, immediate and perfect mixing occurs and a new fluid is generated.
This means that after the mixing it is not possible to physically differentiate between the
gas lift gas and the reservoir fluid and separate the gas lift gas from the reservoir fluid,
hence it is not possible to have a consistent reporting of the gas lift injected throughout
the network, nor to use the gas lift gas rate as a constraint.
Compositional Tracking is recommended for gas lifted systems, as it is based on the
black oil assumption that the various phases are kept separate throughout the system,
hence it is possible to determine and report consistently the amount of gas lift gas at any
point in the system and use it for constraint purpose.
The black oil assumption behind the Tracking model, though considering separation of
the various phases, has been found to be quite reliable, also related to the physical fact
that at the relatively low pressure and temperature conditions occurring in pipeline
networks mixing of fluids becomes possibly unlikely.

2.4.1 Black Oil

If the PVT model model is set to “Black Oil” the PVT properties used in the pressure drop
calculations will be determined with a Black Oil model.

The term “Black Oil” refers to a PVT model that considers the fluid to be (when below
saturation conditions) split between a Liquid and a Gas (2 Phases) in equilibrium. The
basic implicit assumption is that the liquid and the gas are characterised by a fixed
composition, no matter the pressure and temperature conditions.
Correlations are used to calculate the Bo, Bubble Point, Gas Oil Ratio etc from
measurements at surface (API gravity, gas gravity etc). This definition can be extended
to gases and condensates where correlations can be used to get the CGR, dew point

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 127

and other properties. Hence the existence of “Black Oil” PVT models for condensates.

In the MBAL and PROSPER parts of the manual, the black oil models have been described in
more detail. This description includes:
Entry of basic Black Oil PVT data
Matching of lab data to correlations
Selecting the best correlation
Discussion on the use of tables

The origin of the black oil properties used by GAP to perform the network calculations
depends on the way the model is run:

When running the model in Solve Network mode, the black oil properties used by
GAP are the ones present in the well IPR input section and that were imported from
PROSPER with an IPR generation 390 :

When running the model in Prediction mode, instead, the PVT black oil properties of
the fluid produced from each well will be obtained at every time step from the
reservoir model (MBAL or an external simulator). The PVT information transferred
from PROSPER and present in the IPR screen of the well models in GAP will be
overwritten, along with the reservoir pressure and possible PI (if a simulation model
is used for instance).

GAP will then feed this PVT information to its internal PVT model (defined in Default Settings
82 ), thus being able to calculate all the PVT properties necessary when calculating pressure

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 128 GAP

drops in the system.

When two or more fluids are present in the system, GAP will mix the fluids at every joint
where they meet in order to get the parameters for the fluid that results from the mixing. The
gravities, GORs and CGRs of the resulting fluid will be calculated by means of a mass
balance (mass of blending fluids = mass of resulting stream).

At every joint where different fluids mix, a new fluid model will be generated based on
the properties and volumes of the original fluids. This new description will then be
used for calculations downstream of this joint.

2.4.2 Compositional Options

In GAP three main compositional PVT model options are available, which allow to determine
the fluid composition everywhere in the system and its variation with changing reservoir
conditions:

Tracking click here 142

Fully Compositional click here 143

Black Oil Compositional click here 144

Lumping/Delumping

Details about each PVT model option are reported in the next few sections (click on the above
links to access them).
IMPORTANT NOTE:
When modeling gas lifted systems (or any artificial lift systems where a
hydrocarbon fluid is mixed to the main fluid) in compositional mode, it is strongly
recommended to use the compositional Tracking mode.
This is because when using Fully Compositional or Black Oil Compositional modes, a full
Equation of State model is used to determine the fluid composition and PVT properties.
The assumption the EOS model takes is that if two fluids are blended, immediate and
perfect mixing occurs and a new fluid is generated. This means that after the mixing it is
not possible to physically differentiate between the gas lift gas and the reservoir fluid
and separate the gas lift gas from the reservoir fluid, hence it is not possible to have a
consistent reporting of the gas lift injected throughout the network, nor to use the gas lift
gas rate as a constraint.
Compositional Tracking is recommended for gas lifted systems, as it is based on the
black oil assumption that the various phases are kept separate throughout the system,
hence it is possible to determine and report consistently the amount of gas lift gas at any
point in the system and use it for constraint purpose.
The black oil assumption behind the Tracking model, though considering separation of
the various phases, has been found to be quite reliable, also related to the physical fact
that at the relatively low pressure and temperature conditions occurring in pipeline

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 129

networks mixing of fluids becomes possibly unlikely.

2.4.2.1 EoS Model Setup
When any of the three compositional options (Fully compositional, Tracking and Black Oil
Compositional Lumping/Delumping) is selected, the setup of the model is exactly the same.
The main difference among Tracking, Fully Compositional and Black Oil Compositional
Lumping/Delumping is the way the EOS model is used (see sections for each option).
Results can be viewed in exactly the same way too.

Once any of the compositional options have been selected from the System options menu, the
EOS Model Setup will be displayed.

This allows to access a configuration section, where the EOS options can be selected:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 130 GAP

These options should reflect the EOS available for the fluid
(from PVTP for example) and the process (path) the fluid
follows to standard conditions (which will affect the
volumes and quality of the resulting fluid).

In this section various families of options allow to decide how to run the calculations:

General
In this field it is possible to decide which EOS model to select, as well as the calculation
engines.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 131

EOS Model The choice is between the two industry-standard cubic

EOS models: Peng-Robinson and Soave-Redlich-Kwong
Optimisation Mode This defines how the calculations are run. Our PVT
experts have been working on ways to speed up the
calculation of properties from an EOS model. Speed is
one of the main issues with fully compositional models
and the options in this field will define the speed of
calculations. The objective of this option is to speed up
the calculations without penalising the accuracy the
results. The Medium mode is the fastest (up to 80 times)
and also default and this should be selected unless any
problems are detected in the calculations
Optimise Repeat When repetitive calculations are performed, this option
Calculations can be selected to reduce the number of compositional
calculations performed (increase of speed by up to 40
times). This option is particularly useful when running with
Black Oil Compositional Lumping/Delumping: the
determination of the equivalent black oil model is done
only when the composition changes. If the composition
does not change, that means that the black oil properties
remain indeed the same, hence it is not required to use
the EOS to re-calculate the black oil properties

Volume Shift
In this field it is possible to decide if to apply the Volume Shift correction or not to the EOS.
Note that if Lumping/Delumping is enabled, it is possible to enable/disable the Volume Shift in
both the full and the lumped compositions:

If no Lumping is enabled, the only Full composition volume shift option is available.

Lumping NEW!!!
This option allows to enable working with Lumping/Delumping of composition.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 132 GAP

Allow Lumping If No is selected, no Lumping/Delumping is allowed,

which means that each fluid in the system is defined by
one EOS composition. Of course the composition can
vary depending on the reservoir conditions. This option is
selected whenever a Fully Compositional calculation is
performed using a unique fluid PVT definition
If Yes is selected, the Lumping/Delumping options is
enabled, which means that each fluid in the system can
be characterised by two equivalent EOS compositions, a
full (high number of components) and a lumped (reduced
number of components) and the user can decide which
one to use for the calculations and to pass from one to
the other consistently (ref. Lumping/Delumping 6 )
Mode This option defines which composition is used in the
network calculations
Use Full Comp
The full composition is used for the calculations
Use Lumped Comp
The lumped composition is used in the network
calculations.
This option defines also which composition is run in the
MBAL models connected in the case that Lumping/
Delumping is enabled in the MBAL models too
Master Rule This field allows to select the Master Rule used to
perform Lumping/Delumping (ref. Lumping/Delumping 6 ).
the Master Rule can be created or imported from PVTP
and contains the logic followed to pass from an extended
compositon to a lumped one (lumping) and viceversa
(delumping). The Master Rule is the logic applied to all
the network (included any MBAL model connected)
More Lumping This section defines the Lumping Rule used in the whole
GAP model. See paragraph below 135 for further details

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 133

Reference Data for Standard Conditions

This section defines the Reference Standard Temperature and Pressure used to express the
flow rates.
It is important to remark that this option affects only the standard temperature and pressure
used to express the liquid rates. As far as the gas rates are concerned, the standard
conditions are by definition defined by the particular Unit System.
For example, if the Unit System is Oilfield, the gas rates are expressed in Scf or MMscf
(where "S" indicates standard volumes), which are by definition at 60 deg F and 0 psig.
Set as Default allows to set the entered conditions as program default.

Blending
This section defines the rules followed by the program when two or more fluids compositions
mix.

Match Component The program will mix only the properties of

Components Name Only components that have the same name. When suing
this option the user has to make sure that the
by mixing compositions have been defined with the
same number of components and same names
Component The program will mix only the properties of
Name or components that have the same name or similar
Properties properties (Tc, Pc, etc.)
Use Number If Yes is selected, the program will try and blend
of components that correspond to the same
component number. If components in two blending
Components compositions have different names, these will be
as key blended.
If No is selected, if components in two blending
compositions have different names, the
components will not be blended, but they will be
carried on as separate components. The sketch
below shows the concept:
"No" is selected:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 134 GAP

This option allows to even use compositions with

different number of components. If that is so, each
new set of pseudo component will be carried
along.

Phase Check
This section allows to decide the method used for the phase detection. This option should not
be modified.

Path to Surface and Recycle

This field defines the path followed by the fluid down to standard conditions. When expressing
rates, in fact, they are conventionally defined at standard conditions.
However, depending on the path followed, more or less gas/oil can be reported. In general the
path to STD used in the model should be consistent with the path used in the field to meter the
phase rates.

Flash Straight Means that the fluid is flashed straight to STD

to Stock Tank
Use Separator Means that the fluid is flashed through a series of separators

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 135

Train down to STD

Use K Values Option is an addition to the compositional modeling that
allows modeling the process based on K values (equilibrium
ratios). This can allow process calculations from systems
more complex than separation to be represented as
“Pseudo” separators and can be obtained from process
simulators. Note that the use of K values is discouraged by
the fact that they depend on the fluid composiiton: if that
changes, the k values may not be representative anymore,
therefore incorrect answers may be obtained

Target GOR Method

The objective of the Target GOR is to recombine and original fluid in order to reproduce the
produced GOR. In other words the objective is to determine the evolution of the fluid
composition as the GOR changes.
To achieve that, the program determines a gas and a liquid from the original composition and
then it recombines them in order to reproduce the actual producing GOR.
This entry option defines the source of oil and gas used to recombine the fluid.

Use Separator The oil and gas come from flashing the fluid through the
Fluids entered separator train. This option is the default as it works
in all cases
Use Fluid The oil and gas come from flashing the fluid to a few psi
from PSAT below the saturation pressure. It should be noted that this
restricts any target that can be found to the RS of the oil
below PSAT and the GOR of the equivalent gas. Although
more restricted, this mixture better reflects the case of an oil
entraining gas cap gas etc. The limits on the GOR target are
displayed as the min and max GOR. A reservoir or layer
temperature is required for this method. The PSAT is found
at the entered temperature

2.4.2.1.1 More Lumping

NEW!!!
The More Lumping button allows to access the Lump Option Dialog, where the details of the
Lumping Rule are present and can be edited, as well as the Lumping Rule itself can be
defined.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 136 GAP

The Lump Options available are:

Lump Rules
This section allows to select the Master Rule used throughout the GAP model.

Lumping Rules
This contains a table with the list of lumping Rules imported in the GAP model.
Selecting Select it is possible to Import/Export, view or edit the Lumping Rule:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 137

In the Lumping Rules Summary Dialog section the lumps are described (for example, in the
figure above the first lump is N2C1, which is given by the sum of N2 and C1), giving the
correspondence between the lumped and the full composition.
At the top right of the screen a BIC Multiplier is reported, This is a multiplier to the Bi
coefficients of the lumped composition, which is a methodology available to make sure that the
lumped composition reproduces the same saturation pressure as the full composition.
The Setup button allows to define the logic behind each lump, for example:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 138 GAP

The remaining options are self-explanatory.

General
This section allow to select the options for Lumping/Delumping.
Allow Lumping and Mode are the same as reported in the main EOS Setup section ( see
above 131 ). As far as the other options are concerned:

Seps It is possible to perform Lumping/Delumping using gas

and oil obtained by flashing the fluid straight to Stock
Tank or through separator stages
Use Full One of the main reasons why surface and process
Composition for models need to have a large number of components is
Enthalpies that thermal calculations (heat capacities, enthalpies)
require a very detailed composition in order to be
accurate.
This option forces the program to use the full composition
every time enthalpies need to be calculated, and should
always be selected

DeLumping
This section allows to define the techniques used to Delump a lumped composition.

DeLump Method This option defines the method used to determine a full
composition from a lumped one
Three main options are available:
Use DeLump This option uses the Lumping Rule to
Rule and delump the lumped composition, along

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 139

Target GOR with the Target GOR method to make

sure to reproduce the lumped
composition's GOR. This option is
default and also recommended
Use Target This option makes sure that the full
GOR Only composition obtained matched the GOR
of the lumped composition
Use DeLump Only the Lumping Rule is applied
Rule Only
Hold C1 Group in This option makes sure that the C1 amount is preserved
DeLumping when passing from the de-lumped to the lumped
composition. This is useful to quality check

Lumping
This section allows to define the techniques used to Lump a full composition.

Lump Method This option defines the method to determine the lumped
composition from the full. The options are the same as in
the DeLump Method options

2.4.2.2 Setting up a Compositional model

The process of building a GAP model when any of the compositional options is enabled (PVT
model set to Tracking or Fully Compositional or Black Oil Compositional Lumping/Delumping)
is always the same.

The following steps illustrate how to set up the model to use an EOS:

1. Enable the desired PVT Model from the Options | Method entry screen.

2. Compositions need to be entered at the well level.

Note that it is also possible to perform a batch import of compositions by using the
menu Edit / Import Compositions ( related topic 111 ).

To do it on a well-by-well basis, go to the well data input screen and navigate to the
composition tab. In this screen total fluid compositions are entered for the entire well
production (single-layer case) or for each valid layer of a multi-layer case.
Select the layer for which one wishes to enter a composition (if applicable) and press
the Composition button. Compositional information can be entered into the resulting
screen by hand, imported from a PROSPER .PRP file, or pasted from a spreadsheet
application (e.g. Excel). In this screen one may also perform phase envelope
calculations and plotting.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 140 GAP

When the composition has been entered, press OK. The colour of the Composition
button on the well composition entry screen will tell if the composition entered is valid.
Repeat this for all wells.

3. For gas lifted wells, one must ensure that the gaslight source has an associated
composition. This can be determined from the Well Gas lift Input screen: the colour of
the composition button will indicate whether there is a valid composition or not. If there

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 141

is not, access the Gas Injection Source table from this screen and enter a composition
from here.

4. (Prediction only). If there is gas voidage replacement / injection, then the composition
of this needs to be specified. If there is no associated gas injection system, then the
composition of the injected gas can be entered from the Prediction Forecast Set-up
screen or from the Tank Injection Entry screen.

5. If there is an associated gas injection system then the injection source has to be
specified per injection manifold of the injection system. Go to the gas injection system
and enter the injection source from the Injection Manifold Injection Source screen. In
either case the injection source must be selected from the list of gas injection sources
maintained with the production system.

During the prediction run the wells will take the fluid compositions from the tanks, provided
these have been set up in the MBAL model. If one reloads a snapshot following a prediction
run the well compositions will lbe filled in accordingly.

When a reservoir model (MBAL or an external simulator) is linked to

GAP, the composition comes from the reservoir model.
If the reservoir model is not compositional (for example, black oil),
GAP will use the composition entered in the well IPR section and will
recombine it in order to match the fluid properties (GOR) coming
from the reservoir model.
This means that GAP is able to determine the composition even if
the reservoir simulator is not.

If Lumping/Delumping is selected in the EOS Model Setup options, then at

step 2. it is possible to import a .PRP containing both the lumped and the
full compositions (see figure below). The Options will then decide which of
the two to use for the calculation and where to perform the lumping/
delumping.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 142 GAP

2.4.2.3 Tracking
If Tracking is selected as PVT model option, GAP uses the black-oil model in its calculations,
and an EOS composition is carried along and used to determine (track) fluid compositions
from the well bore through the surface network system and the composition of oil and gas
whenever a separation process occurs (for example, before a pump or after a separator) by
means of flash calculations.
The compositional tracking features allow taking advantage of the speed of the Black
Oil calculations and getting the resulting composition of the fluid at every node.
Provided that the pressure drops will not be affected significantly by the fact that the
EOS is not used directly for the PVT properties, then this method can yield very good
results without compromising on speed.

In a stand-alone (non-predictive) mode, the compositions are entered at the well level (well
IPR input area). In a prediction run (see related chapter 453 ), GAP requires that compositions
have been set up in the tank MBAL models.

Compositions are tracked during the Solve Network or during one prediction time step
process:
GAP calculates fluid rates and specific gravities referred to surface conditions
throughout the system.
From these mass flow rates, and hence mole rates, can be evaluated.
Compositions at manifolds are then found by a simple combination of molar quantities
of the input stream compositions.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 143

By working from the bottom (well) level up, the composition of the fluid at the
separator can be deduced
If the fluid GOR changes along the time (for example, during a prediction, if the
reservoir pressure goes below the bubble point), the program will recombine the initial
composition entered in the well IPR section in order to match the fluid GOR. This
recombination technique is called Target GOR.

Gas injection at wells or in injection systems is handled in the same way. Knockout of gas at
joints is achieved by flashing the fluid to the manifold operating pressure and temperature, and
then removing the specified number of moles.

At the beginning of any calculation GAP will inform of the success of the tracking: the tracking
will fail if there are any missing compositions or in the unlikely event of a calculation failing.

When running the model as tracking, it is possible to set in the EOS Model Setup
options ( see above 129 ) if to run with the composition as it is, or if to perform
Lumping/Delumping.
This allows to decide if the composition to track is the full or the lumped one.

IMPORTANT NOTE:
When modeling gas lifted systems (or any artificial lift systems where a
hydrocarbon fluid is mixed to the main fluid) in compositional mode, it is strongly
recommended to use the compositional Tracking mode.
This is because when using Fully Compositional or Black Oil Compositional modes, a full
Equation of State model is used to determine the fluid composition and PVT properties.
The assumption the EOS model takes is that if two fluids are blended, immediate and
perfect mixing occurs and a new fluid is generated. This means that after the mixing it is
not possible to physically differentiate between the gas lift gas and the reservoir fluid
and separate the gas lift gas from the reservoir fluid, hence it is not possible to have a
consistent reporting of the gas lift injected throughout the network, nor to use the gas lift
gas rate as a constraint.
Compositional Tracking is recommended for gas lifted systems, as it is based on the
black oil assumption that the various phases are kept separate throughout the system,
hence it is possible to determine and report consistently the amount of gas lift gas at any
point in the system and use it for constraint purpose.
The black oil assumption behind the Tracking model, though considering separation of
the various phases, has been found to be quite reliable, also related to the physical fact
that at the relatively low pressure and temperature conditions occurring in pipeline
networks mixing of fluids becomes possibly unlikely.
2.4.2.4 Fully Compositional
If the PVT model is set to Fully Compositional, GAP will use an EOS model to determine the
fluid PVT properties used in the network pressure drop calculations.
At each network node the program will perform a full flash calculation using the EOS
composition to determine the liquid and vapour in equilibrium and their properties (FVFs,

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 144 GAP

densities, viscosities, phase split). When two different fluid streams blend, GAP will perform
mass balance (in molar basis) to determine the composition of the resulting fluid.
Whenever there is a phase separation (before pumps or compressors, inline separators, main
separators, etc.) the flash calculation allows to determine the compositions of oil and gas and
the flow rates.
When running Fully Compositional, GAP internally works in molar basis. As the rates are
conventionally reported in volumetric (at standard conditions) basis, the programs converts
every time from molar rates to volumetric rates.
The flow rates reported by the program at any point in the network correspond by
definition to volumetric rate expressed at Standard Conditions (STD, by default 60
deg F, 0 psig, but these conditions can be modified in the main program Options) and
not in in-situ conditions.
For example, if oil rate = 500 STB/day, that means: taking the whole fluid to STD,
the volume of oil produced resulting is 500 STB/d

When running the model as fully compositional, it is possible to set in the EOS Model
Setup options ( see above 129 ) if to run with the composition as it is, or if to perform
Lumping/Delumping.
This means that to run compositional with Lumping/Delumping (NEW!!!) one has to
simply switch on the option Lumping.

2.4.2.5 Black Oil Compositional Lumping/Delumping

NEW!!!
If Black Oil Compositional Lumping/Delumping is selected as PVT model option, GAP uses the
black-oil model for its calculations, and an EOS composition is carried along and used to
determine (track) fluid compositions from the well bore through the surface network system
and the composition of oil and gas whenever a separation process occurs (for example,
before a pump or after a separator) by means of flash calculations.

The difference with Tracking is that in Tracking the EoS originally entered in the well IPR
section is recombined in order to match the black oil GOR and the black oil properties where
fixed by the well IPR section (in in Solve Network calculations) or by the reservoir model.

In the case of Black Oil Compositional Lumping/Delumping, instead, the EOS is used in a full
compositional calculation, however, whenever a pressure drop calculation is performed, the
program determines a black oil model from the EOS and uses the black oil model for the
calculation.
This option ensures that the black oil model is always consistent with the EOS and is in
general the recommended option to adopt when accurate results and at the same time quick
run times are required.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 145

The Black Oil Compositional Lumping/Delumping is able to model fluids where

the EOS does not give accurate results, like for example heavy oils, where
black oil correlations for viscosity are more reliable than the standard LBC
correlation used when running composition.

When running the model as Black Oil Compositional Lumping/Delumping, it is possible

to set in the EOS Model Setup options ( see above 129 ) if to run with the composition
as it is, or if to use Lumping/Delumping.
This allows to decide if the composition to use along with the black oil is the full or the
lumped one. As the model is very fast, the Full Composition can be selected.

2.4.2.6 Viewing Compositional Results

Whenever running the model in Tracking or Black Oil Compositional Lumping/Delumping or
Fully Compositional, it is possible to view the composition everywhere in the GAP network for
any calculation performed.

Compositions for all nodes can be viewed from the Solve Network or the Prediction results as
required.

When inspecting the Solve Network results, the fly-over allows to view the compositional
results:

Note that to view the composition results in the fly-over, this has to be enabled in the menu

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 146 GAP

View / Select Info Displayed.

Alternatively, results can be viewed in any of the Results screens.

It is also possible to view the full table of composition by going to the results screen of the
node in question, scrolling to the right end of the table, and clicking on the View Composition
button for the desired result:

The composition data entry screen will be displayed with the composition for that node, at the
network-solve / time step investigated.
The View Composition screen is common to all the results screens in IPM and allows to:
view the composition
export the composition (for example for further analysis in PVTP or PROSPER)
and have further utilities like Generate (which reproduces a CCE experiment), Phase
Envelope, Target GOR (to determine how the composition varies with changing GOR),
Properties (straight flash to Standard conditions using the Separator Information

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 147

When Lumping/Delumping is performed, in the View Composition screen it is possible to view

one composition or the other by using the View toggle:

If the Full composition is used for the calculation, only the Full results are re-
calculated. Therefore to view the Lumped composition, use the Lump button.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 148 GAP

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 149

2.5 Equipment Data

After completing the system drawing, the unique characteristics of each element must be
entered.
This and the following chapter describe how to enter data to describe the properties of each
of the system elements.

In this chapter main equipment data entry / results display screen format
is described. This is the place from where all equipment data can be
entered and results of calculations for that equipment are stored.
This is followed with a detailed description of the input data that is
required for a full description of a well model in GAP.
Finally, the results screens that apply to all item types will be described.

2.5.1 Introduction
This chapter explains how to describe the different elements making up a GAP model.

Description is provided on the use of:

Equipment data Entry in general 149

Wells 156
Separators 230
Joints 247
Pipelines 251
Tanks 304 (Reservoirs)
Flares and Vents 314
Pumps 315
Compressors 326
Sources/Sinks 341
Inline elements 348
Inflow elements 378
Groups 379
Flowsheets 384

These elements can be found on the main toolbar.

2.5.2 Equipment Data Entry Screen Format

The main data entry screen is the Summary Screen, a master section from which all
equipment data can be entered.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 150 GAP

Enter the screen by double-clicking the left-hand mouse button on any equipment icon on the
GAP drawing. This will take us to a screen that allows us data entry / results display for that
particular well.

The input screen for all the equipment has the same general
format, though the data entry headings/ formats vary from one to
the other.

The following diagram shows the data entry screen for a well.

The screen consists of three parts:

The Navigator (Equipment List)

The Section Buttons
The Action Buttons

2.5.2.1 The Navigator - Equipment list

On the right-hand side of the screen below is a list of the equipment making up the GAP
network.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 151

The equipment in the screen can be listed in four different ways, simply right clicking on the
list:
Separator down sort
Tank up sort
Alphabetical sort by equipment label
Sort by equipment type

As in the example above, we have used “Equipment Type Sort”.

The default is “Separator down Sort” i.e. hierarchically going from the separators
down to the wells and tanks.
The user may change the way the equipment is sorted in the list by clicking
the right-hand mouse button in the window to produce the relevant menu.

Equipment is accompanied by a tick or a cross indicating the

validity of the data associated with the item.
When first entering the screen, the piece of equipment selected

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 152 GAP

is highlighted in the system window .

2.5.2.2 Section Buttons

For each piece of equipment the data is sub-divided into these three sections.

Summary Master section from which one can access all the others
Input Accesses all the sections where data can be entered for
the particular element (for example: IPR, VLP, etc. for a
well)
Results Section where the calculations results are reported
Section buttons Each section can be accessed by means of the
correspondent button at the bottom of the screen.

2.5.2.2.1 Summary
The Summary contains information about each element of the network (for example, a well, a
joint, etc.).

Label Name that appears in the GAP main screen (network drawing)
Name Extended name
Mask Options to disable the element
Comments Comments on each element can be entered
Data Summary Section containing the links to all the input screens. The number and type
of sections vary depending on the element.

Other sections vary depending on the element in consideration.

2.5.2.2.2 Input Button

Clicking the Input button takes us to the input data screens as shown below.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 153

On this screen, it is possible to see various tabs, where the input data is entered. The number
and type of available tabs depends on the equipment type.
For example, in the case of a well, the input data includes the inflow and outflow data, along
with constraints and any tank connections etc.

When one of these tabs / buttons is selected, a child screen appears where relevant data can
be entered.

2.5.2.2.3 Results Button

Clicking on the results button display the calculation results for the specific equipment as
shown below

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 154 GAP

There are two tabs available for results buttons, one for each calculation type available in
GAP:

Network Solver Tab reporting the results of the latest Solve Network calculation
Results performed
Prediction Results Tab reporting the results of the latest Prediction calculation
performed

2.5.2.3 Action Buttons

On the screens shown above one can also find a set of buttons that perform various actions,
like Report, OK, Cancel etc.

The buttons are what are referred to as action buttons in this manual. There are action
buttons at every input data screen like the summary screen, various input screens and the
results screen.

The buttons that are displayed/ active on a screen depend on the equipment type and the

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 155

screen. These are described in detail on all screens description for all equipments. Some of
the main buttons are described below.

Run In the case of a well, this opens a link to Petroleum Experts PROSPER
PROSPER / MBAL program, to allow the setting up of PROSPER well models, the
generation of performance curves, VLP, and IPR. For a tank, this opens
a link to MBAL to allow the setting up of tank models
OK Removes the dialog screen, saving all changes. This includes changes
made in screens that have subsequently left by tabbing to another
screen, or in wells that have been left by clicking on the well list box
Cancel Removes the dialog, ignoring all changes. If any changes have been
made, a Confirmation Message will appear
Help Displays the help screen appropriate to the currently displayed screen or
tabbed screen
Revert This replaces the data of the current screen or tabbed screen with the
data that was current when the screen was entered
Validate Checks the data on the current screen or tabbed screen for validity. This
takes into account the Prediction mode or whether or not the system is
an injection system. If the data is not valid, the Validation Dialog will
appear with diagnostic messages
Calculate Available for well, compressor and pump elements when Summary and
Input Section buttons are selected.
For wells:
If selected from the Summary screen, this allows to perform a
VLP/IPR calculations
If selected from the Input screen, this allows to estimate the liquid
rate given the FBHP or viceversa
For compressors and pumps:
The Calculate button is accessible from the Input screen and
allows to perform a calculation of the compressor/pump dP, head,
power, etc. give the rate, PVT and inlet conditions.
Plot Will produce a plot screen appropriate to the screen or tabbed screen
being displayed (for example, an IPR plot for the IPR input screen). This
is greyed out when there is no suitable plot
Report Enters the GAP Reporting System. The report produced will depend on
the currently displayed screen or tabbed screen (for example, an IPR
report for the IPR input screen)
Next (selected) These buttons can be used to navigate through the equipment list. Next
Previous (selected) will move to the next piece of equipment in the equipment list. Previous
will move to the previous piece of equipment in the list. If items are
selected, these buttons will navigate between selected items
Mark These buttons allow items to be marked for reference purposes during
Mark All an editing session (for example, to indicate to the user that a well
Unmark All performance curve has been regenerated). Marked items appear with
their status (tick or cross) displayed in reverse v

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 156 GAP

2.5.3 Wells

The modeling of the wells is the first part of building an accurate GAP field model.
The rest of this chapter is devoted to a description of the data required for a complete well
model in GAP.

The data required for a well model in GAP model description

depends on the mode in which GAP is running and the well
model selection by user as described in the following sections.

Like any other equipment, well data entry screens can be accessed by

Double-clicking the left-hand mouse button on a well icon on the main GAP drawing, or

Clicking on the appropriate well icon in the equipment list of the main data entry screen
of any element on the network.

On the well data entry / results screens, there are three sections (as explained in the details
of format for equipment in the previous section). These are listed below:

Summary Screen This allows the selection of well-model and well types, and also gives
the status of various aspects of the well-input data. See the following
section
Input Screen Includes tabbed screens for the following input fields:
Control
- dP Control
- Artificial Lift control.
The type of artificial lift control available will be depending on the
well artificial lift method considered, as for example: Gas Lift
Control (For gas lifted wells only) and ESP Control (For ESP
Wells only)
IPR Input
VLP Input
PC Data Input (For manual entry / generation of PC data for
wells where PC model has been selected.)
Constraints
- General
- Abandonment
Downtime
Coning
Tank Connections

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 157

Production Data (Decline Curve prediction only)

Schedule (Only if Prediction Selected in Main Option)
Results Screen Contains the following fields:
Network Solver Results.
Prediction Results

2.5.3.1 Well Summary Screen

This screen is accessed by clicking on the Summary button of the well data entry screen.

Input Fields:

Label Maximum of 18 characters allowed. This defaults to the name supplied in

the label dialogue box when the well icon was initially added to the system.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 158 GAP

If blank, enter a short name or abbreviation to identify the icon on the

screen
Name Maximum of 32 characters allowed. Use this field to enter a full or
descriptive name, if any, for the well. This name will appear in the reports
generated by the allocation calculations
Mask This option allows a well to be added or omitted from the network
database and consequently the calculations to establish a total system
response.
When the well is not to be taken into account in the system calculations,
two options are available:

Mask (i.e. An 'X' over the well icon indicates that this well has been
excluded from the system) where the well is excluded of the
system but will be recalled during prediction if an unmask event
appears in the well schedule
Disable (i.e. A double ‘X’ over the well icon indicates that this well has been
excluded from the system) where the well will be excluded from
the system whatever events are included in the well schedule

Comments Enter any string of comments to give more detailed information about the
well (for example, date shut-in, fractured, etc.)
Well Type Specifies the type of well. This should be the first setting to make when
creating a well, as the data required in the input screens depends on the
well type.
These options are available:

Gas Injector
Gas Producer
Liquid Injector (NEW!!!)
Oil Producer (Diluent Injection)
Oil Producer (ESP Lifted)
Oil Producer (Gas Lifted)
Oil Producer (HSP Lifted)
Oil Producer (Jet Pump Lifted)
Oil Producer (No Lift)
Oil Producer (PCP Lifted)
Retrograde Condensate Producer
Water injector
Water producer

SWAG wells can be modeled using liquid injector or gas

injector well types. GAP handles simultaneously injection of
gas and water.

(NEW!!!) The Liquid Injector well type can be used to model

injection of any liquid, like for example polymer or NGL.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 159

PROSPER GAP can work with PROSPER .ANL or .OUT files. If a PROSPER .OUT or
File .ANL file for this well is available, the file name should be specified here.
When GAP accesses PROSPER, the program will automatically open the
relevant file
Model Select one of the following:

VLP / IPR Well rates will be calculated based on the intersection

Intersection of VLP / IPR curves
PC Interpolation Well rates will be calculated based on a Performance
Curve (PC), which is the curve representing the
relationship rate vs tubing head pressure (or, more in
general, pressure downstream the well, as defined in
the well model).
This option interpolates between the points of the PC. If
this option is selected, The PC Generation selection will
be active.
NEW!!! The PC interpolation method allows to describe
the PC by means of up to 20 points
Outflow Only – VLP The well icon is only used to store the VLP curves that
need to be pre-generated. An associated Inflow Icon
will then provide the IPR in order to have a complete
well model. Equipment set between the Well icon and
the Inflow icon will be used to dynamically correct the
IPR for pressure drop between the IPR and the VLP
depths
Outflow Only – The well icon will not now store any lift curves. When a
PROSPER pressure drop calculation is required, GAP can
calculate it dynamically using the equipment set in the
PROSPER on line section. Please refer to the following
sections for details

The outflow only models for well modeling have been introduced
from GAP v5.0 onwards. They increase greatly the capabilities of
GAP in terms of modeling smart well completions and multilayer
systems (an example of multilayer model 743 can be found in the
Examples Guide section)

Rate Model Rates can be defined in terms of volumes (at standard conditions) or mass.
(only when Defining the rates in terms of mass has got the great benefit of
compositional making the rates (hence the VLPs) process independent. This is
model is because volumetric rates at standard depend on the process used
enabled) to analyse the fluid, whilst mass is invariant, therefore does not
depend on the process used. This option is particularly useful
when coupling models having different reference paths to
standard: using the mass one does not have to re-generate IPRs

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 160 GAP

and VLPs if the process changes.

When This option allows to lump/delump the composition entering the system
Composition through the wells
changes (only
when
compositional
model with
lumping/
delumping is
enabled)
Data In addition to the selections discussed above, the well summary screen
Summary contains an input data summary area.
Area

This gives details on the status of various aspects of the well-input data. It
consists of various fields that correspond to different areas of well-input
data.
These screens have the following colour code:

Red if the data is invalid or missing

Green if the data are valid
Cyan indicates that information have been
entered (e.g. a well constraint or dP
control setting)

These are coloured

These are coloured
Some icons may also be coloured , which

The icons that appear in this area are dependent on well

model and Prediction Type (None / Material Balance /
Decline Curve) selection.

For the various fields, the following Status might be displayed:

Tank Connections (Valid/Invalid)

IPR Input Data (Valid/Invalid)
VLP Input Data (Valid/Invalid)

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 161

Constraints Data (None/Some/Invalid)

Controls (Set/Not Set)
Pump Control (Artificially lifted wells only) (Set/ Not Set / Not
Appl.)
Performance Curve Data (Only for PC well model) (Valid/
Invalid)
Gas Lift Control (Gas Lifted wells only)(Source name is
displayed)
Downtime (Set / None)
Coning (Set / None)
Scheduling (Set / None)

By clicking on any of these fields, one can access the input data for the
field.

2.5.3.2 Calculate
On every well, in the action buttons one has access to a “CALCULATE” button.

On the Summary screen, the Calculate is used to determine both IPR and VLP
corresponding to one specific set of flowing conditions and then calculate the intersections
between the curves.
This is a rapid way to calculate the well performance for a specific set of flowing conditions.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 162 GAP

The user can plot the VLP/ IPR intersection by clicking on the Plot button.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 163

The Initialise from solver results can be used to recall the

flowing conditions calculated during a Solve Network 434
calculation. This is useful when troubleshooting the well
performance in the same conditions as in the main calculation.

This will prompt the following VLP/IPR intersection screen:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 164 GAP

Note that when there are two intersections between the VLP and
the IPR curve, GAP will by default pick up the intersection on the
right hand side of the minimum exhibited by the VLP curve (as
this is generally the stable rate whereas the left side intersection
is the unstable one), except when the “Force Left Hand Side
Intersection (Solver)” option has been selected.

If GAP is expected to pick up the left side intersection, this can

be done by selecting the “Force Left Hand Side Intersection
(Solver)” as described earlier.

On the VLP input screen, this button invokes the VLP calculation dialog.
This enables to calculate the FBHP from the vertical lift performance curve of the well
considered for specific sets of flowing conditions.
The calculation screen appears as follows:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 165

2.5.3.3 Well Input Screens

Appropriate tabs allow to enter all the well-input data required for system optimisation or
prediction runs.

The tabs are coloured according to the validity of the data on the corresponding dialogs.
If the tab is green, then the data is valid for the current system set-up.
If it is red, then the data is invalid or empty.
If the tab is grey, then this tab is not applicable to the current model and so is
inaccessible.

The following represents the division of input data:

Tank Enter/visualize tank connections

Connections
IPR Input Used to enter/visualize IPR data, either for the well, or per-
layer in a multi-layer well.
VLP Input Used to enter/visualize the file that contains the lift curve data
for the well.
Constraints Use to enter/visualize the well constraints and abandonment
constraints.
Controls Used to enter/visualize control data for the well. This allows
wells to be choked back to meet some throughput constraint,
or for artificially lifted wells allows artificial lift control
parameter, such as ESP frequency in ESP wells to be
accounted for in optimisation.
Pump Controls Used to set the artificial lift quantity ad Fixed value (for
example,mfixed gas lift injection rate) or Calculated by the
optimiser. This section can be accessed from the Controls

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 166 GAP

section
PC Data Use this to enter/visualize manually performance curve data, or
to generate the data from VLP/IPR intersections.
Gas Lift Used to set the artificial lift quantity ad Fixed value (for
Control example,mfixed gas lift injection rate) or Calculated by the
optimiser. This section can be accessed from the Controls
section
Production Enter/visualize the production data for the well, for decline
Data curve predictions.
Downtime Enter/visualize the percentage of time a well is offline.
Coning If the well has gas coning the input data may be specified in
this screen for each layer.
Schedule Enter/visualize the Schedule for changing constraints, masking/
un-masking wells during prediction

Apart from the screen inputs as described in the following

sections, there are various action buttons like OK, CANCEL etc.
that appear in these screens. Their function is the same in every
screen.

2.5.3.3.1 Tank Connections

This section contains the list of all the tanks (MBAL models) connected to the particular well.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 167

Use the buttons <<<Add and Remove>>> to create connections or disconnect a well from a
tank.
2.5.3.3.1.1 Multi-Layer Case

In this case, it is simply required to make connections using the two list boxes: the
breakthrough constraints and perforation depths are entered in the Well IPR screen.

Connected tanks are assigned to single layers of the model automatically; the tank name,
which has been assigned to a specific layer, is displayed in the Well IPR Input screen.

2.5.3.3.2 IPR Input

This screen allows the input of well inflow performance data on a

per-layer basis.

For a multi-layer well, any number of separate inflow

performances can be modelled (a well model can be
producing from as many distinct layers as the well has in
reality).

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 168 GAP

The IPR data can be transferred from PROSPER using the

“Generate” function of GAP. If the user chooses to enter the
data manually (IPR may have not been generated with
PROSPER for example) then this can be done as well.

(NEW!!!) IPR’s can now be generated with different PROSPER

files for each layer by associating different PROSPER model to
the each layer's inflow

The IPR data input is divided into four tabbed screens as shown in the example below.

These are:

Ipr Layer Individual layer input data like PI etc

More... Data for defining relative permeability and layer breakthrough (water / gas)
parameters
Prod Data (only if decline curve is selected as tank model)
section defining the well GOR and WC (or WGR in case of gas) versus
reservoir pressure or cumulative production
Grid View Screen where a summary of all layers is tabulated and the individual IPR

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 169

data can be plotted against each other

Abandonment To define the conditions at which the layer is abandoned (production is shut
down)

The data input for all the four sections of the well IPR input us described below:
2.5.3.3.2.1 Ipr Layer input data

In this screen, the input data can be defined, which are needed for generation of an IPR curve
for each layer. The data input screen is divided into four sections. These are:
Select
Inflow Performance Input
Fluid Properties Input
PROSPER File for IPR

Select
This section has the following sub-menus:

Layer Use this to select the layer for which data is to be entered. When the list is
List Box produced, each layer appears in the drop down list with 'Invalid' or 'OK',
representing the status of the IPR layer data
Layer Type (Available only for multi layer IPR Producers except WATER producer
and injection Wells)
This can be Oil, Gas, or Condensate. When a well is created, the layer
type is set to reflect the well type: however, the layer type can be changed
by selection from the drop down list.
Mask is possible to temporarily exclude the selected layer from the IPR by
selecting Exclude from System from this drop-down list box

Switching to the More Input Screen will display data

related to the layer that has been selected in the layer
input screen.

Inflow Performance
The data items shown in this dialog depend on the well type, the layer type and the prediction
(None / Material Balance / Decline Curve) mode.
In a multi layer model, data may be entered on this dialog or in the IPR Input Grid View, which
displays all layers simultaneously.

Tank In a multi layer model, this gives the label of the tank to which the selected
Connection layer for which input is being entered is connected.

The layer-tank connections are assigned automatically when a tank is

connected to a well and are fixed throughout the life of the well. It is

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 170 GAP

possible that the tank may be assigned to a different layer if the user
chooses to do so
IPR Type Select from the combo box the type of the IPR curve. The current choices
are:
Straight Line + Vogel (Oil and Water Producers / Water Injectors).
Forcheimer (Gas / Condensate Producers / Gas Injectors)
Forcheimer Pseudo-Pressure (Gas / Condensate Producers / Gas
Injectors).
This method uses the classic Forcheimer equation solved with a
pseudo-pressure method rather than with a pressure square method.
C and n (Gas / Condensate Producers / Gas Injectors)
Table Look Up (All wells)
The “Table Look Up” utility has been included in the IPR
types for allowing an easy link between GAP and Reservoir
Simulators. It stores the IPR information generated by the
reservoir simulator as a table with oil, gas and water rates
as a function of flowing bottom hole pressure (FBHP). IT
SHOULD ONLY BE USED FOR THOSE APPLICATIONS.
IPR dP Select here whether there is to be a manual offset from the reservoir
pressure by checking the box. If the box is checked, enter the appropriate
dP in the entry field.
The IPR dP is used when the datum for the reservoir
pressure in the well model is significantly different to the
datum used in the reservoir model. The IPM dP corrects the
reservoir pressure coming from the reservoir model to the
well model datum.
Permeability (Production systems only & NOT for Table Look Up)
Correction with This is used to correct the absolute permeability of the layer as the
Pressure pressure declines in a prediction. Enter the quantity N in the equation:
N
kp k0 1.0 p0 p Cf

where, p is the layer pressure, kp is the layer permeability at pressure p ,

k0 is layer permeability at pressure p0 and Cf is the formation
compressibility
Cross Flow (Production systems only & NOT for Table Look Up)
Injectivity This is only applicable to multi-layer models. In cases where there is cross-
Index flow between layers, it is possible to specify here the injectivity index to be
applied to the layer when cross-flow rates are calculated.

The crossflow injectivity index represents the rate of injection in the

reservoir should the bottom hole pressure be greater than the reservoir
pressure. In other words, the crossflow injectivity index represents the IPR
curve for negative flow rates.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 171

If the value of the crossflow injectivity index is not specified, the rate of
injection in the reservoir will be governed by the Productivity Index
(indicating that the production capacity of the reservoir is the same as the
injection capacity).

Should there be any studies made on the injectivity index for the stated
reservoir, then this may be used to define the Crossflow injectivity index.
The use of Crossflow Injectivity Index may lead to large cross-flow rates
and potential instabilities in any prediction run as these rates are held
constant over a time-step.

In the case of gas wells and retrograde condensate wells, the

corresponding IPR model (that is defined in the IPR type section) will be
used instead of the productivity index. Only the primary coefficient of the
IPR description is required in this case: the other (non-Darcy coefficient or
n) is set to zero.

A combination of high instantaneous rates and

large timesteps may cause large cumulative
volumes of fluid to be transferred in a reservoir
over the timestep. This will lead to unrealistically
high reservoir pressures to be calculated. For wells
with cross flow between layers it is recommended
to use small step sizes in prediction mode.
IPR Match Selecting Match IPR on the IPR Input screen to display the following
dialog:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 172 GAP

Test Layer Pressure

When an IPR transfer from PROSPER is done, this screen is
populated with data from the PROSPER IPR section.

Test Water Cut

See the Relative Permeability Section that follows for more details
about how these values are used to apply correction factors to the
IPR

Test Points
These fields hold the set of test points of measured rate and flowing
bottom hole pressure.

Rate and pressure can be entered by hand, or pasted from the

Windows clipboard or directly from PROSPER’s IPR screen.

Click Match and GAP will calculate the well productivity (or injectivity)
index and AOF (or whichever coefficients are required from the IPR
model). Click OK and the P.I. and the rest of the data will be passed

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 173

back to the well IPR screen.

When an IPR is generated, the reservoir pressure and

PVT information (e.g. GOR, Water Cut) are used in the
calculation of an IPR.

Different results may be obtained in IPR generation

when a tank is connected to a well and thus uses the
tank’s PVT calculation, compared to the situation where
the well is isolated and GAP uses its own calculation.
Gravel Pack GAP models Gravel Packed completion as in PROSPER. More
detailed information about this model is available in the PROSPER
user Guide.
When the IPR is generated from a PROSPER file that contains a
Gravel Pack completion, the Gravel Pack information are transferred
from PROSPER to GAP. It is then possible to sensitize on Gravel
Pack parameters in GAP.
When the system is solved, GAP calculates the pressure drop across
the Gravel Pack (accessible under the layer results).
It is then possible to constrain the well production based on:
The maximum gravel pack casing velocity
The maximum gravel pack screen velocity
The maximum gravel pack delta P
Fluid (for producer wells)
Properties This section contains the fluid PVT properties, which are used during the
Solve Network calculation. The properties are updated automatically during
a Prediction, based on the data coming from the connected reservoir model
(be this MBAL or a third party numerical simulator)

PVT Data Enter:

(NOT for Water Oil / Condensate API
Producers) Gas Gravity
Current Water cut/ WGR
Current GOR /CGR
Enter water Salinity
Impurity Data Mole % of CO2, N2, and H2S in gas phase can be specified
Use Tank (NOT for Prediction modes “None” & “Decline Curve”)
Impurities If the ‘Use tank impurities’ box is checked, GAP will use the values from
MBAL tank model and the impurity input data will be made unavailable
PROSPER For multi-layer well, it is possible to import the specific PROSPER file
File for IPR corresponding to each specific layer. When the option "Generate |
Generate Well IPRs from PROSPER..." is used, GAP calls all those
PROSPER files to generate in one go all the different layers' IPRs

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 174 GAP

The Composition button allows to enter/visualize the composition for the well.

This is available when one of the compositional options are selected.

The Composition Button allows to visualize the fluid composition.

Use Original By ticking this box the original composition entered in the well IPR section
Composition will be used for the calculations, overriding any composition coming from
MBAL or the Working composition present in the well IPR section
The IPR Input windows contain the following action buttons.

The action buttons have been explained in detail previously 154 and have here exactly the same
role: OK / Cancel / Help / Revert / Validate / Calculate / Plot / Report.

The following action buttons are particular to the Input section, and their roles are described
below:

Plot Displays the Plot screen with the IPR plot for this layer (or the well in a

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 175

single layer model). The Match data (if present) is also displayed. In case
of Grid View it displays the IPR of all layers and the total IPR of the well as
well
Calculate Displays the IPR Calculation screen. This allows rates to be calculated
from flowing bottom hole pressures or vice versa for this layer (or for the
well in a single layer model)
From MBAL See description below

From MBAL

It is possible to transfer data from existing material balance models to well models inside GAP
. VLP, IPR and relative permeability data can be transferred.
This action button takes us to the screen that allows the import of well data from MBAL
models as shown in the following screen:

On the left hand side, the MBAL files associated with the tanks in GAP are opened and lists
of either history or prediction wells can be displayed, depending on the option chosen.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 176 GAP

On the right hand side, all the GAP wells along with their Layers are displayed.

The user selects a layer in the MBAL list and a layer in GAP list.
This gives the following two transfer options:

IPR To transfer the layer IPR

Rel Perm To transfer the MBAL layer relative permeability
data

If the user selects a well on both sides the following transfer option is available as well:

VLP To transfer the VLP data from the MBAL

prediction well to GAP well

The actual data transferred will depend on the type of item selected in the MBAL list (e.g.
tank IPR data will include the tank starting pressure and PVT data, whereas well IPR data
includes the PI).

At the bottom of the MBAL item list, is a “New Model File” button. Pressing this allows the
user the access to MBAL files that might not be associated with the current GAP model and
from the data can be transferred.
Note that new files are not stored when the screen is cleared and must be reloaded when
going into the screen on subsequent occasions.

The details of data transferred using this facility are:

IPR This transfers IPR data from the MBAL item to

the GAP target. The data transferred is as
follows:
From a tank:
Starting pressure,
Starting temperature,
Impurity data (% H2S, N2, CO2 & water
salinity),
Gas gravity,
Oil/condensate gravity,
GOR/CGR.
From a well:
PI (Darcy coefficients, C and n),
Layer type,
PI Relative permeability correction (oil
layers only),
Perforation depths,
Breakthrough constraints,
Match data,

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 177

Test water cut / layer pressure.

VLP Transfers lift curve data to the well in question.
This is only possible if the data has been
imported into the MBAL well model in *.tpd
format
Rel Perm Transfers either the tank or the well relative
permeability depending on the source type

2.5.3.3.2.2 More Layer Data

This is the second screen in the IPR input. It has the following sections:

Layer This is the place where the current layer is selected. This by default is the
Selection same layer as selected in the first screen
Relative (NOT for Injectors and Water Producers). See description below:
Permeability

Relative Permeability Section

The fields available are:

Prediction Here, we define the set of relative permeability that GAP uses for:
Fractional 1. Calculating water cut and producing GOR (CGR/ WGR in gas /
Flow Condensate) wells during prediction (Material balance).
Rel. Perm 2. Calculating the changes in the well PI corresponding to due to WC and
GOR change in all cases (No prediction/ Material Balance/ Decline
Curve). Effectively, as the WC and GOR change, the fluid mobilities will
be modified.
The Options available are:

From (Available only for Material Balance Prediction) GAP will

Tank Model take relative permeability and data from the tank associated
with the layer considered (MBAL Model)
From GAP will use the relative permeability defined entered under
Rel Perm 1 or 2 the Edit button. These rel perms can be entered by hand or
transferred from MBAL by means of the button From MBAL
(located at the bottom right of the screen).
In both cases From Tank Model and From Rel Perm 1 or 2
the relative permeability curves are defined as Corey
functions (ref. MBAL user Guide)
From (see below 180 ) the user can enter directly the WC and the
Table 1 or 2 GOR as a function or time, pressure or cumulative production
Shift Rel The option “Shift Rel Perm to Breakthrough” is used to smooth the set of

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 178 GAP

Perm to relative permeabilities of water or gas, after the breakthrough occurred (see
Breakthrough "Breakthrough and Perforation Depths" section hereafter). For instance, if
this option is turned off, and if the gas breakthrough occurs at Sgb>Sgr, the
relative permeability of the gas goes straight from zero to Krg_0 (cf.
following sketch).

PI Correction It is possible to trigger this option on by selecting the “Yes” option in the
for Mobility corresponding scrollbar.
If this option is set to ‘Yes’, the PI will be corrected for mobility change as
the water cut changes. A test-water cut and a test pressure have to be
entered.

The test water cut and the test reservoir pressure are used to determine the
water saturations (Sw) and oil and water viscosities. So is calculated as
described in the Vogel correction depending on the options as indicated
later.

With the use of relative permeability curves, the test mobility can be
calculated from:

K rw K ro
M test
w o

At a particular reservoir pressure and water cut, the current mobility (M) can
be calculated using similar formula. Based on the two calculated mobility
values, the corrected productivity index will be:

M
PI PI test
M test

And this value of corrected PI will be used to generate the new IPR

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 179

Vogel (Available Only if Mobility correction for PI is on)

Correction If this option is set to ‘Yes’, the relative permeability values that are used
for GOR for PI mobility corrections are calculated using the effect of reduced oil/
water relative permeability caused by the presence of free gas down hole. It
requires the entry of a test GOR value. The GOR entered is taken as the
total produced GOR.
Based on the PVT, a free gas saturation Sg is calculated.
The Sw is then calculated on the basis of the test water cut and test
reservoir pressure specified.

So is derived from the following relationship:

So 1 Sw Sg

Once the phase saturation and viscosities are known the PI is estimated
from total liquid mobility ratios as indicated above.

In case this option is set to ‘No’

The oil and water mobility values are calculated on the basis of the
assumption that the free gas down hole is zero.
The oil saturation is then calculated as
So 1 Sw

Based on these phase saturations, the PI correction is made from mobility

ratios as indicated above.
Test Layer (Only for Oil producers)
Pressure / Water Cut This is only available when mobility correction to PI option
is set to ‘Yes’
Test GOR (Only for Oil producers)
This is only available when Vogel correction for GOR is
set to ‘Yes
Edit Rel. Perm This displays the Relative Permeability input screen. The
button is coloured according to the validity of the relative
permeability data. The user can enter the relative
permeability data here.
It is important to notice that for both Prediction Fractional
Flow Rel Perm and Prediction mobility Correction Rel
Perm sections, two sets of relative permeabilities can be
specified, Rel Perm 1 and Rel Perm 2
Brakthroughs (ONLY for Material Balance Prediction)
and Here enter the perforation depths and following break-through conditions (if
Perforations any)
Gas Saturation or Gas Contact (Oil layers only) ; as soon as the Oil-
Water contact and Gas-Oil contact predicted by MBAL reach those

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 180 GAP

depths, the breakthrough is triggered

Water Saturation and Water Contact (OIL / GAS/ CONDENSATE
layers).
Oil Saturation (CONDENSATE Layers ONLY).
Top and bottom perforation depths (Perforation depths are
currently used only when performing gas coning calculations)

Entering the Fractional Flow rel perms as Tables (NEW!!!)

It is possible to enter directly the profile of WC and GOR (or WGR for gas) as a function of
time, reservoir pressure or cumulative production. To do that, select from the drop down menu
the option "from Table 1 or 2", as shown below:

Accessing the Edit button will allow to enter the required fractional flow table:

In the Primary Column section select the basis for the fractional flow curves (time, pressure or
Cumulative Production).

2.5.3.3.2.3 Production Data

This option is active only when Decline Curve is selected as tank model.
For Prediction modeling, GAP requires the current GOR and Water Cut for each well in order
to calculate the well behaviour for some future condition. In Decline Curve prediction GAP
interpolates a decline curve table of GOR and water cut as a function of reservoir pressure,

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 181

which is entered here.

If using Decline Curves for prediction, click the Prod. Data tab to access the well production
table, and enter the data as in the following example:

Select the layer for which to enter production data from the list box at the top of the screen.
For single-layer wells, the only layer is available. For a full complement of production data,
GAP required production data for every layer that has valid IPR data.

The required input fields are:

Current Reservoir pressure at which to evaluate GOR and Water Cut

Layer Pressure
Interpolate on Curves can be expressed as function of Reservoir Pressure or Cumulative
Production

Action Buttons:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 182 GAP

Calculate Calculates the water cut and GOR for the Current reservoir pressure
Plot Displays the production data in graphical form. Use Variables on the Plot
screen to switch between GOR and water cut

2.5.3.3.2.4 Tight Gas IPR

As opposed to the other pseudo-steady state IPR models, the Tight Gas IPR model is
transient. This inflow is driven by the rate history and the reservoir model i.e. permeability,
drainage radius...

IMPORTANT: the reservoir model is created within the well

IPR section, and therefore the Tight Gas well cannot be
linked to any reservoir models in GAP.

The Tight Gas model is selected from the Summary section of the well screen, as shown
below:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 183

IPR LAYER section

The inputs required for the IPR section of the Tight Gas well are:

Where, in addition to the fluid properties entries:

The reservoir characteristics are entered separately for each well. Note that the Drainage
Area Radius entry should be a result of the Type Curve Analysis, that can be carried out in
MBAL.

The Darcy and Non-Darcy Skins are the skins relating to the transient inflow equation:
1442T n
m Pi m Pwf Q j Q j 1 PD t dn t dj 1 SQn DQn2
kh j 1

as S and D factors respectively.

The "Current Time" input data is only used when the Network is solved at a particular date.
In that case, the time since the production started is calculated based on the difference
between the "Current Time" entered and the "Start of Production" entered. For prediction

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 184 GAP

runs, the time since production started is calculated based on the current prediction time.

The time can be considered as "Normal Time", "Pseudo Time (Pwf)" or "Normal Time
(Pbar)".
The dimensionless time td in the equation above is:
0.000264 kt
td 2
ct i rw
where the subscript i refers to the evaluation of these parameters at the
initial pressure.
The time t can be considered as:

The "Normal time" (time since the production started)

The "Pseudo Time (Pwf)":

t
dt
t ct i
t0
ct Pwf
where the subscript Pwf refers to the evaluation of these parameters at the
bottom hole pressure.

The "Pseudo Time (Pbar)":

t
dt
t ct i
t0
ct P
where the subscript P"bar" refers to the evaluation of these parameters at
the average reservoir pressure.

More information about this model and its theory can be found in the MBAL User Guide.

PROD DATA section (optional)

In this section, a production history can be entered. It will be used to update the IPR for the
current first timestep of the prediction:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 185

2.5.3.3.2.5 Grid View

To display total IPR plots for a multi-layer well, go to the IPR Grid View and press Plot from
that screen. This will display the plots for individual layers, as well as the overall IPR over all
layers.
This is only available in a multi-layer well model.
This screen also has the summary of all layer IPR data entered. The column headings are the
same as those displayed in the basic IPR Input screen (multi-layer case).

Action Buttons

Plot Plots the total well IPR, in addition to the individual layer IPRs for all valid
layers. This will show a plot looking like this:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 186 GAP

Calculate Invokes the IPR Calculation screen. This performs rate/bottom hole
pressure calculations based on the total well IPR, rather than the individual
layer IPRs
Report Invokes the standard GAP report generator. This produces a report for
the total well IPR in addition to the individual layer IPRs (valid layers only)

2.5.3.3.2.6 Abandonment Section

This section enables to define abandonment constraints (i.e. maximum GOR, maximum WC,
minimum Liquid Rate) for the entire well or the layer considered.
If these abandonment values are met by the well during the prediction, the well will be
definitely closed by GAP, meaning that the well will neither be automatically re-opened by
GAP if the abandonment constraint is not met anymore, neither re-opened through the
schedule.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 187

Wells can be abandoned based on:

Maximum Gas Oil Ratio

Maximum Water Cut
Maximum Water Gas Ratio
Minimum Liquid Rate
Minimum Oil Rate (NEW!!!)
Minimum Gas Rate

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 188 GAP

2.5.3.3.2.7 Note on water injector's IPR

Here is the IPR screen displayed when the well model is "water injector":

The “Frac PI” and “Frac dP” input data are entered to model fractures. The following “Water
Injector” IPR sketch illustrates how these two values are taken into account.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 189

Bottom Hole Pressure

Fractured dP
i.e. “Frac dP”

Normal PI Fractured PI
Initial Reservoir i.e. “P.I.” i.e. “Frac PI”
Pressure
Water Rate

The normal P.I. entered or calculated (if the IPR is generated from PROSPER) is used up to a
bottom hole pressure equal to the initial reservoir pressure + the Frac dP value entered. From
this point, the Frac PI is used.
2.5.3.3.3 VLP Input
This screen allows the user to specify the data file associated with the well considered and
containing the VLP table.
If the table does not exist, it can be generated using the “Generate” feature of GAP. Details
on the VLP generation are given in the VLP/IPR generation 388 section.

The screen appears as follows:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 190 GAP

In this screen, the following input fields are available:

VLP File Name
Turn off if unstable NEW!!!
Force Left Hand Side Intersection (Solver)
Allow Left Hand Side Intersection (Optimiser)
Safe VLP/IPR intersection
Import/Export
Inspect
Generate
VLP Information

VLP In this field, a valid vertical lift performance (VLP) file is expected. The
File Name data file is a binary format file. The file can be generated in the
following ways:

1. Using the “IMPORT” button as shown. This button allows import

of the following lift curve formats:
· *.TPD – Petroleum Experts General GAP/ MBAL Format.
(These can be generated in PROSPER well models).
· *.MBV – Petroleum Experts MBAL Format. (These can be

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 191

generated in PROSPER well models).

· *.ECL – Eclipse Format. (Generated by any nodal analysis
well modeling package).
· *.VFP – Eclipse Format. (Generated by any nodal analysis
well modeling package).
Once files with this format are imported, GAP automatically
creates a *.VLP file and saves it for its own use.

2. Using the “BROWSE” button to pick up an existing VLP File.

3. Using the Generate button available in the VLP screen. This

Generate button is a shortcut to the GAP main VLP generation
menu.

4. Using the “Generate VLP from PROSPER” command in the

Generate menu in main screen to batch generate the lift curves
for all wells in the model with valid PROSPER files.
The label alongside VLP file names will read either OK or Invalid.
An invalid flag means that an invalid file has been selected (e.g. a gas
VLP for an oil well), or that the path name is incorrect.
Import Import allows to import in GAP files containing the VLP sets in format .
tpd (exported by PROSPER), Eclipse .ecl and .vfp and Sensor .snr.
The file .tpd is exported from PROSPER and is the recommended
format to import, as these files contain a list of wellhead temperatures
along with the fluid rates
Export A VLP table can be exported as a *.TPD file for use in other wells or
applications using the “Export” button
Turn off if This option allows to shut down the well as soon as the well becomes
unstable unstable (VLP and IPR intersect on the left-hand section of the VLP)
Force Left Selecting this option will force the solver to select the well rates
Hand Side (calculated by VLP / IPR intersection) on the left hand side of the
Intersection minimum stable rate as indicated by the VLP. The two plots below
(Solver) describe this phenomenon.

Right hand intersection: Stable Well Production

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 192 GAP

Left hand intersection: Unstable Well Production

Allow Left Checking this option will allow the optimiser to use the unstable part of
Hand Side the lift curve in the search for the optimum solution. This can be the
Intersection case in wells which are coning gas for instance, where a higher Well
(Optimiser) Head Pressure will result to higher liquid rates (as the cone is
eliminated)
Safe This is a new feature in GAP 5.0 and is an improvement in the case of
VLP/IPR complex lift curves (primarily for gas coning wells). As the GOR for
intersection these lift curves is a function of the liquid rate (and given by the coning
model), this intersection method provides a much “safer” way of
getting an intersection that the default method. It is, however, much
slower than the default method and should only be used when
absolutely necessary
Inspect This option allows to view the tables of VLP curves and also to plot

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 193

them, which can be used to quality check the sets of VLPs in use
Generate This option accesses the VLP generation dialog (see below 402 )
VLP Information In this section information concerning the VLP curves used are
displayed:
Type of well (indication of the VLP format)
Calculated Variables (sensitivity variables included in the VLPs
Surface and Vertical Correlation (NEW!!!): multiphase flow
correlations used to produce the VLP set in use

In case where a new well model is constructed, it is recommended to go through

“Generate” menu option as this ensures that the correct variable formats that are
needed for the well performance in GAP are picked up.

.
2.5.3.3.3.1 Inspection of VLP Data

The VLP data that is associated with a file in the form of a VLP file can be inspected manually
by selecting the "Inspect" button from the VLP Input screen.

The VLP tables look as shown below:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 194 GAP

This is a lookup table of VLP results. The left and right hand columns give the VLP curves for
the variable parameters highlighted (in reverse video) in the central columns.

The data presented here is editable. It may be exported into a performance data file by
pressing the Export button; this produces a File browser allowing to select the appropriate file
destination.

The variables that are a part of the VLP file depend on the type
of well. For example this is a naturally flowing oil well VLP table.

It is recommended to check the VLP data manually before,

running the prediction cases in order to check the data validity.

On this screen, there are a few action buttons. These are:

OK Validate and go back to the previous panel

Cancel Disregard all changes and go back to the previous panel
Validate To visualize eventual out-of-range data
Plot The "Plot" button can be used to plot on the same graph some VLP curves
and to verify the quality of the curves:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 195

The Variables menu can be used to select the sensitivity cases to plot.

Help To visualize this panel

2.5.3.3.4 Well Constraints

2.5.3.3.4.1 General Constraints

Well constraints can be used to control a well to meet physical or contractual requirements
forcing the well to produce at maximum potential or below it. Select the Constraints tab to
display the well constraints screen as follows:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 196 GAP

Maximum Rates are controlled based on this maximum temperature at the wellhead
Temperature
Minimum well Well is shut in/choked back if the flowing bottom hole pressure falls below
flowing bottom- this value
hole pressure
Maximum Draw GAP will ensure that the flowing bottom hole pressure does not vary from
down / the reservoir pressure by more than this amount.
Reservoir In a snapshot calculation, the reservoir pressure entered in the IPR section
Pressure will be used to calculate the constraint.
In a prediction run, the reservoir pressure will continually be recalculated
for each time step.
In the case of a multi-layer well, the reservoir pressure reference is taken
from the extrapolation of the total IPR to zero rate
Well This is a multiplier that is used on the well production during the
optimisation optimisation process. It essentially weights the well in the optimisation
weighting purposes
Well shut in (Gas lifted systems only)
priority If GAP has to shut in wells during optimisation, then this value sets a ‘shut
in priority’ for the wells considered: if a value greater than one is entered,
then this well will have a greater chance of being shut in during optimisation
(all other conditions being equal). If no entry is made, this value defaults to
unity
Maximum (NOT FOR GAS WELLS)

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 197

Liquid Well production cannot exceed this maximum. Naturally flowing wells will
Production / be choked back using dP Control if necessary to meet the maximum rate
Injection constraint. Artificially lifted wells will be controlled using both dP control
and artificial lift specific controls to meet the maximum rate constraint
Minimum (NOT FOR GAS WELLS)
liquid GAP will try to produce this minimum rate irrespective of oil rate
production optimisation considerations. Use this to set production targets for
rate/ Injection particular wells
Maximum gas (GAS WELLS)
production / Sets upper production limit for the well considered
Injection
Minimum gas (GAS WELLS)
production / GAP will try to produce this minimum gas rate irrespective of optimisation
Injection considerations
Binding This option can be used to set whether a particular constraint is binding or
(Yes / No) not (see binding/not binding topic 121 )
Potential Includes or excludes the constraint it relates to in the potential calculations
(Yes / No)

GAP has the capacity of optimising the production from gas lifted
wells by altering the amount of gas lift gas injected in the well. If
the gas lifted control has been selected (refer to the Gas lift
control 204 section) the constraints screen will allow entering
relevant constraints for gas lifted wells.

The following constraints are available for gas lifted wells control:

Maximum gas Used to set field operational limits for injection gas
injection rate
Minimum gas GAP leaves the well shut in unless it deserves at least this volume
injection rate of gas to optimise production
NO-CLOSE Forces GAP to allocate this volume of gas irrespective of whether
minimum gas the well should be allocated gas to optimise production or not.
injection rate Used to model particular field operating practices e.g. to ensure
flow stability

GAP has the capacity of optimising the production from diluent

injection wells by altering the amount of diluent injected in the
well. If the diluent control has been selected the constraints
screen will allow entering relevant constraints for diluent injected
wells.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 198 GAP

The following constraints are available for diluent wells control:

Maximum Used to set field operational limits for diluent injection

diluent rate
Minimum GAP leaves the well shut in unless it deserves at least this volume of
diluent rate diluent to optimise production
Maximum Set the field operational limits relative to the maximum motor power
motor power used in the well considered
Minimum Set the field operational limits relative to the minimum motor power
motor power used in the well considered

GAP has the capacity of optimising the production from pump

lifted wells by altering the frequency of the pumps in the network.
The constraints screen will allow entering relevant constraints for
pump lifted wells.

The following constraints are available for pump lifted wells control:

Maximum Pump Frequency (ESP Wells)

Minimum Pump Frequency (ESP Wells)
Maximum Power Fluid Rate (HSP and Jet Pump Wells)
Minimum Power Fluid Rate (Jet Pump Wells)
Maximum Speed (HSP and PCP Wells)
Minimum Speed (HSP and PCP Wells)
Maximum motor power
Minimum motor power
Maximum power fluid surface pressure (HSP wells)

These constraints will be available through the Constraints | General screen, as illustrated
below for an ESP well.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 199

However, it is possible to note that for pump lifted wells, it will be possible to specify tables of
pumping characteristics vs. minimum and maximum pump rates given by the pump
manufacturer.
These tables will be used to check make sure the pumps will operate in a suitable range of
rates for a given frequency in the case of ESP wells for instance.

The following tables can be entered, according to the type of artificial lift system selected:

Table of Operating Frequency vs. Minimum Pump Rates (ESP Wells)

Table of PCP Speed vs.Minimum Pump Rates (PCP Wells)
Table of Power Fluid Rate vs. Minimum Pump Rates (Jet Pumps Wells)
Table of Rotational Speed vs. Minimum Pump Rates (HSP Wells)

To enter these constraints tables, click the Pump subsection tab in the Constraints menu, as
illustrated below for an ESP Well.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 200 GAP

2.5.3.3.4.2 Abandonment Constraints

Abandonment constraints can now be set from the data entry

screen and on a per-layer basis.

To enter abandonment constraints, click the Abandonment tab of the constraints screen.
On the resulting screen, the user may enter abandonment constraints for the entire well, or for
individual layers (in the multi-layer model).

Abandonment constraints are used as criteria to shut the well in during a prediction run: for
example, if one sets a maximum GOR abandonment constraint, then the well will be shut in
during a prediction run if the produced GOR exceeds this value.

The following abandonment may be set:

Maximum GOR
Maximum WC
Maximum WGR
Minimum Liquid Rate
Minimum Oil Rate

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 201

Minimum Gas Rate

Enter into the fields the abandonment constraints that one wishes to apply.

2.5.3.3.4.3 Symbols

When setting Constraints, the program will plot in the network picture two arrows pointing
towards the element.

General red arrows pointing to the element

Constraints
Abandonment blue arrows pointing to the element
Constraints

2.5.3.3.4.4 Notes on Constraints

When setting up the model, it is recommended to start with the minimum

necessary number of Constraints. In this way the user has the possibility to
validate that the model performs as it is supposed to.
After that, the number of Constraints can be increases, if necessary.

GAP provides with a physical model of the whole production/injection system.

This means that any constraint imposed in the system should reflect the
physical reality of the field.

For example, if a well at its maximum production cannot produce more than
1000 STB/day oil rate, it would not have sense to set up a minimum
production constraint of 2000 STB/day, as this would be impossible to
achieve.

Based on these considerations, it is recommended not to use minimum

constraints during a prediction run.

In the case where minimum constraints cannot be physically honoured

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 202 GAP

(because the system not necessarily can deliver the minimum liquid rate as the
reservoir depletes, for example), the optimiser will try to honour an infeasible
situation. This may provide unreliable results for the whole system.

If the objective is to shut down the well if this cannot produce a minimum
amount, this can be achieved by setting up an Abandonment Constraint of
minimum rate in the Abandonment section: as soon as the well production
decreases below the set minimum abandonment constraint, the well will be
closed.

2.5.3.3.5 Controls
The Controls section allows to set choke values for the current well, and artificial lift controls
(in the case of an artificially lifted well).
2.5.3.3.5.1 Symbols

When activating a control (dP Control or Artificial Lift quantity control) the program will display
in the network picture the following symbols:

dP Control A thin solid red circle is set around the well icon.

If no circle is around the well, the control is set to None or Fixed Value
Artificial Lift A thin rounded square is set around the well icon.
Control If the square is dashed, the control is set to Fixed Value
If the square is solid, the control is set to Calculated

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 203

2.5.3.3.5.2 dP Control

The Controls section allows to set choke values for the current well, and artificial lift controls
(in the case of an artificially lifted well).

dP Control options

None There is no choke at the wellhead. Equivalent of having the well fully
open
Fixed Value Allows to enter a fixed dP at the wellhead to model the effect of a
choke. Fixed pressure option includes the quantity specified in the next
field as the wellhead choke dP
Calculated GAP optimiser is used to calculate the pressure loss in the wellhead
choke to maximise production and at the same time honour constraints

The choke defined in this section is at the end of VLP curves. If the curves
include pressure losses up to the wellhead, the choke is at the wellhead
level. If the curves include Pressure losses in the downhole equipment and
a flow-line up to a manifold, the choke is then considered to be at the end

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 204 GAP

of flow line.

In the Calculated Option , the results screen has a choke-calculator, which allows
the user to estimate the choke setting that corresponds to the dP calculated using
the Perkin' s choke model (SPE20633).

2.5.3.3.5.3 Gas Lift Control

Gas Lift Control

Control Mode (Fixed / Calculated)

The gas lift gas rate injected in gas lifted wells can be controlled by
GAP by setting the Control Mode field to Calculated.
Minimum and Maximum gas lift gas injection rate need to be specified
Fixed Gas The value of gas lift gas injection rate that GAP will use in calculations
Lift Gas for fixed gas lift gas rate control mode
Injection Rate
Fluid Properties The fluid properties of the gas lift gas used can be specified.
If compositional PVT modeling is enabled, this section will allow to
access and edit the composition of the injected gas

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 205

2.5.3.3.5.4 ESP Control

ESP Control

Frequency (Fixed / Calculated)

Control The operating frequency of ESP wells can be controlled by GAP by
setting the Frequency Control field to Calculated
Fixed The value of fixed frequency that GAP will use in calculations, for fixed
Frequency frequency control

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 206 GAP

2.5.3.3.5.5 Diluent Control

Diluent Control

Control Mode (Fixed / Calculated)

The diluent rate injected in diluent injected wells can be controlled by
GAP by setting the Control Mode field to Calculated.
Minimum and Maximum diluent rates need to be specified
Fixed Diluent The value of fixed diluent rate that GAP will use in calculations, for
Rate fixed diluent rate control mode
Fluid Properties The fluid properties of the diluent used can be specified, as well as the
injected fluid temperature.
If compositional PVT modeling is enabled, this section will allow to
access and edit the composition of the injected fluid

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 207

2.5.3.3.5.6 HSP Control

HSP Control

Control Mode (Fixed / Calculated)

Rotational speed in HSP wells can be controlled by GAP by setting
the Control Mode field to Calculated
Rot.Speed The value of fixed rotational speed that GAP will use in calculations, for
fixed rotational speed control mode
Min Rot. Speed When the Control Model is set to Calculated, Minimum and Maximum
and rotational speed can be specified
Max Rot. Speed
Power Fluid Mode Enables to specify if the power fluid is commingled with the production
fluid or in a closed loop.
If the power fluid is commingled with the production fluid, its impact on
the pressure drop throughout the system will be taken into account
Fluid Injected The fluid properties of the power fluid used can be specified by
defining in the Edit List table the fluid type as Water or Other

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 208 GAP

2.5.3.3.5.7 Jet Pump Control

Jet Pump Control

Control Mode (Fixed / Calculated)

The power fluid rate injected in jet pump wells can be controlled by
GAP by setting the Control Mode field to Calculated.
Minimum and Maximum power fluid rates need to be specified
Fixed Power The value of fixed power fluid rate that GAP will use in calculations, for
Fluid Rate fixed power fluid rate control mode
Power Fluid Mode Enables to specify if the power fluid is commingled with the production
(Available only in fluid or in a closed loop.
the Well Summary If the power fluid is commingled with the production fluid, its impact on
screen) the pressure drop throughout the system will be taken into account
Fluid Properties The fluid properties of the power fluid used can be specified, as well
as the power fluid temperature

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 209

2.5.3.3.5.8 PCP Control

PCP Control

Speed Control (Fixed / Calculated)

The operating speed of PCP wells can be controlled by GAP by
setting the Control Mode field to Calculated
Fixed Speed The value of fixed speed that GAP will use in calculations, for fixed
speed control

2.5.3.3.5.9 Fluids Property Setup

Fluid Properties Setup

(i.e. For all artificially lifted wells using either an injection fluid or a power fluid)

For artificial lift systems associated with an injection/power fluid, it is possible to alter / modify
the fluid properties used in the Control screen, as illustrated below for a gas lifted well.

The Control screen allows to change/ define the gas lift source properties that are associated
with this well.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 210 GAP

The source names are set up in the Injection Fluids dialog, which can be accessed from the
Options menu. It can also be invoked by pressing the Edit List button of this screen.

Select the required Gas lift source in the Enter Choice drop down list box. The properties of
the source will be displayed for convenience in the Fluid Properties area beside this.

The composition of the source can be displayed by selecting the Composition button at the
base of the screen (when compositional tracking is enabled). This can only be edited through
the Injection Fluids screen. The colour of the button indicates the validity of the source
composition. If compositional tracking or full compositional modeling are enabled, this must be
valid for the calculations to be performed.

2.5.3.3.6 PC Data
When the well mode is set to PC Interpolation, in the Input section the PC Data tab is
available.
This tab contains all the information on the PC (ref. Summary screen for definition of PC 157 ),
which can be entered by hand or calculated on the basis of the well VLP/IPR.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 211

The quality of the PC used can be verified by accessing the menu Results/Plot Performance
Curves, as shown in a later section 501 . This feature allows to spot if VLP and IPR have been
correctly generated.
2.5.3.3.6.1 PC Generation

This screen is used to generate a set of well performance curves using the VLP and IPR data
entered in the Well IPR Input screen and the VLP file entered in the Well VLP Input screen. It
is called from the Well PC Data screen from the 'PC Generation' button.

Input Fields

Reservoir The current reservoir pressure

Pressure
IPR dP Shift If enabled (from the Use IPR dP checkbox), offsets the Reservoir
pressure used by the IPR
PVT Data These fields hold the PVT data for the IPR, ie Water cut, GOR, Oil
gravity and Gas gravity for an oil well
Manifold These fields hold the generate wellhead pressures. For non-gaslifted
Pressures wells, clicking the Automatic WHP button will allow PC generation
using a set of pressures which cover the wells operating range.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 212 GAP

The data items displayed on this screen are those that are global to
the well; thus for a multi layer well with more than one valid layer the
reservoir pressure, PVT data and impurity data (for example) can not
be displayed.

The reservoir pressure, PVT quantities etc are the same as those
entered in the Well IPR Input screen

Command Buttons

Generate Use this button to calculate the performance curves. An informational

message will be output when the process is complete
Ok Use this button to leave the screen and save all changes that have
been made. The data generated in any 'Generate' process will be
written to the Well PC input dialog
Cancel Use this button to leave the screen and ignore any changes made
Help Use this button to access this screen

2.5.3.3.7 Downtime
This screen allows entering the well downtime for a prediction run.
Production constraints are evaluated using the potential well rates.

Cumulative production is calculated from the instantaneous rate times the well efficiency factor
(100% - down time).

The well down time factor can be entered in the field provided. The efficiency can also be
adjusted in the Prediction Wells screen that is in turn accessed from the Prediction Forecast
set-up screen.

For decline curve prediction models, the well efficiency is also included in the Well Production
Data screen.

2.5.3.3.8 Coning (For Oil Producers Only)

Coning of gas from a reservoir can be accounted for in the GAP well models.

Two scenarios are possible:

1. The well layer is not linked to any MBAL model. In that case one can directly switch the
Mode from None (no coning) to one of the coning options
2. The well layer is linked to a MBAL model. In that case, the Mode option will be active only
of the coning model has been enabled in MBAL first

See the MBAL manual for more information on the theory behind gas coning modeling.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 213

Layer Selection This list box contains a list of all valid layers, along with the
name of the tank to which they are attached, and whether or
not gas coning is set up in the tank model. Select from the list
the layer for which one wishes to enter data
Mode Select this check box to enable coning for the layer. Coning
will then be applied in prediction, provided that the coning data
is validated successfully. Two options are available:

Analytic This allows to match an analytical method to

match the profile of Liquid Rate vs Produced
GOR
Lookup This allows to directly enter in the program the
Table table of Liquid rate vs Produced GOR. In this
case up to 10 points of the table can be entered

Perforation These are repeated from the "IPR | More..." screen. Enter the
Depths top and bottom perforation depths for the well relative to
surface
Gas-Oil Contact The gas-oil contact depth tracked in the MBAL model during a
prediction run overwrites this field. It may be used following a

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 214 GAP

snapshot reload, or whenever a performance curve is

regenerated outside of a prediction, to adjust the gas-oil
contact depth from the tank model
Matching Data/ These are used to evaluate the coning coefficients F2, F3, and
Test Data the exponent. Enter up to three match points (liquid rate
against producing GOR) and test values for gas-oil contact,
water cut, and layer pressure.
When the Match button is selected, the values for the
coefficients will be entered automatically into the dialog fields
Results The coning coefficients F2, F3, and the exponent may be
entered by hand (without performing a Match). They must be
present for the data to be validated prior to performing a
prediction run
Note When the Validate button is selected, validation information
for the current layer will be displayed. The dialog tab will be
coloured according to the validity of the entire coning data set
- any invalid or missing fields in any layers will be picked up.
Only those layers that have coning enabled will be included in
the validation

2.5.3.3.9 Schedule (ONLY for Prediction)

This is used during the prediction to change the well constraints or to include or exclude the
joint from the system at a specific time in the forecast.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 215

Since IPM version 6, this is possible to schedule any variable change, using the variable
OPENSERVER access string. The variable OPENSERVER access string can easily been
accessed "Ctrl+Right clicking" on the variable tab.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 216 GAP

2.5.3.4 Outflow Only Well

This method is a feature that offers greater flexibility in terms of modeling downhole networks
(multilayer systems and smart well completions). This option can be activated from the well
summary screen:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 217

Two methods are available for the Outflow only well:

VLP The dP along the wellbore is determined on the basis of VLP

curves
PROSPER The dP along the wellbore is calculated using PROSPER online

These two options enable to specify the method by which the pressure drops in the Outflow
part of the well will be calculated, either using VLP tables or calculated “on the fly” using the
PROSPER online options. In the latter case, the well equipment and temperature options are
defined inside GAP and used whenever a pressure drop calculation needs to be performed as
opposed to simply looking up the pre-calculated pressure drops from the VLP table.

The IPR part of the well needs to be considered separately using an inflow icon, described in
Inflow section 378 .

Only limited information can be entered in the outflow section, relating exclusively to the well
outflow performance, and therefore the VLPs.
In the main GAP screen, the outflow only well is identified with the following icon:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 218 GAP

2.5.3.4.1 Outflow Only - VLP

If the VLP only case is selected, then the well icon will only include the lift curves, no IPRs can
be specified. In the Input Data section only data relevant to the outflow part of a well can be
entered.

In the VLP section:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 219

A VLP file can be imported if it already exists or can be generated using the “Generate”
feature from the GAP main screen (Please refer to VLP generation 402 section for details on
the VLP Generation).

The functions of this screen have already been explained in the previous section of this
chapter.

2.5.3.4.2 Outflow Only - PROSPER

This option can be selected from the well summary screen.

The purpose of the Outflow Only – PROSPER model is to enable the user to specify the well
equipment in GAP, or import them from an existing PROSPER file. The pressure drops in the
well bore can then be calculated whenever needed by GAP rather than being looked up from
a table.

There are two main advantages for using this method:

The advanced thermal options of PROSPER are now available in GAP for the
pressure drop calculations
The pressure drops are calculated with the PVT of the fluid that goes into the
wellbore, which may be changing over time. This is particularly useful in
multilayer systems in which the rate contribution from each layer changes
significantly over time (depending on the rate of depletion of each). When lift
curves are used, one can only assume the contribution of each layer and use one
set of PVT as the rate of depletion cannot be decided before a prediction is done.

The well equipment can be setup in two ways, either directly from an existing PROSPER file or
entered directly in GAP.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 220 GAP

2.5.3.4.2.1 Importing the equipment data from PROSPER

This can be done by selecting the “Import” button, as shown previously.

The program will then prompt with a file selection menu where an existing PROSPER file can
be imported.

Selecting “Open”, GAP will transfer the equipment data from the PROSPER file into the
equivalent screens in GAP:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 221

The correlations used in PROSPER along with the corresponding match parameters will also
be transferred, as seen from the screen above. One can then go through the screens (starting
from “Options” in order to validate that the data transferred are OK).

Selecting “Options” will prompt the “Options” screen of PROSPER:

In this screen the Options selected in the PROSPER file can be seen.
Moving to the PVT section:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 222 GAP

The PVT used in PROSPER are transferred along with the PVT Matching parameters for the
different correlations.

The Pressure drop calculations will be done based on the

fluid entering the well at every timestep. This PVT section is
only used to match the correlations that will subsequently
be used to provide the PVT parameters for the pressure
drop calculations. The GOR and gravities entered here will
therefore be ignored during the calculations, only the
matched (or original in the case of no matching) correlations
will be used.

Following the PVT, the equipment section can be accessed:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 223

Here one can specify the equipment based on which the pressure drop calculations can be
done. This section is the same as in PROSPER with screens for entering the deviation survey,
any surface equipment to be included in the pressure drop calculations, the well equipment
and geothermal gradient (these data for the Rough Approximation temperature method only).
Further screens will be made available if the Improved Approximation or Enthalpy balance
methods are selected.

Note on Surface Equipment: There is no need to include any surface pipelines

in this section as they can be described separately in GAP. The user has the
option of including a single flow line leading from the well-head to a manifold in
either program depending on the objective of the model. However, pipelines
that carry fluid originating in more than one wells need to be described as
separate GAP pipelines.

The next section is related to erosional velocities and solids transport.

Selecting the “Solids” button will prompt the following screen:

The variables in this section there are:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 224 GAP

Density of sand Used to calculate the Maximum Grain Diameter that can be
transported based on the velocities in the well
Sand production Will be used to determine the erosional velocities in the pipe
rate and S factor using a Conoco model (Improvement to API14 E)
C factor Will be used to compute erosional velocities based on the API
14E recommendation. A value of 400 is recommended as
opposed to 100 recommended by the API as this was found by
various researches to be very pessimistic
Turner Constant Used for liquid loading calculations. Turner proposed this
constant to be 20.4 but after extensive testing, we have found
that 2.04 gives much more realistic results

These constants can be left to their default values or changed depending on the users
engineering judgement.

The last section in the PROSPER on line data has to do with matching of the pressure drop
correlations:

In the case where test data are available, these can be entered and all the quality check and
matching features of PROSPER can be utilised to QC the data and match a correlation,
making it unique for the well in question.

Selecting “Correlation Matching” for the downhole equipment, the test can be entered and
then the quality check and matching procedure described in PROSPER can be followed,
leading to a consistent and predictive well model. More information are available on this topic
in the PROSPER user Guide.

Having finished this section, the well summary screen can now be revisited and therefore
ensure that the Outflow only well model is valid:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 225

2.5.3.4.2.2 Entering The Equipment in GAP Directly

Selecting the “Edit” button in the screen shown above will allow the user to enter the well
equipment data directly in GAP, without the need to specify a PROSPER file at all:

This button will prompt the Equipment screen and all the sections described above can be
visited and populated with data. Matching of the PVT and pressure drop correlations can also
be done in this section as described previously.

2.5.3.4.2.3 Completing the Outflow Only Well - Inflow Performance Setup

In order to complete an Outflow only well, one or more corresponding inflows need to be
specified, with or without equipment between the inflow and the well. One example of a three
layer system is shown below:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 226 GAP

Completed Outflow
well model Part
with Outflow
only well icon
and inflow
icons.

Inflows

An example of how to set up a model with Inflow and Outflow elements can be found in the
Examples Guide 743 .
2.5.3.5 Well Results Screen
This screen contains all the results from allocations or predictions that pertain to the current
item.
To switch between item results, use the list box on the parent screen:

Network Solver The results screen is divided into two sections. The first is the
Results Screen Network Solver results:

Prediction and the second is Prediction results, which is only valid if a

Results Screen prediction run has been carried out:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 227

2.5.3.5.1 Gradient Results

In the case where the well is modelled as an Outflow only well – PROSPER the results after a
solve network or a prediction calculation will include a new screen where the gradient results
can be seen. This can be accessed from:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 228 GAP

Selection of this will prompt the Gradient calculation screen of PROSPER that will display the
gradient traverse calculations corresponding to the results:

This list includes up to 77 variables that are calculated using the gradient traverse features
and includes erosional velocity, holdup, mass flowrates etc.

2.5.3.5.2 Well Layer Results

In the case where the well is connected to more that one layers as shown below:

The results can be seen as total for the well (as shown in the previous section) or on a layer
by layer basis. When the prediction is done, the “Layers” button will appear:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 229

This allows access to the results of each layer:

Crossflow is calculated based on the IPRs of each layer and will

be shown as negative rates in the layer results.

2.5.3.5.3 Reporting Results

In these sections all the results related to the performance of the well in question can be
accessed and exported using the “Report” Button highlighted above. Selecting the “Report”
button will prompt the following screen:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 230 GAP

If results need to be exported to Excel, the “Clipboard” and “Tab Delimited” formats can be
chosen. Selecting “Run Report” will then allow the program to place the results on the
Clipboard and then pasted into Excel.
2.5.4 Separators (Production / Injection)

In GAP, separators are nodes where a pressure value is fixed regardless of the rate through
them.
It does not necessarily denote the presence of an actual separator in the system; it could be
any fixed pressure point in the network.

The effect of the P and T conditions at various separators in the

network on fluid formation volume factors etc. is accounted for
using the PVT data from the wells or reservoirs providing the
fluid to the separators.

In a single GAP model there can be more than one separator defined, each with its own fixed
pressure value. Each of these separators can have independent constraints.

For systems with more than one separator, make sure that
each separator has a different name to enable easy
identification in reports.

The pressure of the separator when solving the system or

doing predictions is not specified in the separator icon
itself. It is set under the Solve Network or Material Balance
Prediction Forecast screens.

The following help section is valid for both production separators and injection manifold. In
input screens where there is a difference, this is clearly pointed out and explained.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 231

Double clicking on the separator icon will provide access to the Separator Summary screen.
There are three sections, which are itemised below:

Summary Screen This allows the selection of separator types, and also gives
the status of various aspects of the separator input data
Input Screen Includes tabbed screens for the following input fields:
Constraints
Separation ( Only for Production Separators)
Injection source ( Only for gas, water and steam
injection manifolds)
Schedule (Only if Prediction Selected in Main
Option)
Results Screen Contains the following fields:

Network Solver Results.

Prediction Results

NOTE
The separated fluids can be picked up and sent through
separate networks to other separators. This operation can
be done using sources connected to the separator icon, as
shown below. The source can be defined as separator oil,
gas or water to pick up the corresponding phases. This
means that up to three sources (one for oil, one for gas and
one for water) can be connected to a separator.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 232 GAP

2.5.4.1 Separator Summary Screen

When double-clicking on a separator in the system view, the main data entry screen initially
displays the separator summary screen.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 233

The following describes the fields that may be entered on this screen.

Label Defaults to the name supplied in the Label dialogue box when the
item was initially added to the system. If blank, enter a name or
abbreviation to uniquely identify the icon in the screen display of up
to 12 characters in length. Keep labels short to improve drawing
readability
Name Enter any name or description to see as a heading for this
separator in the reports
Comments Enter any string of comments that gives more information about the
separator; e.g. date brought on stream, etc.
Mask This option allows a separator to be included or omitted from the
network database and therefore from the calculations for
establishing the total system responses. An 'X' over the icon
indicates this separator has been masked (excluded from the
system). Three options are currently available:

Include in The item is enabled and open to flow in the

system main network
Mask Excluded from the system unless it is
scheduled to come online during a prediction
Disable If an item is disabled, it will not come online,
even if it is scheduled to do so during a
prediction

Separation Type With this option the user defines whether the separator is
Production Separator
Water Injection Manifold
Gas Injection manifold
Steam Injection Manifold

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 234 GAP

Oil Injection Manifold NEW!!!

Data Summary This field contains the summary of the data that is needed in the
Area input screens. This also indicates, if the current data is valid or not.
In case the separator is an injection manifold, the data summary
screen contains an additional input field as shown below for defining
the source of the injected fluid.

2.5.4.2 Separator Input Screens

The separator input screens that need to be defined, depend on the type of separator
(production / injection) and the type of prediction (None / Material balance / Decline Curve.).

The following sub-sections explain the details of these input screens.

2.5.4.2.1 Separator Constraints

Constraint parameters are optional. They may be used to enter the specific production/
injection or physical constraints of a separator. Selecting the constraints tab of the input data
section yields the following screen:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 235

Constraints (as described under the data input section) should not be entered until the entire
GAP model has been validated against measured production data (provided these are
available).

Operational, environmental or mechanical constraints of a separator can be modelled by

entering the appropriate constraint values. Minimum values can be used to give a production
stream priority during optimisation runs. When left blank, GAP assumes there are no
constraints for this item. The program will not check that conflicting constraints have been
entered. When constraints are active for any node in the system, the constraint symbol is
shown above the element icon (see next figure).

For instance, a separator with constraints will have two arrows pointing to it. Same for any
other piece of equipment with constraints in it:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 236 GAP

Separate constraints are available for Total Gas through the separator (i.e. sum of produced
and gas lift gas) or Produced gas only.

The total list of constraints that can be set at this point is:

1) Maximum water production/ Injection

2) Maximum gas production / Injection
3) Maximum liquid production / Injection
4) Maximum oil production / Injection
5) Minimum gas injection rate
6) Minimum liquid production / Injection
7) Minimum gas production / Injection
8) Maximum power
9) Minimum pressure
10)Maximum pressure
11)Maximum CO2, H2S, N2
12)Minimum Oil Specific Gravity
13)Maximum Gross Heating Value
14)Maximum Specific Gross Heating Value
15)Unscheduled production deferment

GAP will automatically track the gas impurities (CO2, H2S, N2),
even if the compositional tracking option is switched off. In the
case where the tracking option is active, then the impurities
from the composition will override the values from the BO PVT
model.

System constraints, i.e. for the total combined production for all
separators in the system, are entered under Constraints/
System Constraints. Please Refer to Constraints 118 tables
section for details.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 237

2.5.4.2.2 Separation (PRODUCTION Separators ONLY)

This is required only for production separators. At each separator level, we may remove a
percentage of gas and water from the separator, by using the following screen.

The separated fluids can be picked up and sent through

separate networks to other separators. This operation can
be done using sources connected to the separator icon.
Please refer to Sources section 341 for details.

2.5.4.3 Injection Fluid Details (INJECTION Man.Only)

This is required for gas, water or steam injection systems. The properties of the oil / gas /
water / steam (quality) that are to be injected are specified in the list of injected fluids, along
with the composition if compositional tracking is enabled.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 238 GAP

If one selects the Edit List button, the following screen appears:

This screen can be used to create as many fluid sources as required.

One can specify a particular fluid for injection that can be then selected from the list in the
drop down menu of the separator injection screen:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 239

Note on "Steam Injection Manifolds":

The internal steam calculator will automatically calculate the saturation pressure and minimum
enthalpy given the injection temperature (inputted) and the steam quality (inputted in the Fluids'
list).

2.5.4.3.1 Schedule (PREDICTION Cases ONLY)

This is required in case during the production the separator constrains / back pressure
change. All the constraints that are variable in main separator screen can be changed during
the prediction, using the schedule.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 240 GAP

2.5.4.3.2 Steam Stream

The steam Injection manifold is selected from the Separation Type drop down menu:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 241

A steam stream needs to be created in the Injection Fluids' list, using the "Edit List" button
from the Input | Fluid section of the injector icon:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 242 GAP

In this list, a steam "Type" fluid can be created; the steam quality needs to be entered.
The steam calculator can be used to calculate the steam properties at different pressures and
temperatures. It will be noticed that the steam calculator can either been accessed from the
Injection Fluids' screen or from the Input | Fluid screen of the injection icon.
The steam calculator is the same as the one implemented in PVTP.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 243

Steam Calculator

The option "Calculate Range" is used to calculate the PVT steam properties at different values
of pressure and temperature.
The option "Calculate Single" is used to calculate the PVT steam properties for a given
pressure and enthalpy (or temperature and enthalpy).

Calculate The following screen is used to enter the temperature and pressure ranges
Range to calculate the steam PVT properties for.
When the option "Pressure Split Range for Table" is turned on, the program
will use the "Lower Half of Range Step" as step size for the lower pressures
(for half of the number of steps specified).

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 244 GAP

Hit the button "Calculate" to access the calculator screen, from which hit
again the "Calculate" button to trigger the PVT calculation.

The Button "Plot" can be used to plot PVT properties, such as saturation
temperature as illustrated below:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 245

Calculate Enter the Pressure and Enthalpy (or Temperature and Enthalpy), and the
Single steam calculator will calculate:
the density / enthalpy / viscosity / Cp and Cv of the liquid or gas if the
fluid is SINGLE PHASE
the saturation temperature (or saturation pressure) / latent heat and
steam quality (as well as the different phases' PVT properties) if the
fluid is TWO PHASE

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 246 GAP

2.5.4.3.3 Oil Injection manifold

NEW!!!
This new element allows the user to define an input of oil coming from a source at fixed
pressure, just like water injection and gas injection sources.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 247

2.5.5 Joints

The joint is a point in the network where two or more different pieces of equipment connect
together. Each joint is a solution point within GAP.

As with separators, there is no compulsory data entry for joints. This following section
describes the possible input options for Joints.

Like any other equipment entry the joint data entry/results screen has three sections (as
explained in the details of format for equipment in Equipment data 149 section).

2.5.5.1 Joint Summary Screen

The Summary screen appears in the main data entry screen when double-clicking on a joint in
the system window:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 248 GAP

This screen is similar to the Summary screen of all equipment nodes and as such its contents
will not be explained every time. Please refer to the Separator Summary screen section for
details.

Lumping Rule (Present only when Compositional PVT is enabled) It defines which lumping
rule is adopted for the fluid flowing through the joint

2.5.5.2 Joint Input Screen

The various input categories are displayed in the tabs at the bottom part of the screen.
Navigate through the input screens by clicking on the appropriate tab. The tabs conform to a
general colour-coding scheme: Green indicates that the data associated with the screen is
valid; Red indicates that the data is not valid. When the tab is greyed out, the tab is not
accessible due, for example, to the model selected.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 249

2.5.5.3 Joint Constraints

Joint constraint parameters are optional. They may be used to enter the specific production
constraints of a joint and the pipeline it feeds into. Joint constraints are entered on the
following dialogue box:

Enter the maximum levels of production that GAP can use while optimising production. These
are usually determined by the physical or mechanical constraints of the manifold or associated
pipes.
To force production from a group of wells even though this may not maximise oil production,
use minimum constraints. When left blank, the program assumes there are no constraints for
this item.

The full list of constraints that may be set is:

1) Maximum water production/ Injection
2) Maximum gas production / Injection
3) Maximum liquid production / Injection
4) Maximum oil production / Injection
5) Minimum gas injection rate

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 250 GAP

6) Minimum liquid production / Injection

7) Minimum gas production / Injection
8) Maximum power
9) Minimum pressure
10)Maximum pressure
11)Maximum CO2, H2S, N2
12)Minimum Oil Specific Gravity
13)Maximum Gross Heating Value
14)Maximum Specific Gross Heating Value

Use constraints with caution. Constraints set for one item can
conflict with those set for other system components. Maximum
and Minimum constraints that are set close together are
effectively blocking optimisation. Avoid using minimum
constraints during a prediction. The minimum constraints will be
honoured by the optimiser provided that the potential of the
system can sustain production above the minimum. If the
potential of the system is below the minimum, the optimisation
will not be successful.

2.5.5.4 Schedule
This is used during the prediction to change the joint constrains, include or exclude the joint
from forecast.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 251

We will note that masking of joints in the schedule will cause all the equipment that can not
produce into the separator to be masked as well.

2.5.6 Pipelines

Pipeline connections are represented by boxes drawn across the centre of the line connecting
two joints.

A pipeline is created by connecting two joints together.

One joint is needed to specify the beginning of the pipe
and another for the end.

Connections between joints and wells have no input screens. For GAP calculations these are
not pressure drop connections: No pressure drop calculations are run within an element to
joint connection. Therefore, these connections will not be displayed on the screen as pipelines.
The following screenshot illustrates the difference between pipeline connections (i.e. joint to
joint connections) where the pressure drops are calculated and simple links (i.e. joint to
element connections) where no pressure drop calculations are run.

The pipeline data entry / results screen has three sections (as explained in the details of
format for equipment in Summary section 149 ). These are itemised below:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 252 GAP

Summary This screen gives the status of various aspects of the method used to
Screen calculate pressure drops, the input data and the flow correlation in use for
the pipeline. See the following section for details
Input Screen Depending on the calculation method used, the required input data will
change. Please refer to the sections below on the data required for each
method
Results Contains the following fields:
Screen Network Solver Results.
Prediction Results

GAP allows to obtain all the details of the results of a pipeline

calculation ( see below 271 ), like PVT (viscosity, FVF,
densities, etc.), velocity, slug calculation and many other
profiles along the pipeline.
2.5.6.1 Pipeline Summary Screen
This is displayed by default when double-clicking on a pipe icon in the system window.
For example:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 253

This screen is similar to the Summary screens of all equipment nodes. Please refer to the
Separator Summary 232 screen section for general details.

Input data:

Label A maximum of 18 characters is allowed. It defaults to the name supplied

in the Label dialog box when the item was initially added to the system. If
blank, enter a name or abbreviation to identify uniquely the icon on the
screen display
Name Enter any name or description to see as a heading for this pipe in the
reports
Mask This option allows a joint to be included or omitted from the network
database and therefore the calculations for establishing the total system
responses. An 'X' over the icon indicates that this well has been masked
(excluded from the system). When a well is unmasked, all items above it
in the network database up to its separator are automatically unmasked

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 254 GAP

as well. Select:
Include in system
Mask (Excluded from the system unless it is scheduled to come
online during a prediction)
Disable (If an item is disabled, it will not come online, even if it is
scheduled to do so during a prediction)
Comments Unlimited number of characters allowed. Enter any string of comments
that gives more information about the pipe
Pipe Type Pressure drops in the pipe can be calculated using three options (see
below). One can use the internal correlations of GAP, using PROSPER
in line or by the use of lift curves. Options on the summary screen will
change depending on the method used. The following sections will
describe each of these in detail

Pipe Type
Pressure drops in the pipe can be calculated using three options.

GAP Internal Multiphase flow correlations are used for the pressure drop calculation
Correlations
Lift Curves Sets of VLP curves can be imported (for example from PROSPER or
from GAP Internal Correlations themselves)
PROSPER on line PROSPER within GAP is used for the dP calculations

One can use the internal correlations of GAP; PROSPER on line method or pipeline lift curves.
Options on the summary screen will change depending on the method used. The following
sections will describe each of these in detail.

The two pressure drop terms (gravity, friction) are displayed in the results section.

PROSPER on line allows to either generate lift curves for increased speed in
calculations, or to be used as such and take advantage of the thermal models
of PROSPER for accurate pipeline temperature predictions (Enthalpy balance
or Improved Approximation options)
2.5.6.2 GAP Internal Correlations
This section will describe the use of calculating pressure drops “on the fly” using the
internal PVT and pressure drop correlations of GAP.

Correlation Select from this drop-down list the correlation to use in the calculation
of pressure drops. In the presence of match data, then the correlation
selection will depend on the correlation that matches the data the
closest
Correlation These fields display the gravity and friction coefficients that are used in
Coefficients the calculation of pressure drops. These coefficients will be
recalculated in the event that the user performs a Match calculation. For

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 255

a correlation that matches measured data exactly, both parameters

should be 1
Oil Viscosity The oil viscosity correlation can be selected for each pipeline
Correlation independently of the oil viscosity correlation entered by default under
the System Settings (Edit | System Settings)
In the current version of GAP the Egbogah et al. correlation for heavy
oil viscosity is available
Oil Pb, Rs, Bo The Bubble Point, Solution Gas Oil Ratio, and Oil FVF correlations can
correlation be selected for each pipeline independently of the correlations entered
by default under the System Settings (Edit | System Settings).
In the current version of GAP the Al-Marhoun correlation is available
Gas Viscosity The gas viscosity correlation can be selected for each pipeline
Correlation independently of the gas viscosity correlation entered by default under
the System Settings (Edit | System Settings)
Emulsion It is possible to account for the effects of emulsion on fluid viscosity by
ticking the Emulsion box.
After that, a list can be accessed and edited, including all the emulsion
viscosity data
Lumping (active only when compositional model is enabled) This option allows to
Calculation specify which composition to use for the main calculation. if <System
Mode Default> is selected, the program will use the Lumped or the De-
Lumped composition as specified in the menu Options/Method
Data Summary This shows the status of the various aspects of item data. In the case
Area of a pipe, there are only three such areas

2.5.6.2.1 Pipe Input Data

If the link is to be used to model a section of pipe and to calculate pressure drops then
pipeline geometry will be required. If the Calculation Method is Pressure and Temperature (as
set up on the Options screen), then pipe Environment data is also required. All other data
entry is optional; however, matching is recommended if possible.

2.5.6.2.1.1 Pipe Environment

GAP can calculate Pressures Only for each pipeline, or it can calculate both temperature and
pressure. For the Pressure and Temperature case, the program requires information on the
surrounding environment of the pipe, as well as a heat transfer coefficient to run the
calculations. GAP uses this information to determine the rate of heat loss.

The following is a typical data entry screen:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 256 GAP

Surface Temperature Enter the temperature of the environment surrounding the pipe
Overall Heat Transfer This value accounts for steady state heat transfer by conduction,
Coefficient convection and radiation. The HTC is referred to the pipe inside
diameter
Heat Capacities Average values for Oil, Gas and Water.
Note that the Cp of gas is a function of temperature and pressure
and the value entered should be carefully checked - do not rely on
the defaults

2.5.6.2.1.2 Pipe Description

Click on this tab to enter the geometry of a pipeline. Up to 25 pipeline segments can be
entered. Pipe data must be entered from the Downstream (Separator) end to the Upstream
(Wellhead) end.

In this entry screen, begin at the top and work down to enter data, as shown in the following
example:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 257

Pipe Description Input Columns

Type Enter the kind of pipe or choke in use over this section.
The available types are:
Line Pipe
Choke
Coated
Flexible
Fitting

The pressure drop calculations are performed in the

same manner, irrespective of the pipe designation
(Line, Coated or Flexible).
Length Enter the total length of this pipe section. Equivalent lengths can be used
to account for pressure losses associated with elbows, bends etc.
TVD TVD depth is the depth at the upstream end (closest to the well) of the
pipe.
This entry field will be changed to Depth Change should the “Enter
Elevation As” option be switched to Segment Depth Change
Diameter Enter the inside diameter of the pipe
Roughness Enter pipe surface roughness.
The default value of 0.0006 inches corresponds to stainless steel, but it
can changed as necessary depending on the application

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 258 GAP

Fittings In the case where fittings are selected as part of the pipe equipment the
Program will prompt a screen to choose the type of fitting. Selecting the
“Choose” button above:

This screen is essentially a database with different K Values

corresponding to the fitting to be modelled.

The program will then use these K values in order to calculate the
equivalent length of pipe that will give the same pressure drop as the
fitting.

The formula used is HL = K(v2/2g)

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 259

Where:
HL = Velocity Head
K = Resistance coefficient
v = velocity
g = constant

K-Values are defined as the “Resistance Coefficients”.

Details on formulae and nomographs used can be found in
Crane's book “Flow of Fluids through Valves, Fittings and
Pipes”

If a fitting cannot be found in the database, then the “Uselr Entered k

Value” Option may be used in order to enter the K value directly:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 260 GAP

Heat If in the main program Options 70 the Improved Approximation is enabled,

Transfer then in the description data the Heat Transfer Coefficient along the
Coefficient pipeline is required, as shown below:

The depth reference that was used in the PROSPER well models is unimportant as the
connection between well and surface facilities is done with lift curves (a pressure drop

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 261

for given GOR, WC, WHP etc). However, the elevation of the surface pipelines
connected to each well must be entered with respect to a common reference in GAP.
For consistency and ease in troubleshooting, we recommend that the user should enter
all the depths in both PROSPER and GAP using the same reference point.
Chokes are included in the pipeline data input section only to model a fixed restriction in
the pipe. GAP optimiser will calculate the wellhead pressure drops required to meet
system constraints.
Include chokes in the pipeline description only when modeling the effect of a fixed
restriction.

Other Input Fields

Rate Multiplies the pipeline fluid velocity by this value.

Multiplier Identical parallel pipes can be modelled by entering a rate multiplier of 0.5
Max Length This is the iteration length used in the calculation of pressure drops over a
Step pipe length. This should not need to be altered, unless the pipe under
consideration is particularly long and the speed of calculation is particularly
important
Flow Type Either Tubing Flow or Annular Flow; if the annular flow is selected, it is asked
to enter the tubing outside information (roughness and ID) as well as the
casing inside information (roughness and ID)
Correlations / Select an appropriate pipeline correlation from those available. The
Coefficients correlation that is selected will be used in subsequent build operations, and if
the correlation has been matched to existing data the calculated coefficients
will also be incorporated (see below). The user may edit the coefficients by
hand if required
Match Click on this button to perform a pipeline matching to the available multiphase
correlations. The button will be coloured green if there is no match data
present, blue otherwise
Swap Node This button can be used to swap inlet (upstream) and outlet (downstream) of
a pipe work.
Note that the labels of the upstream and downstream nodes are displayed.
This display can be useful in building complex networks.

The small white arrows in the pipeline icon denote the upstream and
downstream direction of the pipeline. The node at which the arrows are
pointing towards is the downstream direction and the node they are pointing
away from is the upstream.
Small arrows denote upstream to downstream directions. Here, J2 is the
Downstream and this relates to the number on row 1 of the pipe description.
The upstream joint refers to the number on the bottom of the description.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 262 GAP

COPY, Select the row number of the desired pipe element/s and click on particular
PASTE, CUT, button to perform the appropriate task
INSERT,
DELETE
ALL This option can be used to select all the points in the pipe element
INVERT This option can be used to select all the other points than the one which is
presently selected

NOTE
Chokes are included in the pipeline data input section to describe the pressure drop due to
fixed restrictions in the pipe, and should only be used to model existing systems. Delta P
control should be used to have GAP calculate the unknown pressure drop required to satisfy a
constraint, thereby modeling a variable choke function. Do not include a choke in the
pipeline description in such cases.

When GAP detects steam in the system (either coming from a source or an injection
manifold), the U-value needs to be specified at the "Segment Type" level for all the
pipelines in the system, even if the temperature model selected in the main option is
"Rough approximation", as steam can potentially pass though it and the "Improved
approximation" temperature model be used by default.

The following example illustrates how to define a pipeline in GAP.

A pipeline is created every time 2 joints are linked. The depth reference that was used in the

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 263

PROSPER well models is unimportant as the connection between well and surface facilities is
none with lift curves (a pressure drop for given GOR, WC, WHP etc). However, the elevation
of the surface pipelines connected to each well must be entered with respect to a common
reference in GAP. For consistency and ease in troubleshooting, we recommend that the user
should enter all the depths in both PROSPER and GAP using the same reference point.

As an example the following sketch is used to represent a pipe description in GAP

NOTE: Please note that the above configuration can be merged in one single pipe; Up
to 100 rows are available to enter pipe data . This will speed up the calculation since
the are less elements interconnected in the system and in some cases avoid
confusion with the linking nodes reference.

The Upstream and Downstream side of the pipeline (for description purposes) will be
determined by which joint one starts to create the link and will be represented by 2 little white
arrows pointing to the downstream side.
This Upstream and Downstream definition has nothing to do with the actual flow direction, as
this will be ruled by the pressures in the system.

When describing the pipeline, the first row in the description screen corresponds to the joint at
which the white arrows are pointing (this is also indicated in the pipe diagram in the right-hand
side of the table). In this example the joint J2 ends at 13 ft (Downstream) and the pipe

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 264 GAP

upstream start at 0 feet

When describing consecutive pipelines, one should make sure that the consecutive pipelines
have the same TVD at the linking joint. The end (Downstream) of one pipe should be
consistent with the Upstream of the next pipe; in this example the linking node is J2, notice
that downstream of pipe 1 TVD correspond with the Upstream depth of pipe 2

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 265

To change the nodes (i.e. switch which joint corresponds to the top row and which joint
corresponds to the bottom row) click on the ‘Swap Nodes’ button.

Chokes are included in the pipeline data input section only to model a fixed restriction in the
pipe. GAP’s optimiser will calculate the wellhead pressure drops required to meet system
constraints. Include chokes in the pipeline description only when modeling the effect of a
fixed restriction.

2.5.6.2.1.3 Pipeline Pressure Matching

This section explains how to enter actual production rates and pressures, and then adjust the
pipeline pressure drop correlation parameters to achieve a match between model and actual
values. For design calculations, an appropriate correlation must be applied without matching.

By matching the pipeline pressure losses to real data, an accurate system model can be built
all the way from the wells through the gathering system up to the production separator.

Pipeline pressure drop matching is not compulsory before carrying out production rate or lift
gas allocation calculations. However, in order to ensure maximum calculation accuracy it is
recommended that the pipe matching step always be carried out whenever field data is

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 266 GAP

available.

A non-linear regression technique is used to adjust the selected pipe correlation to match the
measured producing pressures. To begin the matching process, click on the Match button in
the pipe description screen, as described above. The following screen will be presented:

To enter the pipeline match data, carry out the following steps:

Ensure that the rate type selected is the same as the test data. Choose either Liquid
Rates or Oil Rates.
Enter the test points in the grid columns. Up to ten different points may be entered at a
time.
Match rows can be removed or added to the calculation by selecting the row and then
clicking Enable or Disable as required.
After entered the data, click on Match to proceed with the calculation.

To perform the surface pipe pressure drop matching, carry out the following steps:

Click Match from the pipe match data entry screen, as described above. A surface
pipe match calculation screen will appear.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 267

Select the required correlations to match to from the list box: click All to select all the
correlations. For horizontal flow lines, use a pipeline correlation. For vertical pipes, (e.g.
platform risers), select a vertical flow correlation.
Click Match to start the calculations. Up to 300 iterations are performed by the match
routine; the process completes after 300 iterations or when the Match convergence
criteria are satisfied. The results of the matching can be viewed by clicking the Statistics
command button, as shown below:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 268 GAP

In this screen, the Reset buttons reset the fitting parameters for the given correlation to their
defaults. Similarly, Reset All resets all correlations.

The match parameters represent the corrections to the correlations that were required to
achieve a match.
Parameter 1 is the gravity term correction and Parameter 2 is the friction term correction. The
calculated parameters for the selected correlation are used in any subsequent build process
with this correlation.

The gravity loss is zero for horizontal pipelines: therefore the

gravity term cannot be matched. In such cases, Parameter 1 is
left set to 1.0. Refer to the PROSPER manual for more details
of the matching procedure.

Repeat the matching procedure for each pipe until all pipes have been matched to real data.
Provided that this step has been carefully carried out, the overall system model should not
require further adjustment in order to match actual production and pressure data.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 269

2.5.6.2.1.4 Constraints

In this section the user can apply certain constraints on the pipeline, such as Max velocity, C
factor and Line pressure. Please note that constraints with regards to rates can be set either
at the upstream or downstream node (joint) of the pipeline.

2.5.6.2.1.5 Schedule (ONLY for Prediction)

This is used during the prediction to change the pipeline constrains, include or exclude the
pipeline from forecast.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 270 GAP

Masking of Pipelines in the schedule will cause all the equipment

that can not produce into the separator to be masked as well.

Scheduling OPENSERVER Variables

Since IPM version 6, it is possible to schedule any variable change, using the variable
OPENSERVER access string. The variable OPENSERVER access string can easily been
accessed "Ctrl+Right clicking" on the variable tab.
For instance, it would be possible to schedule a change in the pipeline diameter t model a
workover assuming the OPENSERVER Access String for the pipeline diameter is previously
known:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 271

2.5.6.2.2 Pressure/Temperature gradient result

After the Network Solver is run (or after a prediction snapshot is reloaded), pressure and
temperature gradients calculated in the pipeline can be displayed.
Right click on the pipeline and select "Show Gradient":

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 272 GAP

Pressure and Temperature gradients can be displayed using the "Variables" option from the
plot menu bar.

To view the detailed results of the pressure drop calculation, access the Pipeline Summary
Screen, then Calculate.
After that, select Initialise from Solver results to import the results from the Network Solver
calculation. Then select Calculate: this will convert the pipeline temporarily into PROSPER on
line and will enable to view detailed Gradient Results.
The process is shown below:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 273

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 274 GAP

2.5.6.3 Using Lift Curves for the Pipeline Pressure Drops

This section will deal with the input screens when lift curves are used for calculating pipeline
pressure drops.

When the lift curve option is selected, the user needs to choose a model for generating these:

There are four options in the drop down menu:

External
GAP internal Correlations
PROSPER On line
PROSPER file

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 275

2.5.6.3.1 External
This option allows the user to enter a lift curve file that has been externally generated. The file
will need to be imported by selecting the lift curve button, as shown below:

In the screen that follows allows the user to import the lift curve file:

The “Import” Button will prompt a menu for selecting the file.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 276 GAP

The file can have the following extensions (as shown above):

*.tpd
*.mbv
*.ecl
*.vfp
*.snr

The *.tpd and *.mbv files can be generated by PROSPER. The difference between the two is
that the *.mbv file does not contain any temperature information and should ideally be used
only with a prediction in the MBAL software (as there is no surface network to carry
temperature information through).
The ecl and vfp formats are ones recognised by the Eclipse simulator.
The snr format is one recognised by the Sensor simulator.

Selecting one of these appropriate files will be imported into GAP and automatically converted
into a *.vlp file. This is a binary file that GAP will use in the calculations. If this file already
exists, then it can be imported by using the “Browse” instead of the “Import” button.

2.5.6.3.2 GAP Internal Correlations

The purpose of this Underlying Model is to allow generation of Lift Curves using the Internal
Correlations of GAP. The program will use the pipe description and correlations (matching
included) that have been entered in the data input screens (see above 255 ).
The advantage of this method is speed, as calculations do not need to be carried out during
the prediction or solve.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 277

Upon selection of the Lift Curves tab (shown above), the user is prompted with the following
screen:

As the file needs to be created, one needs to select “Generate” in order to get the following
screen:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 278 GAP

The parameters for which the VLP curves will be created need to be entered under “Data”.

Selecting the Fluid Type will automatically prompt the right parameters to use (for instance, in
the case of "mainly liquid", these are Liquid Rate, Upstream Pressure, GOR, WC and
Upstream temperature). The user can either enter the ranges manually or use the “Populate”
Buttons on the bottom of this screen.

It is important to notice that as pipelines can be flowing in two directions, the

range of rate selected for VLP calculation should include both negative and
positive rates, as in general the flow direction is not known before running the
calculation. The use of negative rates will allow the program to run calculations
even in the case the flow in not in the same direction as the pipeline convention
(defined by the drawing in the pipeline description section). An illustration of
entering negative rates is reported below:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 279

Selecting “OK” will lead the user back to the Generation Screen where selecting “Generate”
will start the calculations:

Progress can be monitored in the progress box at the bottom of this screen (shown above).

Pipe VLPs can also been generated in batch mode, assuming that several pipes have been

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 280 GAP

previously set to "Lift Curves". Please refer to the section "Batch Generation of Pipe VLPs 402 "
for more information.
2.5.6.3.3 PROSPER on line
The selection of this underlying method will allow the user to generate lift curves using the
PROSPER on Line feature to create a model for the pipeline from GAP. Selecting the
PROSPER on line method will prompt the following screen:

The main advantage of this method is that the user can

generate lift curves by using the advanced temperature models
available through PROSPER on Line

The Edit Pipe button allows the user to create the pipeline model using the PROSPER on Line
features.

Please refer to the next section, called "PROSPER on line Pressure Drops 283 " for a
detailed information on how modeling the pipe with PROSPER on Line.

In term of Lift Curves generation, the method is then the same as the one described in the
previous section called "GAP Internal Correlations 254 ".

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 281

Selecting “Options” will prompt the Options screen of PROSPER:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 282 GAP

Under model, one can select three options:

Rough Approximation
Enthalpy Balance
Improved Approximation

A description of the input required for each follows.

2.5.6.3.4 PROSPER file

The selection of this underlying method will allow the user to generate lift curves using an
existing PROSPER file (with the pipeline only option). When this option is selected, the
following screen should prompt:

The "Browse" button can then be used to attach the corresponding PROSPER file.
In term of Lift Curves generation, the method is then the same as the one described in the
previous section called "GAP Internal Correlations 254 ".

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 283

2.5.6.4 PROSPER On Line Pressure Drops

This option can be selected from the well summary screen:

Using this option will enable the user to calculate the pressure drops in a pipeline on the fly,
using the advanced temperature options which were up to now only available in PROSPER.
Traditionally, the temperature calculations in GAP were done using the rough approximation
method. Now the user can do these using the Enthalpy Balance or Improved Approximation
Method.

The advantage of using the PROSPER on Line over lift curves are:
No interpolation between lift curves if the exact conditions are not available is done.
Instead of pre-specifying the PVT as is the case in the lift curve generation, the
calculations are done with the PVT coming from the reservoirs depending on conditions.
This is particularly important in multilayer reservoirs where the contribution of each
reservoir can change over time.

The advantage of using the advanced temperature models over the rough approximation
method are:

When pipelines are being designed, but no match data is available, the Rough
approximation method is not sufficient as the heat transfer coefficient cannot be back
calculated. The enthalpy balance method allows accurate calculation of temperature in
this kind of scenarios.

The drawback of using the Enthalpy Balance method is speed, as the method is
computationally intensive.

In the Examples Guide an example of PROSPER 724 On-line Pipeline 724 can be used as
reference.

NOTE on CO2 injection models

When modelling pipelines carrying CO2 for injection purpose, it is important
to properly define the fluid options in the PROSPER on-line Options:
Fluid type: Retrograde Condensate
PVT Method: Equation of State

The next section explains how to enter the pipe data using the "Edit Pipe" option:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 284 GAP

2.5.6.4.1 Edit Pipe entry

The activation of the three temperature models (Rough Approximation, Enthalpy Balance and
Improved Approximation) can be done from “Options”:

And then under “model” the user can select the temperature model:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 285

The "Equipment" is then customized accordingly to the temperature model selected, as

described in the three next sections.

NOTE:
The Black Oil PVT correlations can be matched using the "PVT Matching" feature. More
information about the PVT matching option can be found in the PROSPER manual.
The "Solid" button allows specifying key parameters used in several complementary
calculations in PROSPER (Maximum Grain Size Diameter, Erosional Velocity,Liquid Loading
and Pigging).
Multiphase Flow correlations can be matched to test data using the "Correlation Matching"
feature. More information about the Multiphase Flow correlation matching option can be
found in the PROSPER manual.
The two matching parameters that result from the Multiphase Flow correlations matching
procedure can be accessed clicking on "Correlation Parameters".
"Correlation Threshold": It allows the user to specify alternative correlations to use for tubing
or pipeline when the angle (from the vertical for tubing and from the horizontal for pipelines)
exceeds a user-specified threshold value. This option is useful for modeling the riser for a
long subsea tie-back or for a highly deviated surface pipeline.
Enter the appropriate angles and correlations. Select Yes to the question Use

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 286 GAP

Threshold Angle to enable the feature. When enabled, the calculation screens will indicate that
this option is active.

2.5.6.4.1.1 Rough Approximation

If the Rough Approximation temperature model is selected, then the user needs to enter basic
information about the pipeline as well as the average surrounding temperature under
equipment. This model is essentially the same as using GAP internal correlations:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 287

2.5.6.4.1.2 Enthalpy Balance

The enthalpy balance method will calculate the heat transfer coefficient as a function of heat
losses due to Convection, Conduction and Radiation. This method is the most accurate
temperature calculation method available as it takes into account sea water velocities,
insulation, sea temperatures, burial depth etc.
For details on the equations, please refer to the PROSPER Manual.

To commence data entry for a new application, click All Edit. The program will then display all
the input screens in sequence. To go back and edit one particular equipment item, click the
button on the left of the appropriate item.

Surface Equipment
An example of the surface equipment screen is shown below:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 288 GAP

To calculate heat losses, additional data such as outside diameter, material type and
insulation (if used) are required to be input. The surface equipment model can utilise the
following equipment types:

Line pipe
Coated pipeline
Flexible tubes
user selected
Choke
Fittings

To allow for pipe bends and fittings in general, the

program contains a database with the K-values used to
model the fitting of choice.

The choke calculation handles both sub-critical and critical flow. The program will calculate
the temperature drop across the choke. Descriptive labels for each element can be entered in
the Label field if desired. Labels appear on reports and calculation screens.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 289

Surface equipment geometry can be optionally entered as TVD of the upstream end of the
pipe segment and length or as X, Y (from the manifold or the Xmas Tree) co-ordinate pairs.

The Rate Multiplier column enables to simulate the pressure drop due to several wells being
connected to a production manifold via a common surface flow line. The fluid velocity in the
flowline is multiplied by the value entered - thereby increasing the frictional pressure losses.
For most applications it should be left at its default value of 1. As an example, the pressure
drop in a flowline connected to 3 identical wells could be modelled using a pipeline rate
multiplier of 3. 2 parallel flowlines having identical dimensions can be modelled by entering the
actual dimensions for one pipe and a pipeline rate multiplier of 0.5. It is also possible to vary
the rate multiplier along the pipeline to simulate varying sections of dual pipelines for example.

The editing buttons Cut, Copy, Paste, Insert and Delete operate on data records that have
been selected by clicking on their row number button(s). All records can be simultaneously
selected by clicking the All button. Use the Import button to import data from a wide variety of
sources. Up to 200 pipe segments can be entered, enabling the user to model very long
pipelines.
Pipe insulation (e.g. concrete, foam or bitumen) can be modelled. To define the pipe
insulation click the Enter button to display the following screen:

Select the required insulation type from the drop-down list and then enter the thickness. Enter
the insulation beginning with the innermost layer.
PROSPER uses the thermal properties in its database to calculate the thermal conductivity of
the composite insulation. Click OK to return to the surface equipment screen. Different
insulations can be entered for each section of the flowline as required.
The calculated composite thermal conductivity is referenced to the pipe inside diameter.
Pipes can be laid on the surface (burial depth = 0) or buried. The diagram below shows the

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 290 GAP

burial depth geometry.

The burial depth is the distance between the soil surface and the bottom of the pipe (including
insulation, if present). The pipe is partially buried if the burial depth < O.D. of the insulated
pipe.

Ensure that the flowline pipe geometry is consistent with the

pipe burial depth. If necessary, insert another node and
change the burial depth for e.g. the riser.

The soil conductivity around buried surface pipes is taken

from the Thermal Properties database for the shallowest
rock type entered in the Lithology screen. In previous
PROSPER releases, the soil conductivity was fixed at 3.5 W/
m/K.

Temperature Data
Surface Environment data is required for the calculations of heat loss for surface flow lines
and well risers. Data must be entered according to the screens shown below depending on
whether prediction is being done offshore or on land (Specified from Options).

Temperature Data Input (Off Shore):

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 291

Temperature Data Input (On Land):

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 292 GAP

Databases
This optional feature is used to access the thermal properties databases for editing or addition
of user-defined materials. Select Databases and click Edit and the following selection screen
will be displayed:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 293

Enter appropriate values for the Conductivity of cement and casing.

Depending on the selection, PROSPER expects input of thermal conductivity, emissivity,
specific heat capacity, specific gravity or density.

Check that the correct units are used before entering the
thermal properties.

Edited values remain in memory and become part of a particular well model file when the file
is saved. To permanently save edited values or new user-defined entries for use in other
projects, click the Save button to write them to the database. The Reset button is used to
return all entries to their default values.

2.5.6.4.1.3 Improved Approximation

The advantage of using the Improved approximation option over rough approximation method
is that although a heat transfer coefficient accounts for the heat losses from the inside of the
pipe to the surroundings, the Joules-Thomson effect (cooling or heating of the fluid because of
pressure drop in the pipe) is also accounted for. This can be of particular importance to gas
pipelines, where the J-T effect can cause the formation of Hydrates in high pressure/low
temperature situations. In addition to this, the user can enter more than one U-values for

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 294 GAP

calculation of temperature drops (one for each segment of pipe).

Equipment entry for the Improved Approximation temperature model varies little from the
Rough Approximation option. Click on Equipment to display the following input screen:

To start data entry for a new application, click All Edit. The program will then display all the
relevant input screens in sequence. If data has already been entered, clicking the Summary
command button will display a summary of the current equipment. To go back and edit one
particular equipment item, click on the button beside the appropriate item.

Surface Equipment
Surface Equipment requires the user to enter the temperature of the pipe surroundings and an
overall heat transfer coefficient.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 295

The heat transfer coefficient can be specified for each pipe segment and should not be
confused with the pipe thermal conductivity. The heat transfer coefficient accounts for the heat
flow through the production tubing, annulus and insulation (if present) to the surroundings. Heat
transfer by forced and free convection, conduction and radiation must all be accounted for in
the value of the overall heat transfer coefficient.
In PROSPER the overall heat transfer coefficient is referenced to the pipe inside diameter.

2.5.6.5 Gradient Calculation

The PROSPER on line method also offers the user the facility of doing gradient calculations to
see the pressure and temperature variations along a segment of pipe. This can be done
through the “Calculate” button shown below:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 296 GAP

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 297

Results
After a solve network or a material balance prediction calculation is done, the user can look
into the results from the “Results” tab in the pipe summary screen:

Separate screens are available for the results depending on which calculation was done

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 298 GAP

(Solve or Prediction):

Scrolling to the right will reveal a new button which is active now and will perform the gradient
calculations along the pipe segment, thus showing the results not only up and down stream of
the pipe but also along the pipe as well:

The gradient calculations will yield a number of different

variables, like C factors, Flow regimes, holdup etc, which are
essential in pipeline design.

2.5.6.6 Bottlenecks
GAP can be used to detect "bottle necks" in the system:
After a "Solve Network" is run, the bottle necked pipelines are turned red.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 299

After a "Prediction" is run, a bottle neck flag is displayed in the pipelines prediction results,
under the "Status" results column.

Note that the option "Highlight Bottle Necked Pipes" has to be previously selected from the
"View" menu.
2.5.6.7 Emulsion correction
GAP includes a model that corrects the viscosity of the fluid in the presence of emulsions:

The emulsion correction will create a model for viscosity which will override the standard
viscosity calculation based on the viscosity of the water and the oil in the pipe. It is based on
the Woelflin correlation which can be matched to measured data. Selecting the “Emulsion”
checkbox will lead to the activation of the Edit List button.

GAP allows to create a different correction for each pipe in the system. Selecting the “Edit
List” button, will prompt a table where the different models can be selected:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 300 GAP

The emulsion correction model requires the match parameters to be entered, or created
based on the “Match” feature.

This will prompt the screen shown below:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 301

After entering the match data (the multiplier needs to be calculated based on the
measurements of the fluid without and with emulsions), the “Match” button will create a model
which can then be plotted:

The curve will look as shown below:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 302 GAP

The match performed with the parameters shown above will only change the first part of the
curve (Woelflin model – parameters 2 and 3). For the viscosity correction applying to water
cuts above the right plateau limit, an exponential decline is implemented that needs to be
matched manually using parameters 4 and 5.

Having done the match, the viscosity model can then be applied to one, some or all the
pipelines in the system:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 303

2.5.6.8 Wax or Hydrate Risk

GAP can also be used to determine if there is any risk or Wax or Hydrates being formed in
the system. In order to perform this prediction, the Compositional Model from the Options
Screen must be set to either Tracking or Fully Compositional. This is because the calculations
require the fluid compositional details.

If GAP does encounter an element where there is a potential for Wax or hydrate, a flag will be
raised in the pipe element as shown in the figure below.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 304 GAP

The flag above refers to the Solve Network results. With regards to the prediction, the flag will
be displayed in the Status column in the prediction results section.
2.5.7 Tanks

In GAP, Tanks (Reservoirs) are used to predict reservoir pressures and saturations for
Prediction runs only.

A Tank in GAP refers to a reservoir. It should not be confused with

Stock Tank conditions.

Tanks can be represented in GAP as

A reservoir pressure decline curve

MBAL Material Balance model file.

Please remember to activate the prediction to “ON” from the Options/

Method screen:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 305

Within GAP three methods can be followed to model reservoirs:

Material GAP can use MBAL Material Balance models to determine reservoir
Balance pressures and well GOR ’s and water cuts
Decline Decline Curves are entered as reservoir pressure as a function of
Curves cumulative production. The reservoir pressure decline therefore includes the
effects of aquifer pressure support or fluid influx from adjacent reservoir
units
External An external simulator (like REVEAL, Eclipse, Imex, MoReS,
Simulator CHEARS, etc.) can be linked to wells. This can be achieved by linking GAP
to the simulator using RESOLVE

Once a tank has been defined, production wells must be assigned to the tank. This can be
done either by:

Clicking the Tanks input tab from a Well data input screen, or
From the Tank data entry screen (see below), or
By dragging connections between wells and tanks, in a similar fashion to the creation of
pipeline links.

Wells can connect to more than one tank by entering appropriate

allocation factors (for single-layer wells);
Wells can connect to more than one tank by associating different tanks to
different well inflow layers (for multi-layer wells);

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 306 GAP

See below for more information on the assignment of tank connections.

The tank data entry / results screen has three sections (as explained in the details of format
for equipment, see above 149 ). These are itemised below:

Summary This screen gives the status of various aspects of the input data and the
Screen MBAL file that represents the reservoir (for MBAL prediction). It also
allows the user to select which method to use for Prediction
Input Includes tabbed screens for the following input fields:
Screen Well Connections (Valid/Invalid)
Constraints (injection system only) (Present/None/Invalid)
Production Data (decline curve prediction only) (Present/None/
Invalid)
Injection Fluid (Injection source)
Schedule (None/Some)
Results Contains the following fields:
Screen Network Solver Results
Prediction Results

2.5.7.1 Tank Summary Screen

Double-click on a tank icon in the system window to obtain a tank summary screen.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 307

Main features

Model The user can select the method of prediction. There are three
choices; Material Balance, Decline Curve, External Simulator (ref.
previous paragraph 304 )
Type The fluid type will be automatically selected from the PVT description
in the case of material balance prediction. The user can select the
fluid type in case of Decline Curve predictions. Choices are:
Oil
Gas
Retrograde Condensate
In a material balance prediction, the MBAL model file
decides the selection and this field is automatically
populated
PVT Model This field displays the PVT modeling option used by the reservoir
model. The options are: Black Oil, Fully Compositional and Tracking
MBAL File (Material Balance Prediction only)
For a material balance tank, this gives the name of the MBAL file
that contains the model for the tank. To select a new file, select the
Browse button next to this field and choose a file from the selection
dialog presented.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 308 GAP

Note that GAP must save all changes made in the data entry screen
(for all items since the screen was opened) if one changes the tank
file. A warning to this effect is produced when selecting a new file.
Number of Tanks (Material Balance Prediction only)
For a multi-tank, this displays the number of sub-tanks in the system
Tank ID (Material Balance Prediction only)
This displays the tank ID from the MBAL model file
Start of GAP will look up the start of production from the MBAL tank and
Production displays it here. In material balance mode only
End of History Again this is used for Material Balance model only. GAP will display
the end of history date in cases where the MBAL model contains
historical data
Original Oil The Original oil or gas in place is displayed
and Gas in Place
Run MBAL MBAL may be run with a DDE link by selecting this button. This is
recommended in order to avoid building the tank models separately

Multiple tanks
If a multi-tank MBAL file is loaded into this screen, the pie-slice icon
that represents the separate tanks will be replaced by a number of
icons, each corresponding to the tanks in the MBAL file. These may
be treated individually in assigning well – tank connections.
Transmissibility leaks between tanks are represented by lines joining
tanks together.

2.5.7.2 Tank Input Data (Material Balance Tank)

2.5.7.2.1 Constraints
This tab allows to enter constraints for the tank:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 309

2.5.7.2.2 Wells
For a tank to be considered in the prediction calculations it must be connected to one or more
wells. This can be achieved from this tab.
Alternatively, similar connections can be established using the following methods:
Connect the tanks from the wells screen by selecting the Tanks tab
Drag a link between a well and a tank on the system window

In this screen, select wells from the ‘Not Connected’ list and click the Add button to connect
them to the tank. Alternatively, disconnect wells by Removing them from the ‘Connected’ list:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 310 GAP

2.5.7.2.3 Injection
This section is only used in cases where there is no associated injection system and allows to
define the properties of the injection fluids, which are then used for pressure drop calculations.

The screen has the following appearance:

Gas Injection Select the injection source from the current list. The properties of the
Fluid selected source will be displayed in the Source Statistics area
below this.
If compositional tracking option is selected, the statistics section has
a composition button as well
Edit List Invokes the gas injection source dialog (as accessed from the
Options menu 76 item). Use this to update or add to the current
source list
Composition Allows the viewing (read-only) of the composition corresponding to
the selected source

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 311

2.5.7.2.4 Tank Schedule

This screen is similar to the schedule screens in other equipment nodes.
The user can enter the dates and nature of events that need to be investigated.

2.5.7.2.5 Tank Results

This screen is similar to the results screens in other equipment nodes.

2.5.7.3 Tank Input Data (Decline Curve Tank)

When the Decline Curve option is chosen, similar input tabs than the one used for Material
Balance tanks will be available, plus additional input data only relevant to this type of reservoir
model, and that will be described below.

Type This entry allows to define the main phase produced by the tank (Oil, Gas,
Retrograde Condensate)

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 312 GAP

2.5.7.3.1 Tank Production Data

The reservoir pressure decline curves should be entered from the beginning of a Decline
Curve Prediction run period; i.e. the reservoir pressure should be the current reservoir
pressure.

Cumulative production at the start of the prediction can be left at zero (predicted production
will be relative to the current cumulative production for the tank).
An example of a reservoir pressure decline curve (Production Data) input screen follows:

If one enters the current oil production it is possible to interpolate the data to estimate the
tank pressure corresponding to that production by pressing the Calculate button.

The reservoir pressure vs. cumulative production data can be entered by hand or pasted from
the Windows clipboard.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 313

Import from This feature allows to import and use as decline curve whatever
Prediction result was previously calculated for the tank, for example using an
Results MBAL model.
This option can be used when one wants to substitute the reservoir
model (for example, numerical simulation) with a quick decline curve
to perform many scenarios that would require long run times if the
simulator was used
Calculate Interpolates the table to find the tank pressure corresponding to the
value of Current Oil Production
Plot Plots the tank pressure against cumulative production, as entered in
the table.

2.5.7.3.2 Compressibility
This GAP option allows entering rock compressibility’s that vary with pressure.

There are two ways of defining the compressibility: on original volume and on tangent.

On Original The Cf at pressure P and V is defined using the formula,

Volume
Cf = - 1/Vi (V – Vi) / (P – Pi)

Where Vi and Pi are the pore volume and pressure at initial

conditions. This formulation means that the results are not
dependant on the time steps selected
On Tangent The Cf at pressure P and V is defined using the formula:

Cf = - 1/Vi (dV / dP)

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 314 GAP

Where dV/dP is the derivative at pressure P.

The program ALWAYS uses the original volume Cf so this column

must be entered to make the dataset valid.
However if the Use only has the Cf based on tangents, it is
possible to enter this column instead and then use the Calculate
button to calculate the Cf based on original volume.

:
.

2.5.8 Flares and Vents

NEW!!!

Flares and Vents are elements that can be used to account for emissions for reporting
purposes.

Flares and Vents act like sinks. Each flare or vent can be assigned a fix pressure or a fix rate.

These are two typical applications of flares and vent.

Note that the two elements are interchangeable, as their difference is only visual.
2.5.8.1 Summary and Input
These sections are the same as in Sinks 346 .
2.5.8.2 Results
The Results tab is exactly the same as any other element.

In the menu Prediction the results of the Flares and Vents are reported under Emissions.
To access the Emissions select the menu Prediction / View Prediction Results System
Emissions or, to plot, Plot Emissions Prediction Results.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 315

2.5.9 Pumps

Pumps are defined by their Performance Data, which can come from a model or entered by
the user depending of the selected pump type.

Three Types of pumps are available:

Performance This is a table that relates head and power consumed to operating
Curves rate. The lookup table can also have speed and gas/liquid fraction
as sensitivity variables. If desired, affinity laws can be used to scale
the calculations for actual vs. design speed. The pump pressure
calculations are based on an averaged rate through the pump; i.e.
the volume changes as the pressure increases from inlet to outlet
are taken into account. This averaged rate is then used as the input
to the performance table to obtain a head, which is converted into a
pressure using the average density of the fluid. Note that the
calculations are repeated sequentially for the number of stages
specified
Jet Pump The model of a Jet pump can be used to account for the pump
performance. The Jet pump can be selected from a list that mirrors

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 316 GAP

the database of pumps of PROSPER

Framo Pump The model of a FRAMO Multiphase pump can be used to account
for the pump performance. The pump can be selected from a list
that mirrors the database of pumps of PROSPER

When defining a pump, it should be always placed between two joints, one
at its suction and the other at its discharge. This is done, by dragging
connections between pumps and joints with the Link icon selected.
NOTE: the pump connections (represented by the white arrows) should be
consistent with the actual flow direction:

Summary This screen gives the status of various aspects of the input data for
Screen the pump. See the following section for details
Input Includes tabbed screens for the following input fields:
Screen Data (Valid/Invalid)
Control (OK)
Schedule (Prediction Only)
Results Contains the following fields:
Screen Network Solver Results
Prediction Results

2.5.9.1 Pump Summary Data

Double click a pump icon to display the pump input summary screen:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 317

Data Summary This shows the status of the various aspects of item data. These
Area will be described next

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 318 GAP

2.5.9.2 Pump Input Data

No of Stages This is the number of stages in the pump. The stages are modelled as
identical. Pre, post and inter stage separation can be set up via the
Stage Data screen
Use Affinity Laws The Use Affinity Laws option must be selected when entering pump
performance curve data. The pump model uses affinity laws to scale
the calculations from design speed to actual speed. The pump speed
values are entered by selecting the Control tab in the pump element
input dialogue
Actual Speed Current speed of operation of pump
Design Speed Design speed of operation of pump, to which the performance data
refers
Stage Data Allows the specification of pre post and inter stage separation and
cooling
Edit TPD Allows the creation/editing of performance data for the pump. When
creating the data from scratch, the after pressing Edit TPD, following
screen will appear.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 319

On this screen, choose the variables for performance tables. These

are:
Operating rate
Frequency
Gas Fraction
Rotational Speed
One needs at least operating rate as a variable. Fill the data in the
following table

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 320 GAP

Delete TPD Deletes the performance data entered for the pump. Once the
performance data is deleted, the pump input sections are treated as
new

2.5.9.3 Jet Pumps Option

When the pump is defined as Jet Pump, the database with available jet pumps will become
active as shown below:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 321

The user can then select the pump of choice, or edit the database to add more pumps if a
given pump does not already exist:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 322 GAP

2.5.9.4 Pump Calculate Button

On input data screen, there is a Calculate Button. This is the
Pump Calculator, which can be used to calculate the outlet
pressures, discharge temperature etc, for test data, given the
pump performance tables entered.

One selected, the calculation screen will appear:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 323

The rate type list box can be used to select the desired input rate type. Pressing Calculate will
perform the pump calculation for each line of data entered.

The Initialise from solver results button can be used to load as input
data the results of the latest Solve Network calculation. This allows to
check the pump performance in the same conditions as the main Solve
Network calculation.

This screen can be extremely useful in matching the performance of the model to that of a real
compressor. A typical set of performance curves for a centrifugal compressor consists of Inlet
Rate Vs Head, Inlet Rate Vs Power and Inlet Rate Vs Dicharge Pressure. So, having entered
the data, the user may enter various test points
to check if for a given rate, inlet pressure and speed, the correct oulet pressure is displayed.
If the pressure is not correct, then the polytropic efficiency of the machine can be changed to
match real performance for example.

Input Fields

Table Enter test rates and inlet conditions. The rate can be specified as a liquid
rate, oil rate or gas rate, the type being chosen from the Rate Type
combo box

Action Buttons

Calculate Calculates the output head, pressure etc for each test rate entered
Disable To disable a line, select the check box and press this button. Pressing
the button successively toggles the enabled/disabled state
OK Removes the dialogue, saving data entered

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 324 GAP

Cancel Removes the dialogue

Help Displays this screen

2.5.9.5 Pump Control

The pump model in GAP is controllable in terms of speed of operation in order to optimise
production. In order to activate the Control section, the user needs to provide information on
how the pump will perform at different speeds.
To this end, one can use either the affinity laws or use speed as one of the input variables.

The input screen will look like so:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 325

Speed Control
The options are:

Fixed for no control case, the pump calculations are done with actual speed

Actual Speed Speed to be used in fixed speed calculations

Calculated when the program calculates the speed of operation, which optimises
production and obeys the total system constraints

Actual Speed Speed to be used in fixed speed calculations (not

optimised calculations)
Optimised This will be selected by the optimiser of GAP when
Speed performing the calculations
Minimum Speed Operating range of the pump speed
Maximum Speed

2.5.9.6 Pump Schedule (ONLY for prediction)

Like any other equipment in GAP, for models with prediction enabled, the pumps can be
scheduled to be masked/ unmasked during predictions.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 326 GAP

2.5.10 Compressors

Once a compressor has been defined, it is always placed between two joints, one at its
suction and the other at its discharge. This is done, by dragging connections between
compressor and joints with the Link icon selected.

The three section buttons of the compressor have the following entries:

Summary This screen gives the status of various aspects of the input data
Screen for the compressor. The type of compressor is also selected in
this section
Input Includes tabbed screens for the following input fields:
Screen Data (Valid/Invalid)
Control (OK)
Schedule (Prediction Only)
Results Contains the following fields:
Screen Network Solver Results
Prediction Results

NOTE: The compressor connections (represented by the white arrows)

should be consistent with the actual flow direction:

2.5.10.1 Compressor Summary Data

Double click a compressor icon to display the compressor input screen:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 327

Main options

Type Select the type of Compressor here. The options available are:
Performance Curves (Full model)
Fixed dP Compressor
Fixed Power Compressor
Reciprocating
Data Summary This shows the status of the various aspects of item data
Area

2.5.10.2 Input Data for Compressor (Full Model)

This option is for modeling existing compressors with known performance curve data.
Compressors have a similar performance data tables to pumps, although of course the gas
rate is used. The rate at the inlet (calculated at that pressure and temperature) is used to look
up the head and power.
The head given by the table is interpreted as either polytropic head or isentropic head,

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 328 GAP

depending on the check box setting in the input screen.

The pressure calculations are performed by equating the head to that predicted from the
isentropic or polytropic compression of a gas (see Gas Conditioning and Processing, by J.
Campbell).
The fundamental equation used to correlate head and inlet/outlet conditions in a compressor is
given by:

Main input data

No of Stages This is the number of stages in the compressor. The stages are
modelled as identical. Pre, post and inter stage separation and
inter-cooling for compressors can be set up via the Stage Data
screen
Use Affinity Laws The Use Affinity Laws option must be selected when entering
compressor performance curve data. The compressor model uses
affinity laws to scale the calculations from design speed to actual
speed. The compressor speed values are entered by selecting

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 329

the Control tab in the compressor element input dialogue.

In certain cases, it is likely that the Performance Curves of the
Compressor are defined at the ‘Design Speed’ only. If the
objective is to perform the calculations at a speed which is
different from the Design Speed, then the ‘Affinity Laws’ can be
used. The affinity laws allow the performance curves to be scaled
to a different speed.
The affinity laws are also helpful when optimizing on the
Compressor Speed, where these laws are used to define the
performance of the compressor at speeds other than the Design
Speed
Use Overall Head (to fluid) and the Overall Efficiency are used to determine
Efficiency the power required by the machine based on the power given to
the fluid (calculated from the Head).
If not selected, the user can directly enter the power consumed
by the compressor and the program will calculate the efficiency
Actual Speed Current speed of operation of pump/compressor
Design Speed Design speed of operation of pump/compressor, to which the
performance data refers
Polytropic Efficiency When performing the calculations, the head required by GAP is
the ‘Polytropic Head’.
GAP will use the ‘Polytropic Efficiency’ to convert the ‘isentropic
head’ into ‘polytropic head’.
It is also possible to define the ‘Polytropic Efficiency Multiplier’ at
various ‘Operating Rates’ to account for the variation of the
polytropic coefficient with the rate flowing through the
compressor. This Polytropic Efficiency Multiplier will scale the
Polytropic Efficiency depending on the operating rates so that the
performance of the compressor is captured accurately
Use Polytropic Head When checked, the head in the performance data is taken to refer
to polytropic head, otherwise the head is isentropic head.
If the option ‘Use Polytropic Head’ is selected, then the Head
defined in the performance curves will be treated as ‘Polytropic
Head’.
If the Isentropic Head is available, then this can be indicated by
removing the stated option
Edit TPD Allows the creation/editing of performance data for the
compressor.When manually entering data, select Edit TPD, to
access the following screen.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 330 GAP

On this screen, choose the variables for performance tables.

These are:
Operating rate
Frequency
Gas Fraction
Rotational Speed
Delete TPD Deletes the performance data entered for the pump. Once the
performance data is deleted, the pump input sections are treated
as new

Performance Curve Input Data

Compressor performance data can be entered in the following screen. The minimum amount
of data necessary to describe the compressor performance is the operating rate relationship
with head and power.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 331

The data required by performance curves are: curves of operating rate vs head to fluid and
power to machine, where:

Operating rate The gas rate flowing through the compressor, expressed at inlet
conditions
Head Measure of the energy (expressed in unit length) given to the fluid

Power Power provided to the machine

Polytropic Multiplier is used to modify the polytropic efficiency with varying
Efficiency flow rate
Multiplier

The Head is the energy provided to the fluid and as such it is used to directly
determine the dP provided by the compressor.
The Power, instead, is an external power that is given to the machine. It is used only
for reporting and for constraining the system and is not used to determine the
compressor dP.

Knowing the Head, it is possible to determine the power given to the fluid. The ratio of
this power by the entered external Power is the compressor efficiency.

If Overall Efficiency entry is enabled, in the place of the Power the user can enter the Overall
Efficiency. The Overall Efficiency represents the ratio between the power to fluid (given by the
Head) and the power to the machine, knowing the Head and the Overall Efficiency, one can
determine the power required by the compressor.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 332 GAP

Surge/Choke
Two additional variables enable to specify the compressor operational limits (i.e. stonewall
and surge).

Minimum Rate (i.e. Surge)

For every single compression stage, the minimum rate will be re-
circulated in the compressor: there will always be this rate flowing
through the compressor
Maximum Rate (i.e. Stonewall)
This maximum rate will be seen as a constraint applied on the
compressor considered

Important: To have a good definition of the compressors performance, the curves defined in
GAP should have atleast one point outside the operating range of the envelope. In other
words, there must be at-least one point below the surge limit and one point above the choke
limit. This allows for the operating conditions to be accounted for.

Example of Performance Curve

An example of the operating curves is as shown in the following figure. This example has the
performance curve at various rotational speeds.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 333

Compressor Performance Curves

Plot of Head Vs Operating Rate at various speeds

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 334 GAP

Plot of Power Vs Operating Rate at various speeds

2.5.10.3 Input Data for Fixed dP Compressor

This model will apply the specified pressure difference across the compressor.
This model will also be an approximation to the actual performance of a compressor; as it will
apply a constant dP independent of the flow rates flowing in the system.

This compressor module should be used only for scoping

studies, when the compressor has not been selected yet.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 335

Main Input data

No of Stages This is the number of stages in the compressor. The stages are
modelled as identical. Pre, post and inter stage separation and
inter-cooling for compressors can be set up via the Stage Data
screen
Polytropic The polytropic efficiency is used for passing from isentropic
Efficiency coefficient (k) to polytropic coefficients (n). For recall, k is the ratio
of specific heat, Cp/Cv. It is used for the discharge temperature
calculation
Delta P Pressure gain across each stage

2.5.10.4 Input Data for Fixed Power Compressor

This model specifies a constant supply of Power to the compressor. GAP will use this power
to calculate the Head developed by the compressor for the flow rate and thus calculate the dP
across the compressor.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 336 GAP

Main Input Data

No of Stages This is the number of stages in the compressor. The stages

are modelled as identical. Pre, post and inter stage separation
and inter-cooling for compressors can be set up via the Stage
Data screen
Poly Efficiency The polytropic efficiency is used for passing from isentropic
coefficient (k) to polytropic coefficients (n). For recall, k is the
ratio of specific heat, Cp/Cv. It is used for the discharge
temperature calculation
Power per The overall power input per stage of the compressor
Stage
Overall Overall efficiency, used to correct overall power input to actual
Efficiency input to the compressor
Surge This represents the minimum surge rate. If the rate entering
Minimum the compressor decreases below the minimum surge rate,
Rate recirculation is activated, so that the actual flow through the
compressor equals the minimum surge rate. The head is then
calculated based on the minimum surge rate head

Efficiency

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 337

Overall Eff. This section enables to enter an overall efficiency multiplier as a

Multiplier function of the rate passing through the compressor. This
enables to take into account the efficiency variation with rate

This compressor module should be used in the design phase (when the
compressor has not been yet selected) or for scoping studies.
A fixed power compressor by definition will give infinite head for low rates and
may provide with inconsistent results.

Because of this, a curve of efficiency vs rate should be entered to avoid infinite

head.
2.5.10.5 Input Data for Reciprocating Compressor
Four types of Reciprocating compressors can be modeled:
Single Acting Head End
Single Acting Crank End
Tandem
Double Acting

The number of Stages is required, and for each stage the inputs are:
Number of cylinders
Stroke length
Rod diameter
Clearance (as a percentage)

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 338 GAP

2.5.10.6 Compressor Control (Full Model Only)

The compressor model in GAP is controllable in terms of speed of operation. The overall
power constraint specified at field level is what determines the speed of the compressors.

The input to the control section is

Speed Control

Fixed for no control case, the pump calculations are done with actual speed

Actual Speed Speed to be used in fixed speed calculations

Calculated when the program calculates the speed of operation, which optimises
production and obeys the total system constraints

Actual Speed Speed to be used in fixed speed calculations (not

optimised calculations)
Optimised This will be selected by the optimiser of GAP when
Speed performing the calculations
Minimum Speed Operating range of the pump speed
Maximum Speed

2.5.10.7 Compressor Schedule (ONLY for Prediction)

Like any other equipment in GAP, for models with prediction enabled, the compressor can be
scheduled to be masked / unmasked during predictions.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 339

2.5.10.8 Compressor Calculate Button

Just like in the pump input data screen, on the Compressor input data screen, there is a
Calculate Button. This is the Compressor Calculator, which can be used to calculate the
outlet pressures, discharge temperature etc.

The rate type list box can be used to select the desired input rate type. Pressing Calculate will
perform the compressor calculation for each line of data entered.

The Initialise from solver results button can be used to load as input data the
results of the latest Solve Network calculation. This allows to check the
compressor performance in the same conditions as the main Solve Network
calculation.

NOTE: If the compressor is set to Controllable, then the solution speed from a
solve network must also be updated in the main compressor input screen prior
to using the performance calculator for results comparison, etc.

When using the compressor performance calculator to review optimised

compressor results for multistage reciprocating compressors, the optimised
compressor speed MUST be entered in the compressor input screen prior to
using the performance calculator utility.
2.5.10.9 Operating point in Plot
NEW!!!
The operating point can be displayed by accessing the TPD Input section after running a Solve
Network calculation and plotting the compressor performance curve. GAP will display the
operating point along with the compressor curve:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 340 GAP

2.5.10.10 Surge and Choke

In GAP it is possible to define the Surge Rate (Minimum Rate) and Choke Rate (Maximum
Rate) for the particular compressor.

During the compressor calculations, if the compressor rate falls below the Surge Limit, then
GAP will recycle the quantity of gas that is required. This means that if the Surge (Minimum)
Limit is reached, the Head reported by GAP will correspond to the surge rates even though
the actual throughput of gas (from the upstream elements) is less than the surge limit.

If the quantity of Gas produced upstream of the compressor is greater than the Choke Limit,
then GAP will increase the speed of the compressor so that the operating rate falls within the
operating range of the compressor (This is only if the compressor speed is controllable.)
2.5.10.11 Efficiency vs rate
This can be accessed by clicking in the Efficiency tab.
This table allows to enter the variation of the overall efficiency of the fixed power compressor
with the operating rates.
The section is optional, however, when using Fixed Power compressor it is recommended to
enter the curve of Efficiency with rate, in order to reduce the head given to the fluid and avoid
inconsistent negative inlet pressures.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 341

2.5.11 Sources / Sink

When entering a source/sink element in the network, the following dialogue is displayed, to
select either a Source or a Sink:

Sources/ Sinks are connected to the main surface network via a

joint

2.5.11.1 Source
Source is a point in a network, where a given rate of fluid (defined by the user or taken from a
separator) is injected into the system, and to achieve that, the necessary pressure is applied:
the required pressure at the source for the injection to be possible is calculated by GAP.
The source element can be used in two different ways, depending on the objectives to
achieve:

Fixed When the source is linked only to a joint, it injects in the system a fixed rate of
rate / a user-defined fluid.
pressure In this way inline injection or even contribution of fluid from a nearby field, for
sources example, can be modelled.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 342 GAP

Separator Sources that are connected to separators and handle a separated stream (
oil/gas/ gas, oil, water or a mixture thereof).
/water When a source is linked directly to a separator (fixed pressure or inline
line separator) the source can be used to pick on of the phases (oil, gas or
water) and send it to a downstream network.
In order to inject that amount of fluid, it will apply the necessary pressure,
allowing in this way to model the outlet of a pump or of a compressor. This is
particularly useful in design phase, to determine the duty of pumps and
compressors.

To define which phase to pick up through the source, access the source
Summary screen and select the Type as shown below:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 343

2.5.11.1.1 Source Data Entry

The three section buttons of the source have the following entries:

Summary This screen gives the status of various aspects of the input data
Screen for the source. The type of source is also selected in this
section
Input Includes tabbed screens for the following input fields:
Screen Fluid (Valid/Invalid)
Fixed Rate(Valid/Invalid)
Schedule (Prediction Only)
Results Contains the following fields:
Screen Network Solver Results
Prediction Results

2.5.11.1.1.1 Source Summary Data

This following screen is the source summary data screen.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 344 GAP

Main Options

Type Here the type of source is selected. The options depend on

whether or not the source is connected to a separator.
Standalone If the source is independent source, the
sources options are:
Fixed Rate
Fixed Pressure
Sources For sources connected to separators, the
connected options are:
to Separated gas
separators Separated water
Separated Oil
Depends on Indicates the separator directly connected to the source
Pressure If ticked Yes the source will have the same pressure as the
constrained connected separator, otherwise (recommended in most cases) the
source will apply the required pressure to transfer the fluid to a

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 345

downstream network, modeling in this way the effect of a

compressor of a pump
Data Summary This shows the status of the various aspects of item data
Area

The separated oil stream, contains the remainder of the fluid

inlet stream after the user defined gas % and water % are
separated in the separator.

For defining the fixed rate and the fluid, we go to the following screen from the summary area
and define the inlet fluid rate and the temperature.

2.5.11.1.1.2 Source Data Input

From the summary area the fluid source is defined in the following screen:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 346 GAP

Select from the drop down list the gas / water injection source to be applied to the system
derived from this manifold. When the injection system is associated with a production system,
the source must be chosen from the list maintained with the production system. Otherwise the
user may select the source from the injection system list.
The properties of the source selected here are displayed in the ‘statistics’ area at the bottom
of the screen.

Edit List This button allows to edit the gas / water / steam injection source
list
Fluid This can be used to view the details of the properties of the
Properties injection fluid. In case one of the compositional options is enabled,
the Injection Fluids section will have a ‘composition’ button as well.
Clicking this will display the composition associated with the injected
fluid that will be used in the calculations

2.5.11.1.1.3 Source Schedule (ONLY for Prediction)

For Prediction runs, like any other equipment, sources can be scheduled from this screen.

2.5.11.1.1.4 Steam Stream

Refer to the section "Equipment Data | Separator (Production / Injection ) | Injection Source
Details 237 | Steam Stream"
2.5.11.2 Sink
Sink is a point in a network, where a given rate of a fluid (a user input) is removed from the
system at the connecting joint.
Sinks need to be linked to a joint.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 347

Label Short label used to distinguish equipments on the system

drawing. Up to 12 characters are allowed
Edit Takes to the data entry screen for the source
Cancel Takes to the main GAP drawing

2.5.11.2.1 Sink Data Entry

The three section buttons of the sink have the following entries:

Summary This screen gives the status of various aspects of the input
Screen data for the sink
Input Includes tabbed screens for the following input fields:
Screen Fixed Rate(Valid/Invalid)
Schedule (Prediction Only)
Results Contains the following fields:
Screen Network Solver Results
Prediction Results

2.5.11.2.2 Sink Summary Data

This following screen allows the data entry for the sinks

Type Here we select the type of the sink. Only one option is available:
Fixed Rate
Data Summary This shows the status of the various aspects of input datasets
Area

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 348 GAP

2.5.11.2.3 Sink Input Data

On the rate data entry screen, the rate type is defined. The options are:
Water
Gas
Oil
Liquid

2.5.11.2.3.1 Sink Schedule (ONLY for Prediction)

For Prediction runs, like any other equipment, sinks can be scheduled from the schedule
screen.

2.5.12 Inline Elements

This is generic piece of equipment that can be placed anywhere in the surface network
between two joints.

When an inline element icon is placed in the main window, the user will get the following
dialogue, allowing the selection of various types of inline elements.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 349

The options available are:

Inline Gate Valve

Inline Check Valve
Inline Separation
Inline Choke
Inline Injection
Inline General (up to now known as “Inline Programmable”)

Inline Elements are placed in the main surface network between

two joints.

Label Short label used to distinguish equipments on the system drawing.

Up to 12 characters are allowed
Edit Takes to the data entry screen for the element
Cancel Reverts back to the main GAP screen

2.5.12.1 Inline Gate Valve

The Inline Gate Valve is an on / off type of valve. This element
should be placed in network, if we want to control the start /
stop of the flow of fluids through certain parts in the network.

The three section buttons for data input of the Inline Gate valve have the following entries:

Summary This screen gives the status of various aspects of the input data
Screen for the Inline Gate Valve. The type of Inline Gate Valve is also
selected in this section

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 350 GAP

Input This section contains an entry screen for the Schedule (ONLY
Screen FOR PREDICTION CASES)
Like any other equipment in GAP, for models with prediction
enabled, the gate valves can be scheduled to be masked /
unmasked or bypassed / unbypassed during predictions
Results Contains the following fields:
Screen Network Solver Results
Prediction Results

2.5.12.1.1 Inline gate Valve Data Summary Screen

Main options

Type Here we select the type of the element.

Two options are available:
Gate Valve
Check Valve
Status When selecting the type gate valve, two options are available:
Open
Close
Data Summary This shows the status of the various aspects of input datasets
Area

2.5.12.1.2 Input Data / Schedule ( ONLY for prediction)

Like any other equipment in GAP, for models with prediction enabled, the gate valves can be
scheduled to be masked/ unmasked during predictions.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 351

2.5.12.2 Inline Check Valve

The Inline Check Valve should be placed in a surface network, if
the objective is to physically stop the flow reversal in a segment
of the surface lines.

The three section buttons for data input of the Inline check valve have the following entries:

Summary This screen gives the status of various aspects of the input
Screen data for the Inline check Valve. The type of Inline check is also
selected in this section
Input This section contains an entry screen for the Schedule (ONLY
Screen FOR PREDICTION CASES)
Like any other equipment in GAP, for models with prediction
enabled, the check valves can be scheduled to be masked /
unmasked or bypassed / unbypassed during predictions
Results Contains the following fields:
Screen Network Solver Results
Prediction Results

2.5.12.2.1 Inline Check Valve Data Summary Screen

The Inline Check valve has the following data entry screen:

Type Here we select the type of the element.

Two options are available:
Check Valve
Gate Valve
Data Summary This shows the status of the various aspects of input datasets

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 352 GAP

Area

2.5.12.2.2 Input Data / Schedule ( ONLY for prediction)

Like any other equipment in GAP, for models with prediction enabled, the check valves can be
scheduled to be masked/ unmasked during predictions.

2.5.12.3 Inline Separation

If there is a separation within the network, where the pressure

values are not fixed like a separator, but floating, the inline
separation element can be used.

The three section buttons of the inline separation have the following entries:

Summary This screen gives the status of various aspects of the input
Screen data for the inline separation. The type of inline separation is
also selected in this section.
Input Includes tabbed screens for the following input fields:
Screen Separation (OK/Invalid)
Schedule (Prediction Only)
Results Contains the following fields:
Screen Network Solver Results
Prediction Results

2.5.12.3.1 Inline Separation Data Summary Screen

The Inline Separation has the following data entry screen:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 353

Type Here we select the format in which inline separation variables are
defined.
The following options are available:
% Separation
Fixed Q Removal
Data Summary This shows the status of the various aspects of item data
Area

2.5.12.3.2 Inline Separation Data Input Screen

The separated oil stream, contains the remainder of the fluid

inlet stream after the user defined gas % and water % are
separated in the separator.

If Fixed Q Removals had been chosen in Type, The separation

parameters are rates rather than % values.

2.5.12.3.3 Input Data / Schedule (ONLY for prediction)

Like any other equipment in GAP, for models with prediction enabled, the inline separators
can be scheduled to be masked/ unmasked during predictions.

2.5.12.4 Inline Choke

If there is fixed / controllable choke in the pipeline network, this
element can be used.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 354 GAP

The choke model implemented in GAP is based on the Perkins choke model.

The three section buttons of the inline choke have the following entries:

Summary This screen gives the status of various aspects of the input
Screen data for the inline choke
Input Includes tabbed screens for the following input fields:
Screen dP Control (OK)
Schedule (Prediction Only)
Results Contains the following fields:
Screen Network Solver Results
Prediction Results

2.5.12.4.1 Inline Choke Data Summary Screen

The Inline Choke has the following data entry screen:

Data Summary This shows the status of the various aspects of item
Area data

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 355

2.5.12.4.2 Inline Choke dP Control

The options for entering the pressure drop are:

None No pressure drop across choke considered

Fixed dP A fixed pressure loss equal to value entered is taken
for all rates
Fixed Choke the choke size is considered being constant
Diameter
Calculated The drop calculated by GAP

The option Calculated determines the best setting for the choke in order to optimise
production and satisfy various constraints specified in the system.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 356 GAP

Note that there is a choke calculator online that allow to

estimate the choke size for given inlet and outlet conditions:

The plot button allows displaying the performance curve of the

choke with the current operating point.

The discharge coefficient relates the actual flow to the ideal

frictionless flow.
By default the discharge coefficient is 1, which means that the
Perkins model is used as such. If choke measurements are
available, it is possible to tune this parameter so that the choke
model reproduces them. This feature makes the choke model
in GAP general and customizable.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 357

2.5.12.4.3 Input Data / Schedule (ONLY for prediction)

Like any other equipment in GAP, for models with prediction enabled, the inline chokes can be
scheduled to be masked/ unmasked during predictions.

2.5.12.5 Inline Injection

If there is injection of a particular within the network, this option
may be used. Examples are: riser lift gas injection, inhibitor
injection in surface lines, etc.

The three section buttons of the inline choke have the following entries:

Summary This screen gives the status of various aspects of the input
Screen data for the inline choke
Input Includes tabbed screens for the following input fields:
Screen Fluid (OK / Invalid)
Injection Rate (OK / Invalid)
Schedule (Prediction Only)
Results Contains the following fields:
Screen Network Solver Results
Prediction Results

2.5.12.5.1 Inline Injection Data Summary Screen

The Inline Injection has the following data entry screen:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 358 GAP

Data Summary This shows the status of the various aspects of item
Area data

2.5.12.5.2 Inline Injection Data Input Screen

For defining the fixed rate and the fluid, we go to the following screen from the summary area
and define the inlet fluid rate and the temperature.

2.5.12.5.2.1 Defining the Injection Rate

In this screen, we define the rate, inlet temperature and rate type of the injection fluid.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 359

Type Two options are available:

Fixed A fixed rate is defined which is
injected into the network at that point
Optimised GAP will inject a rate that minimises
the pressure loss in the network
downstream of the injection point in
order to maximise production
Rate Define the rate of injection or maximum rate of
injection
Temperature Define the injection fluid temperature

The optimised method can be used to model RISER LIFT

scenarios

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 360 GAP

2.5.12.5.2.2 Defining the Injection Fluid PVT

Select from the drop down list the gas / water injection source that one would like to be
applied to the system derived from this manifold. When the injection system is associated with
a production system, the source must be chosen from the list maintained with the production
system. Otherwise the user may select the source from the injection system list.
The properties of the source that is selected here are displayed in the ‘statistics’ area at the
bottom of the screen.

Edit List This button allows to edit the gas / water / steam injection source
list
Fluid This can be used to view the details of the properties of the
Properties injection fluid. In case one of the compositional options is enabled,
the Injection Fluids section will have a ‘composition’ button as well.
Clicking this will display the composition associated with the injected
fluid that will be used in the calculations

2.5.12.5.3 Schedule (ONLY for prediction)

Like any other equipment in GAP, for models with prediction enabled, the inline injection
elements can be scheduled to be masked/ unmasked during predictions.

2.5.12.6 Inline General

The inline General (Programmable) element can be used to
define a variety of speciality equipment parts/ like pressure loss
elements, control valves, heat exchangers etc in the surface
network through an internal script.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 361

The three section buttons of this element have the following entries:

Summary This screen gives the status of various aspects of the input
Screen data for the inline General element
Input Includes tabbed screens for the following input fields:
Screen Script (OK)
Variables (None/Some)
Schedule (Prediction Only)
Results Contains the following fields:
Screen Network Solver Results
Prediction Results

2.5.12.6.1 Notes on Inline General Elements

Inline programmable objects are objects whose behaviour is controlled by a program script
rather than a particular physical model (e.g. pipe). These can therefore be used to create a
user defined equipment type.

The syntax used is similar to the C programming language, and the variables considered can
be accessed using strings similar to the one used in OPENSERVER.

It is important to notice than when using an inline element, only the current model (i.e.
Production or Injection) can be accessed. The inline script cannot access the injection model
when the inline element is located in the production model.

The following example shows the basic structure of a program script.

The example applies a fixed pressure drop over the object.

Example: DeltaPressure = 50.0;

Apply a fixed pressure PRESOUT = PRESIN - DeltaPressure;
drop of 50 psi over the if ( PRESOUT < DeltaPressure )
inline element PRESOUT = DeltaPressure;

Each line must be terminated by a semi colon. Local variables 362 (such as DeltaPressure) do
not need to be declared.

One can access various variables defined in GAP that correspond to the inlet and outlet
conditions of the inline programmable object, as well as during the solver to most of the
variables the solver is using to calculate.
In the above example, PRESOUT is the outlet pressure and PRESIN is the inlet pressure.
These values can be changed by the script.

The Inline General Element uses Field Units in all calculations.

NOTE: All calculated Fluid Density values are returned in SI

Units i.e., g/cc.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 362 GAP

2.5.12.6.2 Inline General Input Data (Script) Screen

The following screen is used to write the script for the element or associate the element with a
script file *.gsc by using the browse button at the top of the screen.

2.5.12.6.3 Inline General Script Variables

There are three different classes of variables that can be defined and used in the inline
general element script:

Local Temporary These variables are defined by the user within the script to for
Variables instance proceed to calculations internal to the script.
The values associated to these variables are lost at the end of
the script
Temporary These variables are defined using the TEMPVAR[0…10] or
Variables ITEMPVAR[0…10] keywords. See section below 366
The values associated to these variables are initialised to 0 at
the beginning of the solver calculation.
The values associated to these variables can be kept
throughout the solver calculation process (i.e. they will be kept
throughout the solver calculation iterations) but will be lost at the
end of the solver calculation
Permanent These variables are defined within the inline general script and
Variables their value can then be accessed and modified within the
Variable screen of the inline general element. These variables
will be kept throughout the entire calculation

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 363

Important Note on Permanent Variables

These variables are not re-initialized when the run ends or is cancelled,
therefore it is recommended to use these variables only for fixed values such
as constraint for instance, and to avoid having them modified during the
calculation.

These variables should only be used to define a state (i.e. such as open,
closed) or a parameter (i.e. such as frequency, power, efficiency, delta P) that
will be used by the associated script to model the behaviour of this inline
element.

These permanent variables must not be used to store temporary values during
a solver or prediction run.
This will severely slow down the solver and may cause repeatability issues. At
the end of the solver, these variables are left with the value stored in them on
the last iteration of the solver or when the Cancel button was clicked.

Instead, the TEMPVAR and ITEMPVAR arrays need to be used to store

temporary values.

The user defines the name of each variable. Name of existing or predefined
script variables are not allowed. Therefore, any name starting with VAR should
be adequate.

There is no limitation to the number of user defined variables.

These variables will be accessible through OPENSERVER, and the

OPENSERVER string can be found using the Ctrl + Right Click facility.

2.5.12.6.4 Schedule (ONLY for prediction)

Like any other equipment in GAP, for models with prediction enabled, the inline general
elements can be scheduled to be masked / unmasked during predictions.

2.5.12.6.5 Inline Element Variables

This section lists the variables that can be changed or accessed in the script and their
associated units.

Five stream arrays exist in an inline element:

IN[...] Inlet stream

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 364 GAP

OUT[...] Outlet stream

SEPGAS[...] This is a stream (called gas but not necessary being gas) that
is separated and sent to a gas source connected to the inline
general element
SEPOIL[...] This is a stream (called oil but not necessary being oil) that is
separated and sent to an oil source connected to the inline
general element
SEPWAT[...] This is a stream (called water but not necessary being water)
that is separated and sent to a water source connected to the
inline general element

The following keywords can be used to access the array values :

CO2 CO2 mole percent (mole percent)

CO2FREE injected gas CO2 mole percent (mole percent)
DILSG diluent specific gravity (sp. grav)
GGHV gas gross heating value (MMBTU/d)
GNHV gas net heating value (MMBTU/d)
H2S H2S mole percent (mole percent)
H2SFREE gaslift gas H2S mole percent (mole percent)
N2 N2 mole percent (mole percent)
N2FREE injected gas N2 mole percent (mole percent)
PRES pressure (psig)
PWFSG power fluid specific gravity (sp. grav)
QDIL diluent rate (STB/day)
QGAS gas rate (MMscf/day) - black oil model only, otherwise use
QMOLE
QGFREE injected gas rate (MMscf/day) - black oil model only, otherwise
use QMOLE
QMOLE mole rate (mol/lbm/sec) - compositional model only
QOIL oil rate (STB/day) - black oil model only, otherwise use
QMOLE
QPWF power fluid rate (STB/day)
QPWFU power fluid rate used (STB/day)
QWAT water rate (STB/day)
REVENUE revenue/cost of fluids flowing through (<0 for cost)
SGG gas specific gravity (sp. grav)
SGGFREE gaslift gas specific gravity (sp. grav)
SOG oil specific gravity (sp. grav)
TEMP temperature (degrees F)
WENT water enthalpy (BTU/lb)
This variable is only calculated when steam is present. If steam

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 365

is not present, the value associated to this variable will be nil

WSAL water salinity (ppm)

For example to access the inlet stream pressure, the IN[PRES] variable name should be used.

Shortcuts have been created for the frequently used inlet and outlet stream. Add the ‘IN’ or
‘OUT’ suffix to the above indexes to access directly the corresponding stream variable.
For example PRESIN is a shortcut for IN[PRES].

When calling the calculation script, GAP initialises the fluid properties of the all streams and
the PVT calculator variables (see below) to the inlet stream fluid properties. The rate of the
separation streams have been set to zero and the outlet stream rates have been set to the
inlet stream rates. So by default, OUT[…] is equal to IN[…].

When in fully compositional mode, the five streams have an associated composition. These
compositions can be accessed through the five COMP type structures named:

COMPIN inlet stream composition

COMPOUT outlet stream composition
COMPSEPGAS composition of the stream that is separated by a gas source
COMPSEPOIL composition of the stream that is separated by an oil source
COMPSEPWAT composition of the stream that is separated by a water source

see definition of COMP structure 367 below.

2.5.12.6.6 Control Variables

Control variables enable to check or modify the behaviour and status of the system:

ABORT If set to a value # 0, the solver calculation will stop. This is

equivalent to clicking the ‘Cancel’ button during the solver run
DERIVCALC Is non zero if the calculation currently held is a derivative
calculation. READ ONLY variable
EVALCOUNT Returns an evaluation of the number of times the script is
called. From 1 to n
FLOWDIR 1 or -1 if the fluid flows in a direction opposite to the pipe
description (pipe only). READ ONLY variable
ISBOTTLENECKED Is non zero if the pipeline rate is close to the pipeline critical
rate (pipe only). READ ONLY variable
ISCOMP Is 0 if the calculation is a BO calculation, Is non zero if the
calculation is compositional. READ ONLY variable.
IT IS IMPORTANT TO NOTICE THAT WHEN THE
CALCULATION IS DONE IN FULLY COMPOSITIONAL
MODE, ONLY MOLE RATES ARE USED.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 366 GAP

ISPOTENTIALCALC Is non zero if the calculation currently held is a potential

calculation
LASTCALC Is non zero if the calculation currently held is in the last solver
calculation step. READ ONLY VARIABLE. It can be used for
instance when saving results in the OTHERRES[i] variable
OPTIMISATIONMODE Returns the status of the optimiser for the current run.
The following values are used:
0: No Optimisation
1: Optimise and Honour Constraints
2: Optimise with Potential Constraints Only
OPTIMISERITER Contains the current optimiser iteration number. From 0 to n.
Always 0 when the run is non-optimised
OUTLETJOINTPRES Returns the pressure of the joint downstream the inline
general element (psig)
OUTLETJOINTTEMP Returns the temperature of the joint downstream the inline
general element (F)
IT IS IMPORTANT TO NOTICE THAT THE DOWNSTREAM
AND UPSTREAM NODES OF THE INLINE ELEMENT WILL
NOT BE CHANGED THROUGHOUT THE CALCULATION,
EVEN IF THE FLOW DIRECTION IS CHANGED
SOLVERITER Contains the current solver iteration number. Starts at 0 when
the system is initialised, and 1 to n thereafter.
READ ONLY variable
Can be used to initialise the script temporary variables
TEMPVAR[ ] or ITEMPVAR[ ] when the solver calculation
starts

2.5.12.6.7 Temporary Variables

A set of temporary variables that will be available throughout the solver calculation. They can
be used to store intermediate or calculated values as well as the state of piece of equipment
moldelled by the script. These variables are initialised to 0 when the solver calculation starts.

These variables can be defined as follows:

TEMPVAR[ ] An array of 10 real number variables, indexes ranging from 0

to 9
ITEMPVAR[ ] An array of 10 integer variables, indexes ranging from 0 to 9

2.5.12.6.8 Results Variables

In the results for the inline programmable object, there are a number of user defined results. It
is possible for the script to assign values to these user defined results.
This is done as shown in the following code fragment:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 367

Example: DeltaPressure = 50.0;

Apply a fixed pressure PRESOUT = PRESIN - DeltaPressure;
drop of 50 psi over the if ( PRESOUT < DeltaPressure )
inline element PRESOUT = DeltaPressure;
OTHERRES[0] = DeltaPressure;

There are 10 user defined results available.

So one may use the variables OTHERRES[0] to OTHERRES[9].

2.5.12.6.9 Tax Regime Variables

The following variables can be used when the tax regime option is selected.

TaxRegimeRevenueOil Revenue from oil ($ per STB)

TaxRegimeRevenueGas
TaxRegimeCostWater
TaxRegimeCostInjGas
TaxRegimeCostPower
TaxRegimePowerFluid
TaxRegimeCostDiluent
Revenue from gas ($ per MMscf)
Cost of water processing ($ per STB)
Cost of injected gas ($ per MMscf)
Cost of power ($ per HP)
Cost of power fluid ($ per STB)
Cost of diluent ($ per STB)

2.5.12.6.10 FLOW and COMP Structure Variables

FLOW structure variables

The FLOW Structure allows access to the data of other network nodes while the solver
calculation is running.

In order to access the values of these variables, the following syntax can be used: MOD.
EQUIP.FLOW.VAR

FLOW is a READ ONLY structure and it is not necessary to use a DoGet command along
with a FLOW structure.

The keywords used for these variables are tags that are added at the end of the variable
string, after the tag .FLOW.

CFACTOR C Factor (Pipelines only)

CO2 CO2 mole percent
DILSG Diluent specific gravity
FLUIDTYPE Fluid Type
GASSPECGROSSHEATVAL Gas specific gross heating value
GASGROSSHEATVAL Gas gross heating value

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 368 GAP

GASSPECNETHEATVAL Gas specific net heating value

GASNETHEATVAL Gas net heating value
GINJ Injected gas rate (SCF)
GINJCO2 Injected gas CO2 percent
GINJH2S Injected gas H2S percent
GINJN2 Injected gas N2 percent
GINJSGG Injected gas specific gravity
H2S H2S mole percent
HCMASSRATE Hydrocarbon mass flow rate
HCMOLERATE Hydrocarbon mole flow rate (Compositional model
only)
ISBOTTLENECKED Returns a non zero value if the pipeline is
bottlenecked
ISUNSTABLE Returns a non zero value if the well is unstable
MASSRATE Mass flow rate
MAXPRES Maximum pressure (Pipeline only)
N2 N2 mole percent
POWER Power used
PRES Pressure
QDIL Diluent rate of the element
QGAS Gas rate of the element
QOIL Oil rate of the element
QPWF Bottom hole flowing pressure
QPWFU Power fluid rate used by this element
QTOT Total liquid rate of the element
QWAT Water rate of the element
REVENUE Revenue / Cost
RDIL Average cost of diluent per unit
RGAS Average revenue of gas per unit
RGINJ Average cost of injected gas per unit
ROIL Average revenue of oil per unit
ROTHER Cost of other elements - By default the value of
that variable is 0.
This can be modified to factor in any additional
costs (i.e. negative value) / revenues (i.e. positive
value) and include them in the optimisation
procedure
RPOW Average cost of power per unit
RPWF Average cost of power fluid per unit
RPWFU Average cost of power fluid used per unit

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 369

RSTM Average cost of steam used per unit

RWAT Average cost of water per unit
SGG Specific Gas Gravity
SOG Specific Oil Gravity
STMQUA Steam Quality
TEMP Temperature
VELOCITY Maximum velocity (Pipelines only)
WENT Water Entropy
WSAL Water Salinity

Example: MOD.JOINT[{Abc}].FLOW.PRES
to access the pressure
at the node'ABC'

COMP structure variables

When in fully compositional mode, the five streams have an associated composition. These
compositions can be accessed through the five COMP type structures named:

COMPIN inlet stream composition

COMPOUT outlet stream composition
COMPSEPGAS composition of the stream that is separated by a gas source
COMPSEPOIL composition of the stream that is separated by an oil source
COMPSEPWAT composition of the stream that is separated by a water source

The COMPx variables refer to the total hydrocarbon fluid composition, including gaslift or
injected gas.
It is possible to create local temporary compositions by simply copying and existing
composition.
For example MYCOMP = COMPIN will create a local copy of COMPIN.

The following keywords are associated with compositional modelling:

They need to be preceded by the keyword COMPx, where x can be IN, OUT, SEPGAS,
SEPOIL, SEPWAT.

Variable list
BICOEFF[i][j] Binary interaction coefficients between
component i and component j
COMPINDEX(component Returns the index associated with the component
name) specified
MOLEPCT[i] Mole percent of the component index (i) specified
MW[i] Molecular weight of the component index (i)
specified

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 370 GAP

NAME[i] Name of the component characterised by the

index i
NumComp Number of Components
OMEGA[i] Omega value associated to the component index
(i) specified
OMEGAA[i] OmegaA of the component index (i) specified
OMEGAB[i] OmegaB of the component index (i) specified
PARACHOR[i] Parachor of the component index (i) specified
PCRIT[i] Critical pressure of the component index (i)
specified
PROP1[i] Parachor of the component index (i) specified
PROP2[i] OmegaA of the component index (i) specified
PROP3[i] OmegaB of the component index (i) specified
PROP4[i] Original composition of the component index (i)
specified
SPGRAV[i] Specific gravity of the component index (i)
specified
TBOIL[i] Boiling temperature of the component index (i)
specified
TCRIT[i] Critical temperature of the component index (i)
specified
VCRIT[i] Critical volume of the component index (i)
specified
VSHFT[i] Volume shift of the component index (i) specified
Version PVTP version in use

Examples
How to read the mole percent of COMPOUT.MOLEPCT[i]
component of index 'i' at the
outlet of the element
How to read the critical COMPIN.PCRIT[2]
temperature of the third
component of the composition at
the inlet of the element
How to determine the mole % of X = COMPIN. COMPINDEX(CO2);
CO2 in the composition at the MPCT = COMPIN. MOLEPCT [X];
inlet of the element

2.5.12.6.11 PVT Calculator - Black Oil

A PVT calculator is available which allows temporary calculation of PVT properties.

PVT calculation variables

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 371

The following functions can be called to perform PVT calculations:

CALCPVT () Simultaneous Oil and Gas calculator

CALCPVTOIL() Oil calculator – black oil model only
CALCPVTGAS() Gas calculator – black oil model only
CALCPVTWAT() Water calculator – black oil model only
CALCPVTHT() Specific heat, conductivity and enthalpy calculator –
black oil model only

PVT calculation input/output variables

The following variables can be referenced directly in the script. These variables include both
input values and values calculated by the calculator functions.

Input variables
PVTPRES Pressure
PVTTEMP Temperature
PVTSOLGOR GOR – black oil mode only
PVTSOG Specific oil gravity – black oil mode only
PVTSGG Specific gas gravity – black oil mode only
PVTWSAL Water salinity – black oil mode only
PVTH2S H2S impurity – black oil mode only
PVTCO2 CO2 impurity – black oil mode only
PVTN2 N2 impurity – black oil mode only
PVTCOMP composition – compositional mode only

Calculated variables
PVTRS Calculated RS
PVTPB Bubble Point
PVTRHOOIL Oil density
PVTGRVOIL Oil gravity
PVTOILFVF Oil FVF
PVTFMUOIL Oil viscosity
PVTCT Total compressibility
PVTRHOGAS Gas density
PVTGASFVF Gas FVF
PVTFMUGAS Gas viscosity
PVTFACTOZ Z factor
PVTPCRITP Critical pressure
PVTPCRITT Critical temperature
PVTRHOWSC Water density at SC

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 372 GAP

PVTRSOWAT Solubility of gas in water

PVTWATFVF Water FVF
PVTCOMWAT Water compressibility
PVTRHOWAT Water density
PVTFMUWAT Water viscosity
PVTCONWAT Conductivity of water
PVTCPROIL Specific heat capacity of oil
PVTCPRWAT Specific heat capacity of water
PVTCPVGAS Specific heat capacity of gas
PVTENTWAT Enthalpy of water
PVTCONOIL Conductivity of oil
PVTCONGAS Conductivity of gas
PVTENTOIL Enthalpy of oil
PVTENTGAS Enthalpy of gas
PVTVAPFRA Vapour/Liquid fraction after the flash – compositional mode
only
PVTVAPCOMP Vapour composition – compositional mode only
PVTCOMPLIQ Liquid composition – compositional mode only

Example
An example of PVTPRES = PRESOUT;
using the PVT PVTTEMP = TEMPOUT;
calculator. CALCPVTGAS();
The gas Z factor is Z1 = PVTFACTOZ;
calculated at the inline PVTPRES = PRESOUT + 20.0;
element outlet T and P CALCPVTGAS();
and pressure 20 psi Z2 = PVTFACTOZ;
higher dZ = (Z2 - Z1)/20.0;
2.5.12.6.12 PVT Calculator - Compositional

A PVT calculator is available within the script, which allows calculation of PVT properties for
compositional models.

In addition to the COMP structure 369 variables and the PVT black oil 370 calculator variables
additional variables are available:

PVTVAPFRA Vapour Fraction

PVTCOMPVAP Vapour Composition
PVTCOMPLIQ Liquid Composition

The following functions can be used to run a flash calculation. Added to this PVT flash

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 373

calculator, blending calculations are possible through the inline element script:

CALCPVT(Composition) Enables to perform a flash PVT calculation at specified

PVTTEMP and PVTPRES.
Specifying the composition considered is optional. If it is not
specified, the program will use by default the composition
present in PVTCOMP. The liquid and vapour composition
resulting of a call to the CALCPVT() flash calculation are
stored in the PVTCOMPLIQ and PVTCOMVAP structures
CALCPVTWAT() Similar to the one used in BO
PVTBLENDSTART() To be called before any blending to initialise structures
PVTBLENDADD ( Add a composition to the blend in given proportion. The sum of
Composition, Fraction of all the proportions do not nedd to add up to 1 or 100.
the composition PVTBLENDCALC() below normalises the proportions
considered)
PVTBLENDCALC() Does the blending and stores the resulting composition in the
PVTCOMP structure
PVTCHANGECOMP() allows the script to alter the mole percentages of an existing
composition.
PVTCHANGECOMP(Composition, Component,
NewPercentage, RenormalizationFlag [, QMOLE]))
Component can be a component number or name, i.e. 12
or “CO2” .
RenormalizationFlag flag specifies whether the mole
percent is changed before renormalization of the
composition (flag = 0) or after renormalization of the
composition (flag = 1).
QMOLE is optional. If present, the function will adjust the
mole rate to take into account the change of mole percent
of the component.

A predefined composition called PVTCOMP is used by the PVT calculator such as

CALCPVT() or the blending routine described below. PVTCOMP is initialised to
COMPIN when the script is called. The liquid and vapour composition resulting of a
call to the CALCPVT() flash calculation are stored in the PVTCOMPLIQ and
PVTCOMVAP structures

Examples
How to flash the inlet
composition at P and T and
send the vapour on the gas
line and the liquid
hydrocarbon on the oil line
PVTPRES = PRESIN - 10;
PVTTEMP = TEMPIN;
PVTCOMP = COMPIN;
CALCPVT();
COMPSEPOIL = PVTCOMPOIL;
COMPSEPGAS = PVTCOMPGAS;
SEPGAS[QMOLE] = IN[QMOLE] * PVTVAPFRA;

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 374 GAP

SEPOIL[QMOLE] = IN[QMOLE] * (1 - PVTVAPFRA);

OUT[QMOLE] = 0;
How to change the CO2 mole
percent of composition
COMPOUT to 1.2% after
normalization i.e. the CO2 PVTCHANGECOMP(COMPOUT, “CO2”, 1.2, 1,
percent is set 1.2% with the QMOLEOUT);
sum of the mole percent of
all the components equal to
100%.
How to change the CO2 mole
percent to 1.2% without
normalising the total mole PVTCHANGECOMP(COMPOUT, “CO2”, 1.2, 0,
percent to 100%. This QMOLEOUT);
means that, if normalised,
the CO2 mole percent may
no longer be 1.2%
How to blend the oil and PVTPRES = PRESIN;
50% of the gas and sets it PVTTEMP = TEMPIN;
as the outlet stream PVTCOMP = COMPIN;
composition CALCPVT();
PVTBLENDSTART();
PVTBLENDADD(PVTCOMPOIL, PVTVAPFRA / 2);
PVTBLENDADD(PVTCOMPOIL, (1 - PVTVAPFRA));
PVTBLENDCALC();
COMPOUT = PVTCOMP;

It is important to note that in compositional mode, inline elements cannot use

hydrocarbon rates anymore. QOIL, QGAS, and QGFREE are not be available in
compositional mode
2.5.12.6.13 Logging Messages
It is possible to log messages during the inline element script progress, through the following
function:

LogMsg(comma separated list of text strings or variables);

For example :
LogMsg(“Oil rate: ”, IN[QOIL], “ Gas rate:”, IN[QGAS]);

Important note: Outputing a log message is a slow process. As scripts are being called
thousands of time in a solver calculation, these statements are going to slow down massively
the calculation. Make sure that these statements are used for debugging purposes only.
Please comment them when the script has been debugged. Also make sure not to display log
messages during derivatives calculation (i.e. DERIV #0) unless required.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 375

2.5.12.6.14 Mathematical Functions

A number of maths functions are available in the script. These include:

COS(x) Returns the cosine of x (units of x are radians)

COSH(x) Returns the hyperbolic cosine of x (units of x are radians)
SIN(x) Returns the sine of x (units of x are radians)
SINH(x) Returns the hyperbolic sine of x (units of x are radians)
TAN(x) Returns the tan of x (units of x are radians)
TANH(x) Returns the hyperbolic tan of x (units of x are radians)
ACOS(x) Returns the inverse cosine of x in radians
ASIN(x) Returns the inverse sine of x in radians
ATAN(x) Returns the inverse tan of x in radians
ATAN2(x,y) Returns the inverse tan of x/y in radians
EXP(x) Returns the exponential of x
LOG(x) Returns the natural logarithm of x
LOG10(x) Returns the logarithm (base 10) of x
POW(x,y) Returns x raised to the power of y
FMOD(x,y) Returns the floating-point remainder of x / y
FABS(x) Returns the absolute value of x
SQRT(x) Returns the square root of x
CEIL(x) Returns a value representing the smallest integer that is
greater than or equal to x
FLOOR(x) Returns a value representing the largest integer that is less
than or equal to x
HYPOT(x,y) Returns the length of the hypotenuse of a right triangle, given
the length of the two sides x and y. It is equivalent to the
square root of x2 + y2
J0(x) Returns the zero’th order Bessel function of the first kind of x
J1(x) Returns the first order Bessel function of the first kind of x
JN(n,x) Returns the n’th order Bessel function of the first kind of x
Y0(x) Returns the zero’th order Bessel function of the second kind of
x
Y1(x) Returns the first order Bessel function of the second kind of x
YN(n,x) Returns the n’th order Bessel function of the second kind of x
LDEXP(x,n) Returns x*POW(2,n)

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 376 GAP

2.5.12.6.15 Control Structures

The control structures are the same as used in the C language.
Examples of the basic structures are shown below.

if block If ( QGASIN > 6.0 )

{
PRESOUT = PRESIN – 50.0;
QWATOUT = QWATOUT * 0.75;
}
if-else block if ( QGASIN > 6.0 )
{
dP = 50.0;
}
else
{
dP = 100.0;
}
PRESOUT = PRESIN - dP;
if ( PRESOUT < dP ) PRESOUT = dP;
while loop i = 0;
dP = 0.0;
while ( i < 10 )
{
dP = dP + 10.0;
i = i + 1;
}
PRESOUT = PRESIN - dP;
do-while loop i = 0;
dP = 0.0;
do
{
dP = dP + 10.0;
i = i + 1;
}
while ( i < 20 );
PRESOUT = PRESIN - dP;
for-loop dP = 0.0;
for ( i = 0; i < 21; i++ )
{
dP = dP + 10.0;
}
PRESOUT = PRESIN - dP;

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 377

2.5.12.6.16 Example Script

Calculating the number of days since 1900. The following script fragment will calculate the
number of days since 1900 for a calendar date.

// Date to convert is 14th September 1996.

Year = 1996;
Month = 9;
Day = 14;
// Check if a leap year - the rules are:-
// If divisible by 400 then it is a leap year
// If not divisible by 400 BUT divisible by 100 then it is NOT a leap year
// If not divisible by 100 but divisible by 4 then it is a leap year.
LeapYear = 0;
if ( Year % 400 == 0 )
LeapYear = 1;
else if ( Year % 100 == 0 )
LeapYear = 0;
else if ( Year % 4 == 0 )
LeapYear = 1;
Year = Year - 1900;
NumDays = Year*365;
// Add extra days for leap years
NumDays = NumDays + floor((Year+3)/4);
// Don't count the days for the current month
Month = Month - 1;
// Add up days for the months in the current year
while ( Month > 0 )
{
if ( Month == 2 )
{
if ( LeapYear == 1 )
NumDays = NumDays + 29;
else
NumDays = NumDays + 28;
}
else if ( Month == 4 || Month == 6 || Month == 9 || Month == 11 )
{
NumDays = NumDays + 30;

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 378 GAP

}
else
{
NumDays = NumDays + 31;
}
Month = Month - 1;
}

NumDays = NumDays + Day;

2.5.13 Inflow Icon

This element allows to decompose the wellbore into sections and model multilateral and
complicated down hole geometry in GAP.

The inflow data entry is split into three sections as described below.

Summary This screen gives the status of the input inflow data and allows
Screen the type of well (producer or injector) and the location of an
appropriate PROSPER file to be defined
Input This screen allows the input data to be entered. The options
Screen in this section are the same as the IPR description
discussed in IPR section 167
Results Contains the following fields:
Screen Network Solver Results
Prediction Results

2.5.13.1 Inflow Summary Screen

The inflow summary screen is shown below.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 379

Browse The browse button is used to select the location of a PROSPER file
that contains the IPR description. The file defined here can be used
to import the IPR information into GAP as outlined in th section
concerning IPR Generation 390

2.5.13.2 Input
Refer to IPR section 167 for further details.
2.5.14 Grouping

The grouping option allows collections of equipment to be controlled from one icon.

The Group summary screen is divided into three sections.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 380 GAP

Summary Allows navigation to the constraints and grouping input screens.

Screen If under the |Options |Method screen the prediction option is
set to on this screen will also allow navigation to the scheduling
screen
Input Allows values to be entered to constrain and schedule the
Screen group
Results Contains the following fields:
Screen Network Solver Results
Prediction Results

In order to create a group of nodes firstly add a group to the current system screen. To
associate a node with a group there are two options:
1. Press the control key and the left mouse button over the node and move the mouse
cursor until it is over the group. Now release the left mouse button.
2. Connect the well to the group using the Add Link/Pipe tool

Three wells associated with a particular “Group1” are shown below.

2.5.14.1 Grouping Data Entry

2.5.14.1.1 Constraints
When constraints are entered into the constraints input screen, the values entered represent
an overall constraint that the sum the values for the nodes in the group cannot exceed. If the

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 381

maximum gas production rate for group 1 is set to 5MMscf/day, then the overall quantity of
gas produced from wells “W1”, “W2” and “W3” will be constrained so as not to exceed this
quantity.

For systems containing multiple compressors, the Group

Constraints section will show an additional constraint option
for Maximum Power. This feature has been designed to be
used to manage the maximum compressor power distribution
between two (or more) independent networks. It is not
designed to be used for single network systems.

A total compressor maximum power constraint for single

network systems can be imposed on any downstream node
(or separator) from the last compressor described in the given
system.
2.5.14.1.2 Schedule
The Group scheduling screen is shown below. The event type column allows a selection to be
made between mask, unmask and change constraint. The mask and unmask commands allow
all of the nodes in the group to be masked or unmasked. If the change constraint option is
selected then the constraint type and a new value for the constraint need to be defined in the
blue columns.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 382 GAP

2.5.14.1.3 Grouping
The screen that is displayed when the grouping tab is clicked is shown below:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 383

Belongs Each group can belong to other groups. This field highlights
to group the groups this group belongs to
Does not This field highlights the groups this group does not belong to
belong to group
Group members Elements of the network that belong to the group

The Add and Remove buttons allow pieces of equipment to be added to or removed from the
current group.

Selection of elements belonging to a group

It is possible to select al the members belonging to the group
by right-clicking on the group (or using the menu Edit/Selected
Groups) and selecting Show Members as Selected:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 384 GAP

2.5.15 Flowsheets

Flowsheets can be created to facilitate the visualization of big GAP models. It is possible to
embed parts of the GAP model to a smaller subscreen

Considering the GAP model below, a worksheet can be created to group all the wells flowing
from the manifold WH1:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 385

The objective for this small example will be to copy the elements of RES1 production side to a
separate flowsheet. Hence the elements that will be placed are Res1, Well1, Well1_ESP,
Well1_GL, WH1.

Step 1: Copy the Copy the items from by using the "Select" pointer from the
items
main tool bar .
Once the select pointer has been selected, elements can be
marked for copying using a left-mouse click.
Once the desired model elements have been selected, simply
right-click in the main GAP screen and select "Extract to GAP
Partial FIle (*.gpp") from the pop-up menu.
This will save a .gpp file to a relevant directory.
To insert the previously copied sub network into the
flowsheet, enter the flowsheet and right-click and select
"Insert GAP Partial File" from the pop-up menu
Step 2: Create the Create a flowsheet in the main production flowsheet, using
Flowsheet the "Flowsheet" icon from the main menu bar.
Step 3: Paste the In the new flowsheet, right clicking and select the option
elements in the 'Insert Gap Partial File'.
flowsheet Point it to the .gpp file that was created in step 1.
This will paste all the five elements inside the flowsheet.
Clicking on Window Tile Vertically will display both the Main
network and the flowsheet side by side.

Step 4: Create the The next step will be to create the flowsheet port.
'Flowsheet Port'
The flowsheet port is the link between the flowsheet elements
and the main network. In the above example this link will be the

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 386 GAP

joint 'WH1'.

To create the flowsheet port, double click on the WH1 element

inside the flowsheet (and not in the main network), and in the
summary section, there is an option that says 'Flowsheet Port'.
Select the Radio button.

Alternatively, it is also possible to just right click on the WH1

(inside the flowsheet and not in the 'Main Network')

This will publish the WH1 element inside the main network as
shown in the figure below.

Step 5: Create the The worksheet port created on the main worksheet can now
link between the be linked to the rest of the network.
Flowsheet Port
and the other Since the objective is to link up the WH1 to the Manifold, a link
elements in the will be created between the flowsheet port and the joint called
main network. 'Manifold'. This will of course be an empty link between the two
nodes. The main network will look something like this.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 387

Step 6: Copy the Since the pipeline definition is already present in the link
contents of the between WH1 (old) and Manifold, this needs to be copied
pipeline across to across to the newly created link between the WH1 (new) and
the newly created the Manifold.
pipe. The easiest way to do this is to press down the CTRL button on
the keyboard, left click on the existing pipe and drag - drop on
the newly created link.

The screen after the drag and drop will look like this.

Step 7: Delete the The items duplicated can be deleted from the main flowsheet
duplicated The GAP model after the deletion will look like this.
Network
elements.

The initial model and this model above are exactly equivalent.

It might be possible that an item remains duplicated (such as a common joint), and therefore
the icon will turn "invalid", as GAP detects twice the same label within the same instance.

Double clicking on the Flowsheet will open up a new window

containing the section of network under the Flowsheet.
To Enter the Flowsheet Summary/Input/Results Screen, right
click on the Flowsheet and select Edit.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 388 GAP

2.5.15.1 Summary, Input, Results

These sections are accessed by right-clicking on the Flowsheet element.
The Summary screen is just any other element (ref. Summary 152 section).
In the Input section contains the Schedule, which allows to set events on the Flowsheet along
a Prediction.
2.5.16 Notes on Constraints
When setting up the model, it is recommended to start with the minimum
necessary number of Constraints. In this way the user has the possibility to
validate that the model performs as it is supposed to.
After that, the number of Constraints can be increases, if necessary.

GAP provides with a physical model of the whole production/injection system.

This means that any constraint imposed in the system should reflect the
physical reality of the field.

For example, if a well at its maximum production cannot produce more than
1000 STB/day oil rate, it would not have sense to set up a minimum
production constraint of 2000 STB/day, as this would be impossible to
achieve.

Based on these considerations, it is recommended not to use minimum

constraints during a prediction run.

In the case where minimum constraints cannot be physically honoured

(because the system not necessarily can deliver the minimum liquid rate as the
reservoir depletes, for example), the optimiser will try to honour an infeasible
situation. This may provide unreliable results for the whole system.

If the objective is to shut down the well if this cannot produce a minimum
amount, this can be achieved by setting up an Abandonment Constraint of
minimum rate in the Abandonment section: as soon as the well production
decreases below the set minimum abandonment constraint, the well will be
closed.

2.6 VLP/IPR Generation

This chapter describes the following procedures:

Batch mode transfer of well inflow performance relations from PROSPER

Batch mode generation of well vertical lift performance curves using PROSPER
Batch mode generation of pipe VLPs
How to import externally generated well and pipe VLPs into GAP

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 389

How externally generated well IPRs can be imported into GAP

NOTE: For being able to generate IPRs or VLPs in batch mode, GAP needs to know the path
of the PROSPER file associated to each specific GAP well model. Therefore a PROSPER file
needs to be associated to the well instance in GAP.

2.6.1 A well model in GAP

A well model is essentially a mathematical representation of a real well. It needs to be able to
represent past performance of the well (Flowrates, Water Cut, GOR etc) in order for the
engineer to have confidence in prediction results from the model.

The most common results a well model can provide are rates for a given well head pressure,
GOR and WC. This is done on the basis of VLP/IPR plots (Bottom Hole Pressure Vs Rate),
as shown below:

The intersection between the VLP and the IPR gives the rate and bottom hole pressure under
the given conditions.

In order to create this model, IPRs and VLPs need to be created for all the conditions the well
will encounter during its life. Together the IPR model and the VLP set constitute a well model:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 390 GAP

2.6.1.1 IPR
Inflow performance relationships are transferred from PROSPER.
GAP has the PI and Vogel relationship (for Oil wells) built into it and therefore the choice of
model used in PROSPER to generate the IPR is irrelevant. GAP will find an equivalent PI that
can match the curve from PROSPER and this will be used to perform the well calculations.
The data entered in the IPR section can be verified by accessing the well IPR Input 167 section.
2.6.1.2 VLP
Lift Curves are generated by the PROSPER well file. The procedure will be outlined in the
following sections 402 .

In order to inspect the VLP curves in the GAP well model, click on "Inspect" from the well VLP
section (ref. VLP Inspection 193 section)
2.6.1.3 Importance of VLP Data Ranges
In order to enable GAP to calculate production rates and optimise, it is essential that the VLP/
IPR data represent the well performance accurately.

Before running any calculation it is recommended to verify

the quality and accuracy of the calculated VLP and IPR
curves

2.6.2 Batch Generation of IPR’s

2.6.2.1 Single layer wells

The following description assumes that a PROSPER model which includes an IPR has already
been built for each well.

It is first necessary to tell GAP the location of the PROSPER files that describe each well. The
method of doing this is summarized below:

1. Open the well summary screen by double clicking on the well icon.
A well summary screen is shown in below:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 391

2. Click on the summary button in the bottom left hand corner of this window.
3. Click on the browse button to open a file selection dialogue box. From this dialogue box
select the appropriate PROSPER file for the well.

Repeat this process for each of the wells that require IPR generation. Note that this is an
operation that is performed just once, when the model is built.

Now that the appropriate PROSPER files have been specified for each well Click "Generate
Generate Well IPR’s with PROSPER" from the main menu bar.

If some wells have been selected this window should appear:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 392 GAP

The user can then select from the list of wells selected the wells to generate the IPR for.

If no wells have been selected a message warning the user of this is first displayed.

If the “All” button is selected, GAP will automatically select all the wells in the system and
open the screen shown before where all the wells can be selected or de-selected individually.

The button "Generate" is eventually used to transfer in batch mode the IPRs from the
PROSPER files to the GAP well models.

The result is that the IPR is imported in the well IPR section:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 393

In the case of multilayer wells (wells where multiple IPR have been added in the IPR Layer
section), clicking the Generate button GAP will display the Enter Layer Indices screen in the
case of multilayer wells

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 394 GAP

The Enter Layers Indices screen is used to select which layer the IPR data read from
prosper will be applied to. In the case of PROSPER multi-layer IPR model wells it should be
noted that the total IPR (of whatever model chosen in PROSPER) is transferred to GAP.
Therefore if transfer data to multi-layer models is selected, a target layer in each case must
be especified to link the IPR data to be written to. If multi-layer wells had been selected,
these will be listed in a screen after the Generate had been pressed. From the appropriate list
boxes the target layer for the data in each case can be seected.

Click |OK to start PROSPER. Each well’s input (.SIN) file will be opened in sequence and the
IPR data will be automatically read into GAP.

GAP uses its current type of IPR model for the well regardless of the IPR model used in the
generation by PROSPER. This means that Oil IPR’s are always modeled with a PI and Vogel
correction, while Gas/Condensate IPR’s are always Forcheimer or C and n. GAP takes the
reservoir pressure and PVT information from PROSPER along with three IPR data points.
These points become the Match points in the GAP model, and GAP fits its IPR coefficients to
these points.

2.6.2.2 Multilayer wells

The two following cases will be addressed.

a) Generating multiple IPRs in GAP when having different PROSPER files for each layer.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 395

b) Importing multiple IPRs in GAP when having one single PROSPER file with a Multilayer IPR
model.

The following example considers a Multilayer gas well:

Case a

In this case it is assumed that each IPR layer in GAP corresponds to one PROSPER file (***.
out) containing a single layer IPR model (Jones, Forcheimer, etc.). The objective is to import
into GAP each IPR .
The following figure illustrates the objective.

This can be achieved by first associating each layer to the correspondent PROSPER model
and then generating the IPRs in batch model in GAP. This allows to import all the IPRs in one
go.
This is the process to follow:
Associate in GAP each layer to each PROSPER model. This can be achieved by
accessing the IPR Layer section and selecting Browse to recall the correspondent
PROSPER file. This is shown below:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 396 GAP

Repeat that for all the Layers. To skip through the layers select the layer number from
the top-right corner selection dialog.
Import the IPRs accessing from the main program menu Generate/Generate well IPRs
with PROSPER
The IPRs will be imported all in GAP

Case b

In this case it is assumed that there is one single PROSPER file (***.out) with a multilayer IPR
model, and we need to import each layer IPR in GAP assigning each IPR to different well-tank
connections in GAP. The following figure illustrates the objective.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 397

This is the process to follow:

Select the Multilayer PROSPER model in the GAP Well Input Screen (Summary section) as
shown below:

Open the PROSPER model (click on "Run PROSPER", as shown above).

Access the IPR section (System | Inflow Performance Relation )

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 398 GAP

Click on Input Data, and deselect all the layers but the first one.
This can be done by selecting the blank option in the IPR type pop-down menu (the
other layers data will be kept stored and will be recall every time the IPR type is restored).

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 399

Click "Calculate" to calculate the IPR, then "Done" to exit the IPR screen.
Save the PROSPER file, and return to GAP by clicking "GAP" from the main PROSPER menu

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 400 GAP

bar.
Once in GAP, Click on "Generate | Generate well IPRs with PROSPER" from the main GAP
menu bar.
Click "All" and select the well for which to generate the IPR.
Click on "Generate"; It will be asked to select the Tank model (in brackets) to which the IPR
will be assigned. Select the Tank model using the drop down menu illustrated below and
click "Ok".

The IPR will be generated for this only specific layer.

In order to generate the IPR for the Layer 2, open the PROSPER file again.
In the PROSPER IPR section, deselect the layer 1 and select the layer 2 as shown below:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 401

The previous steps are then repeated (PROSPER file saved, IPR generated in GAP for the
second layer, etc...) for all the layers.
The different layers' IPRs can then be inspected, using the drop down menu in the GAP well
model, as shown below:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 402 GAP

2.6.3 Batch Generation of Well and Pipe VLPs

2.6.3.1 Batch Generation of VLPs

This section describes the process of batch generating VLPs in PROSPER and transferring the
information to GAP. As with the batch transfer of IPRs as described before, it is of course
necessary to have appropriately prepared PROSPER files for each well and also to have these
PROSPER files referenced on the well summary screens. The process of referencing the
PROSPER files is described in the introduction of the "VLP/IPR Generation" section of this
manual.
The following description assumes that PROSPER models have been built for each well and
referenced from within GAP.

To generate the VLPs click "Generate Generate Well VLPs with PROSPER"

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 403

And the screen shown below will be presented:

If no wells have previously been selected then this screen will be displayed:

This can be used in the same way as discussed for well selection during "Batch Transfer of
IPRs".

To generate VLP tables for GAP, check the For GAP model box. PROSPER will be used to

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 404 GAP

calculate and save a *.VLP file (GAP Binary VLP lift curves).
If the “For Simulator” option is selected then it is necessary to select a target simulator lift
curve format from the list selected and an Injection Rate Type (GLR/Gas Injection Rate).
The PVT Method drop down box enable to select which PVT dataset is to be used to
generate the VLPs, either following the PROSPER model, using a blck oil PVT model or a full
compositional PVT model if available.

The “For GAP model” option must be used when modeling pipeline Pressure
and Temperature in GAP. No other VLP format allows for transferring the
temperature values from the well models to the surface network.

For Gas Lift wells, it is possible to select the sensitivity variable type as:
Either "GLR injected"
Or "Gas Lift injection rate"
It is recommended to use the "GLR injected" sensitivity variable as the range of
variable will be independent of the wells' productivity. The range recommended
for the GLR injected is (in scf/STB): 0, 100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200, 6400,
12800, 25000.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 405

Check the “For GAP model” option and Click the Data button. GAP will start PROSPER and
recall the .ANL file for each selected well. The .ANL files contain the values of sensitivity
variables to be used in the VLP calculations. Once all the well files have been read the screen
shown below is presented.

To check and edit the values, click the Edit button for the corresponding factor. The following
screen represents the factors to be entered for a naturally flowing well.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 406 GAP

The populate buttons shown above can be used to fill in the table with numbers:

Enter rates (up to 20) and values of manifold pressure, GOR and water cut into the VLP table
to be used for generating the VLP curves. Click the |OK button to exit the data screen.

The values used for generating the VLP curves are dependent upon the conditions of the field.
The objective is to generate the VLP curves with a range of values that encompass the
conditions that will be experienced in the well/field in future.

The reason for using a high range of values is so that GAP will always interpolate between the

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 407

values entered. If the range of data points entered is sparse, then GAP will have to
extrapolate on the values which may give incorrect results.

A possible range of values that can be used for the generation of VLP's can be found be
clicking here 408 .

Once the rates, pressures etc. have been entered correctly for each selected well the OK
button can be pressed to return to the selection screen. The VLP generate variables are
saved in the well .ANL files. GAP is now set up to batch calculate the well VLP curves.

Before Generating the VLP curves, make sure that the correlation used in the PROSPER
corresponds to the correlation that is matched to the well test data (if any).

When the Generate button on the VLP Generation screen is pressed GAP will automatically
direct PROSPER to calculate VLP curves for each selected well using the rates and sensitivity
variable values entered in the GAP VLP data table. PROSPER will automatically save the VLP
tables in the appropriate file format.

In the version 8 of GAP (IPM 7) the VLP generation process has been
made much faster by working with the PROSPER model in background
and not opening the PROSPER model in the Windows interface.
In past versions the PROSPER model was opened directly.
The progress of the VLP generation can be followed by means of a
progress bar that shows the time elapsed and the time remaining to
complete the calculation.

VLP calculations can take a considerable time if many rates and variables
are used. Before starting the run, check the PROSPER files carefully to
avoid problems that may halt the automatic process. To maximise
efficiency, plan to Generate Well VLPs when the computer is not in use
(overnight).

Once the generation is successfully completed, a screen notifying the user of the completion
of the task will be shown.

The process is now complete. It is recommended that the VLPs are inspected at this stage to
ensure that the calculated values are consistent. This is done by opening an appropriate well

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 408 GAP

data input screen and selecting |Summary |Lift curves |Inspect.

2.6.3.2 Values to use for VLP Generation

The values used for generating the VLP curves are dependent upon the conditions of the field.
The objective is to generate the VLP curves with a range of values that encompass the
conditions that will be experienced in the well/field in future.

The reason for using a high range of values is so that GAP will always interpolate between the
values entered. If the range of data points entered is sparse, then GAP will have to
extrapolate on the values which may give incorrect results.

The following values can be used as possible intervals to enter the data for the VLP curves.
These values are only provided as guidance.

The user has the best understanding of the production system, and therefore is
the best person to decide on the range of values to be used. It is the
responsibility of the user to cross check if the field conditions observed for a
particular well lie within the range of data entered for the VLP curves.

For Naturally Lifted Oil Wells.

From To Number Distribution Comments

of Points of Points
Liquid From low AOF 20 Geometric
Rate value (say (Absolute Spacing
100 stb/d) Open Hole
Flow of
well)
Top Node From Reservoir 10 Linear The Top Node
Pressure separator Pressure Spacing Pressure
pressure corresponds to the
value (for Well Head Pressure.
example,
100 psig)
Water Cut 0 % 90% or 95 10 Linear
% or 99 % Spacing
GOR A value 25000 scf/ 10 Geometric The second value of
less than stb Spacing the GOR is generally
Solution set to the Solution
GOR GOR. The value less
than Solution GOR
corresponds to the
reduction in GOR
when Reservoir

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 409

Pressure just falls

below the bubble
point.

For Gas Wells

From To Number Distribution Comments

of Points of Points
Gas Rate From low AOF 20 Geometric
value (say (Absolute Spacing
0.1 MMscf/ Open Hole
d) Flow of
well)
Top Node From Reservoir 10 Linear The Top Node
Pressure separator Pressure Spacing Pressure
pressure corresponds to the
value (for Well Head Pressure.
example,
100 psig)
WGR 0 Refer to 10 Linear The value for
Comments Spacing Maximum WGR is
on the dependent upon the
Right fluid properties.
Generally a value of
100 stb/MMscf is
reasonable.
CGR 0 Refer to 10 Geometric The value for
Comments Spacing Maximum CGR is
on the dependent upon the
Right fluid properties. Use
a value slightly
greater than the
reservoir CGR

For Retrograde Condensate Wells

From To Number Distribution Comments

of Points of Points
Gas Rate From low AOF 20 Geometric
value (say (Absolute Spacing
0.1 MMscf/ Open Hole
d) Flow of
well)

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 410 GAP

Top Node From Reservoir 10 Linear The Top Node

Pressure separator Pressure Spacing Pressure
pressure corresponds to the
value (for Well Head Pressure.
example,
100 psig)
WGR 0 Refer to 10 Linear The value for
Comments Spacing Maximum WGR is
on the dependent upon the
Right fluid properties.
Generally a value of
100 stb/MMscf is
reasonable.
GOR 0 Refer to 10 Geometric The value for
Comments Spacing Maximum CGR is
on the dependent upon the
Right fluid properties. Use
a value slightly
greater than the
reservoir CGR

For Artificially Lifted Wells

The VLP Data section for Artificially Lifted Wells requires inputting a fifth variable. The
following table shows the variables and values for different types of Artificially Lifted Wells.

Variable Values Comments

Gas Lifted GLR Injected or 0, 100, 200, 400, 800, Using the GLR Injected as a
Wells 1600, 3200, 6400, variable will ensure that the VLP
12800, 25600 (in scf/ curves will always interpolate for
stb) the Gas Lift Gas Rate.
Gas Lift Gas Enter the range of values that
Rate could be injected in the well
ESP wells Frequency of Depending on the Variable
Operation Frequency Drive Option, enter
the range of values for the
frequency of motor operation.
These generally range from 40
to 70 Hz.
PCP Well Motor RPM The Motor rpm corresponds to
the Pump Speed.
Jet Pump Power Fluid
Well Rate
HSP Well Pump
Rotational

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 411

Speed

For GAS Injection Wells

From To Number Distribution Comments

of Points of Points
Gas Rate From low AOF 20 Geometric
value (say (Absolute Spacing
0.1 MMscf/ Open Hole
d) Flow of
well)
Top Node From low Reservoir 10 Linear The Top Node
Pressure value (for Pressure Spacing Pressure corresponds
example, to the Well Head
100 psig) Pressure.
WGR 0 Refer 10 Linear The Maximum Value
Comments Spacing for WGR is dependent
on Right upon the quality of the
gas being injected.
Generally a value of
50 stb/MMscf is
reasonable.
CGR 0 Refer 10 Geometric The Maximum Value
Comments Spacing of CGR is dependent
on Right upon the quality of the
gas being injected.

For WATER Injection Wells

From To Number Distribution Comments

of Points of Points
Liquid From low AOF 20 Geometric
Rate value (say (Absolute Spacing
100 stb/d) Open Hole
Flow of
well)
Manifold From low Reservoir 10 Linear
Pressure value (for Pressure Spacing
example,
100 psig)

The VLP calculation data can be easily copied from one well to another using the
copy and paste function. Click in the check box next to the well with the data to

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 412 GAP

be copied so that a cross appears. Click on the copy button at the bottom of the
dialogue screen. Then click in the check box next to the well that the data is to be
copied to and press paste. The range of the variables entered for the first well will
be copied to the currently selected well.
When copying data from one well to another, it should be ensured that the data
cover the operating range of the new well.
2.6.3.3 Generating Well VLP on a well-by-well basis
The generation of a VLPs can also be carried out for an individual well by following the
procedure below. This method may be preferable if a model is small or if additional wells are
being added to an existing GAP model.

The procedure is as follows for generating the VLP file in PROSPER is as follows:

1. Load PROSPER from Windows or from the well data entry screen and open (or create)
an appropriate PROSPER well file.

2. The VLP curves for the file for a naturally flowing well can be generated by selecting |
Calculation |VLP Tubing Curves|(3 Variables) from the menu bar. For a gas lifted well
select |Calculation |VLP Tubing Curves|(4 Variables) from the menu bar.

3. Enter the top node pressure and water cut values into the input table and a range of
liquid rates that encompass the full range of operating conditions into the table at the
bottom screen. Now press the |Continue button at the top of the screen. This will display
the sensitivities screen shown below:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 413

For a naturally flowing well the first node pressure, GOR and water cut must be varied. For a
gas lifted well the Gas lift injection rate must also be varied. An error message will be
displayed and the created file will not be useable in GAP if variables other than the above are
varied.

4. To start the generation of the VLP’s click |Continue which will display the “VLP (tubing
curves) calculation screen” followed by |Calculate to begin the calculations. The “VLP
(tubing curves) calculation screen is shown below:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 414 GAP

5. Click the |Export Lift Curve button on the Calculation screen. A list of Export formats
appears – GAP is able to read lift curves in Eclipse (.ECL), MBAL (.MBV), and GAP (.
TPD) formats. Select one of these from the list, and save the file to a suitable location.

To import the file into GAP open the appropriate well VLP screen in GAP

6. From the well VLP input screen, click on the Import button. Locate the file that has just
been exported from PROSPER using the browser, and press OK. GAP will generate a .
VLP file, and the name will be displayed in the VLP file field of the dialog.
2.6.3.4 Batch Generation of VLPs with Mass flow rates
The classic definition of VLP curve is that the VLP provides with a relationship between the
rate flowing and the bottomhole pressure considering the pressure losses from wellhead (or,
more in general, the manifold downstream to the well) to the bottomhole (top perforations), as
a function of the operating conditions (manifold pressure, WC and GOR).

In this definition the flow rates are defined as volumetric rates at standard conditions (STD).
As the volumes at standard conditions are dependent on the way the fluid is processed down
to STD, they will depend on the specific path followed to STD. In other words, the same mass
of fluid flowing will have a different flow rate depending on the path to STD used to express
the rates.

Defining the rates in terms of mass has got the great benefit of making the rates
(hence the VLPs) process independent. This is because volumetric rates at standard
depend on the process used to analyse the fluid, whilst mass is invariant, therefore
does not depend on the process used. This option is particularly useful when coupling

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 415

models having different reference paths to standard: using the mass one does not
have to re-generate IPRs and VLPs if the process changes.

When one of the compositional PVT models (see above 128 ) is selected, it is possible to
generate the lift curves with mass flow rates. To achieve that:
The PROSPER well model should be set to Equation of State:

In GAP, well Summary screen (accessible by double-clicking on the well), the option to
use the Mass rates should be enabled:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 416 GAP

Generate the VLPs directly in PROSPER as showed in the section above 412 .
In PROSPER the Rate Type selected in the VLP calculation section should be selected as
Hydrocarbon Mass Flow Rate :

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 417

Note that the variable GOR to use should be replaced by Molecular Weight, whilst all the
other variables should be the same as the volumetric rate VLPs. For example, the
screenshot below shows the variables to enter for a gas retrograde condensate well:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 418 GAP

2.6.3.5 Batch Generation of Pipe VLPs

The batch generation of Pipe VLPs has been added to GAP to allow lift curves to be
generated for pipes that have been defined using the new PROSPER in line features or for
which the “use lift curve” option has been selected from within the pipe summary screen.

The procedure for generating pipe VLPs is similar to well VLPs. Select |Generate |Generate
Pipe VLPs from the GAP menu bar.

If no wells have been selected, then the screen shown below will be displayed.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 419

Clicking on all will select the pipes in the system that has the ‘Use lift curves’ option selected.

Clicking on |Data will display the ‘generate data’ screen shown below:

This should be used as described in the user Guide for well VLP generation. Ensure that the
values specified in the table encompass the full spectrum of operating conditions that will be
encountered.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 420 GAP

It is advised to include negative rates, as the fluid can potentially flow in both
directions.

Repeat this process for each of the pipes that have been selected.

Clicking on the |Ok button will return control to the ‘Generate’ dialogue screen above. From
this screen, press the generate button to begin the batch generation of the pipe VLPs. Once
this is successfully completed the software will prompt a message notifying the user of the
completion of the task.

It is recommended that the VLPs are inspected at this stage to ensure that the calculated
values are consistent. This is done by opening an appropriate pipe data input screen and
selecting |Summary |Lift curves |Inspect.

2.6.4 Batch Generation of Well Performance Curves

This section describes the process of batch generating Performance Curves for the GAP well
models, using the well VLPs and IPR previously generated.

We will note that the Performance Curves (PCs) are going to be generated for unique values
of Reservoir Pressure, WC (or WGR for gas wells) and GOR (or CGR for dry gas wells).
During a Prediction, the PCs are re-generated before each timestep using the WC, GOR and
Reservoir Pressure coming from the tank models associated to the wells.

In order to batch generate the PCs, the wells model need to have previously been changed to
"Performance Curves" or "PC interpolation" (the "Performance curves" model fits a polynomial
curve to the PC points, whereas the "PC interpolation" model linearly interpolates between the
PC points).

One can decide to select and modify all the wells models in one go by:

1. Selecting all the wells:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 421

2. Changing the well models to "PC Interpolation":

3. Once the GAP well models are modified to "PC Interpolation", the batch generation option

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 422 GAP

can be followed, just like in the case of well VLP generation 402 :

If no wells have previously been selected then this screen will be displayed:

This can be used in the same way as discussed for well selection during "Batch Transfer of
IPRs".

When the wells are selected from the list below, click "Continue":

On the table below, the well are listed accordingly to their types (Naturally flowing, Gas lifted,
ESP...):

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 423

As mentioned before, the WC, GPR and Reservoir Pressures are unique. They are by default
coming from the well IPR sections. However, one can decide to use those information from
the "Wells Model Validation" screen, using the "Transfer" button.
The 10 different Manifold Pressure can be entered by hand, or selected automatically, using
the "Automatic WHP" feature, as shown below:

We use the "Generate" button to generate the Performance Curves.

Note on Gas Lift wells:

For Gas Lift wells, the Performance Curves are generated for two variables; the Manifold
Pressure (as the other wells) and the Gas Lift Injection Rate.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 424 GAP

Like for the other wells, the range of Manifold Pressure has to be entered. The range of GLR
injected (or Gas Lift Injection Rate) is then automatically selected by GAP, in order to always
get the maximum of the PC curves.

Note on the Performance Curves:

Since the PC is a curve fitted on a number of points, this may cause interpolation
approximations. Using the VLP/IPR intersection method instead, linear interpolation is applied
between the VLPs, thus limiting the amount of error that can be introduced to a minimum.

NEW!!! In the current version of GAP the PC curves are characterised by 20 points, which
makes them very accurate and avoid the issue highlighted above.

The VLP/IPR intersection method should be the preferred one. Using PC's might however
speed up the calculation for big systems.

It will eventually be noted that generating Performance Curves ("with VLP/IPR") can help
highlight issues in the quality of the VLPs.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 425

2.7 Model Validation

In any GAP model it is important that the well models used can reproduce measured
well data reasonably well.

This section introduces the user to the Model Validation menu option in GAP, which
allows efficient quality checking of the well models in GAP against measured data, with
the ability to trouble shoot individual wells.

This also allows verifying if they are able to reproduce current test data and update the
well models (e.g. IPR) if required.

This chapter describes the validation of well models in GAP using the |Model Validation menu
options.
The well performance model considered can be:

Performance Curves
VLP / IPR intersection

2.7.1 Well Model Validation

The following assumes that the PROSPER well model is accurately matched to measured
production data.

The following steps outline how to ensure that the accuracy of the PROSPER model has been
preserved within GAP. The accuracy of the well models must be checked before attempting
an optimisation.

The following sections go through the quality check procedure for the well models.

2.7.2 Checking Wells Calibration

Model Validation is based on reservoir pressure, water cut GOR (oil producer wells) and
measured manifold pressures from a test.
GAP uses either the performance curves entered or the VLP and IPR curves that are in the
well-input screens and calculates well production rates for the flowing conditions specified.

The calculated well rates are displayed against the measured rates and an overall liquid error
is indicated. Changes can then be made to the model in order to respect the measured data.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 426 GAP

2.7.2.1 Running Model Validation / Quality Check

To carry out a Model Validation calculation, enter the following screen by selecting Model
Validation | Well Models Validation from the main screen of GAP.

On entering the dialogue, select the well type to work with and whether the oil or liquid rates
should be used when entering rates. This may depend on the measured data available

The values of Reservoir Pressure, Water Cut and GOR present in the well’s IPR screen can
be transferred to this screen. In the case of the Gas producer Wells, the values of WGR
and CGR will be transferred. This is done by using the Transfer button located at the
bottom of the screen:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 427

Select the Transfer from IPR / VLP option. The option Transfer to IPR / VLP option enables
to transfer the data from the validation screen to the IPR / VLP section of the wells
considered.

NEW!!! The Transfer menu allows to transfer to the Model

Validation the well test data from the PROSPER well model
by selecting Transfer/Transfer latest Well Tests from
associated PROSPER files, as shown below:

The wells to select can be chosen from the well list displayed.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 428 GAP

If required, the transferred data (Reservoir Pressure, GOR, WC) can be changed
accordingly to the actual measured data.

For the wells described with performance curves, the reservoir pressure column will be
disabled.

The Import button can be used to import a dataset from a text file. The Paste button can be
used to transfer data from Excel using the Copy + Paste route.

Once part of the dataset has been transferred using the Transfer button, it will be possible
to enter the Manifold Pressure and Liquid Rate (or Gas Rate) according to the measured
data.

For artificially lifted wells, the artificial lift quantity will only be
updated automatically via the transfer option if the existing
artificial lift quantity data has first been deleted from the model
validation table.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 429

Click the Calculate button and GAP will use the VLP tables and evaluate the IPR for the
current producing conditions as entered in the individual well input screens, and use them to
calculate production rates for each well:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 430 GAP

Rates are marked with a contrasting colour if the lift curves were extrapolated to find a
solution.

In the case of a multi-layer IPR model, GAP will use the layer pressures used in the well
IPR entry screen and will disable the reservoir pressure column.

Once the calculation has been done, the user can compare the measured rates versus the
calculated rates of the model and in case there are significant differences, identify the well
and check visually the error. The difference between the calculated rates and the measured
ones.

2.7.2.2 Checking the Quality of Individual Wells Graphically

If a well has large deviation between measured and calculated rates, select the Edit button to
access the well input screen for troubleshooting purposes.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 431

VLP and IPR intersections can be viewed by pressing the Plot button.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 432 GAP

VLP and IPR intersections can be viewed by pressing the Calculate button in the well
summary screen.

On this screen, click on Plot and a plot of the intersection as generated by GAP can be seen.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 433

Once the reason for the discrepancy between measured and calculated well performance is
identified, any required adjustment can be done (e.g. PI adjustment, VLP re-generation with a
more appropriate range of values).

As a final step, the values of Reservoir Pressure, Water Cut and GOR can be transferred
back to the well’s IPR screen by using the Transfer button as illustrated previously, using the
option “To VLP/IPR screen”.
This step is required if GAP is to update the existing values in the wells with the current
measured values.

While troubleshooting check that the IPR PVT and, reservoir pressure etc are
identical to that of test. Also check that the set of VLP data used in GAP has the
relevant range, i.e. not extrapolating.

Note that, in Material Balance Prediction mode, well inflow performances will be calculated
using a connected Tank’s PVT calculator. If no tank is connected, GAP will use its own PVT
calculator. This could yield slightly different results: when performing a Production Validation
calculation prior to performing a prediction, one should connect all the Tanks to the required
Wells before performing this operation.

GAP will display a ‘No Solution’ message if no intersection

could be found.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 434 GAP

2.8 Network Solver and Optimiser

This chapter describes how GAP solves the surface network system for pressures and rate at
various nodes / points within the system once the system is defined. A defined system
consists of the following:

All wells with valid inflow / VLP data or Performance Curves

All pipelines and other surface equipment defined and calibrated.

2.8.1 The Solver

The solver in GAP essentially generates a set of mass balance equations and pressure
balance equation at each joint in the system as indicated in the Core GAP technique 15 . In this
way a set of equations for the whole network is generated. Then these equations are solved
simultaneously, given the boundary conditions, which are fixed separator pressures. The
solver is used to find the pressure and flow distribution in the surface network given the fixed
separator pressures.

2.8.2 The Optimiser

GAP contains a powerful non-linear optimisation algorithm (NLP) for naturally flowing, gas
lifted and injection wells.

GAP will optimise oil production by simultaneously adjusting well chokes, gas lift gas injection
rates, ESP frequencies, pump/compressor speed etc as applicable. If, after reducing the lift
gas injection rate to zero for a gas lifted well, the well production must be further reduced to
meet a constraint for example, GAP can automatically choke wells back.
Please refer to the section on the Optimiser 16 for further details.

2.8.3 Constraints and Equipment Control Screen

2.8.3.1 Constraints
Constraints can be used to choke wells back to meet production targets or processing
limitations while optimising oil production. By careful use of maximum and minimum well
constraints, the user can give priority to, for example, high water cut wells while allowing other
wells to be choked back to meet overall constraints.

The Optimiser in GAP is designed to optimise the returns of the objective functions, which
could be the oil produced, revenue earned or gas produced depending on the options selected
as defined in next section. The Optimisation done is subject to the constraints entered at
various levels in the network.
The results of the optimisation will be the following:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 435

For Naturally Flowing Wells (Wellhead dP)

For Inflow Elements (down-hole dP)
For Gas Lifted Wells (Gas Allocated to the Well / dP at well head)
For Diluent Injection Wells (Diluent Injection Rate / dP at well head)
For ESP Wells (Frequency of operation / dP at well head)
For PCP Wells (Speed of operation / dP at well head)
For HSP / Jet Pump Wells (Power Fluid Injection Rate / dP at well head)
For Inline Controllable Chokes (dP)
For Pumps with Control (Speed of rotation)
For Compressors with Control (Speed of Rotation)
For Optimised Inline Injection (Gas injection Rate)

When performing optimised runs, the wells in the system

should be set controllable (Chokes on the wells that can
be controlled by the Optimiser).

2.8.3.2 Equipment Control Screen

The equipment control screen enables to monitor the status of the different elements of the
system relatively to production validation and optimisation.

The equipment control screen can be accessed using the following icon on the shortcut menu
bar.

The equipment control screen appears as follow.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 436 GAP

The equipment control screen will display all the system equipment susceptible to be
controlled by the optimiser, along with their control variable values.

The top part of the screen enables to filter the equipment list either by equipment type and
sub type, equipment control type, Optimised only or Non optimised only elements.
Once a specific layout has been defined, the Save Layout button enables to save it in memory
to be able to use the same layout later on.

The bottom part of the screen displays the list of system elements as follow:

Equipment Enables the identification of the element considered

Label
Control Enables to identify which specific parameter of a system element
Type can be controlled by the optimiser
Control Enables to identify whether a specific parameter of a system
Mode element is controlled by the optimiser or is set to a fixed value
Measured In relation with the model validation facilities (i.e. see Chap 7),
displays the current measured value of the parameter
considered
Actual Displays the current value of a parameter in the system. For
instance, if a gas lift gas injection rate for a well has to be fixed,
the value of gas lift gas injection will be specified in this section
and the control mode set to Fixed value using the Edit button
Optimised Displays the value of the parameter considered after
optimisation

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 437

Minimum If the control parameter is bounded by a minimum value, displays

this minimum
Maximum If the control parameter is bounded by a maximum value,
displays this maximum
Unit Refers to the unit used to define the control parameter
Edit Enables to go to the Control section of the element considered
Transfer The Transfer button at the bottom of the screen enables to
transfer one set of value from one column of the equipment
control screen to another (i.e. transfer optimised parameter
values to the actual column for instance).
The Transfer button triggers the following transfer screen.

2.8.3.3 Optimisation Objective Function

This section defines the objective function used by GAP to optimise the system
To define the method of optimisation, click on Options Method and select the optimisation
method from the drop-down box as in the following dialogue box:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 438 GAP

Make the selection of optimisation method from the choices provided in the box above:

Production This option optimises the production rate of the primary fluid (in an oil system
this is the oil for example). GAP will calculate the maximum rate that can be
achieved while honouring production constraints
Revenue This option optimises on the revenue generated by sales of oil and gas
produced after taking into account the cost of processing water and injecting
gas. If this option is selected, then prices need to be defined for each fluid in
the system (see below).
The currency can be defined by selecting "Currency Setup".
The following additional data is required to be entered in |Options |Tax
Regimes:
Revenue from oil sales
Revenue from gas sales
Cost of water processing
Cost of injection gas
Cost of power
Cost of steam

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 439

Up to 32 different Tax Regimes can be set.

The Tax Regime to be used by the system during optimisation can be
selected in any well summary screen.
The default Tax Regime is selected in |Options |Default Settings.
Oil rate only / Those methods are used when the objective is to maximize only the Oil rate,
Water rate the Gas Rate or the Water rate
only
Gas + Oil This method allows to maximise at the same time oil and gas production
rate rate only rates and honour constraints
Gross This option maximises the gross heating value produced by the field. This
Heating Value option is mainly used in the case of gas fields where one would like to
maximise the gas heating value of the delivered gas.
If the GAP model contains various streams of gas that will contain different
compositions and hence gravities, the optimizer will control the system in
order to provide at the delivery point a blend of gas that can have the highest
possible heating value. In black oil mode, the program will use a correlation
to associate the heating value to the gravity of the gas (Figure 4.82 in the
Handbook of Natural Gas Engineering published by McGraw-Hill).

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 440 GAP

2.8.4 Solving the Network

There are three Network Solving modes to know,

No optimisation
Optimise and honour constraints
Optimise, no constraints

These options will be discussed later in this section.

To perform the Network Solving on the main GAP menu chose Solve Network and then "Run
Network Solver...".

If there is any gas lifted wells, the gaslift gas available will be required.

Up to ten different cases can be set.

The values set in this screen will be only used when the network is solved with Optimisation.
Otherwise, the gas injection rates for each well will be taken from the |Actual |Actual screen.

Click on Next to specify the separator pressures

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 441

If there is no gas lifted wells, up to ten different Separator Pressures (cases) can be
specified.

Once the separator pressure is defined, click on Next. This leads to the Solver screen as
shown:

On this screen, the Optimisation mode can be selected before performing the calculation.
Click "Calculate" to run the solve network.
2.8.5 Solver Modes
This section describes the different modes that can be selected when solving the network:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 442 GAP

2.8.5.1 No Optimisation
This option invokes the solver only. GAP will calculate the pressures and rates at various
points in the network.
The solution is according to the following criteria:

No constraints specified are honoured

For artificially lifted wells, the solver takes the corresponding artificial lift parameter
value for each well from the Equipment Control screen under the section Actual

For all Equipments with dP Control (Wells and online Chokes) specified as calculated,
the dP is taken as specified in the Equipment Control screen under the section Actual

For all Equipments with dP Control (Wells and online Chokes) specified as a fixed value,
the specified value is used

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 443

2.8.5.2 Optimise with all constraints

This option invokes the solver and the optimiser as well. GAP will optimise the Production /
Revenue honouring the specified constraints.
The solution is according to the following criteria:

All specified binding constraints are honoured (provided they are feasible).

For artificially lifted systems, the optimiser allocates the artificial lift parameter value in
such a fashion that overall production is optimised.

For all Equipments with dP Control (Wells and inline Chokes) specified as Calculated, the
dP is calculated so as to yield an optimum solution.

For all Equipments with dP Control (Wells and inline Chokes) specified as a fixed
number, the specified number is used.

If this mode is selected, an option to also calculate the potential becomes available. If this
option is checked, GAP will also report the optimum calculated values that could be obtained if
the constraints were ignored.
Note: The constraints that have the "Potential" option turned to "Yes" will still be considered
and honored during the potential calculation.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 444 GAP

2.8.5.3 Optimise with potential constraints only

GAP will optimise the Production / Revenue only honouring the "potential" constraints.
Those are the constraints for which the "potential" option is turned to "yes" in the constraint
table. The constraints which have the "potential" option turned to "no" are ignored during this
calculation.

2.8.6 The Solver / Optimiser Settings

The Solver and the optimiser both use numerical schemes for solution. For these schemes,
the derivatives (rates of change) need to be calculated numerically. Also, we define various
tolerance criteria to check for convergence. All these are defined under the Settings. The
settings button is seen in the Solver / Optimiser screen as shown below:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 445

Selecting the “Settings” button will prompt the following screen with the default settings:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 446 GAP

GAP offers various settings configurations. For most cases, the default configuration should
be OK. However, for complex systems, the experienced user may select a different
configuration, better suited to their needs.

The following configurations are available:

Default
Fastest but may be less accurate in small systems
Large System (to speed up)
Quick and Rough
Tight tolerance (slower)

To change a Base Configuration, click on the drop down list box, selected the base
configuration that you wish to change to. Then, click on the ‘Apply’ button, followed by the
‘Reset’ button.

Beyond this, the experienced user may customize the various settings.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 447

Below are some guidelines to the settings available:

Solver - Max iterations This is the maximum number of iterations the solver is allowed to
perform in order to converge. If convergence has not been
achieved within this number of iterations, then the solver will
simply stop. However, in most systems the solver will require
much less iterations than 50 (the default number) so if
convergence has not been achieved, this may indicate a
problem in the model setup which prevents the solver from
finding a solution
Solver - Jacobian This parameter exaggerates the slopes (derivatives) hence a
Term Multiplier faster solution can be achieved if this value is increased.
However, there is the possibility that by increasing this value, the
solver may overshoot and cause problems with the convergence
Solver - pressure The GAP network Solver works with derivatives which are
perturbance created with a certain change in pressure. This delta in pressure
defines the magnitude of perturbation (in psi)
Solver - Total Rate This is the total rate used to calculate the derivatives (as with
Perturbance the pressure perturbance described above). A value of 1 (Mstb/
day or MMscf/day depending on the system being oil or gas) is
the default one and should be fine for most cases. If the model
contains chokes and long pipelines with small ID for instance, it
is recommended to reduce the total rate disturbance to 0.1 or
0.01 as appropriate
Solver - pressure Used to normalize the derivatives of dp/dDp and dq/dDq. It
balance normalizer defines the relative weighting of the pressure balance error
relative to the rate error. The smaller the value the more
accurate the balance will be, but then the more difficult it is to
converge
Solver - well initial It is the fraction of the initial rates (generated from wells using
rate fraction separator pressures as back pressure) that is used to get the
first guess for the solver. The default is 1.0. In some long
pipeline systems or small pipeline systems, or systems with
chokes, where the initial rates are difficult to pass, setting a
smaller number may increase speed of convergence. In such a
case, one might reduce the initial rate fraction, to 0.1 for
instance
Solver - tolerance F This is the root mean square of the errors in the material
balance and pressure differences at any node. The higher this
number, the higher the error in mass/pressure at each node, but
the faster the solution. The default is 0.1
Solver - tolerance min Do not change
Solver - tolerance X Do not change
Solver - Maximum The solver line search will limit the change from one iteration to
Step Size the other by this value

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 448 GAP

Solver - Mass to In IPM 4.0 and earlier, GAP was performing the calculations
Volume Scaling based on volumes. IPM 5.0 can be fully compositional so all the
calculations are done based on mass. This value can be used to
scale up or down the volume given by a particular amount of
mass in the system
Solver - Limit In certain cases derivatives can be very difficult to calculate
movement of because of extremely rapid changes or extremely low changes
derivative in the system. This parameter limits the movement of the
derivatives and attempts to get something meaningful from the
system. Minimum number is 0 and maximum 1
Solver - display This setting allows the user to display the pressure and mass
(0:none, 1:pipe, results in the network on the solver display screen during solver
2: eqns, 3: pipe+eqns) iteration.
0: No intermediate results are displayed
1: The intermediate results for the pipes are displayed
2: The intermediate residuals of equations at the nodes
displayed.
3: The intermediate residuals of equations at the nodes and the
pipes are displayed.
The default is 0 and does speed up the calculation time
Solver - Inflow Crossflow This setting can be set to 0 or 1. If it set to 1, then cross-flow in
Control (0:Off, 1:On) an inflow element is not allowed (cross-flow is prevented). If
instead it is set to zero (default), then cross-flow is allowed to
occur
Solver - report When running any calculation in optimisation mode the program
violated /limiting will highlight eventual limiting or violated constraints.
constraints without In the case the calculation is run in no optimisation mode the
optimisation program will run the system without changing controls, therefore
(0:Off, 1:On) in no optimisation mode the constraints will not be accounted
for.
This setting allows to activate a report showing if a constraint is
violated or limiting for the system when the calculation is run
without optimisation
Optimiser - max This is the maximum number of iterations the optimizer is
iterations allowed to perform in order to converge. The default is 100
Optimiser - well This is the fraction of the normalized system potential used for
initial rate fraction the first guess. If there are small chokes and long pipelines in
the system, a smaller value (0.1) could be used, in order to
ensure that the calculations do not start with critical conditions at
these elements.
Another case where the well initial rate fraction may require
reduction to 0.1, is when there are constraints which are very
small compared to the potential of the wells. So the optimiser
will reach the constraints by increasing the rate of the wells,
instead of the conventional rate reduction than might pose
problems in such a case (optimiser not 'seeing' the constraints).

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 449

The default is 1
Optimiser - gas For gas lifted systems, this defines the gas lift gas injection rate
injection perturbance used to perturb the system. The default is 0.1 and should work
for most cases
Optimiser - frequency For ESP lifted system, this defines the magnitude of frequency
perturbance used by the optimizer in perturbing the system. The default is
0.1 and should work for most cases
Optimiser - rpm If there are surface pumps and/or compressors in a network
perturbance and pumps lifted system, this defines the magnitude of
revolutions per minute used by the optimizer in perturbing the
system. The default is 100 and should work for most cases
Optimiser - max In simple terms, this parameter will determine whether a
step size constraint is seen and whether it should be included in the
matrix. The higher this number is, the further the algorithm sees
to include violated constraints as part of the matrix. On the other
hand, a high value will lead to greater changes and a more
complicated problem. An inequality g is binding if g/max {1, ||
grad g||} <= max step size where g(x) (penalty) is m-vector of
smooth nonlinear constraint functions. Among the g's there may
be any lower or upper bounds on the variables. These are
identified by a special indicator array
Optimiser - parameter 1 Serves as a scaling of the "max step size" under certain
conditions. (An attempt to automate the above)
Optimiser - parameter 2 Optimiser-Parameter 2 is the factor that controls how far the
optimiser is allowed to work towards finding the optimum
objective function. The smaller this parameter the longer it will
work to extract every possible barrel. The default value is 1e-6
and it is advised not to change this parameter.

Optimiser - parameter 3 There are two elements to consider when looking at an

optimisation problem.
1. Creating a solution space for the optimiser to work with
2. Solving the optimisation problem within the space created
The Space of potential solutions is created by the Solver. The
solver uses the input data (such as well IPRs, VLPs…) to
generate this space of potential solutions. Thus the quality of the
input data will itself determine the performance of the optimiser.
When running the optimiser, the space of potential solutions is
divided in sub-spaces. Solutions within these sub-spaces will be
analysed by the optimiser at each iteration.
Parameter 3 regulates the size of the sub-spaces. The larger
the Parameter 3, the larger will be the sub-space being looked
at.
The impact of this parameter could, for instance, be that if there
are two local maxima close by and a high value of Parameter 3

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 450 GAP

is selected then it is possible that one of the two maxima might

be missed.
The Parameter 3 in most cases should be kept at the default
value unless otherwise recommended
Optimiser - optimisation This setting allows the user to display the intermediate values of
variable display the optimization variable. The following conventions apply:
(0:nothing, 1:final value 0: No intermediate value is displayed
only, 2:each trial) 1: The final values of each trial are displayed
2: Each trial value is displayed.
The default value is 2 and should be OK for most cases. In
general, hiding the display would reduce the time required for
the calculations
Optimiser - Optimisation Changes the sum of constraint violations allowed during
Mode iteration. Mode ZERO should switch automatically from one to
the other
Optimiser - lift and choke Artificially lifted wells may be prevented to be choked and at the
wells simultaneously same time optimized on gas or frequency
Optimiser - report Controls the tolerance at which a constraint violation flag is
constraint violated triggered
by more than (percent)
Optimiser - Sensitivity Will change the driving term of the inflow of wells and hence the
on Inflow rest of the system after normalization and pre-conditioning
Optimiser - Maximum Self explanatory
number of retry when
well unstable
Prediction - save This setting allows the user to save or not to save the
intermediate step intermediate results during a prediction run. The following
results snapshots at conventions apply:
each prediction step 0: Intermediate steps results are not saved. No *.gmh file is
(slower!) generated.
1: All intermediate steps results are saved.
The default option is 0. For troubleshooting purposes, one might
want to save the intermediate step results at the expense of the
calculation time. During a prediction run, a so-called *..gapsnp (
GAP prediction snapshot file) file is created and can be reload
afterwards with |Prediction Prediction Snapshot Reload
Prediction - reset This setting allows to reset or not to reset the solver variables
solver variables for each new step during a prediction run. The following
at each prediction conventions apply:
step (slower!) 0: The solver uses the results of the last step as first guess for
the current step.
1: The solver will start any new step without using the results of
the previous step.
The default setting is 1 and should be fine for most cases
Prediction - reset This setting allows to reset or not to reset the optimizer

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 451

optimiser variables variables for each new step during a prediction run. The
at each prediction following conventions apply:
step (0:never, 0: The optimizer uses the results of the last step as first pass
1:always, 2:smart) for the current step.
1: The optimizer will start every new step without using the
optimization results of the previous step.
2: The optimizer will reset the variables whenever there are
changes is the system, such as wells coming on.
The default setting is 1 and should be fine for most cases.
However, in cases where major changes in system configuration
occur from one time step to another, it might be more
appropriate to reset the solver variables to account for changes
in the model response
Prediction - control This option will limit the movement of optimiser variables
movement of optimiser between timesteps. The default value is 1.
variables This setting is only valid in forecasting mode.
Let us say maximum separator constraint of 10 000 bbls is set
on a system with two wells but each single well is capable of
producing 8000 bbls for instance. Clearly, there is an infinite
number of solutions to achieve 10000 bbls as a total. Hence as
long as there is an infinite number of solutions, from one step to
the another we may go from one solution to the other .
Mathematically speaking, all these solutions are equally valid if
there is no discrimination in the objective function. However, the
profile can oscillate heavily . What has been added in IPM 6.2 is
a penalization of the movement of variables from last time step .
This is controlled by the “Prediction - control movement of
optimizer variables” at the bottom of the setting screen for
forecast . The default is 1 (means penalize movement from last
time) . Changing this setting to 0 means that the history has no
effect on the present optimization and the rate/time profile may
show oscillations

.
2.8.7 Calculation Results
Once the mode is selected, click on Calculate to run the Solver.

To view the results of the solution, click Main to return to the main menu. Click Results to
display or plot the results of the calculations or Report to prepare text based reports.

A convenient way to inspect production results is to plot a histogram of production for each
well. Click Results Summary All Wells Plot to display a plot similar to the following:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 452 GAP

Amount of Gas Lift

Allocated
(No optimisation):

Oil Production Results

(No optimisation)

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 453

Amount of Gas Lift

Allocated (Optimised)

Oil Production Results

(Optimised)

Refer to the chapter on Reporting 494 for more details. Clicking

on an icon and selecting the results data section can view
calculated results for individual system elements.

2.9 Prediction
GAP prediction calculates optimised production rates over user-defined time steps. Tank
pressure decline curves or MBAL material balance models can be used to provide reservoir
pressures and saturations. GAP automatically re-calculates well IPR for the current reservoir
conditions (and re-calculates the well performance curves if the user is using performance
curve option), then performs the Network Solver calculation to find the well production rates.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 454 GAP

Using the well rates, cumulative oil production for each well and reservoir tank is calculated.
The reservoir model (Decline Curve or MBAL Material Balance) is used to find the reservoir
pressure at the end of each time step. The entire process is repeated stepwise until the end
of the prediction time is reached.

Each well connected to a Tank shares the same reservoir pressure. The parameter IPR
Offset dP is optionally used to shift the reservoir pressure from the Tank datum to each well’s
intake node depth.

Reservoir targets can be set for each tank and abandonment limits for each well. GAP will
calculate how much water or gas injection is required to maintain tank pressure within the
user-specified end of prediction target pressure. Well, tank, separator, and joint constraints
can be scheduled in time and the results plotted.

In the next paragraphs the following topics will be illustrated:

Set up of Material Balance predictions is explained.

Options that are available in the running of a prediction.

An overview of short term, decline curve forecast predictions is given.

In order to carry out predictions the prediction option must be enabled under the “systems
option” screen. To do this select |Options |Method from the main menu. This will display the
screen shown below:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 455

From the drop down menu next to prediction select “On” to allow predictions to be performed.

2.9.1 Prediction - Basics

GAP uses the pressure and saturations from a reservoir model to calculate well inflow and,
together with relative permeability curves and PVT properties, the producing fraction flow of
oil, water and gas.

MBAL can be directly linked to GAP to provide the required reservoir data for production
forecasting applications. GAP interrogates standard MBAL files for each reservoir tank in the
production system. Well performance information that may be contained in the MBAL files is
ignored. GAP runs the MBAL model in predictive mode by entering the oil, water and gas
production for a time step. MBAL returns the reservoir pressure and saturations at the end of
the step. These values are used by GAP to calculate well production potential for the next
step.

To make a production forecast using material balance for the reservoir models, GAP requires
MBAL tank models that contain a minimum of the following data:
PVT data,
Oil (or gas) in place,
Residual saturations,
Aquifer model,
Pore Volume Vs Depth (if using breakthrough constraints),
Relative Permeability curves (as Corey exponents).

2.9.1.1 Forecast Workflow

Assemble the required information:

Reservoir PVT data (Use Flash data)

Well inflow and equipment configurations
Reservoir data as listed above
System geometry
Production and process system constraints

A suggested workflow is described below:

1. Match PVT in PROSPER

2. Build well inflow and outflow models and match to field data where
applicable

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 456 GAP

3. Build and match reservoir models using MBAL. Matched PVT can be
shared with PROSPER *.pvt files.

4. Draw the gathering system sketch using GAP

5. Batch calculate well VLP and IPR using PROSPER from within GAP

6. Match pipeline pressure drops in GAP if applicable

7. Check GAP model using the Model Validation and Solve Network

8. Set-up up well and reservoir constraints

9. Run production forecast

The following sections describe the data entry for the setting up of a Material Balance
Forecast in GAP.

2.9.1.2 Linking MBAL files to GAP

Once prediction has been enabled double click on the relevant tank icon in the GAP system.
This will display the tank summary screen shown below.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 457

In order to use an MBAL model for predictions select the ‘Material Balance’ option from the
drop down menu. This will display a Browse button which allows an MBAL file to be selected.
To link an MBAL file, use the Browse button to invoke a file selector and browse to the
required file. Initially, only the Run MBAL button is active on the data entry dialog: once GAP
has located the relevant MBAL file, the MBAL model and MBAL Results buttons in the Tank
Summary Screen become active.

2.9.1.3 Prediction Execution and Results

This section describes how to perform a prediction. It is assumed that the network model has
already been set up as described in previous chapters.

Click on | Prediction | Run Prediction from the main menu:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 458 GAP

The set-up screen shown below will be presented.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 459

This screen is used to set the start and stop dates for prediction and the time step size.

Start Enter the date of start prediction. Note that the start date needs to be within the
Date historical ranges of all the tanks connected in the network model
End Date Enter the date of end prediction
Step Enter the prediction step size. Note that the rate produced is considered to be
Size constant within a time step
Restart The “Restart” Facility can only be accessed if a run has been performed already.
A restart can serve in not having to repeat the full run if it is decided (based on
previous results) to include a new well in the system midway through the forecast
period for example
DCQ The "DCQ Prediction" option enables GAP to calculate the maximum daily gas
predictio contract quantity that the system can deliver for the entered DCQ period. This
n option is particularly useful to understand DCQ quantities that can be delivered by
the field over a given contract period.

The Populate button on the DCQ Prediction Schedule can be used to

automatically create a DCQ profile. This feature is only valid to enter a GAP
predicted DCQ i.e., entered dates where the Predict is set to NO will be
automatically deleted from the DCQ table.

GAP fixes a DCQ constraint over the first DCQ period, and as soon as the
program sees that it cannot honour the maximum gas rate constraint during the
DCQ period, GAP reduces the DCQ constraint and runs the prediction over the
same time period up to the date it failed honoring the DCQ. The prediction will
only pass to the second DCQ period when GAP has ensured that the first DCQ
constraint can be honored over the first DCQ period.

The program takes into account the seasonal swing factors entered in the "Swing
Factor" table and will calculate the controls that would need to be applied in the
field (wellhead chokes, compressor speed, etc.,) to honour the DCQ values
during the prediction period.

NOTE: If none of the Predict entries in the DCQ prediction schedule have been
set to "YES," then when attempting to select Next from the Prediction screen to
continue on to execute the prediction, GAP will automatically again open the DCQ
Prediction Schedule screen until a "Predict | Yes" entry has been made

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 460 GAP

If no DCQ periods have been set to Predict | Yes, then the DCQ
Prediction dialogue will continue to appear until all (or one) of
the entered DCQ "Predict" periods has been set to YES

If the DCQ menu has been completed via Prediction | Edit DCQ
Schedule then the entered DCQ values will not be accessible via
the DCQ Prediction | Edit button shown above

Seasonal swing factors can be entered for each of the DCQ periods
Wells Clicking on the Wells button will display the screen shown below. This screen
allows Well breakthrough and abandonment constraints to be defined for each
well.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 461

Use this screen to enter constraints that are active for the entire
prediction run. Constraints can also be scheduled and modified
before a prediction is started by selecting |Prediction
Equipment Schedule.

Reservoir constraints can also be entered on this screen if desired. The constraint parameters
are outlined in the table below:

Target Pressure GAP will determine the gas or water injection

required to achieve the pressure target by the end
of the prediction period
Gas Injection GAP will make up the required reservoir injection
Fraction using the specified fraction gas. If set to zero,
100% water injection is assumed
Voidage Repl. Pressure will be maintained by voidage
(Water) replacement with water
Voidage Repl. Pressure will be maintained by voidage
(Gas) replacement with gas
Water Recycling Produced water is re-injected
Gas Recycling Produced gas is re-injected
Gas Recycling Gas less a specified volume is recycled. This
(Prd – amnt) constraint can be scheduled to model injection of
gas in excess of sales contract
Fixed Rate (Water) Injection of a specified rate of water
Fixed Rate (Gas) Injection of a specified rate of gas

The voidage replacement options cannot possibly work if

the MBAL models contain multiple tanks which are
connected with transmissibilities. This is because the
production will affect the volumes transferred from one
reservoir to the other. The problem becomes non linear
since the injection will change the balance of volumes
previously calculated based on production alone.

Click |Next to proceed to the Results screen:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 462 GAP

Click Next from this screen, and in the dialogues that follow enter the separator pressure and
available gas lift gas (if applicable), and then Calculate to begin the forecast. The same
options as for solving are available with respect to optimization.

GAP will load and check the tank models and check that the IPR & VLP data are available for
each well. The system will then be built automatically and allocated to calculate production
rates for the first time step. When constraints are active, GAP will iterate until the optimised

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 463

solution rates for the time step are found.

The cycle is repeated until the end of prediction time is reached or no wells remain active. The
Material Balance Forecast Results screen is filled with the calculated data at the end of the
prediction run. Oil, water and gas production for the prediction time period plus the closing
reservoir pressures for each tank and the total system are shown on the screen. Water and
gas injection are also shown if required to satisfy tank level constraints. Detailed results by
tank and well can be output by clicking the Report button.

General Note on Schedules during the prediction: It is possible to

schedule any variable change during the run, using the variable
OPENSERVER access string. GAP The variable OPENSERVER access
string can easily been accessed "Ctrl+Right clicking" on the variable tab.

2.9.1.4 Notes on Constraints

When setting up the model, it is recommended to start with the minimum
necessary number of Constraints. In this way the user has the possibility to
validate that the model performs as it is supposed to.
After that, the number of Constraints can be increases, if necessary.

GAP provides with a physical model of the whole production/injection system.

This means that any constraint imposed in the system should reflect the
physical reality of the field.

For example, if a well at its maximum production cannot produce more than
1000 STB/day oil rate, it would not have sense to set up a minimum
production constraint of 2000 STB/day, as this would be impossible to
achieve.

Based on these considerations, it is recommended not to use minimum

constraints during a prediction run.

In the case where minimum constraints cannot be physically honoured

(because the system not necessarily can deliver the minimum liquid rate as the
reservoir depletes, for example), the optimiser will try to honour an infeasible
situation. This may provide unreliable results for the whole system.

If the objective is to shut down the well if this cannot produce a minimum
amount, this can be achieved by setting up an Abandonment Constraint of
minimum rate in the Abandonment section: as soon as the well production
decreases below the set minimum abandonment constraint, the well will be
closed.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 464 GAP

2.9.1.5 Linking Production / Injection Forecasting

Reservoir (tank) targets allow GAP to model production rates under specified conditions of
injection and pressure maintenance. GAP will calculate both the production and the injection
rates required to satisfy the reservoir constraints assuming that sufficient equipment
(compressors, pumps, injection wells) is available to inject the required volumes of gas and
water. Linked injection models must be set up using Material Balance Forecasts.

This is adequate to model systems that are production constrained. When, for example,
injection water requirements to maintain reservoir pressure exceed plant capacity, there are 2
possible courses of action:

Reduce production off take

Relax the reservoir pressure (voidage) targets

When gas or water injection models are available, they can be linked to a GAP production
system model. The production forecast is made first assuming that the reservoir injection
targets can be met. GAP will then run the linked injection models to determine the required
injection pressures.

If the injection system is unable to inject the target volumes, GAP will re-run the production
forecast step using the maximum capable injection rate. In this way, realistic optimised
production forecasts can be computed that take into account both production potential and
injection capacity.

There are two ways to carry out a production prediction with both production and injection:

Having the production wells and injection wells described in the same model
Having two different models, one model for production, and one model for injection, and
link these models together.

To have the production wells and injection wells described in the same model, we simply add
the production wells and injection wells in the same network drawing and link them
accordingly. A simple system with one production well and one injection well linked to the
same reservoir is shown below as example:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 465

The alternative is to have the injection system modelled as a separate GAP file:

Then, this separate GAP model can be linked to the production system from the Options
menu:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 466 GAP

Then GAP will connect the two models and by selecting Window/Tile vertically for example,
both models will be displayed on the screen:

Once this option is selected, the main window of GAP will display both models:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 467

The decision on which method to choose will depend on whether or not pressure support
options are set (for example 90% voidage replacement is specified).

When the two models are linked in the same GAP file, they are solved together. This implies
that GAP does not know how to constrain the injection system to honour reservoir
management targets.

When the two models are set in separate GAP files and linked as shown above, then GAP will
first solve the production system. GAP will then know how much is produced so if any
pressure support options are specified (like voidage replacement for instance), the injection
system will be optimized based on the allowable injection volumes. If the potential of the
injection system is higher than the volume to be injected, then the injection system will not be
constraint.

Note: The "Water Injection System 709 " (in the Worked Example section) illustrates how to
create a water injection system, and how to link it "step-by-step" to the production system, in
order to run voidage replacement by water.

2.9.2 Prediction Options

If a decline curve or material balance prediction type is set up the Prediction menu item
becomes active.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 468 GAP

Note also that it is possible to initialise IPRs from tank simulation runs (in MBAL or decline
curve mode) or from the tank/well models in the MBAL files themselves: this may be
convenient when setting up a well for a prediction.

2.9.2.1 Run Prediction

This is used to access the Set-up screen and initiate the prediction run.
2.9.2.2 View Prediction Log
This is used to access directly the Prediction Log Window:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 469

Log This reports the steps followed by the calculations

Events Log screen reporting any event occurring in the system (for example wells coming
on line, change of separator constraints, etc.)
Constrai This log screen highlights if constraints are violated during the prediction
nts
Limiting The "Limiting" window shows the constraints that are limiting the overall system to
highlight the elements of the network that are constraining the system
Script If a Prediction Script is defined, this log screen will report any message sent by
the script itself
Message This log will report messages highlighting for example well or pipeline lift curves
s extrapolation

2.9.2.3 Save Prediction Results as

It is possible to save the prediction results every time a prediction is run. This allows to save
multiple scenarios and compare them all together on the same Plot.
The feature is accessed from the Prediction menu.

The Add button should be used to create a new stream, that can be renamed:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 470 GAP

In order to plot on the same graph the results from different saved runs, click on "Variables"
from the graph menu bar and select the different streams, as shown below:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 471

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 472 GAP

2.9.2.4 Reload Prediction Snapshot

This option is used to re-load the reservoir pressures, well performance curves, well rates and
production pressures for a particular time step. Select Prediction Reload Prediction
Snapshot and the following screen will be presented:

Select the date of the required time step and press OK to load the results. Well performance
curves and GAP results can be checked for each part of the system at the selected time.

To be able to use material balance snapshot reload, the solver / optimiser

setting should have been chosen accordingly.

By default, GAP does not save the snapshots for a prediction run as this adds
to the runtime. It will be down to the user to specify through the GAP
prediction settings if these snapshots have to be saved.
The setting to be modified is the "Prediction - Save Intermediate step results
snapshots at each prediction step (Slower!)" in the GAP prediction settings
section.
This setting has to be set to 1 if the snapshots have to be saved. The Setting
dialog is shown below.
Once this is done, a prediction forecast can be run and the snapshots will be
saved.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 473

In the Prediction menu other reloading options are available, which allow to change the
snapshot to view:
Reload Prediction Previous Snapshot
Reload Prediction Next Snapshot
Unload Prediction Snapshot
2.9.2.5 Prediction Script Options
The Prediction Script option of GAP allows to execute a script to modify the model or get
results during a Prediction.
The options available are:

Edit Prediction Script

Selecting edit prediction script displays the screen where it is possible to enter the script
code:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 474 GAP

Please refer to the section "Prediction Script 520 " for more information on this topic.

Import/Export The script can be stored in an ASCII file (extension .gapscr) and
Prediction Script imported and exported in/from GAP
Disable Prediction This option discards the prediction script from the Prediction
Script

2.9.2.6 Edit System Constraints Schedule

Selecting | Prediction | System constraints schedule displays the following screen.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 475

From this screen, it is possible to modify system constraints and to change the prediction step
size. In the date column, enter the date that the event is required to occur. In the event type
column choose to either change a constraint the prediction step size. In the constraint type
column select the constraint that is to be changed and in the New value column enter the new
variable value, ensuring that it is the correct units.

2.9.2.6.1 Notes on Constraints

When setting up the model, it is recommended to start with the minimum
necessary number of Constraints. In this way the user has the possibility to
validate that the model performs as it is supposed to.
After that, the number of Constraints can be increases, if necessary.

GAP provides with a physical model of the whole production/injection system.

This means that any constraint imposed in the system should reflect the
physical reality of the field.

For example, if a well at its maximum production cannot produce more than
1000 STB/day oil rate, it would not have sense to set up a minimum
production constraint of 2000 STB/day, as this would be impossible to

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 476 GAP

achieve.

Based on these considerations, it is recommended not to use minimum

constraints during a prediction run.

In the case where minimum constraints cannot be physically honoured

(because the system not necessarily can deliver the minimum liquid rate as the
reservoir depletes, for example), the optimiser will try to honour an infeasible
situation. This may provide unreliable results for the whole system.

If the objective is to shut down the well if this cannot produce a minimum
amount, this can be achieved by setting up an Abandonment Constraint of
minimum rate in the Abandonment section: as soon as the well production
decreases below the set minimum abandonment constraint, the well will be
closed.

2.9.2.7 Edit Separator and Joint Schedules

The separator schedule is used to change separator or joint backpressure at any point during
the prediction run, or to change a particular constraint on the separator or joint operation. The
separator schedule operates in the same manner as the Well Schedule described above.
Separator pressure changes can be used to model, for example, installation of gas
compression equipment.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 477

To enter constraints, first select the separator or joint required from the list of system items in
the lower part of the dialogue. Then, in the upper list, enter the following data:

Enter the date that the constraint or the pressure change will apply from at the end of
the current constraint list (if any). If this date does not fall on an exact time step in the
prediction run, GAP will perform an additional step to account for the change. This will
cause the prediction calculation to take longer.
Select the event type (change constraint, change manifold pressure) from the drop
down list in the next field.
If a constraint change was selected, select the constraint from the drop down list in
the next field.
In the final field, enter either a new value for the manifold operating pressure, or a new
value for the selected constraint.

This screen allows the schedule for the joints/ separators to

defined in a batch mode, but each equipment could be
scheduled in the equipment-input data screen as well. If this has
been done, this screen will reflect that.

The fields available are:

Date Date that event occurs. If this date lies between timesteps, then the date will
be added to the list of step dates - ie the timestep will be divided. This

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 478 GAP

ensures that the effect of an event is modeled when it happens, rather than
delaying it till the next regular timestep. Another effect of this will be to
increase the time taken to run the forecast, since any events that lie between
timesteps add another step to the overall calculation
Event Choose the event from the ones that appear on the drop down list.
Type Depending on the type of equipment
Wells
Change constraint
Start Well
Stop Well (X-flow is still allowed between layers if the well is
multilayer)
Stop Well-No Xflow
Change Downtime
Change OPENSERVER variable
Execute OpenServer Command

Pipelines / Joint
Change constraint
Mask
Unmask
Change OPENSERVER variable
Execute OpenServer Command

Separator / Injection Manifold

Change constraint
Change Pressure
Mask
Unmask
Change OPENSERVER variable
Execute OpenServer Command

Compressor / Pump / Check Valve / Gate Valve / Inline Separator /

Inline General
Mask
Unmask
Bypass
Unbypass
Change OPENSERVER variable
Execute OpenServer Command

Inline Choke
Change diameter
Mask
Unmask
Bypass

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 479

Unbypass
Change OPENSERVER variable
Execute OpenServer Command

Inline Injection
Change Injection Rate
Mask
Unmask
Bypass
Unbypass
Change OPENSERVER variable
Execute OpenServer Command

Sink / Source
Change Fixed Rate
Mask
Unmask
Change OPENSERVER variable
Execute OpenServer Command
Constraint If Change constraint was chosen above, this field contains a drop down list
Type of constraints. Select the desired constraint to change from this
New value This field specifies the new value of pressure, if a change of change of
constraint was selected above. Otherwise, it specifies the new value for the
constraint that is to change

Action Buttons

OK Save changes and go to the previous panel

Cancel Ignore any changes and go to the previous panel
Help Displays this screen

2.9.2.8 Edit Equipment Schedule

The equipment schedule is used to mask and unmask equipment and modify constraints at
any time in the prediction run. Click Prediction Equipment Schedule and the following screen
will be presented:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 480 GAP

The screen is divided into 2 sections. The lower part lists the equipment in the system. To
enter constraints for a particular piece of equipment, click on the required equipment in the
lower list. The upper list will display the current set of constraints for the equipment in
question.

In general, to schedule equipment constraints:

Select the relevant equipment

Enter the date that the constraint will apply from at the end of the current constraint list
(if any)
Select the event type (for Change constraint, mask item, unmask item or other variations
depending on the specific piece of equipment) from the drop down list
Select the constraint type (Max Liquid, Min Pwf, Min Liq, well weighting, shut in priority,
maximum draw down etc) from the drop down list, if applicable
Enter the new value for the constraint, if applicable.

The final two fields for each row are only applicable if the event type is a constraint change;
otherwise, the fields are not active and cannot be edited.

Note that the dialogue supports the standard GAP cut and paste facility, to aid the movement
of data between the dialogue fields.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 481

This screen allows the schedule for the wells to define in a batch
mode, but each well could be scheduled in the well-input data
screen as well. If this has been done, this screen will reflect
that.

The fields available are:

Date Date that event occurs. If this date lies between timesteps, then the date will
be added to the list of step dates - ie the timestep will be divided. This
ensures that the effect of an event is modeled when it happens, rather than
delaying it till the next regular timestep. Another effect of this will be to
increase the time taken to run the forecast, since any events that lie between
timesteps add another step to the overall calculation
Event Choose the event from the ones that appear on the drop down list.
Type Depending on the type of equipment
Wells
Change constraint
Start Well
Stop Well (X-flow is still allowed between layers if the well is
multilayer)
Stop Well-No Xflow
Change Downtime
Change OPENSERVER variable
Execute OpenServer Command

Pipelines / Joint
Change constraint
Mask
Unmask
Change OPENSERVER variable
Execute OpenServer Command

Separator / Injection Manifold

Change constraint
Change Pressure
Mask
Unmask
Change OPENSERVER variable
Execute OpenServer Command

Compressor / Pump / Check Valve / Gate Valve / Inline Separator /

Inline General
Mask
Unmask
Bypass
Unbypass

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 482 GAP

Change OPENSERVER variable

Execute OpenServer Command

Inline Choke
Change diameter
Mask
Unmask
Bypass
Unbypass
Change OPENSERVER variable
Execute OpenServer Command

Inline Injection
Change Injection Rate
Mask
Unmask
Bypass
Unbypass
Change OPENSERVER variable
Execute OpenServer Command

Sink / Source
Change Fixed Rate
Mask
Unmask
Change OPENSERVER variable
Execute OpenServer Command

Constraint If Change constraint was chosen above, this field contains a drop down list
Type of constraints. Select the desired constraint to change from this
New value This field specifies the new value of pressure, if a change of change of
constraint was selected above. Otherwise, it specifies the new value for the
constraint that is to change

Action Buttons

OK Save changes and go to the previous panel

Cancel Ignore any changes and go to the previous panel
Help Displays this screen

2.9.2.9 Edit Tank Schedule

The tank schedule option is used to change reservoir parameters at any point during the
prediction run. The tank schedule operates in the same manner as the equipment Schedule
described above, i.e. select the required tank, enter the date to change the target, select the

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 483

constraint type, and then enter the new value. Supported tank target parameters are:

Voidage Replacement (with water or gas)

Pressure Target
Production recycling (water or gas)
Gas recycling less sales amount
Fixed rate (water or gas)

These constraints can be changed or turned off altogether using the event type list box of the
Tank Schedule screen.

The fields available are:

Date Date that event occurs. If this date lies between timesteps, then the date will
be added to the list of step dates - ie the timestep will be divided. This
ensures that the effect of an event is modeled when it happens, rather than
delaying it till the next regular timestep. Another effect of this will be to
increase the time taken to run the forecast, since any events that lie between
timesteps add another step to the overall calculation
Event Choose the event from one of
Type Voidage Replacement (Water)

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 484 GAP

Voidage Replacement (Gas)

Pressure Target (The User will also be required to input a gas injection
fraction)
Water Recycling
Gas Recycling
Gas Recycling (Produced gas - fixed amount)
Fixed Rate (Water)
Fixed Rate (Gas)
Voidage Replacement (Water) OFF
Voidage Replacement (Gas) OFF
Pressure Target OFF
Water Recycling OFF
Gas Recycling OFF
Gas Recycling (Produced gas - fixed amount) OFF
Fixed Rate (Water) OFF
Fixed Rate (Gas) OFF

These events allow the scheduling of any desired injection policy for the tank.
If no associated injection model exists, the desired injection will be calculated
and it will be assumed that the injection system can inject this. If an
associated model exists, the desired injection will be used as a target on the
injection model, then the rates actually achieved used to calculate the
pressure for the next timestep.
Constraint If Change constraint was chosen above, this field contains a drop down list
Type of constraints. Select the desired constraint to change from this
New value This field specifies the new value of pressure, if a change of change of
constraint was selected above. Otherwise, it specifies the new value for the
constraint that is to change

Action Buttons

OK Save changes and go to the previous panel

Cancel Ignore any changes and go to the previous panel
Help Displays this screen

This dialogue also supports the standard GAP copy and paste mechanism.
2.9.2.10 Edit Gas lift Schedule
This screen is used to change the amount of available gas lift gas at a particular point in the
prediction run. When invoked, the following dialogue is produced:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 485

To enter a change in the amount of lift gas available, enter the date at which the change is to
occur in the left-hand column of the dialogue. If this is not exactly at a time step in the
prediction run, an extra step will be carried out to account for the change. This will cause the
prediction calculation to take longer, so care should be taken in the setting up of these
constraints if calculation time is important.

In the following field, select the required event type from the drop down list. At present, only a
change in the amount of available list gas is supported.

In the final field, enter the new amount of available list gas. Press OK to save the list, or
Cancel to ignore the changes.
Fields available:

Date Date that event occurs. If this date lies between timesteps, then the date will
be added to the list of step dates - ie the timestep will be divided. This
ensures that the effect of an event is modeled when it happens, rather than
delaying it till the next regular timestep. Another effect of this will be to
increase the time taken to run the forecast, since any events that lie between
timesteps add another step to the overall calculation
Event Choose the event from one of
Type Change Gas Available (only option currently)

This events allows the scheduling of any desired gas available amount
changes in the system
New value This field specifies the new value of pressure, if a change of change of

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 486 GAP

constraint was selected above. Otherwise, it specifies the new value for the
constraint that is to change

2.9.2.11 Edit DCQ Schedule

To meet seasonal and contractual demands when running a gas field, it is possible to
schedule gas contract volumes and seasonal swing factors when performing a prediction. To
do this, invoke the DCQ (daily contracted quantity) schedule menu item under the Prediction
menu button. This is only active when modeling a gas field.
The following screen will be displayed:

DCQ constraints can be entered at the system level or at different levels of the system
hierarchy (Task 1 on the screenshot above).
Enter the start date and the contract gas volume requirement per day (Tasks 2 and 3 on the

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 487

screenshot above).
The DCQ can be fixed by the user (the "Predict" option is turned off) or can be predicted by
GAP when the "Predict" option is turned on. GAP will predict the maximum DCQ that can be
honored for the whole DCQ period (Task 4 on the screenshot above). See Prediction
Execution and Results 457 for more information
If the option "Change Swing Factor" is turned to "Yes" (Task 5 on the screenshot above),
then "seasonal" swing factors need to be entered over the DCQ period considered (Task
5bis on the screenshot above). Enter date offsets (in the format date/month) from the start
date entered in the left-hand table, and corresponding swing factors, as shown in the
example above. The instantaneous gas production is the product of the DCQ and seasonal
swing factor.

The contract type (gas rate, gross heating value, water rate or oil rate) can be selected by
the user.

In its treatment of DCQs and swing factors, GAP sets a maximum gas volume constraint at
the selected system level that is equal to the DCQ value multiplied by the swing factor (if
present). If swing factors are not required at all, then one should simply set a maximum gas
volume constraint at the required component (from, for example, the Edit Constraints Table),
or at system-level (from Options | System Constraints).

When entering the DCQ profile it is important to ensure that the Production
System option has been selected under Type (see above). This ensures
that the total production of the model response is considered.
2.9.2.12 Edit Schedule Event Groups
A series of schedule events can be "grouped" into an "Event Group".
As shown below, two Event Groups have been created, in addition to the two ones by default
(Off and On):

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 488 GAP

Now, any schedule entered at any element level (wells, pipelines, joints...) can belong to one
of the Event Groups defined above.
Simply use the drop down menu as shown hereafter to select which Event Group does the
event schedule belong to:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 489

When the Event Group is "enabled" from the "Edit Schedule Event Group" window, all the
schedules associated to this Event Group will be enabled.
When the Event Group is "disabled" from the "Edit Schedule Event Group" window, all the
schedules associated to this Event Group will be disabled.
2.9.2.13 Apply Schedule to
This option is used to visualize the status of the system at a certain date during the prediction
period.
Once a date is entered, the GAP network is displayed as it will be at this specific date, taking
into account the "masked/unmasked" items and the constraints.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 490 GAP

2.9.2.14 Purge Results

These options allow to eliminate the prediction results (latest run performed) and the
Prediction Snapshots.
2.9.2.15 Plot and View the Prediction Results
The prediction results can easily be visualized, plotted, analysed using the options below:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 491

2.9.2.15.1 Plot Nodes Prediction Results

The first screen is used to select the type of nodes to consider for the results (left hand side),
as well as the list of the equipment to consider (right hand side):

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 492 GAP

Click "Plot" to access the graph were the results are plotted for all the nodes considered.
From this plot, the option "Variables" is used to modify the results' variable to plot (a maximum
of two variables can be plotted on the same graph).
It will be noticed that if different runs' results were saved as different streams, they appear on
the right hand side of the screen below:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 493

2.9.2.15.2 Plot Tanks Prediction Results

Same as for the Nodes 491 , this option allows to view the Prediction results from multiple tanks.
2.9.2.15.3 Plot Emissions Prediction Results
(NEW!!!)
This option allows to view the results of all the Emissions, which are given by the sum of all
Flares and Vents in GAP.
The screens work in the same way as in the case of Plot Nodes Prediction Results 491 .
2.9.2.15.4 View DCQ Prediction Results
When the DCQ are "predicted", DCQ values can be accessed from this screen:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 494 GAP

2.10 Results and Reports

This chapter describes how to view results and prepare plots and reports from GAP
simulations. GAP's features allow a wide range of data to be conveniently reported. The two
options that will be described in the following chapters are the Results and the Reports
menus.

Selection of Results from the main application menu allows access to the results on the
screen. Selection of Reports allows the setting up of hard copy reports for printing or the
writing to files for inclusion in external applications such as spreadsheets and word
processors.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 495

2.10.1 Results Menu

Click Results from the main menu and it will be prompted to select the level of detail required
for display. Choose from 5 options:

Detailed To display detailed data including water cuts, pressures

and temperatures
Summary To display summary data for selected items. Select the
summary variable to display
Total System To display overall system production rates as a function
of gas injected
System Emissions To display all the results concerning the fluid that goes in
vents and flares. This option is active only when flares or
vents are available in the network
Plot Performance To display the PC curves. This option is active when in
Curves the system there are wells modeled with Performance
Curves Interpolation, and it can be used to verify the
quality of the PC

For the Detailed and Summary reports the user can also select which elements to require
results for. Select the choice of:
All Items
All Wells
All Joints
All Pipes
All Separators
Selected Items.

2.10.1.1 Detailed Results

Detailed results are required for troubleshooting and investigation of individual element
temperatures, pressures, etc. An example of a detailed results screen is shown below:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 496 GAP

Selecting one of these options allows access to the results menu on which the results of the
equipment chosen are displayed.

Use the arrows at the bottom of the screen to scroll to the right and display details such as
choke pressure losses, oil and gas gravity, etc. The following command buttons are used to
display data from the selected system elements and move about the results database.

The command buttons allow access to the results of other nodes, as well as the prediction
results (if any exist of course).

2.10.1.2 Summary Results

Use summary results to quickly identify where production problems are occurring or where the
best producers are located. An example summary results screen is shown below:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 497

The difference of the Results Summary with the detailed results is that whereas in the detailed
results these are shown for each item separately, in the Summary the results are shown for all
items together to facilitate comparisons.

Results are displayed for each selected element for up to 10 gas injection rates or separator
pressures (in the case of naturally flowing wells). Use the scroll thumb at the right of the
results table to scroll through all the data. Select the variable to display by clicking the
direction arrows located to the right of the report item field.

The fields of the lower half of the screen represent the quantity of the given display variable
present at the system component in question. The total fields at the top of the dialogue
represent summations of the fields in the lower half. If these are not meaningful they are left
blank.

Clicking Plot from the Summary Results screen will display a histogram for the report variable
arranged by selected item. This feature is useful for quickly identifying strong producers or
problematic wells.

An example of a summary histogram for oil production is shown below:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 498 GAP

2.10.1.3 Total System Results

A quick way of accessing the results for the total system is through the Total System results:

This will lead to a screen in which the total system results from the network solve as well as a
prediction can be seen:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 499

By default the program will display the solver results. The user can access the forecast results
by clicking the “Prediction” button shown above. A typical display of prediction results is shown
below:

2.10.1.4 System Emissions

NEW!!!
This section allows to display all the results concerning the Emissions, that is to say, the fluid
that is withdrawn from the network by means of flares and vents.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 500 GAP

The results are displayed as in the previous sections:

Selecting Prediction the prediction results are displayed:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 501

2.10.1.5 Plot Performance Curves...

This option is used to plot the well performance curves. This is useful to check the quality of
the PCs well by well.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 502 GAP

2.10.1.6 Plot Options

Below is a brief discussion on different actions one can do on the plots, as well as the menu
appearing on the plots in GAP, which is the same irrespective of how it is created.

Zoom/Unzoom To zoom in on a particular region of a plot, first click the left-hand

mouse button on a corner of the required zoom area. While holding the
button down, drag the mouse to the opposite corner of the region and
release the button. The plot will be rescaled so that the zoom rectangle
fills the entire plot window.

To ‘unzoom’, either invoke the Replot menu item of the Plot menu, or
double-click the mouse anywhere within the plot display (apart from an
annotation: see below). The plot will be redrawn at its original size
Scales The Scales dialogue allows changes on the scales of the plot window
relative to the actual plot display.

When this option is invoked, the following dialog is displayed:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 503

GAP normally picks appropriate scales to display the data. Scales can
be used to enter custom upper and lower limits for both X- and Y-
scales. To rescale the plot to the current data, press ReScale. The
way the plot is scaled then depends on the setting of the Scaling
Method; selection of End Point in this field will cause the scaling to be
based on the exact maximum values of the data, whereas a Rounded
method will cause the scaling to be rounded upwards to create space
around the plot data. To display round numbers on the intermediate grid
lines, ensure that the span of the upper and lower plot limits fits evenly
the number of plot blocks set in the Options menu.

In addition, this dialogue allows to extend the plot window around the
plot display to create a border area. To do this, change the X axis and
Y-axis Plot Extents. This can be a useful facility to display large
descriptive annotations around the edges of the plot: see below for
more information. Otherwise, it is recommended that the plot extents
remain at their default values.

To return the plot scaling to its original state, press the Defaults button.
This fills the input fields with default values.
Output Plots can be output to the Windows clipboard, a Windows metafile or a
hard-copy device in colour, grey-scale or monochrome formats. In the
former case, plots can then be pasted directly from the clipboard into
other Windows applications such as a word processor. Windows
metafiles can be saved and read by a variety of applications.

If one selects hard copy output, the program will prompt to enter printer
option on the following screen:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 504 GAP

Select the desired plot options and click Print to output the plot.
Depending on the actual hard copy device connected, one may need to
experiment with font styles and sizes. Font selections made here affect
only printed plots. Report fonts must be set up in the report section.
Before printing reports or plots, check that GAP’s default font selection
is available on the system. Return to the plot menu by clicking on OK
Colours This option enables customisation of the colour of any item on the plot.
A sample colour-customising screen is shown below:

Select the plot element of which to change the colour in the left-hand
list. Slide the Red, Green and Blue controls to mix the sample colour
until it matches the choice. Clicking Save Colours | OK will make the

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 505

colour selections permanent. Clicking OK will keep the colours for the
current GAP session only.

If the user selects a grey scale colour scheme, the RGB sliders will be
forced to the same value (effectively tied together) so that only 255
different shades of grey are available. Alternatively, if one select a
monochrome colour scheme, the slider values will be forced to zero or
255, allowing the selection of only black or white.

The Colours menu can also be accessed directly from the main menu of
the GAP application screen. This allows to change the colours of the
components of the main screen, either permanently or just for the
current session
Options The Options button enables to customise the overall appearance of the
plot screen and select font type and size, etc. A sample options screen
is shown below:

To adjust the horizontal or vertical font, invoke the appropriate button.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 506 GAP

This brings up a standard font browser, in which one can set up font
styles and sizes.

The number of blocks that make up the X and Y axes are adjusted by
entering the required number if the Options entry fields. In addition, this
dialogue can be used to:

Toggle the display of the Plot Labels,

Toggle the display of the Plot Scales
Change the mode of display of the grid lines. The current choice is:
dotted line, dashed line, solid line, or tick mark.
Rescale the plot. Select the scaling method and click the ReScale
button, as for Scales above.
Toggle the date stamp of the Plot Title
Toggle the display of the mouse cursor position co-ordinates
Adjust the plot line thicknesses. This affects only the thicknesses of
the data lines, not the grid lines or any other display features.

Press the Defaults button to fill the entry fields with default values
Plot It is possible to annotate plots with descriptive labels of choice. To bring
Annotations up the annotations dialogue, invoke the Annotate button of the plot
menu. The following dialogue is produced:

Annotations can be entered in the text box as shown in the above

screen image. Up to 1024 characters are allowed on multiple lines; to
move to a new line, press <Ctrl>+<Enter>.

If a single annotation is entered (as above) and OK is pressed, the

dialogue will be removed and the annotation will appear in an arbitrary
position on the plot screen. The annotation appears in the selected font,

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 507

with a border colour and fill colour as set in the annotation dialogue. To
move the annotation to the desired position on the plot, press <Shift>
and drag the box to the new location with the left-hand mouse button.

As many annotations as desired can be added to a plot. When the

dialogue is invoked again, the first annotation in the list will be displayed
by default. Press Add to create a new entry; the text box will be cleared
and a new entry will be made in the Annotation Number drop down list
box. To move between existing annotations, simply select the required
annotation number from the drop down list.

An additional facility offered is the ability to use the dialogue in

conjunction with the reporting procedures. Invocation of the Data button
will bring up the standard GAP report dialogue; select the type of report
that is required and press OK. The report will automatically be pasted
to the edit box, although some further manual formatting may be
required. When using this facility, it may be useful to increase the plot
extents using the Scales dialogue (see above) to allow room for the
large annotations produced.

If there are several annotations on a single plot, the annotations

dialogue can be opened at a particular entry by double-clicking the left-
hand mouse button on the required annotation.

A brief description of the annotation dialogue fields is given below:

Data Allows a GAP report to be written to the dialogue. See above for
more information.
Show All Show all the annotations in the list.
Hide All Hides all the annotations in the list without deletion.
Show This checkbox can be used to display or hide the current
annotation on the plot. This is a good method of temporarily
removing an annotation from display without deleting it. Use
Show All or Hide All to perform the same operation on all
annotations.
Font Brings up a font selector, which allows the current annotation font
Select style, colour, and size to be set up.
Fill When this is set, the annotation box in question will appear filled
Checkbox in the current fill colour (see below). Otherwise, the box will be
‘transparent’.
Fill Brings up a colour selector to allow to choose the colour for the
Select inside of the current annotation box.
Alignment The annotations can be oriented horizontally or vertically. Vertical
alignment is only possible when true-type fonts are selected.
Add Adds an annotation to the list.
Delete Deletes an annotation from the list. The last annotation in the list

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 508 GAP

must be removed with Clear All.

Clear Clears the text box for the current annotation.
Cut Clears the current annotation text boxes and pastes it to the
clipboard.
Copy Copies the current annotation to the clipboard.
Paste Pastes the current clipboard contents to the annotation text box.
Undo Undoes the last editing action.
Clear All Clears the entire annotation list.
2.10.2 Reports
Use the main menu Report option to prepare reports from a current analysis, or from a
previously saved .GAP file.

When the Report button is selected, a series of screens leads through the process of
selecting the data required for the report. To include a section in a report, click on the check
box to the left of the item and, depending on the selection, further input screens will be
presented. This process ensures that only relevant sections are reported.

For example, if the prediction results need to be extracted to Excel, then the prediction results
option needs to be checked:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 509

Selecting the “Run Report” button will allow the program to write the results on the clipboard,
which can then be pasted into Excel:

More than one section can be reported in the same report. For example, if all the options are
selected for reporting:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 510 GAP

This time the screen report is selected. The result after selecting “Run Report” is a screen
report as shown below:

2.11 History Matching an IPM Model

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 511

2.11.1 Introduction
This chapter describes the recommended procedure to be followed in ensuring that an IPM
model has been fully history matched and is therefore a reliable platform upon which
management decisions can be made.

An IPM model consists of several elements which are interacting; the response of one
element depends on one or more of the others. For example, the response of a well model
depends on both the reservoir and surface network performance. In the case where the
reservoir model has been history matched but no quality check has been done on the surface
network, then the response of the whole model will not represent reality and results will be
unreliable.

By nature, an IPM model can be made up of hundreds of nodes, making it complex and
difficult to manage if no procedures are in place to allow effective troubleshooting and
matching. The aim of this chapter is to describe such a procedure and guide the user in the
process of history matching.

2.11.2 Procedure for History Matching

There are two ways an IPM model can be history matched:

1. A model can be created and run for the duration of history, checking the results at the
end to ensure that rates are consistent with measured cumulatives and rates.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 512 GAP

2. Each element of the system can be created and matched independently. By definition,
when the individual models are put together into a full field system, this will automatically
be history matched.

The following is a comparison of the two methods.

2.11.2.1 Running the model and comparing to history

Consider the model shown in the figure above. This is a complex network that could take up to
5 hours to run for the duration of history (depending on the time step size of course). If the
results at the end of the run do not reflect the historical production, the engineer should make
changes to the model and re-run. The following is a list of some changes that could be made
in the model:

1. Change the size of the fluid in place of one or more reservoirs

2. Change the IPR of one or more of the wells
3. Change the pressure drop response of one or more wells
4. Change the pressure drop response of one or more surface pipelines
5. Change the response of one or more compressors

This list can extend to every single element that makes up the system. In addition to this, all
the events that took place in history should be accounted for by scheduling:

1. When each well was on or off line

2. When each compressor was on of off line
3. Routing of fluids through different pipelines
4. Shutdowns of part of the field

Again the list can be quite extensive and days can be spent scheduling events to happen.

This procedure for history matching is not the most efficient way a model can be matched. It
will take a lot of time to perform and the engineer might be changing one element of the
system whereas the problem might lie somewhere else.

2.11.2.2 History matching each element independently

This procedure is the recommended way to perform history matching in a full IPM model:

1. Match the reservoir models to historical production (independent of well

performance), quality checking PVT at the same time.

2. Match the well models (independent of reservoir and surface facilities) to more than

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 513

one test in time. In order for a well model to be predictive, it needs to be able to
reproduce more than one test without changes to make it match for each test. If
changes are made to match to each test (different pressure drop correlation for
example) then the model cannot be considered reliable.

3. Match the surface pipelines to tests.

4. Run the full model (solve) at different points in time during the history. Since each
element of the system has been matched independently, then the results should by
default match the total production from the field. If the total results for the particular
date do not correspond to what was produced from the field, then the elements that
were not matched (lack of tests for pipelines for example) should be looked at to
determine the inconsistency.

Let this procedure be demonstrated on the following simple model:

The matching procedure can start from the reservoir model. This can be history matched as
explained in the MBAL manual:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 514 GAP

And fractional flows created for the history wells in order for the water cut and GOR to be
correct for a particular water saturation:

As soon as this is done, each well can be matched independently of the reservoir model in
PROSPER:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 515

to more than one tests in time:

Tests can be matched in PROSPER based on the matching procedures described in the
PROSPER part of the manual.

Once each model is built and the network completed, then the pseudo rel perms should be
transferred from the MBAL file to the equivalent GAP wells. This can be done from the IPR
screen of GAP using the “From MBAL” button:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 516 GAP

This will prompt the following icon:

Where either only the rel perms or the whole IPR definition can be transferred from prediction
wells in MBAL to the equivalent wells in GAP:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 517

The surface pipelines can also be matched if tests are available:

In order to initialise the whole model for one specific date during the history now, one can take
advantage of the following feature:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 518 GAP

The initialise feature will perform the simulation from MBAL and transfer the results (Reservoir
Pressure, water saturations and PVT) in the IPR models in GAP:

All the wells in the model can be selected and then a date can be entered in the following
screen for which the model can be checked:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 519

Selecting Calculate and Continue will update the well models, thus initialising them to
represent the conditions of the day in question.

The Model Validation feature can now be used as explained in the related topic 425 of this
manual in order to check the well production against tests:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 520 GAP

If no tests are available on a well by well basis for the particular date selected, the whole
system can be solved instead and results checked against production data.

As the reservoir and well models have been validated, any problems can be attributed to the
elements of the system that have not been matched. The attention of the engineer can then be
focused on those elements rather than the already matched ones.

2.12 Prediction Script

2.12.1 Introduction
The Prediction Script is a feature that enhances enormously the capabilities of the software
with regards to “What If” scenarios and control mechanisms.
The Prediction Script can be accessed from the menu Prediction/Edit Prediction Script or from
one of the buttons in the menu:

Selecting this will prompt the following screen:

where scripts can be written in VB Script, a format very similar to the VBA to control the
prediction.

These are some of the functions one can do with the scripting:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 521

a. Wells can be prioritised and switched on as soon as the potential of the field cannot
satisfy contracts volumes.
b. Log messages of prediction events (for instance water cuts reaching a given value)
c. Automatic detection of unwanted fluid volumes in the system and triggering of disposal
systems.

The list of things that can be done can be very extensive indeed.

2.12.2 Functions
The scripting facility revolves around the following commands:

DoGet Used for retrieving a certain value

DoSet Used for setting a certain value
Cmd Used for performing a command (such as masking a well)
LogMsg Logging a message on the log screen appearing during the prediction:

EndRun Ends a prediction run

SetRedoStep Sets the flag that will force the program to re-run the solver for the
current time step
SetTakeSnapshot Switch on and off the 'take snapshot' flag. 1 = on
(0 or 1)

These commands can be set in the same way as the Open Server commands in four
subroutines in the script:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 522 GAP

PredProlog Subroutine that is executed once at the beginning of the

prediction (before any calculations are done)
PredEpilog Subroutine that is executed once at the end of the prediction
(after all calculations are done)
PredStepProlog This subroutine is executed at the beginning of each prediction
step
PredStepEpilog This subroutine is executed at the end of each prediction step.
For example, results of the previous timestep can be used to
make decisions on how to set up the network for the timestep to
follow
PredStepSolverProlog The script is run once at the beginning or end (depending on the
and Epilog Prolog/Epilog choices) of each solver step. This means that if
the GAP model has a production system, water injection and/or
gas injection system, the script will be run at the beginning or end
of solve of each of them. This mode is particularly useful, for
example, when we want to act on the injection systems during a
time step

2.12.3 Example
Let us consider an example:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 523

In the above screen, the script is set to operate at the end of each timestep in the prediction
of GAP, as shown be the red marker.

Looking at the code line by line now:

The first line check if the well considered is masked or not. The ISMASKED variable returns 0
if the well is activated and a value # 0 if the well is masked. The value returned by this variable
is stored in a.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 524 GAP

If the well is activated (i.e. a = 0) the water cut of the well considered is taken from the solver
results and reported in the script log of the prediction.

The following lines state an if statement that indicates that if the water cut of the particular
well is above 15% then this well will be masked and a message will be entered in the script
page of the prediction window stating that the above function has been carried out.

Just to refresh, the addresses can be obtained by pointing the mouse cursor in the cell where
the address is required and clicking the right mouse button. So for the water cut of well W1,
this is what this corresponds to:

So, when the program is run, the log window will show the following commands recorded:

During each timestep, in the script window we can see the water cuts values for well W1
reported.

The same window will report the masking of the well.

Important Note: When a model will be run using the Restart facility, only the
events entered in the schedule will be considered and not events imposed by
the script.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 525

More Details regarding this script can be found in the GAP section of the
OPENSERVER manual.

2.13 Defining System Units

In GAP, the units can be changed / selected at two levels. These are at the GAP network
level i.e. global level or at an individual variable level.

2.13.1 Defining the Global Unit System

The Units menu can be used to define the units that are applied to the inputs and calculation
results. There are a number of pre-defined unit systems in the program which can be selected
from the window shown below:

The default unit system will be “Oilfield”.

When the Units menu option is invoked, the following dialog appears:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 526 GAP

This dialog is an interface to the global units system: changes made here affect all input and
output units throughout GAP.

To change the selection for a particular unit, select the required

unit from the list box. To change the unit system, select the
required new system from the list box at the head of the column.
Note that the per-control settings are also saved as part of a unit
system.

2.13.2 Setting the Input / Output Unit System

The user may select a unit system from the drop-down list boxes at the top of the unit
columns. This will change the default units for all variables in GAP. The following options are
available:

Oilfield
Norwegian S.I.
Canadian S.I.
German S.I.
French S.I.
Latin S.I.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 527

GAP calculates internally in Oilfield Units. The program

measurement units default to Oilfield Units unless otherwise
specified.

It is also possible to change the units of individual variables in

GAP to generate a user specific set of units that can be saved
and picked up later in other GAP models.

To change units of individual variables and create a mixed set of units follow the steps below:

First, find the variable for which units needs to be changed. To view the variables, move the
scroll bar thumb in any direction, up or down, until locating the variable.
The corresponding input and output unit categories will scroll simultaneously. From the
appropriate unit category (Input/Output), select the preferred measurement unit for the unit
selected. To view the list of units click the arrow to the right of the field. To select a unit, click
the name to highlight the item.

To view the conversion between the currently selected unit and the base (default) unit for the
variable in question, click the blank button to the right of the units drop down list.
Note that a change to the input or output units in the unit database is truly global, and will
affect entries made in the variable database (accessed from the Controls button). For
example, a change in the input unit of Pressure will affect, among others, the Layer Pressure
in the Well IPR Input screen.

Once all the changes have been made Press on Save button and it will prompt for a name to
be given to the mixed set of units.
2.13.3 The Control Database
The controls database is invoked from the Controls button of the unit dialog and is shown
below.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 528 GAP

This screen allows the user the access to change the units of
various variables NOT GLOBALLY but at a single variable level.
For example we can change the units of pressure to psig in tank
production data as shown above, whereas in the unit selection
screen, we might have a selected Norwegian SI with completely
different pressure units.

Thus, we will have the pressure unit as Norwegian for all entries
except for the tank.

The control database contains information on all the controls of

the Post V3.2 dialogs.

2.13.4 Defining Units at a Variable Level (Dynamic Unit Conversions)

It is possible to change the input or output unit of a control ‘on-the-fly’, without recourse to the
controls dialog described above.

By clicking the right hand mouse button on a dialog entry field, it will be possible to obtain the
following menu (for example):

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 User Guide 529

This example was taken from the well IPR data entry screen. Select the new unit for the
variable that is required. The values in the entry field will be updated accordingly. The variable
database will also be updated with the new unit selection.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

Chapter

3
 Examples Guide 531

3 Examples Guide

3.1 Examples Index

The following table can be used as reference for the example included in this Guide.

Application area Topic Examples Guide

Setting up a network model for a gas
Gas field Modelling and
field, entering constraints and Example 1 535
Optimisation
Schedules, running Predictions
Setting up a network model for an oil
field, Model Validation to QC the well
models, using "Initialise IPRs from
Oil field Optimisation and Tank Simulations" to update the
Example 2 574
Forecasting model to a certain time, setting
constraints, running Solve Network,
entering schedules and running
Predictions
Viewing details of the pressure drop
Detailed results for
calculation in GAP using PROSPER on Example 3 619
pipelines
line feature
Setting up a network model with gas
lifted wells, pipeline pressure drop
Artificial Lift Modelling and
matching, gas lift optimisation using Example 4 628
Optimisation
GAP Optimisation feature, use of the
well Controls
Generating lift curves for gas lift wells
with casing head pressure, setting up
a network model for the gas lift
Gas lift injection network
injection network, linking the Example 5 654
optimisation
production network to the injection
network and optimising the two
coupled network models
Setting up network model with ESP
lifted wells, Model Validation to QC
well models, Pipeline Matching to
Artificial lift Optimisation -
validate pipeline pressure drops, Example 6 678
Model QC
running Optimisation to honour
constraints on maximum power
available
Setting up network model for water
Pressure support with injection system, linking it to the main
Example 7 709
water injection production model and running
Prediction with the two coupled

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 532 GAP

models
Using PROSPER on line to run
Flow assurance studies onadvanced temperature modelling in
Example 8 724
pipelines pipelines, importing PROSPER
pipeline models in GAP
Modelling de-hydration and heat
Modelling surface
exchangers with the Inline General (or Example 9 737
equipment
Programmable) element
Smart well completions Setting up a network model for a
multi-layered well completion with
inflow controllable valves, optimising Example 10 743
the two layers to maximise oil
production
Setting up a GAP network model for
a gas retrograde condensate field
PVT Compositional
using the fully compositional method, Example 11 761
modelling
running predictions and evaluating the
changes of composition
PVT Compositional Exporting the lumped and de-lumped
Lumping/Delumping compositions from PVTP, setting up a
GAP model with compositional Example 12 795
lumping/delumping, running model and
viewing the results
PVT Black Oil Setting up GAP to work with Black Oil
Compositional Lumping/ Compositional Lumping/Delumping, Example 13 816
Delumping running model and viewing the results

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 533

3.1.1 Extracting a GAP Archive file (.GAR)

All the files related to a worked example are stored in a single GAP archive file. An archive file
works in a similar way to a ‘zip’ file in that a group of files can be compressed and stored in
one single file.

The worked example files need to be extracted from the archived files so that they can be
used in the following examples. The simple process of extracting the files is described below.

To extract an archive file

From the GAP main screen, click on | File | Archive | Extract, the following screen will appear:

Select the *.gar file to be extract and click on | Open (details of the archive files that are
relevant to each example are given in the exercises.) The ‘Extract archive’ screen will be
displayed. Fill in the Extract Directory box at the bottom of the screen to specify where the
files will be extracted to. Remember the location that has been entered so that the files can be
retrieved later.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 534 GAP

After setting the directory, click on | Extract to extract the files.

When the Job Progress bar has turned fully blue click on |OK. The files have now been
extracted.

Related topics:
Archive Creation 64
Archive Extraction 67

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 535

3.2 Example 1 - Gas Field Network modelling with GAP

3.2.1 Objectives
Definition of the problem
A new gas field has been discovered offshore at 330 m water depth. The top of the reservoir
is 3460 m TVD below the mean sea level.
The reservoir will be depleted with 4 wells tied-back to a sub sea manifold via sub sea lines.
The produced fluid is to be delivered 80 km away from the sub-sea manifold at the beach via
a main pipeline and a riser.
The treatment facilities can process maximum 250 MMscf/day of gas.

The objective is to determine for how long the field can keep producing the target rate.
To achieve that, it is necessary to generate a production profile from 01/01/2008 to
01/01/2018 for a given target rate of 250 MMscf/d. The delivery pressure at the beach is
fixed to 1000 psig.

Learning topics
The objectives of this example are to learn how to:
Set-up a basic GAP model for a gas field.
Set-up constraints in the system.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 536 GAP

Pipeline matching
Run a prediction using GAP and MBAL.

Executive Summary
The steps followed will be:
1. Build the GAP network
- Draw the GAP network
- Define a reservoir in GAP
- Define wells in GAP
- Generate Well IPRs in GAP using PROSPER
- Generate Well VLPs in GAP using PROSPER
- Define the pipeline and eventual surface equipment
- Setting Schedules, Constraints and well Controls
2. Run the prediction

The files for this example and the final model can be found
in the GAP archive file format in the following directory.
~\samples\GAP\gasfield\gasfield\gasfield1.gar
Extract 533 the archive file to an appropriate directory
3.2.2 Data available
Description of the reservoir
Initial Reservoir pressure at 5300 psig
datum:
Reservoir Temperature: 142 degF
Initial Gas in Place: 2000 Bscf
Associated MBAL file: \Samples\GAP\Gasfield\drygas.
mbi
Table 1 reservoir data

Description of the wells

A well is described with an Inflow Performance relationship and Vertical Lift Performance
curves.

In this example, the C and n Method will be used for the description of the IPRs.

The file names corresponding to each well are shown in the table below.

Well Name Start of production Well Model

- dd/mm/yyy
DryGas#1 01/01/2008 DryGas#1.out
DryGas#2 01/03/2008 DryGas#2.out
DryGas#3 01/05/2008 DryGas#3.out

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 537

DryGas#4 01/07/2008 DryGas#4.out

Table 2 wells data

Description of the pipelines

In this example, we will define the mean sea level as the reference depth. Mean Sea level and
Beach are at the same elevation (e. g. 0.00 meter).

Pipe Length TVD TVD Diamete Heat Flow correlation

(km) upstrea downstrea r Transfer
m m (m) (in) coeff
(m) (Btu/h/ft2/
F)
Sealine#1 0.5 330 330 4 3 Petroleum Experts
4
Sealine#2 0.5 330 330 4 3 Petroleum Experts
4
Sealine#3 0.5 330 330 4 3 Petroleum Experts
4
Sealine#4 0.5 330 330 4 3 Petroleum Experts
4
SSManifold 40 330 100 16 3 Petroleum Experts
to RiserBase 4
Riser 0.5 100 0 16 3 Petroleum Experts
4
Table 3 pipeline data

Test data are available for the main pipeline SSManifold to RiserBase

3.2.3 Build the GAP model

This section can be used as a general step-by-step procedure to build any GAP model.
The sketch illustrated in the Objectives 535 will be used as reference.
3.2.3.1 Draw the GAP Network
1. Getting Started
Begin by starting the program.
From the GAP entry screen, select File New to reinitialise GAP.

2. Defining the global system options

To begin setting up the system options, select Options | Method and make the following
selections:

System Type : Production

Optimisation Method : Production

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 538 GAP

PVT Model : Black oil

Prediction: On
Prediction Method : Pressure and Temperature
Water Vapour: No Calculations
Temperature model: Rough Approximation

Then click Ok to exit this screen.

This completes the system set-up and reinitialises the program.

3. Defining the Units System

In order to define the units system click on Units | Edit Units. The following screen will appear:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 539

A units menu can be selected by pointing the cursor in the cell below input. This allows the
overall units system to be selected. Clicking on the white cells below this allows individual units
to be changed.
Input : Oilfield
Output : Oilfield

In order to follow exactly the path suggested in this

example, it is recommended to set the inputs and outputs in
Oilfield Units.

For further details, access the Units section 525 of the user Guide.

Click on OK to complete the selection of units and to close the screen.

4. Drawing the system

The purpose of this section is to demonstrate how to construct graphically the complete
network.
The reservoir will be described first. Notice that the order of the drawings has no effect on the
results.

The reservoir
In order to draw a reservoir select the tank icon and click anywhere on the screen. This
will create an icon which will be called “DryGas”.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 540 GAP

The name “DryGas” is like all icon/node names in GAP, just

a label. Node labels are not required, but it is generally a
good idea to be able to identify them in this way.

Press the |Ok button to complete this and place the tank icon on the screen.

The wells
We will start with the first well “DryGas#1”.
Select the Well icon and add a well. Name this “Drygas#1”

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 541

Some useful tips

1. To move a node to a new location on the screen, move the mouse arrow over the node
to be moved and press the left mouse button and the |Shift key. Keep the left mouse
button pressed and move the node to the new location. Releasing the left mouse button
will position the node in the new location.
2. Nodes can be deleted by selecting the scissors icon from the toolbar menu and
clicking on the node to be removed.

The Separator “Beach”

A separator is considered by GAP to be the end of the
production chain and will be allocated a pressure at a later
stage. It does not have to actually be a separator, rather a
convenient delivery point where a known pressure exists.

Select the Separator icon and click the left-hand mouse button in the main GAP display
area towards the top right. Give the resulting node the name “Beach” when requested

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 542 GAP

The Joints
A joint is any manifold or intersection where pipes
converge. Every pipe must have at least one end
connected to a joint.
THIS MEANS THAT TO CREATE A PIPELINE TWO
JOINTS NEED TO BE INTRODUCED

our joints will be created to start with:

1. One joint to represent the wellhead (“WH#1”) near the well icon
2. One joint to represent the sub sea manifold (“SSManifold”)
3. One joint to represent the Riser base (“RiserBase”)
4. One joint to represent the Riser top (“RiserTop”)

Click on the Joint icon and add 4 joint icons by clicking in the main GAP display area: one
near the well, one at the middle of the screen, one to the right of the screen and one next to
the Separator.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 543

The links /pipes

Links are connection tools which connect the various nodes
in the network system. The following rules apply:

a link between a reservoir and a well has no dimension

a link between a well and a joint has no dimension
a link between 2 joints may have a dimension (pipe, chokes)
a link between a joint and a separator may have dimensions
a well can not be linked directly to a separator. An intermediate joint is compulsory,
a reservoir can not be linked directly to a separator.

Link the components together by doing the following:

1. Selecting the Link icon.
2. Click on the first component to be connected with the left mouse.
3. Keeping the left mouse button pressed, move the cursor from the first component to the
second component.
4. A joint will form when the mouse button is released over the second component.

Create links between the following components:

1. Connect the Tank “DryGas” to the well “DryGas#1”,

2. Connect the Well to the well head (“WH#1”)
3. Connect the well head to the sub sea manifold (“SSManifold”),

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 544 GAP

4. Connect the sub sea manifold to the base of the riser (“Riserbase”)
5. Connect the riser base to riser top (“RiserTop”)
6. Finally, connect the Riser top to the delivery point (“Beach”).
Deselect the link icon to avoid adding more headings

The basic model layout has been specified. Additional components can easily be added or
deleted when the model is refined later. The GAP screen display should look something like
the screen shot below:

Completing the System description

Following the same procedure as that outlined above:

Create 3 additional well icons and link these to the DryGas tank.
Create 3 additional joints representing the well heads.
Link each well head to SSmanifold as below.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 545

3.2.3.2 Define the Reservoir

For the purposes of this example an MBAL file has already been built. Please refer to MBAL
manual and the Worked Example section of the online manual for examples on how to build an
MBAL model.
The MBAL file location needs to be identified from within GAP. In order to do this, firstly open
the DryGas tank summary screen by double-clicking on the tank icon. The summary screen is
shown below:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 546 GAP

From this screen create a link to the MBAL file by clicking on |Browse and selecting the
MBAL file
The MBAL file DryGas.mbi can be found in the directory where the archived file was
extracted to at the start of the exercise:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 547

Click on | Open to establish the link between tank icon in GAP and the MBAL file.
To confirm the changes that have been made to the tank, click on |OK at the bottom left of the
dry gas summary screen.

At this stage the GAP file should be saved. To do this click on |File |Save As and using the
browsing feature save the file as DRYGAS1.GAP.
3.2.3.3 Define the Wells
Description of the first well DryGas#1

A well is described in GAP by means of an IPR and a VLP. Refer to the PROSPER manual for
more information about well modeling. For this exercise, VLP’s have been generated and
saved so that they can be imported into GAP.
In order to describe the well DryGas#1 double-click on the well icon. This will open the |Well
Data entry summary screen.
In the summary screen enter the following information:

Label: DryGas#1
Mask: Include in System (default)
Well Type: Gas Producer
Model: VLP / IPR intersection
PROSPER well file: DryGas#1.OUT

(Ensure that the Well Type is changed from ‘Oil Producer (No lift)’ to ‘gas producer’)

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 548 GAP

Complete all the wells according to the data of Table 2 536 .

PLEASE MAKE SURE THAT THE WELL TYPE IS

DEFINED AS "Gas Producer"

Access the IPR section from the Summary screen and set the IPR Type to C & n for all well
IPR models:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 549

3.2.3.4 Generate Well IPRs

Once all the wells have been created and the associated PROSPER well models selected, the
IPRs can be generated in GAP in a batch mode.

From the main GAP menu select Generate | Generate Well IPRs from PROSPER.

Then select All | Generate.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 550 GAP

By double-clicking on any of the wells and selecting the IPR tab, one can verify the IPR input
data as shown in the following screen shot:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 551

The IPR curve can be seen by selecting Plot.

The scale of any plot can be changed by clicking on |Scales on the menu bar. This allows the
min and max X and Y axis values to be redefined, and the number of grid blocks (divisions)
that the axis should be divided into.
Before leaving the IPR section, access the More tab screen and select the set of Rel Perms
for fractional flow prediction to be From Tank Model. This is important to determine the WGR
produced by the well, based on the history matching performed in MBAL.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 552 GAP

Do the same for all the wells. The IPR section of each well will become green, sign that
the data have been imported correctly and no further data are required.

Click on |OK to get back to the GAP main screen.

3.2.3.5 Generate Well VLPs

To import the VLP curves in GAP (ref. VLP generation 402 ), access the menu Generate/
Generate Well VLPs with PROSPER., then then All, then Data to enter the ranges of
sensitivity variables.
Please refer to the VLP generation 402 for guidelines.

In this case, as the well models have already been saved, we will use the ranges already
present in the models:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 553

NOTE: the CGR value is unique, as the fluid type is dry gas, which assumes the fluid to have a
fixed amount of condensate, which is vaporized in the gas.

After that, select Ok and Generate. At the end of the calculation the program will have all the
VLP curves sets imported in GAP.

In order to check the generated lift curve access the well Summary screen (double click on
the well), then access the VLP section. This will lead to the VLP description screen:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 554 GAP

In this screen the .vlp file has been created, containing all the VLP curves. Select Inspect to
verify the quality of the curves.
3.2.3.6 Define the Pipelines
Description of the seabed lines
According to the network, the well DryGas#1, #2, #3 and #4 are tied back to the sub sea
manifold via sub sea lines. The four lines are exactly the same
The sub sea line is therefore represented by the link between the wellheads WH#i and
SSmanifold.
In order to describe this access the ‘Pipe Data Entry – Summary’ screen by double-clicking on
the square box in the centre of the link. The summary screen is shown below. Make the
following changes:

Label: SeaLine#1
Pipeline model: GAP Internal Correlations
Correlation: Petroleum Experts 4
Gravity Coefficient: 1
Friction Coefficient: 1

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 555

Environment
By clicking on the cell opposite “Environment” the environment variables screen can be
accessed. In this screen the values below should be entered.

Surface Temperature: 50 degF

Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient: 3 Btu/h/ft
Oil Heat Capacity: 0.53 Btu/lb/F (default)
Gas Heat Capacity: 0.51 Btu/lb/F (default)
Water Heat Capacity: 1 Btu/lb/F (default)

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 556 GAP

Pipe Description
To describe the Sealine#1 pipe click on the tab labeled Description, the following screen will
appear:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 557

Enter the following data:

Segment Type: Line pipe

Length: 0.5 km
TVD upstream: 330 m
TVD downstream: 330 m
Inside Diameter: 4”
Roughness: 0.0006” (default)
Rate Multiplier: 1 (default)
Correlation: Petroleum Experts 4
Gravity Coefficient 1
Friction Coefficient 1

To change the length unit from ft to km point the cursor

in the cell containing the unit “ft” This will activate a
pull-down menu list from which km can be selected. The
same principle applies for the TVD.

Once the data has been entered it is useful to click on |Validate in order to check whether the
description entered is valid or not. This is not compulsory but can be useful if non-valid data
have been entered. Click |OK to return to the main GAP screen.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 558 GAP

Copy/Paste flowlines
If two pipe descriptions are the same, the information can be
copied from a described pipe to an undescribed pipe as
follows:

1. Hold down the left mouse button on the described

pipe and press the Control key.
2. Move the cursor until it is over the un-described pipe
and release the control key. The information will now
be transferred.

Description of the main flowline

Double-click on the pipe linking ‘SSManifold’ to ‘Riserbase’ and make the following
changes:

Description

Label: Main Pipe

Segment Type: Line Pipe
Pipe Length: 40 km
TVD upstream: 330 m
TVD downstream: 100 m
Inside Diameter: 16”

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 559

Roughness: 0.0006” (default)

Rate Multiplier: 1 (default)
Correlation: Petroleum Experts 4
Gravity Coefficient 1
Friction Coefficient 1

Environment

Surface Temperature: 50 degF

Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient: 3 Btu/h/ft
Oil Heat Capacity: 0.53 Btu/lb/F (default)
Gas Heat Capacity: 0.51 Btu/lb/F (default)
Water Heat Capacity: 1 Btu/lb/F (default)

Matching of the Multiphase correlation

Select the Match Data tab in the pipeline, and enter those information:

Upstream Pressure = 1260 psig

Downstream Pressure = 1000 psig
Gas Rate = 250 MMscf/day
Upstream Temperature = 115 F
WGR = 0 stb/scf
CGR = 1 stb/scf
oil gravity = 50 API
gas gravity = 0.58
Water salinity = 100,000 ppm
H2S content = 0 % / CO2 content = 0.5 % and N2 content = 2%

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 560 GAP

Click "Match" and select Petroleum Experts 4 as the multiphase flow correlation to match.
Click "Match" again, and the two correction parameters (one is a multiplier of the gravity
term, the other is a multiplier of the friction term) are displayed:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 561

More information about the multiphase flow correlation procedure can be found in the
PROSPER user Guide.

Click OK, and Petroleum Experts 4 has now been matched:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 562 GAP

Description of the Riser

Double-click on the pipe linking ‘RiserBase’ to ‘RiserTop’ and make the following
changes:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 563

Label: Riser
Segment Type: Line Pipe
Pipe Length: 0.50 km
TVD upstream: 100 m
TVD downstream: 0.00 m
Inside Diameter: 16”
Roughness: 0.0006” (default)
Rate Multiplier: 1 (default)
Correlation: Petroleum Experts 4
Gravity Coefficient 1
Friction Coefficient 1

Environment

Surface Temperature: 50 degF

Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient: 3 Btu/h/ft
Oil Heat Capacity: 0.53 Btu/lb/F (default)
Gas Heat Capacity: 0.51 Btu/lb/F (default)
Water Heat Capacity: 1 Btu/lb/F (default)

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 564 GAP

3.2.3.7 Setting Schedules, Constraints and Well Controls

Based on the example objectives:
The 4 wells come on line at different times Schedule for each well have to be entered.
There is a maximum gas rate capability at the process Constraint on the separator or at
the system level needs to be entered
As there is a constraint in the system Controls have to be defined for the wells in for of
wellhead chokes, in order to honour the constraints, just like this is done in reality

1. Entering Schedule for the Wells

Table 2 536 shows the production schedule for the four wells.
In order to enter this information into GAP
- select |Prediction|Equipment Schedule from main menu, or, equivalently,
- double click on each well and access the Schedule section

For the well “DryGas#1” enter the information shown below:

Date: 01/01/2008
Event Type: Start Well

For the well “DryGas#2”

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 565

Date: 01/03/2008
Event Type: Start Well

The same procedure is done for the wells DryGas#3 and DryGas#4:

For the well “DryGas#3”

Date: 01/05/2008
Event Type: Start Well

For the well “DryGas#4”

Date: 01/07/2008
Event Type: Start Well

Click on |OK to complete the equipment scheduling.

It would be advisable to save the GAP file at this stage.

GAP allows wells and equipment requiring the same scheduling to be grouped together for the
purposes of defining events. Please refer to the GAP user guide for information about how to
use this feature.

A small clock symbol is added up to the well icon to

symbolise that a Schedule has been defined for the well

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 566 GAP

2. Entering the Constraint

The target rate of 250 MMscf/d is a constraint. This constraint will be set at the “Beach”. To
do this double-click on the “Beach” and enter under |Constraints:

Maximum Gas Rate: 250 MMscf/d

Notice that it is possible to navigate through the entire network by selecting the desired node
from the white screen on the right hand-side of the window. By pointing the cursor on the
white screen and clicking on the right mouse button the nodes can be sorted. The options are:

- Separator-Down Sort
- Tank-Up Sort
- Alphabetical Sort and
- Sort by Equipment.

Click |OK to close the “Separator ’Beach’ – Input screen”

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 567

3. Set Well Controls

The wells can be made "controllable" (which means that the wellhead choke can be changed
by the optimiser) by:
Accessing the Controls 202 section in the well Summary screen and setting the dP Control to
Calculated, or
Right clicking on the well icon in the main GAP screen and selecting "Controllable" (this is
only in the case of dP Control - for other controls, like gas lift injection rate, the COntrols
section needs to be accessed)

It is paramount to set Controls every time a constraint

needs to be honoured. This is to reproduce what
happens in reality, where devices like chokes are used
to control the field

3.2.4 Running the Prediction

To start the production prediction click on |Prediction |Run Prediction and enter the following
information if not already done.

Start Date: 01/01/2008

End Date: 01/01/2018
Step Size: 3 Month(s)

Having done this click now on | Next | Next and then enter 1000 psig as the separator
pressure at the Beach.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 568 GAP

Pressure 1: 1000 psig

Now click on |Next to open the prediction window.

Select the ‘Optimise with all constraints' option and tick the ‘Calculate Potential’ check box.

If the objective is to maximise production and honour

Constraints set in the system, the Optimisation model
should be set to 'Optimise and honour constraints'

The 'Calculate Potential' option allows to calculate the

field Potential. If no Potential Constraints have been set
up (ref. related chapter 121 ), the program will calculate
the maximum the field can produce

Before running predictions it is recommended that the settings are reset to their default
values. Click on |Settings and then |Reset in the top right hand corner of the window. Then
press |OK

Now click on |Calculate to run the prediction

At the end of the prediction the results the results shown below will be displayed:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 569

In the Prediction Log window the Events tab allow the

user to visualise when the wells come online

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 570 GAP

Notes on Constraints 201

3.2.4.1 Results
Once the prediction has finished click on | Back | Back | Plot Nodes. The screen below
allows the selection of equipment that results will be displayed for.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 571

Select ‘Well’ from the ‘Equipment Type’ column and select the four dry gas wells from the right
hand column. Click Plot to see the results.

From the main plot menu select Variables to select the variable to visualize.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 572 GAP

On the prediction screen we selected the option ‘optimise and honour constraints’ and ticked
the box ‘calculate potential’. To view the optimised gas rate click |variables and select the
Gas rate option from the variables screen shown below:

Press | OK

In order to see the unconstrained gas production rate for the wells select instead the ‘gas rate
potential’ option from the choose variables screen

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 573

It is also possible to add further nodes by clicking on |Nodes.

It is recommended that the file is saved before exiting GAP.

To exit GAP click on |File |Exit.

The flow rates reported by the program at any point in the

network correspond by definition to volumetric rate expressed at
Standard Conditions (STD, by default 60 deg F, 0 psig, but
these conditions can be modified in the main program Options)
and not in in-situ conditions.
For example, if oil rate = 500 STB/day, that means: taking the
whole fluid to STD, the volume of oil produced resulting is 500
STB/d

This completes Example 1.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 574 GAP

3.3 Example 2 - Oil Production Network

3.3.1 Objectives
Definition of the problem
Two off-shore oil reservoirs (reservoir A and B) have been in production from the beginning of
2006 to 1/10/2008. Each of the two fields is produced by one well. The wells are tied to a
main manifold through devoted flowlines and the production is sent 11 Km away to a main
Center Oil.
The Center Oil pressure is 250 psig and at the moment has a processing capability of 18000
STB/day.

It is required to have a better understanding of the field. In particular, it is required to know:

Question 1. How much we would get from the field today 1/10/2008 if the wells were fully
open? Go to answer 596
Question 2. How should we choke back the wells in order to satisfy the maximum
capability at the process and at the same time produced the maximum amount of oil?
Go to answer 601
Question 3. What would be the total amount of oil recovered in 10 years time? Go to
answer 605
Question 4. How much more could we get from the field if a work-over on the center oil is
carried out on 1/1/2010, so that it will be able to handle up to 40000 STB/d of liquid?
Go to answer 610

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 575

Learning topics
The objectives of this example are to learn how to:
Set-up a basic GAP model for an oil field
Use the Model Validation to quality check the model
Updating the model to a given date based on the MBAL History Matching using the
Initialise IPRs from Tank Simulations
Set-up constraints in the system
Running Solve Network
Entering a Schedule to model a work-over
Running Prediction using GAP and MBAL
Saving the prediction results

Executive Summary
The steps followed will be:
1. Build the GAP network
- Draw the GAP network
- Define a reservoir in GAP
- Define wells in GAP
- Generate Well IPRs in GAP using PROSPER
- Generate Well VLPs in GAP using PROSPER
- Define the pipeline and eventual surface equipment
2. Use the Initialise IPRs from Tank Simulations feature to update the model to the
1/10/2008
3. Run Solve Network without optimisation to get the production with wells fully open
4. Set the Constraint of Maximum liquid rate of 18000 STB/day at the Center Oil and run
Solve Network with optimisation to assess if and which wells need to be choked back
5. Run a prediction from 1/10/2008 for 10 years (2 months time step) with optimisation
to verify for how long we can keep the production plateau
6. Set the schedule to change the maximum liquid constraint on 1/1/2010 to 40000 STB/
day
7. Run the prediction again to verify how much more production we can obtain from the
field

The files for this example and the final model can be found
in the GAP archive file format in the following directory.
~\samples\GAP\oilfield\oilfield1.gar
Extract 533 the archive file to an appropriate directory
3.3.2 Data available
Description of the surface network
In this example, we will define wellhead level as the reference depth. With regards to the
above figure.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 576 GAP

NOTE: the pipelines are defined from upstream to downstream

Pipe Pipe Upstream Downstream Overall Heat Multiphase

segment ID TVD TVD Transfer Correlation
Length Coefficient
km Inches m m Btu/h/ft2/F -
line_A 0.2 4 0 20 8 Petroleum Experts
4
0.3 4 20 0 8 Petroleum Experts
4
line_B 0.2 4 0 20 8 Petroleum Experts
4
0.1 4 20 0 8 Petroleum Experts
4
pipeline 5 12 0 20 8 Petroleum Experts
4
5 12 20 10 8 Petroleum Experts
4
1 12 10 20 8 Petroleum Experts
4
Table 1 describing the pipelines

Description of the reservoirs

Tank Name History start - STOOIP MBAL file
end (MMSTB)
(dd/mm/yyyy)
Reservoir_A 1/1/2006 - 425.704 reservoir_a.
1/10/2008 mbi
Reservoir_B 1/1/2006 - 762.053 reservoir_b.
1/10/2008 mbi
Table 2 reservoir data

Description of the wells

A well is described with an Inflow Performance relationship and Vertical Lift Performance
curves.

The file names corresponding to each well are shown in the table below.

Well Name Well Model

Well_A Well_A.out
Well_B Well_A.out
Table 3 wells data

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 577

3.3.3 Build the GAP model

This section can be used as a general step-by-step procedure to build any GAP model.
The sketch illustrated in the Objectives 574 will be used as reference.
3.3.3.1 Draw the GAP Network
1. Getting Started
Begin by starting the program.
From the GAP entry screen, select File New to reinitialise GAP.

2. Defining the global system options

To begin setting up the system options, select Options | Method and make the following
selections:

System Type : Production

Optimisation Method : Production
PVT Model : Black oil
Prediction: On
Prediction Method : Pressure and Temperature
Water Vapour: No Calculations
Temperature model: Rough Approximation

Then click Ok to exit this screen.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 578 GAP

This completes the system set-up and reinitialises the program.

3. Defining the Units System

In order to define the units system click on Units | Edit Units. The following screen will appear:

A units menu can be selected by pointing the cursor in the cell below input. This allows the
overall units system to be selected. Clicking on the white cells below this allows individual units
to be changed.
Input : Oilfield
Output : Oilfield

In order to follow exactly the path suggested in this

example, it is recommended to set the inputs and outputs in
Oilfield Units.

For further details, access the Units section 525 of the user Guide.

Click on OK to complete the selection of units and to close the screen.

If necessary, later we will modify the units system when entering input data.

4. Drawing the system

The purpose of this section is to demonstrate how to construct graphically the complete
network.
The reservoirs will be defined first. Notice that the order of the drawings has no effect on the

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 579

results.

The reservoir
In order to draw a reservoir select the tank icon and click anywhere on the screen. This
will create an icon which will be called “Reservoir_A”.
Placing another icon will create the second reservoir, that can be named "Reservoir_B"

The tank icons will be on the screen:

NOTE: If a mistake is made in entering the Label, this

can be changed by Double clicking on the element and
in the Summary screen changing the Label field.

The wells
We will start with the first well “Well_A”.
Select the Well icon and add a well. Name this “Well_A”.
After that, create also Well_B, as shown below:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 580 GAP

Some useful tips

1. To move a node to a new location on the screen, move the mouse arrow over the node
to be moved and press the left mouse button and the |Shift key. Keep the left mouse
button pressed and move the node to the new location. Releasing the left mouse button
will position the node in the new location.
2. Nodes can be deleted by selecting the scissors icon from the toolbar menu and
clicking on the node to be removed.

The Joints
A joint is any manifold or intersection where pipes
converge. Every pipe must have at least one end
connected to a joint.
THIS MEANS THAT TO CREATE A PIPELINE TWO
JOINTS NEED TO BE INTRODUCED

Four joints will be created to start with:

1. One joint to represent the wellhead (“WH_A”) near the well icon
2. One joint to represent the wellhead (“WH_B”) near the well icon
3. One joint to represent the main manifold (“Manifold”)
4. One joint to represent the separator joint (“sep”)

Click on the Joint icon and add 4 joint icons by clicking in the main GAP display area: one
near the well, one at the middle of the screen, one to the right of the screen and one next to
the Separator.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 581

The Separator “Center Oil”

A separator is considered by GAP to be the end of the
production chain and will be allocated a pressure at a later
stage. It does not have to actually be a separator, rather a
convenient delivery point where a known pressure exists.

Select the Separator icon and click the left-hand mouse button in the main GAP display
area towards the top right. Give the resulting node the name “Center Oil” when requested

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 582 GAP

The links /pipes

Links are connection tools which connect the various nodes
in the network system. The following rules apply:

a link between a reservoir and a well has no dimension

a link between a well and a joint has no dimension
a link between 2 joints may have a dimension (pipe, chokes)
a link between a joint and a separator may have dimensions
a well can not be linked directly to a separator. An intermediate joint is compulsory,
a reservoir can not be linked directly to a separator.

Link the components together by doing the following:

1. Selecting the Link icon.
2. Click on the first component to be connected with the left mouse.
3. Keeping the left mouse button pressed, move the cursor from the first component to the
second component.
4. A joint will form when the mouse button is released over the second component.

Create links between the following components:

1. Connect the Tank “Reservoir_A” to the well “Well_A”, and do the same for Well_B
2. Connect the wells to the correspondent well heads
3. Connect the well head to the manifold
4. Connect the manifold to the sep joint

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 583

5. Connect the sep joint to riser Center Oil

Deselect the link icon to avoid adding more headings

The basic model layout has been specified. Additional components can easily be added or
deleted when the model is refined later. The GAP screen display should look something like
the screen shot below:

The network drawing is completed.

3.3.3.2 Define the Reservoirs
For the purposes of this example the MBAL files has already been built (ref. Table 2 575 ).
Please refer to MBAL manual and the Worked Example section of the online manual for
examples on how to build an MBAL model.
The MBAL files location need to be defined from within GAP. In order to do this, firstly
double click on each reservoir to open up the tank Summary screen .
From this screen create a link to the MBAL file by clicking on |Browse and selecting the
MBAL file
The MBAL file Reservoir_A.mbi can be found in the directory where the archived file was
extracted to at the start of the exercise:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 584 GAP

Click on | Open to establish the link between tank icon in GAP and the MBAL file.
To confirm the changes that have been made to the tank, click on |OK at the bottom left of the
dry gas summary screen.
Browse also the second reservoir Reservoir_B.

At this stage the GAP file should be saved. To do this click on |File |Save As and using the
browsing feature save the file as DRYGAS1.GAP.
3.3.3.3 Define the Wells
As mentioned before, a well is described in GAP by means of an IPR and a VLP. Refer to the
PROSPER manual for more information about well modeling. For this exercise, VLP’s have
been generated and saved so that they can be imported into GAP.
In order to describe the well Well_A double-click on the well icon. This will open the |Well Data
entry summary screen.
In the summary screen enter the following information:

Label: Well_A
Mask: Include in System (default)
Well Type: Oil Producer (No Lift)
Model: VLP / IPR intersection
PROSPER well file: Well_A.OUT

(Ensure that the Well Type is ‘Oil Producer (No lift)’)

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 585

Complete all the wells according to the data of Table 3 575 .

PLEASE MAKE SURE THAT THE WELL TYPE IS

DEFINED AS "Oil Producer (No Lift)"

3.3.3.4 Generate Well IPRs

Once all the wells have been created and the associated PROSPER well models selected, the
IPRs can be generated in GAP in a batch mode.

From the main GAP menu select Generate | Generate Well IPRs from PROSPER.

Then select All | Generate.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 586 GAP

By double-clicking on any of the wells and selecting the IPR tab, one can verify the IPR input
data as shown in the following screen shot:

The IPR curve can be seen by selecting Plot.

The scale of any plot can be changed by clicking on |Scales on the menu bar. This allows the
min and max X and Y axis values to be redefined, and the number of grid blocks (divisions)

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 587

that the axis should be divided into.

Before leaving the IPR section, access the More tab screen and select the set of Rel
Perms for fractional flow prediction to be From Tank Model. This is important to
determine the Water Cut and GOR produced by the well, based on the history
matching performed in MBAL.

Do the same for all the wells. The IPR section of each well will become green, sign that
the data have been imported correctly and no further data are required.

Click on |OK to get back to the GAP main screen.

3.3.3.5 Generate Well VLPs
To import the VLP curves in GAP (ref. VLP generation 402 ), access the menu Generate/
Generate Well VLPs with PROSPER., then then All, then Data to enter the ranges of
sensitivity variables.
Please refer to the VLP generation 402 for guidelines on the ranges to use.

In this case, as the well models have already been saved, we will use the ranges already
present in the models:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 588 GAP

NOTE: In the GOR ranges the value of 325 scf/STB for Well_A and 768 scf/ STB for Well_B
have been entered. These values are equal to the Solution GOR of the two fluids. As the
reservoirs are operating both above the bubble point, the producing GOR will be equal to the
Solution GOR, therefore it is useful to enter directly those values in the VLPs to avoid any
interpolation.

After that, select Ok and Generate. At the end of the calculation the program will have all the
VLP curves sets imported in GAP.

In order to check the generated lift curve access the well Summary screen (double click on
the well), then access the VLP section. This will lead to the VLP description screen:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 589

In this screen the .vlp file has been created, containing all the VLP curves. Select Inspect to
verify the quality of the curves.
3.3.3.6 Model Validation to QC the wells
The Model Validation is a feature in GAP that allows to verify that the well performance in
GAP is able to reproduce well tests measured on the field.
In other words, the Model Validation has as objective the QC of the well models. Please refer
to the Model Validation topic 425 in the user Guide for full details.

The Model Validation can be used:

Whenever the GAP model is built (like in the case of this example) to verify that the well
VLP and IPRs imported in GAP from PROSPER are consistent with reality
Whenever new well tests are performed and one wants to quickly validate them

In the case of this example two tests are available:

Reservoir Manifold Production

Pressure Pressure Liquid rate Water cut GOR
Well Name psig psig STB/day percent scf/STB
Well_A 4680 378 9427.2 22.2 325
Well_B 4660 359 13970 0 768

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 590 GAP

The PROSPER models were already matched to these tests.

These tests can be entered directly in the Model Validation screen (menu Model Validation /
Wells Model Validation) and running Calculate:

It is possible to verify that the two well models match the tests very well (difference less than
0.6%).

If instead a big difference was found, being the PROSPER models matched, that would have
menat that the VLP and IPRs were not correctly generated.

3.3.3.7 Define the Pipelines

Table 1 575 contains the information about the three pipes in the system.

Description of the well lines

According to the network sketch 574 , the wells Well_A and Well_B are tied back to the manifold
via devoted lines.
The two lines are therefore represented by the link between the wellheads WH#i and
manifold.
In order to describe this access the ‘Pipe Data Entry – Summary’ screen by double-clicking on
the square box in the centre of the link. The summary screen is shown below. Make the
following changes:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 591

Label: line_A
Pipeline model: GAP Internal Correlations
Correlation: Petroleum Experts 4
Gravity Coefficient: 1
Friction Coefficient: 1

Environment
By clicking on the cell opposite “Environment” the environment variables screen can be
accessed. In this screen the values below should be entered.

Surface Temperature: 50 degF

Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient: 8 Btu/h/ft
Oil Heat Capacity: 0.53 Btu/lb/F (default)
Gas Heat Capacity: 0.51 Btu/lb/F (default)
Water Heat Capacity: 1 Btu/lb/F (default)

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 592 GAP

Pipe Description
To describe the line_A pipe click on the tab labeled Description.
Enter the following data (note: the data are given from upstream to downstream):

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 593

The drawing on the right hand side allows to define

which node is the upstream and which the downstream:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 594 GAP

To change the length unit from ft to km point the cursor

in the cell containing the unit “ft” This will activate a
pull-down menu list from which km can be selected. The
same principle applies for the TVD.

Once the data has been entered it is useful to click on |Validate in order to check whether the
description entered is valid or not. This is not compulsory but can be useful if non-valid data
have been entered. Click |OK to return to the main GAP screen.
The Plot at the bottom of the screen allows to have a view of the pipeline profile and verify
graphically that the data entered are correct:

Complete the other pipe between WH_B and manifold according to Table 1 575 :

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 595

Description of the main flowline

Double-click on the pipe linking the ‘Manifold’ to ‘sep’, name it in the Summary screen 'pipeline'
and enter data as per Table 1 575 and the instructions seen above:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 596 GAP

Description

The GAP model has been built. Save the file as Oilfield1.gap.

3.3.4 Question 1 - Solution

In order to address Question 1 574 , it is required to update the status of the reservoir
performance (IPRs) to date 1/10/2008.
3.3.4.1 Initialise IPRs from Tank Simulations
To achieve that, the feature Initialise IPRs from Tank Simulations can be used. This features
exploits the history matching performed on the MBAL tanks in order to update the reservir
pressure and PVT properties in the wells.
Please refer to the Edit menu 110 and History Matching 510 topics in the user Guide for further
details.

To use this feature access the menu Edit / Initialise IPRs from Tank Simulations, then All
to select all the wells and Continue.
In the Initialise Well IPRs from tanks enter at the bottom the desired date, the Calculate and
Continue:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 597

Accessing the well IPR section, it is possible to verify that the IPRs have been updated with
the reservoir pressure, WC and GOR according to the history matching in MBAL:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 598 GAP

Well_B can also be verified.

The status of the reservoir is now updated to the 1/10/2008, end of production history.

3.3.4.2 Solve network for wells fully open

Question 1 574 requires to determine the production for the system when the two wells are fully
open.
To achieve that, Solve Network calculation should be run.

Select the menu Solve Network / Run Network Solver.

Enter a Center Oil pressure of 250 psig

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 599

Select the optimisation mode to No Optimisation

Run the calculation with Calculate:

NOTE: as no Controls have been set up so far, zero

wellhead dp will be applied, which means that no
choke is set on the wells, in other words, the wells are
fully open.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 600 GAP

If Controls are set in the model instead, when running

with No Optimisation the program will use a Fixed
value for the Controls. Again, setting zero dP as Fixed
dp Control, will mean: wells fully open. The value used
for the Controls can be found under Edit / Edit
Equipment Controls and under the column name
"Actual"

To check the results of a Solve Network calculation various method are available:
Fly-over. Pointing the mouse on each element in the network drawing will allow to visualise
the production results
Double clicking on each element and accessing the Results section
Using the menu Results. Various formats are available. It is left up to the user to explore
the Results menu.

Using the Fly-over, it is possible to verify that the production at the Center Oil is around 23900
STB/day of liquid:

In the same way, the production from each well can be viewed.

Answer to Question 1: If the wells were fully open they would produce 23130 STB/day
of liquid and 20990 STB/day of oil.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 601

3.3.5 Question 2 - Solution

Question 2 574 requires to determine if and in that case how the wells should be choked back to
honour a constraint of 18000 STB/day of liquid at the Center Oil separator.
3.3.5.1 Entering the Constraint
To enter the constraint access the Center Oil separator by double clicking on it, access the
Constraint section and enter the Maximum Liquid Rate constraint:

Two arrows will appear in the main screen on the Center Oil icon.
3.3.5.2 Setting Well Controls
In order for the Optimiser of GAP to be able to maximise production and honour constraints,
controls have to be set in the system, just like it is in reality.
In this case, wellhead chokes are present.

The wells can be made "controllable" (which means that the wellhead choke can be changed
by the optimiser) by:
Accessing the Controls 202 section in the well Summary screen and setting the dP Control to
Calculated, or
Right clicking on the well icon in the main GAP screen and selecting "Controllable" (this is

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 602 GAP

only in the case of dP Control - for other controls, like gas lift injection rate, the Controls
section needs to be accessed)

It is paramount to set Controls every time a constraint

needs to be honoured. This is to reproduce what
happens in reality, where devices like chokes are used
to control the field

The figure below shows the Controls section in the well input area:

3.3.5.3 Solve Network with Optimisation

At this point the model is ready to be run.

Select the menu Solve Network / Run Network Solver.

Enter a Center Oil pressure of 250 psig

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 603

Select the optimisation mode to Optimise with all Constraints

Run the calculation with Calculate:

In order to honour a constraint, the optimisation mode

must be set to Optimise with all constraints

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 604 GAP

The Limiting tab log allows to verify if an element is

limiting the production of the field. If that is so, that
means that the system can produce more
Going to the main panel, one can check the results as described in the previous section 600 .

Using the Fly-over, pointing the mouse on the Center Oil, it is possible to verify that the
constraint is honoured:

Also, looking at the two wells, it is possible to verify their production and also which well
needs to be choked back more.
The Choke result towards the bottom of the results table shows the dP required to achieve
the objectives of maximising oil and honouring the set constraints.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 605

Answer to Question 2: Yes, the wells require to be choked back. In particular, well
Well_A is choked back, whilst Well_B is kept fully open (0 psig wellhead choke).
The reason for this result is that Well_A produces a higher water cut: higher water cut,
for the same liquid rate means less oil. That is why to honour the constraint and
maximise the amount of oil produced, the well with higher water cut must be choked
back.

3.3.6 Question 3 - Solution

Question 3 574 asks for how long the system can produce at the maximum capability of 18000
STB/day.
3.3.6.1 Run Prediction with Optimisation
To answer to the question, a prediction from 1/10/2008 to 1/10/2018 can be run. The
prediction needs to be run with Optimisation.
To run the prediction select the menu Prediction / Run Prediction and then enter the
following:

Start Date: 1/10/2008

End Date: 1/10/2018
Step Size: 2 Months

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 606 GAP

Then Next / Next / Next , enable the Mode Optimise with All Constraints and Calculate:

To check the results of Prediction, various options are available:

Double-Clicking on each element of the network and accessing the Results / Prediction
menu
Accessing the Results menu
Accessing the menu Prediction / Plot Nodes (or Plot Tanks) Prediction Results

We will follow the last method to plot the Center Oil separator results:

In the plot select the Liquid Rate from the Variables menu. Also, use the Scales menu in order
to visualise a broader y-axis range:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 607

The plateau can be kept throughout the prediction.

In the same way, the results for all the elements in the network can be viewed. In particular, it
is possible to verify how to choke back the wells along time.

well liquid rate production:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 608 GAP

Checking the tabular results at the Center Oil by double-clicking on the Center Oil separator
and accessing the Results section, it is possible to verify that at the end of the 10 years the
cumulative oil produced is 58.9 MMSTB:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 609

Answer to Question 3: The system can produce up to the maximum constraint for 10
years. The amount of oil produced by the end of the 10 years is 58.9 MMSTB.

3.3.6.2 Saving the Prediction results

In GAP it is possible to save the results obtained in a Prediction run (ref. Save Prediction
Results 469 ). This allows to compare multiple scenarios all together.
To save the results of a run:
Access the menu Prediction / Save Prediction Results As.
Select Add and Type the same of the scenario. In this case "Base Scenario", then Ok

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 610 GAP

GAP will save the results in the memory and will be able to retrieve them at any time.

3.3.7 Question 4 - Solution

Question 4 574 asks to quantify how much more production is obtained if a work-over is done on
the Center Oil separator so that form 1/1/2010 it can handle up to 40000 STB/day of liquid.
To answer to the question a Schedule on the separator has to be entered and Prediction run
again.
3.3.7.1 Setting a Schedule
To enter a Schedule on the separator double-clik on it and then access the Schedule section.
In the Schedule section:
Enter the date (1/1/2010)
Enter the Event Type (Change Constraint)
Enter the Constraint Type (Maximum liquid rate)
Enter the value (40000 STB/day)

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 611

Changing the constraint will be able to model the work-

over. The assumption here is that no shut-down is
carried out.
However, note that it is possible to reproduce reality by
introducing events of Mask/Unmask to model the shut-
down for work-over.

A small clock symbol will appear near the icon of the Center Oil separator to indicate that a
schedule is present.

3.3.7.2 Run Prediction with Optimisation

At this point run the Prediction as shown in the previous paragraph 605 .

During the prediction it is possible to follow the events triggered by accessing the Events tab:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 612 GAP

After the prediction is completed, Save the results as Scenario 1 - workover, as shown in the
previous section 609 .

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 613

The access the results for the Center Oil by following any of the methods shown before (
previous section 606 ).
For example, accessing the menu Prediction / Plot Nodes Prediction Results:

Center Oil Liquid Rate:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 614 GAP

It is possible to see that initially the maximum production is 18000 STB/day. On 1/1/2010 the
constraint in increased to 40000 STB/day following the work-over. The well production cannot
reach the maximum of 40000 STB/day.
Checking the well results, it is possible to verify that the wells are fully open after the work-
over. Well_A produces a much higher water cut (up to almost 40%) than Well_B:

Well_A and Well_B Water Cut:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 615

3.3.7.2.1 Comparing scenarios

In the Results plot section access the Variables menu and select the Cumulative Oil
Production for both Base Scenario and Scenario 1:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 616 GAP

The Ok to Plot:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 617

It is possible to verify that Scenario 1 with the work-over allows to produce more, as
expected.
Checking the value from the plot or from the tabular results for Center Oil (double-click on the
Center Oil separator icon, then access the Results / Prediction and the Cumulative oil
production), the amount produced is 63.3 MMSTB:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 618 GAP

Answer to Question 4: The work-over allows to produce 63.3 MMSTB of oil in 10 years,
compared to the base configuration, where the production would be 58.9 MMSTB.

Save the file as Oilfield1.gap.

To go to the next topic (Flow assurance - slug calculations, click here 619 )

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 619

3.4 Example 3 - Pipeline detailed results

3.4.1 Objectives
Definition of the problem
It is required to investigate the length and frequency of the slugs in the main pipeline for the
design of the main production separation facility.

Learning topics
The objectives of this example are to learn how to:
View detailed results of the pressure drop calculation (Flow Assurance)
Extra topic: Select the pipe and converting it to PROSPER on line

Executive Summary
Starting from the Oilfield1.gap 618 model, the steps followed will be:
1. Run a Solve Network calculation to determine the production on 1/10/2008 (the
system was already initialised 596 )
2. Access the detailed results of the pipeline calculation

3.4.2 Data available

For this example we need to start from the saved Oilfield1.gap 618 model.
3.4.3 Run Solve Network
The system has been already initialised to 1/10/2008 (ref. previous section 596 ), and the Solve
Network has already been run (ref. previous sections 602 ).
We will repeat the Solve Network (with optimisation) calculation, just in case the model has
been accidentally changed.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 620 GAP

Checking the results of the Solve Network with the fly-over:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 621

3.4.4 Pipeline detailed results

To visualise the detailed pipeline results:
Access the pipeline Summary screen and select Calculate at the bottom:

Then select Initialise from solver results. This will import in the screen the results obtained
with the Solve Network calculation

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 622 GAP

Select Calculate to visualise the Gradient calculation results, just like in PROSPER:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 623

Scrolling to the right, it is possible to read the required results on slug length and frequency:

The Mean Slug Length is around 323 ft, whilst the Mean Slug Frequency spans from 24 to 29
/hour. 1/1000 SLug Length is instead over 1500 ft, whilst the 1/1000 Slug Frequency is
between 5 and 6.

The pipe gradient calculation utility is not available for pipe elements
described using Annular Flow

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 624 GAP

3.4.5 Note on pipeline results

The workflow illustrated above shows how to read directly the pipeline detailed results for
Solve Network calculation.

If the objective is to view the evolution along time (prediction) of some pipeline parameters, it
is possible to achieve the objective by different routes:

1. Running the Prediction (or the Solve Network) using GAP Internal Correlations and then
converting the pipe to PROSPER on line (see next section) and then reading the results of the
Gradient calculation by scrolling the Prediction results all the way to the right hand side:

2. Modelling the pipe directly in PROSPER on line and running the calculations, then reading
the Gradient results as shown above. This alternate route is not recommended, as using
PROSPER on line makes the model slower, without introducing any benefit in terms of
accuracy, as GAP Internal Correlations uses the same flow correlations.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 625

3.4.5.1 Convert the pipeline to PROSPER on line

To convert the pipeline to PROSPER on line:

Select the pipeline

This can be done by using the cyan arrow tool and clicking on the pipeline element.
The pipeline will be circled by a thin light blue circle:

Use the menu Edit to convert the pipeline to PROSPER on line

This can be achieved by selecting the menu Edit / Selected Pipes / Convert to PROSPER on
line:

After that, a confirmation message appears and Yes needs to be selected for the
conversion to take effect.

The pipeline will be converted to PROSPER on line. Accessing the pipe Summary screen, the
Edit button will allow to access the input screens for the PROSPER on line feature, which are
the same as PROSPER.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 626 GAP

For example, the Equipment screens will have the equipment previously entered in the pipe
decription:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 627

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 628 GAP

3.5 Example 4 - Gas Lift Optimisation

3.5.1 Objectives
Definition of the problem
A small oil field is produced by 5 wells, one naturally flowing and four gas lifted wells. The field
is currently operated according to a strategy based on a certain gas lift allocation.
It is requested to assess if the field is producing at its maximum potential or if there is any
margin of improvement.

The separator pressure is 250 psig. The amount of gas lift gas available for the whole system
is 10 MMscf/day.

Learning topics
The objectives of this example are to learn how to:
Build a GAP model for a gas lifted system and perform a Network Solver Calculation
Running pipeline matching
Increase production by optimising the gas lift gas allocation
Use the well controls to run sensitivities on the controls (fixed gas allocation or
calculated by the Optimiser)

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 629

Executive Summary
To achieve the objective two calculations will be run:
- The first calculation will be with a user-specified gas lift gas injection rate for all the gas
lifted wells. Go to answer 646
- In the second the same total gas lift gas injection rate will be specified, but GAP will be
used to determine the optimum gas lift injection rates to each well that maximise the oil
production. Go to answer 651
The steps followed will be to:
1. Build the GAP network
- Draw the GAP network
- Define wells in GAP
- Generate Well IPRs in GAP using PROSPER
- Generate Well VLPs in GAP using PROSPER
- Define the pipeline and eventual surface equipment
2. Set the given gas lift gas allocation and run the Solve Network calculation (no
optimisation)
3. Set the well gas lift controls Calculated and run the Solve Network calculation (with
optimisation)
4. Compare the results

The files for this example and the final model can be found in the
GAP archive file format in the following directory.
~\samples\GAP\gaslift\ gaslift_field1.gar
Extract 533 the archive file to an appropriate directory

Click here 654 to include a gas lift injection network

3.5.2 Data Available

Description of the wells
The table below shows the PROSPER well files that will be used later to create the well IPRs
and VLPs

Well type PROSPER well model Current Gas lift

allocation
(Mmscf/day)
Well 1 Natural flowing Well_1.out -
Well 2 Gas lift Well_2.out 1
Well 3 Gas lift Well_3.out 3
Well 4 Gas lift Well_4.out 3
Well 5 Gas lift Well_5.out 3

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 630 GAP

Table 1 well data

The PROSPER well model files will be located in the directory the archive files were extracted
to.

Description of the pipelines

In this example, we will define the mean sea level as the reference depth. Mean Sea level and
Beach are at the same elevation (e. g. 0.00 meter).

Pipe Length TVD TVD Diamete Heat Flow correlation

(ft) upstrea downstrea r Transfer
m m (m) (in) coeff
(m) (Btu/h/ft2/
F)
Flowline1 500 0 0 6 8 Petroleum Experts
4
Flowline2 500 0 0 4 8 Petroleum Experts
4
Flowline345 500 0 0 4 8 Petroleum Experts
4
MainPipe 500 0 0 8 8 Petroleum Experts
4
Table 2 pipe data

Test data are available for the pipes:

Upstream Upstream Liquid Downstream Gas Lift WC GOR Oil Gravity Gas Gravity
Pressure Temperat Rate Pressure Rate (%) (scf/stb) (API) (sp. gravity)
(psig) ure (stb/day) (psig) (MMscf/
(F) day)
Flowline 1 190 143 13500 165 / 0 1200 40 0.8
Flowline 2 176 97 3100 165 1 30 300 34 0.739
Flowline 345 199 85 3510 165 9 75 300 34 0.703
MainPipe 165 119 20110 150 10 17.7 1100 38.9 0.763
water salinity: 100000 ppm
Table 3 pipe match data

Note that no reservoir is included in the network, nor tank

models are available. In that case the model will allow to
run only Solve Network and not Predictions.
3.5.3 Build the GAP Network
This section can be used as a general step-by-step procedure to build any GAP model.
The sketch illustrated in the Objectives 628 will be used as reference.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 631

3.5.3.1 Draw the GAP Network

1. Getting Started
Begin by starting the program. From the GAP entry screen, select File New to reinitialise
GAP.

2. Defining the global system options

To begin setting up the system options, select Options Method and make the following
selections:

System Type : Production

Optimisation Method : Production
PVT Model : Black oil
Prediction: On
Prediction Method : Pressure and Temperature
Water Vapour: No Calculations
Temperature model: Rough Approximation

Then click Ok to exit this screen.

This completes the system setup and initialises the program.

3. Defining the Units System

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 632 GAP

In order to define the units system click on Units | Edit Units. The following screen will appear:

A units menu can be selected by pointing the cursor in the cell below input. This allows the
overall units system to be selected. Clicking on the white cells below this allows individual units
to be changed.
Input : Oilfield
Output : Oilfield

In order to follow exactly the path suggested in this

example, it is recommended to set the inputs and outputs in
Oilfield Units.

For further details, access the Units section 525 of the user Guide.

Click on OK to complete the selection of units and to close the screen.

If necessary, later we will modify the units system when entering input data.

4. Drawing the system

The purpose of this section is to demonstrate how to construct graphically the complete
network.
The wells will be defined first. Notice that the order that the GAP drawing is produced in has
no effect on the results.

Wells

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 633

To add a well select the Well icon then click on the white section of the screen. Name this
“Well_1” and then Click | OK.
Repeat the procedure above four times to add the other 4 wells.

Some useful tips

1. To move a node to a new location on the screen, move the mouse arrow over the
node to be moved and press the left mouse button and the |Shift key. Keep the left
mouse button pressed and move the node to the new location. Releasing the left
mouse button will position the node in the new location.
2. Nodes can be deleted by selecting the scissors icon from the toolbar menu and
clicking on the node to be removed. Items can also be deleted by Right Clicking on
the element to be deleted then selecting Delete from the pop-up menu.

The Joints
Five joints will be created:
- One joint to represent the wellhead (“WH_1”) of Well_1
- One joint to represent the wellhead (“WH_2”) of Well_2
- One joint to represent the common wellhead (“WH_345”) of Well_3, Well_4 and Well_5
- One joint to represent the manifold (“Manifold”) where all the fluids from the wells are
commingled
- One joint to represent the connection to the separator (“Sep joint”)

Create the joints by clicking on the joint icon and clicking on the main GAP screen. Add five

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 634 GAP

joint icons and label them accordingly. The following screen shot shows the current layout of
the system.

The Separator
A separator is considered by GAP to be the end of the
production chain and will be given a pressure at a later
stage. It does not have to actually be a separator, rather a
convenient delivery point where a known pressure exists.

Select the Separator icon and click the left-hand mouse button in the main GAP display
area towards the top right. When requested, give the resulting node the name “Separator”.

The links /pipes

Links are connection tools, which connect the various
nodes in the network system. The following rules apply:

a link between a reservoir and a well has no dimension

a link between a well and a joint has no dimension
a link between 2 joints may have dimensions (pipe, chokes,)
a link between a joint and a separator has no dimensions
a well cannot be linked directly to a separator. An intermediate joint is compulsory,
a reservoir cannot be linked directly to a separator.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 635

Link the components together by selecting the Link icon and dragging the left-hand mouse
button between two components.

1. Connect “Well_1” to “WH_1”

2. Connect “Well_2” to “WH_2”
3. Connect “Well_3” to “WH_345”
4. Connect “Well_4” to “WH_345”
5. Connect “Well_5” to “WH_345”
6. Connect “WH_1” to “Manifold”
7. Connect “WH_2” to “Manifold”
8. Connect “WH_345” to “Manifold”
9. Connect “Manifold” to “Sep joint”
10.Connect “Sep joint” to “Separator”
Deselect the link icon to resume the normal Windows cursor.

The following screenshot illustrates the connected network:

GAP provides two ways to represent a well: the performance curve (PC Interpolation)
method, or the VLP / IPR intersection method. In this example the second option will be used,
VLP/IPR intersection.

PROSPER will be used from within GAP to generate the VLPs and IPRs for the wells. Firstly
however, the following information must be entered for the wells

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 636 GAP

3.5.3.2 Define the wells

Well_1
In order to describe the well “Well_1”, double-click on the well icon to open the |Well Data
entry summary screen. After that enter the following information:
Label: Well_1
Mask: Include in System (default)
Well Type: Oil producer (no lift)
PROSPER well file: Well_1.out
Model: VLP/IPR

In order to set the PROSPER well file to be used for generating Well 1’s IPR and VLP’s click
on the browse button next to the ‘PROSPER well file’ in the summary screen and Select the file
shown in the table from the expanded archive directory.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 637

Useful Tip: If when opening a PROSPER well file the file extensions are not visible then carry
out the following procedure to enable the viewing of file extensions:
1. Open Microsoft Explorer
2. Select | Tools| Folder Options.
3. Select the View tab and un-check the option |Hide file extensions of known file folders.
Click on “Well_2” on the Equipment list on the right. The summary data of “Well_2” will be
displayed in the child screen. Set the following options for Well_2:

Label: Well_2
Mask: Include in System (default)
Well Type: Oil producer (Gas lifted)

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 638 GAP

PROSPER well file: Well_2.out

Model VLP/IPR

Click on “Well_3” on the Equipment list on the right. The summary data of “Well_3” will be
displayed in the child screen. Set the following options for Well_3:

Label: Well_3
Mask: Include in System (default)
Well Type: Oil producer (Gas lifted)
PROSPER well file: Well_3.out
Model VLP/IPR

Click on “Well_4” on the Equipment list on the right. The summary data of “Well_4” will be

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 639

displayed in the child screen. Set the following options for Well_4:

Label: Well_4
Mask: Include in System (default)
Well Type: Oil producer (Gas lifted)
PROSPER well file: Well_4.out
Model VLP/IPR

Click on “Well_5” on the Equipment list on the right. The summary data of “Well_5” will be
displayed in the child screen. Set the following options for Well_5:

Label: Well_5
Mask: Include in System (default)
Well Type: Oil producer (Gas lifted)
PROSPER well file: Well_5.out
Model VLP/IPR

PLEASE MAKE SURE THAT THE WELL TYPE FOR

WELLS 2, 3, 4, 5 IS DEFINED AS "Oil Producer (Gas
Lifted)"

Click |OK to complete this part of the well description process.

3.5.3.3 Generate Well IPRs

Once all the wells have been created and the associated PROSPER well models selected, the
IPRs can be generated in GAP in a batch mode.

From the main GAP menu select Generate | Generate Well IPRs from PROSPER.

Then select All | Generate.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 640 GAP

By double-clicking on any of the wells and selecting the IPR tab, one can verify the IPR input
data as shown in the following screen shot:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 641

The IPR curve can be seen by selecting Plot.

The scale of any plot can be changed by clicking on |Scales on the menu bar. This allows the
min and max X and Y axis values to be redefined, and the number of grid blocks (divisions)
that the axis should be divided into.
Click on |OK to get back to the GAP main screen.
3.5.3.4 Generate Well VLPs
To import the VLP curves in GAP (ref. VLP generation 402 ) the user can either:

Access the VLP section in the well input area and Browse the VLP sets already generated
for this example (after that, it is possible to skip to the next step 643 ) (this is a much faster
option in the case of this example, being the VLP already available; of course, in all real
cases the VLPs need to be generated), or

Generate them Access the menu Generate/Generate Well VLPs with PROSPER., then
then All, then Data to enter the ranges of sensitivity variables.

Please refer to the VLP generation 402 for guidelines on the ranges to use.

Please also note that depending on the well type, VLP generation can take some time i.e.,
approximately 1-hour for a gas lifted VLP, depending on computer speed. For this reason, it
may be best to generate the VLP for a single well to understand the VLP generation workflow

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 642 GAP

and simply import the given *.tpd file (or browse for the *.VLP file) for the remaining wells.

In this case, as the well models have already been saved, we will use the ranges already
present in the models:

NOTE: see VLP generation 402 section for the recommended

ranges for gas lift quantity.

After that, select Ok and Generate. At the end of the calculation, which will take some time to
run (please, be patient) the program will have all the VLP curves sets imported in GAP.

In order to check the generated lift curve access the well Summary screen (double click on
the well), then access the VLP section. This will lead to the VLP description screen. Select
Inspect to view the tables and Plot to view the curve plots:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 643

In this screen the .vlp file has been created, containing all the VLP curves. Select Inspect to
verify the quality of the curves.
3.5.3.5 Define the Pipelines
1. Description of the Flowlines
A pipeline is represented by a ‘pipeline segment’ icon between the joints. Initially, due to no
length entered in the pipeline, the icon is transparent in colour. Once there is pipeline
description in the item, the colour of the icon will turn to cyan.

First, double-click on the pipeline between “WH_1” and “Manifold”. The pipeline summary
screen shown below will appear.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 644 GAP

Label the Pipeline as ‘Flowline1’. GAP Internal Correlations will be used for modeling the
pressure drop in the pipeline. Petroleum Experts 4 correlation will be used.

The default environment variables will be used. If however these values were to be changed,
then the green box labelled “OK” that is located next to the word “Environment” would be
pressed. The default environment conditions are as follows:
Surrounding temperature 50 degree F
Overall heat transfer coefficient (for oil well) 8 BTU/h/ft2/F
Oil heat capacity 0.53 BTU/h/F
Gas heat capacity 0.51 BTU/h/F
Water heat capacity 1.00 BTU/h/F

Click on the green box labelled “None”, that is located next to the word “Pipe Data”. This will
open the window that allows the pipe geometry to be described.

Assuming the pipeline is horizontal, hence, the true vertical depth is not changing (at 0 ft),
populate the screen as shown below to describe a horizontal pipeline of 500 ft in length and 6
inches in diameter.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 645

When the description is complete, click |OK. This will display the main screen.

Repeat the process described above for the remaining pipes using the data in Table 2 629 .

2. Pipeline matching
Under the matching input screen of each pipeline, enter the following measurement:
Upstream Upstream Liquid Downstream Gas Lift WC GOR Oil Gravity Gas Gravity
Pressure Temperat Rate Pressure Rate (%) (scf/stb) (API) (sp. gravity)
(psig) ure (stb/day) (psig) (MMscf/
(F) day)
Flowline 1 190 143 13500 165 / 0 1200 40 0.8
Flowline 2 176 97 3100 165 1 30 300 34 0.739
Flowline 345 199 85 3510 165 9 75 300 34 0.703
MainPipe 165 119 20110 150 10 17.7 1100 38.9 0.763

and for all the pipelines:

water salinity = 100,000 ppm, no non-hydrocarbon impurities.

For instance:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 646 GAP

Click the Match button, in order to match the multiphase flow correlation (PE4), as explained
in the previous example 559 .
Repeat the procedure for the three other pipelines, taking care of selecting the proper
"Expected Fluid Type".

Useful Tip:

If two pipe descriptions are the same, the information can be copied from a described pipe to
an new pipe as follows:
1. Hold down the left mouse button on the described pipe and press the control key.
2. Move the cursor until it is over the new pipe and release the control key. The information
will now be transferred.

The model set up is completed. Save the model as gaslift_field1.gap

3.5.4 Scenario with fixed allocation

Currently the allocation of gas lift is such as:

Gas lift injection

(MMscf/d)
Well_1 -

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 647

Well_2 1
Well_3 3
Well_4 3
Well_5 3

It requested to determine how much production we obtain currently.

To achieve that, the following steps will be followed:
Enter the current gas lift allocation
Run Solve Network without optimisation

3.5.4.1 Enter current gas lift allocation

To enter the current gas lift allocation, various options are available:
As seen before 599 , accessing the wells' Controls section, setting the gas lift control to Fixed
and entering the injection rate or
Accessing the menu Edit / Edit Equipment Controls. This will allow to enter directly the
current gas lift allocation under the Actual column:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 648 GAP

Note that the wells' Controls section can be accessed from this screen by clicking on the Edit
buttons.

Important note: The values for the controls under Actual

are the ones that figure under "Fixed Value" in the wells'
Controls section. These values will be used whenever the
GAP model is run under No Optimisation

It is possible to verify in the well Controls section that the desired allocation has been entered:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 649

The model is set now with a fixed gas lift allocation and is ready to be run.
3.5.4.2 Solve Network with No Optimisation
As mentioned previously, when running Solve Network with No Optimisation the values of the
controls used (gas lift gas injection rate, wellhead chokes, etc.) are the ones under "Fixed
Value" in the wells' Controls section or under the "Actual" column in the Edit / Edit Equipment
Controls.
Run Solve Network with No Optimisation for a separator pressure of 250 psig (see previous
example 598 for illustration of this step) and Gas lift available of 10 MMscf/d.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 650 GAP

Checking the results with the fly-over, it is possible to record a production of about 15200
STB/day:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 651

3.5.5 Solve Network with optimised gas lift allocation

The second scenario consists of asking GAP to re-allocate the gas lift in order to maximise
the oil production.
To achieve that, the following steps are required:
Set the wells' gas lift controls to Calculated
Run Solve Network with optimisation

3.5.5.1 Set gas lift Controls

To set the controls, access each well input screen and in the Controls section select Gas Lift
Control as Calculated:

Do that for each gas lift well.

This will activate a thin red rounded square symbol around each well: .
3.5.5.2 Solve Network with Optimisation
Run Solve Network with Optimisation. After the calculation, checking the results, it is possible
to verify that the oil produced is now 16280 STB/day, against the 15200 STB/day (7%
increase) given by the current allocation:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 652 GAP

The total gas lift used is still 10 MMscf/day. To achieve this production, the GAP Optimiser
has re-allocated the gas lift injection differently.
Accessing the results under the menu Results / Summary / All Wells, it is possible to read the
new allocation:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 653

Most of the gas (around 7 MMscf/day) is allocated to well2.

Conclusion: using the same total amount of gas in the field, just reallocating the gas
lift injected among the wells, GAP has allowed to verify that it is possible to increase
the production by 7%.

Save the model as gaslift_field1.gap

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 654 GAP

3.6 Example 5 - Gas Lift Injection Network

The previous example 628 showed how to set up a gas lift production system and can be
applied to the majority of the cases.
In many cases it is required to verify if the gas lift injection network is able to provide the
necessary pressure to inject the required gas lift gas. The following example shows how to
introduce in the system the physics of the gas lift injection network.
3.6.1 Objectives
Definition of the problem
In the case of the oil field of the previous example 628 it is required to describe in detail the gas
lift distribution network, including the compression facility and the lines carrying the gas to
each wellhead.
Also, for the current compression capability it is required to determine the maximum amount of
oil the system can produce for a separator pressure of 250 psig.
The amount of gas lift gas available for the whole system is 10 MMscf/day. For reasons of
pipeline integrity, the maximum pressure at the Casing Head is restricted to 4000 psig.

Sketch of the gas lift injection network

Learning topics
The objectives of this example are to learn how to:
Generate lift curves for gas lift oil producer wells with casing head pressure as
sensitivity variable

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 655

Build a GAP model for the gas lift injection network

Couple the production system to the gas lift injection network
Optimise at the same time the two production and injection models

Executive Summary
To achieve the objectives above stated a gas lift injection network model will be built and then
coupled to the production model. GAP allows to optimise the production system and then to
verify if the gas lift injection network is able to provide the necessary pressure to inject the
necessary gas at the casing head side.
The steps followed will be, starting from the existing gaslift_field1.gap 628 model, to:
1. Modify the existing gas lift production network:
- Generate in PROSPER lift curves with Casing Pressure as sensitivity variable and
import the curves in GAP
- Set the well controls in GAP
2. Build the gas lift injection network
- Draw the GAP network
- Define wells in GAP as sinks with the same name as the production wells
- Define the Pipelines
3. Associate the gas lift injection system to the production system
4. Run Solve Network including the gas lift network in the calculation to optimise both
production and injection

The files for this example to start building the model can be
found in the archive:
~\samples\GAP\gaslift\ gaslift_field1.gar
and in the folder
~\samples\GAP\gaslift\Gas lift Network\Initial Files
and the final model can be found in the GAP archive file format
in the following archive:
~\samples\GAP\gaslift\Gas lift network\Gas Lift Network.gar

Extract 533 the archive file to an appropriate directory

3.6.2 Data Available
Description of the gas lift wells (production network)
The table below shows the PROSPER well files that will be used later to create the well IPRs.

The initial GAP model (GASLIFT_FIELD1.gap) has PROSPER models which use the Fixed
Depth of Injection to model the Gas Lift data. However for the sake of modelling the Gas Lift
Network, the PROSPER models must use the VALVE DEPTHS SPECIFIED method.

PROSPER files for the four wells which use the Valve Depths Specified are provided in the
folder Initial Files.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 656 GAP

Furthermore, the VLPs with sensitivity on casing head pressure have also been provided in the
folder Initial Files:

Well type PROSPER well model Lift curves

Well 2 Gas lift Well_2_CP.out Well_2_CP.tpd

Well 3 Gas lift Well_3_CP.out Well_3_CP.tpd
Well 4 Gas lift Well_4_CP.out Well_4_CP.tpd
Well 5 Gas lift Well_5_CP.out Well_5_CP.tpd
Table 1 - well data

Description of the pipelines (gas lift injection network)

Pipe Length TVD TVD Diamete Heat Flow correlation

(ft) upstrea downstrea r Transfer
m m (m) (in) coeff
(m) (Btu/h/ft2/
F)
Flowline1 500 0 0 4 3 Petroleum Experts
4
Flowline2 500 0 0 4 3 Petroleum Experts
4
Flowline345 500 0 0 4 3 Petroleum Experts
4
Table 2 - pipeline data

Compressor: fixed dP. dP/stage: 1000 psi

In order to link a production network to an injection network, it is

mandatory to define the injection sinks with the same names as
the production wells.
In the same way, defining the injection manifold with the same
name as the production separator will make GAP understand
the two have the same pressure. Note that the last
consideration is not a mandatory requirement: if a different
name is used for the injection manifold, GAP will ask further for
its pressure.

3.6.3 Modify the production network

The classic (and also most common) way of defining a gas lifted production well consists of
IPR and set of VLP curves that take into account the gas lift gas injected (see previous
example 628 ). The basic assumption is that enough pressure is available at the casing side for
the injection of the gas lift gas.
The verification of if the casing pressure is suitable to achieve the injection or not can be done
separately by running sensitivity analysis with the PROSPER well model.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 657

In the case of this exercise, it is required to optimise the production taking into account
dynamically of the gas lift injection network capability.

In order to be able to optimise at the same time the production and the gas lift injection
networks, it is necessary to define the production wells as controllable in the casing pressure.
The casing pressure will be the parameter linking production to gas lift injection network.
In order to define the casing pressure as control for the gas lift production wells:
The PROSPER well models have to be defined with Valve Depths Specified
Lift curves have to be generated taking into account the casing pressure as
sensitivity variable. This means that along with the standard 4 variables, a 5th has to
be added to the VLPs

Before starting, open up the GASLIFT_FIELD1.gap model. Associate to the wells 2, 3, 4 and
5 to the correspondent well models as defined in Table1 655 and as seen in the figure below.

Associate all the gas lift well files. The naturally flowing well Well_1 remains unmodified.
3.6.3.1 Generate the well VLPs in PROSPER
This section shows how to generate the lift curves with casing pressure as sensitivity variable.
Note that the lift curves have already generated (see Table 1 654 ), therefore the steps
described below (in italics) are just as an illustration of how they were generated.

Open up the PROSPER model for one of the wells and access the calculation VLP Multi
Variable

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 658 GAP

Enter a range of rates and select 5 sensitivity variables:

Guidelines on the VLP generation can be found in VLP generation 402 section.

Calculate the curves (this will take some time, therefore be patient) and then use the
button Export Lift Curves to export the curves in .tpd format.
The .tpd file can be imported in the well VLP section in GAP.

For the example file GASLIFT_FIELD1.gap, the .tpd file (present in the Initial files folder (
Table 1 654 )) shall be imported for each well.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 659

Inspect will allow to verify that the curves have 5 sensitivity parameters.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 660 GAP

3.6.3.2 Setting well Controls in GAP

Once the lift curves have been imported in GAP, , the next step will be to specify the Casing
Pressure Control mode.

In order to activate the Casing Pressure Control Mode, double click on the Well2 and from the
Summary screen, select the option 'USE CASING PRESSURE'

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 661

Accessing the well Controls section, it is possible to set the Casing Pressure Control to
Calculated. Setting this option to 'Calculated' indicates that the Casing Pressure will be
calculated dynamically by GAP based on the Gas Lift injection Network.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 662 GAP

And also set a Maximum Casing Pressure value to 4000 psig. Enter an initial Casing Pressure
of 1250 psig. The program will later modify it to optimise the system.

Perform these steps for all the remaining wells.

The gas lift production network is ready. Save the file as Gas Lift Network.gap.
3.6.4 Build the Gas Lift Injection Network

3.6.4.1 Draw the GAP Network

1. Getting Started
Begin by starting a new file by selecting File/New.

2. Defining the global system options

To begin setting up the system options, select Options Method and make the following
selections:

System Type : Gas Lift Injection

Prediction: On
Prediction Method : Pressure and Temperature
Water Vapour: No Calculations
Temperature Model : Rough Approximation

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 663

Then click Ok to exit this screen.

This completes the system setup and initialises the program.

3. Defining the Units System

In order to define the units system click on Units | Edit Units. Follow the same directives as in
the previous example 631 .

4. Drawing the system

The purpose of this section is to demonstrate how to construct graphically the complete
network.
The network sketch in the Objectives 654 will be used as reference.

The network will be drawn from upstream to downstream. The gas lift gas injection manifold
will be defined first. Notice that the order that the GAP drawing is produced in has no effect
on the results.

In order to link a production network to an injection network, it is

mandatory to define the injection sinks with the same names as
the production wells.
In the same way, defining the injection manifold with the same

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 664 GAP

name as the production separator will make GAP understand

the two have the same pressure. Note that the last
consideration is not a mandatory requirement: if a different
name is used for the injection manifold, GAP will ask further for
its pressure.

Injection Manifold "Separator"

The Injection Manifold corresponds physically to the production separator and is defined by
entering in the system a Separator/Injection manifold element :

The Joints
Five joints will be created:
One joint to represent the separator joint ("J1")
One joint to represent the compressor outlet ("J2")
One joint to represent the manifold ("Manifold")
One joint to represent the wellhead (“WH_2”) of Well_2
One joint to represent the wellhead (“WH_345”) of Well_3, 4 and 5

Create the joints by clicking on the joint icon and clicking on the main GAP screen. Add five
joint icons and label them accordingly. The following screen shot shows the current layout of
the system.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 665

The Compressor
The compressor element can be added by selecting the correspondent icon from the
toolbar.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 666 GAP

Wellheads (casing side)

The Wellheads will be modelled using sink elements . Make sure to enter for each sink
element the same name as the corresponding well. This is important to make GAP recognise
the linking points between production and gas lift injection.
Once the Source/Sink button is selected, place an icon on the screen and select Sink:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 667

Some useful tips

1. To move a node to a new location on the screen, move the mouse arrow over the
node to be moved and press the left mouse button and the |Shift key. Keep the left
mouse button pressed and move the node to the new location. Releasing the left
mouse button will position the node in the new location.
2. Nodes can be deleted by selecting the scissors icon from the toolbar menu and
clicking on the node to be removed. Items can also be deleted by Right Clicking on
the element to be deleted then selecting Delete from the pop-up menu.

The links /pipes

Links are connection tools, which connect the various
nodes in the network system. The following rules apply:

a link between a reservoir and a well has no dimension

a link between a well and a joint has no dimension
a link between 2 joints may have dimensions (pipe, chokes,)
a link between a joint and a separator has no dimensions
a well cannot be linked directly to a separator. An intermediate joint is compulsory,
a reservoir cannot be linked directly to a separator.

Link the components together by selecting the Link icon and dragging the left-hand mouse
button between two components. Follow the sketch in the Objectives 654 .

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 668 GAP

Deselect the link icon to resume the normal Windows cursor.

The following screenshot illustrates the connected network:

3.6.4.2 Define the Wellheads

Access the Sink input screen by double-clicking on it and define a rate of 0, as shown below:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 669

Note that this is just to validate the system. Later on, when running calculations the program
will determine the optimum value for the injection rate.
Repeat that for all the sinks.
3.6.4.3 Define Pipelines and surface equipment
Pipelines
Enter the pipeline data according to Table 2 655 .
The steps to follow are exactly the same as seen in previous examples 554 .
The pipeline labels can be entered by entering the Label in the Pipeline Summary screen.

Injection manifold
Access the injection manifold input section and enter an injection fluid temperature of 60 deg F

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 670 GAP

and define the injected gas PVT properties by entering the Edit List section:

The gas gravity of the injected fluid is 0.7.

Compressor
The compressor is defined as fixed dP. This is just a simplification. Note that in general, when
modelling compression, the option Performance Curves 326 should be used instead.
In the Compressor Summary screen select Fixed dP Model

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 671

In the Data section enter a dP of 1000 psi:

Save the GAP model as Injection_network.gap.

Run a Solve Network for the injection network only for a separator pressure of 250 psig.
3.6.5 Link the production to the gas injection network
The next step is to link the two models production and injection network.

Open up the production network Gas Lift Network.gap

Access the main program Options from the menu Options / Method
At the bottom - Associated Models section - tick the box corresponding to the Gas lift
Injection and Browse the injection_network.gap model, as shown below:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 672 GAP

Clicking on OK will open up the gas lift injection network alongside the production network
Selecting the Window / Tile Vertically menu will allow to view both networks at the same
time

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 673

The program knows now that each well corresponds to a source element and the injection
manifold corresponds to the Separator. This is because the same names have been used for
those elements.

Note that in the gas lift injection network the icons for injection
manifold and sinks (wellheads) have turned upside down. This is
the symbol that those elements are linked to their correspondent
in the production network

Save the file. The whole model will be saved as Gas Lift Network.gap. This is the name of
the production network. The injection network will be saved as injection_network.gap. Note
that as the production network is the master model, the whole model can be opened opening
the master model file (Gas Lift Network.gap).

3.6.6 Solve Network with Optimisation including Gas Lift Injection

Network
When running the model in a coupled production/injection system, the production network is
the master model.
This means that in order to run the calculation, the production network screen has to be active
(like in the figure above 672 ).

Run a Solve Network with Optimisation for these conditions:

Gas Lift available: 10 MMscf/d - this is the total gas available in the whole field
Separator pressure: 250 psig

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 674 GAP

To run the gas lift network model coupled to the production model select Include Gaslift
System:

When running the production and the gas injection model together GAP will follow these steps:
The Production model is optimised to maximise production and honour constraints.
The amount of gas lift to inject in each well is determined, as well as the casing
pressure required
The gas lift injection rate determined in the first step is passed as fixed rate to the
sinks in the gas lift injection system. The injeciton system is solved and the
pressures at the sinks are determined. If the pressure required is higher than the one
determined in the production system, the calculation stops, otherwise the calculation
of the production system is done again for the new casing pressures, injection rates
again estimated, passed to the injection system, as so on.

Checking the results, it is possible to view the results with the fly-over by pointing the cursor
on any element of the two networks, for example separator and at the wellheads (sinks):

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 675

Note that to view the results concerning each system (production or injection) the
corresponding screen has to be made active.
Selecting the production network screen and accessing the menu Results / Detailed /
All Wells, it is possible to view the gas lift allocated:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 676 GAP

The same results can be viewed by displaying the sinks gas rate production in the injection network. To achieve that, make the
injection network screen active and select the menu Results / Detailed / All Items and report the Gas
Rate:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 677

Save the file.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 678 GAP

3.7 Example 6 - Electric Submersible Pump - Model

Calibration

3.7.1 Objectives
Definition of the problem
The field consists of 5 oil producing wells with ESPs producing from 2 different reservoirs. The
pumps can be operated at variable speed.

It is required to investigate how to increase field production and honouring at the same time a
constraint on maximum power available. The maximum power for the whole field is 1700 Bhp

Learning topics
The example is a review example that shows all the steps to achieve the model calibration.
The objectives of this example are to learn how to:
Build a GAP model for an ESP lifted system
Use Model validation to quality check the well models
Match the pipelines
Run Solve Network calculations
Run Optimisation using ESP frequency
Honour constraints on maximum power

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 679

Executive Summary
After building the model for this production network in GAP, a calculation to determine the
overall amount of producing fluid at current conditions will be performed.
A second calculation will be performed allowing GAP to optimise a given ESP’s power in order
to maximise oil production.
The steps followed will be:
1. Build the GAP network
- Draw the GAP network
- Define a reservoir in GAP
- Define wells in GAP
- Generate Well IPRs in GAP using PROSPER
- Generate Well VLPs in GAP using PROSPER
- Define the pipeline and eventual surface equipment
- Match the pipelines to test data
2. - Run Solve Network for current network status
3. - Set well Controls and Run Solve Network with optimisation

The files for this example and the final model can be found
in the GAP archive file format in the following directory.
~\samples\GAP\espfield\Espfield.gar
Extract 533 the archive file to an appropriate directory

3.7.2 Data Available

Description of the wells

Well type PROSPER well Lift curve file ESP Operating

model Frequency (Hz)
Well W1 ESP ESP-W1.out ESP-W1.tpd 56
Well W2 ESP ESP-W2.out ESP-W2.tpd 68
Well W3 ESP ESP-W3.out ESP-W3.tpd 60
Well W4 ESP ESP-W4.out ESP-W4.tpd 56
Well W5 ESP ESP-W5.out ESP-W5.tpd 57
Table 1

Well test data:

Reservo Producti
ir Manifold on
Pressur Frequenc Liquid Water
e y Pressure rate cut GOR
Well
Name psig Hertz psig STB/day percent scf/STB

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 680 GAP

W1 4490 56 457 10019 16 507

W2 4490 68 387 6718 60 507
W3 4458 60 405 7780 40 434
W4 4458 56 484 11510 10 434
W5 4458 57 418 7705 30 434
Table 2

The PROSPER well model files are in the ..\Samples\GAP\espfield directory.

Description of the pipelines

Connection Pipe Pipe Pipe Pipe

node label length diameter roughness
From To Km Inches inches
WH_1 MP P1 3.7 5.761 0.0006
WH_3 MP P2 4.2 5.761 0.0006
WH_3 MP P3 3.9 5.761 0.0006
WH_4 MP P4 3.6 5.761 0.0006
WH_5 MP P5 4.5 5.761 0.0006
MP JSep Main 28.7 15.25 0.0006
Table 3

3.7.3 Build the GAP model

This section can be used as a general step-by-step procedure to build any GAP model.
The sketch illustrated in the Objectives 678 will be used as reference.
3.7.3.1 Draw the GAP Network
1. Getting Started
Begin by starting the program.
From the GAP entry screen, select File New to reinitialise GAP.

2. Defining the global system options

To begin setting up the system options, select Options Method and make the following
selections:

System Type : Production

Optimisation Method : Production
PVT Model : Black oil
Prediction: On
Prediction Method : Pressure and Temperature

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 681

Water Vapour: No Calculations

Temperature model: Rough Approximation

Then click Ok to exit this screen.

This completes the system set-up and re-initialises the program.

3. Defining the Units System

In order to define the units system click on Units | Edit Units. The following screen will appear:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 682 GAP

A units menu can be selected by pointing the cursor in the cell below input. This allows the
overall units system to be selected. Clicking on the white cells below this allows individual units
to be changed.
Input : Oilfield
Output : Oilfield

In order to follow exactly the path suggested in this

example, it is recommended to set the inputs and outputs in
Oilfield Units.

For further details, access the Units section 525 of the user Guide.

Click on OK to complete the selection of units and to close the screen.

If necessary, later we will modify the units system when entering input data.

4. Drawing the system

The purpose of this section is to demonstrate how to construct graphically the complete
network.

Notice that the order of the drawings has no effect on the results.
The wells
Select the Well icon and add a well by clicking on the main GAP display area. Name this

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 683

“W1” and click | OK when finished naming it.

Repeat this procedure 4 times to add the other 4 wells (W2 to W5)

Useful tips
Any node can be moved from one position to another by holding the |Shift key while using the
left-hand mouse button to drag it to the desired place.

It is possible to delete any icon by using the scissors icon from the toolbar menu.
The Joints
7 joints are to be created:
- 1 joint (J1) to represent the wellhead (“WH_1”) of Well W1
- 1 joint (J2) to represent the wellhead (“WH_2”) of Well W2
- J3 to J5 to represent the rest of the wellheads.
- 1 joint to represent the manifold (“MP”) where all the wells are flowing to.
- 1 joint to represent the connection to the separator (“JSep”)

To create the joints, click on the Joint icon, add 7 joint icons and label them accordingly

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 684 GAP

The Separator
A separator is considered by GAP to be the end of the
production chain and will be given a pressure at a later
stage. It does not have to actually be a separator, rather a
convenient delivery point where a known pressure exists.

Select the Separator icon and click the left-hand mouse button in the main GAP display
area towards the top right. Give the resulting node the name “Separator” when requested.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 685

The links /pipes

Links are connection tools which connects the various
nodes in the network system. The following rules apply:

- a link between a reservoir and a well has no dimension

- a link between a well and a joint has no dimension
- a link between 2 joints may have dimension (pipe, chokes,)
- a link between a joint and a separator has no dimensions
- a well can not be linked directly to a separator. An intermediate joint is compulsory,
- a reservoir can not be linked directly to a separator.

Finally link the components together by selecting the Link icon and dragging the left-hand
mouse button between two components.

a) Connect Well “W1” to joint “J1”

b) Connect Well “W2” to joint “J2”
c) Connect Well “W3” to joint “J3”
d) Connect Well “W4” to joint “J4”
e) Connect Well “W5” to joint “J5”
f) Connect all wells to manifold “MP” (naming “P1” to “P5” each link (pipeline))
g) Connect the manifold “MP” to joint “JSep”
h) Connect the joint “JSep” to separator “Separator”

Deselect the Link icon to prevent adding more links.

The GAP screen display should look like:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 686 GAP

3.7.3.2 Define the Wells

As it can be seen, when a well is defined in GAP, it is by default set up as an oil producer (no
lift) well. The description therefore has to be changed. In this case it will be defined as an Oil
Producer (ESP lifted)

In order to describe the well, double-click on the well icon which will lead to the Well Data
entry summary as indicated below:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 687

Select the type of well and choose the option Oil producer (ESP lifted)
The PROSPER well files are included in the archive file.

Set the following options for well W1:

Label: W1
Mask: Include in System (default)
Well Type: Oil producer ESP lifted
Model: VLP/IPR intersection (default)
PROSPER well file: ESP-W1.out

Click on “W2” on the Equipment list on the right. The summary data of “W2” will be displayed
in the child screen. Set the following options for Well W2:

Label: W2
Mask: Include in System (default)
Well Type: Oil producer ESP lifted
Model: VLP/IPR intersection (default)
PROSPER well file: ESP-W2.out

Click on “W3” on the Equipment list on the right. The summary data of “W3” will be displayed
in the child screen. Set the following options for Well W3:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 688 GAP

Label: W3
Mask: Include in System (default)
Well Type: Oil producer ESP lifted
Model: VLP/IPR intersection (default)
PROSPER well file: ESP-W3.out

Click on “W4” on the Equipment list on the right. The summary data of “W4” will be displayed
in the child screen. Set the following options for Well W4:

Label: W4
Mask: Include in System (default)
Well Type: Oil producer ESP lifted
Model: VLP/IPR intersection (default)
PROSPER well file: ESP-W4.out

Click on “W5” on the Equipment list on the right. The summary data of “W5” will be displayed
in the child screen. Set the following options for Well W5:

Label: W5
Mask: Include in System (default)
Well Type: Oil producer ESP lifted
Model: VLP/IPR intersection (default)
PROSPER well file: ESP-W5.out

PLEASE MAKE SURE THAT THE WELL TYPE IS

DEFINED AS "Oil Producer (ESP Lifted)"

Click | OK to return to the main screen.

About some useful tips
The way that the equipment list is sorted can be changed by clicking on the equipment list
area with the right-hand side mouse button.
3.7.3.3 Generate Well IPRs
Once all the wells have been created and the associated PROSPER well models selected, the
IPRs can be generated in GAP in a batch mode.

From the main GAP menu select Generate | Generate Well IPRs from PROSPER.

Then select All | Generate.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 689

By double-clicking on any of the wells and selecting the IPR tab, one can verify the IPR input
data as shown in the following screen shot:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 690 GAP

The IPR curve can be seen by selecting Plot.

The scale of any plot can be changed by clicking on |Scales on the menu bar. This allows the
min and max X and Y axis values to be redefined, and the number of grid blocks (divisions)
that the axis should be divided into.
Click on |OK to get back to the GAP main screen.
3.7.3.4 Import Well VLPs
To import the VLP curves in GAP (ref. VLP generation 402 ) the user can either:

Access the VLP section in the well input area and Browse the VLP sets already generated
for this example (after that, skip to the next step) (this is a much faster option in the case of
this example, being the VLP already available; of course, in all real cases the VLPs need to
be generated), or

Generate them Access the menu Generate/Generate Well VLPs with PROSPER., then
then All, then Data to enter the ranges of sensitivity variables.
Please refer to the VLP generation 402 for guidelines on the ranges to use.

As the second method has been widely demonstrated in previous examples 587 , as VLP curves
have been already generated, the first method will be followed here.

To import the VLPs, access the well VLP seciton and Browse the correspondent .vlp file

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 691

according to Table 1 679 :

If instead of the .vlp file the .tpd file (the one exported
manually form PROSPER), the Import button can be
used to import it.
3.7.3.5 Model validation to QC wells
GAP allows well models to be quality checked against measured data (see topic 425 ).

When the well model is VLP/IPR intersection, this quality check is done by | Model Validation |
Wells with VLP/IPR menu option.

The test data to be used in this example is described in the following table.

Reservo Producti
ir Manifold on
Pressur Frequenc Liquid Water
e y Pressure rate cut GOR
Well
Name psig Hertz psig STB/day percent scf/STB

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 692 GAP

W1 4490 56 457 10019 16 507

W2 4490 68 387 6718 60 507
W3 4458 60 405 7780 40 434
W4 4458 56 484 11510 10 434
W5 4458 57 418 7705 30 434

The current well’s data (Reservoir Pressure, GOR and WC) can be transferred by clicking on
the ‘Transfer’ button and selecting the ‘Transfer data FROM VLP/IPR data’ option.

The data present in the IPR section of the wells will be transfer to the Production Validation
screen.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 693

Now complete the rest of the data as indicated in the table.

Once the data is entered, click on Calculate. The estimated values calculated from the IPR/
VLP data will be reported, as well as the difference against the measured data.

If there were any significant difference, the well data could be inspected by clicking on the
‘edit’ button next to the well data. This will lead to the well model screen and the measured
data will be transferred to the well model (Calculation screens) in order to trouble-shoot
individual wells.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 694 GAP

It is important to mention that if all previous stages (i.e. PVT, PROSPER well model, lift curves
generation, etc.) have been correctly matched and quality checked, the measured and
calculated rates should agree closely.
3.7.3.6 Define the Pipelines
This seciton shows how to define a pipeline and how to match the pipeline multiphase flow
correlation to test data.

1. Pipeline Input data

A pipeline is represented by a square box between the joints. Initially, due to the fact that no
length is entered in the pipeline description, the box is transparent in colour. Once the pipeline
is described, the colour of the icon will turn to cyan.

First, double-click on the pipeline between joints “J1” and “MP”.

The following pipe summary screen will appear.

GAP Internal Correlations will be used for modeling the pressure drop in the pipeline.
Petroleum Experts 4 correlation will be used. Enter values of 1 for both the gravity coefficient
and the friction coefficient.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 695

In order to change the environment condition of the pipeline, the green box labelled “Ok” that
is located next to the word “Environment” should be clicked. The environment conditions are
as follows:

For this example, the Surface Temperature will be set to 70 F:

Click on the green tab labelled “Description”, that is located at the bottom of the screen. The
section where the pipe elevation and geometry description is entered will appear:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 696 GAP

Populate the screen as above to describe a horizontal pipeline of 3.7 Km in length, 5.761
inches in diameter and a Roughness of 0.0006 inches.

While describing the pipeline, the units system can be changed as indicated below:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 697

Repeat the same process for the rest of the pipelines (the different pipelines can be selected
from the Equipment list on the right). When the pipelines have been described, the square
boxes representing them should all be cyan.
Surrounding temperature 70 degree F
Overall heat transfer coefficient 8 BTU/h/ft2/F
Oil heat capacity 0.53 BTU/h/F
Gas heat capacity 0.51 BTU/h/F
Water heat capacity 1.00 BTU/h/F

The pipelines data is as follow:

Connection Pipe Pipe Pipe Pipe

node label length diameter roughness
From To Km Inches inches
WH_1 MP P1 3.7 5.761 0.0006
WH_3 MP P2 4.2 5.761 0.0006
WH_3 MP P3 3.9 5.761 0.0006
WH_4 MP P4 3.6 5.761 0.0006
WH_5 MP P5 4.5 5.761 0.0006
MP JSep Main 28.7 15.25 0.0006

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 698 GAP

It is assumed that all the pipelines are horizontal.

2. Pipeline matching
The procedure is described in a previous example 643 .
Here are the data to use for the matching procedure, pipe by pipe:

Upstream Upstream Liquid Downstream WC GOR Oil Gas Gravity

Pressure Temperatur Rate Pressure (%) (scf/stb) Gravity (sp. gravity)
(psig) e (stb/day) (psig) (API)
(F)
Pipe 1 455 167 9960 350 16 507 34.2 0.92
Pipe 2 366 135 4100 350 60 507 34.2 0.92
Pipe 3 410 155 7900 350 40 434 31 0.91
Pipe 4 524 164 13400 350 10 434 31 0.91
Pipe 5 432 165 8400 350 30 434 31 0.91
Main 350 88 43760 200 25 456 32 0.91
Pipe

The water salinity is 220,000 ppm in all the pipes, and the impurities are:
Content of CO2 : 0.66 %
Content of N2 : 0.53 % in Pipe 1 and 2, 0.9 % in Pipe 3,4, and 5, and 0.76 % in the main pipe.

3.7.4 Present production

To calculate the production for the actual field status, these steps will be followed (see
previous example 651 ) :
Set well controls to fix the pump frequency
Run Solve Network with Optimisation

3.7.4.1 Well Controls

In Table 1 679 it is reported the frequency at which the pumps operate.

In the well Summary screen, click on the green box labelled ‘Not Set’, that is located to the
right of the ‘Pump Control’ text as shown below.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 699

Set the Frequency Control to ‘Fixed Value’ and the frequency value according to the table
above, as indicated below.

Repeat the procedure for all the wells.

3.7.4.2 Solve Network without Optimisation
A Network Solver calculation (No Optimisation) will be performed in order to see how much
production it can be obtained at the current conditions that are specified in the wells.

The separator pressure will be set to 200 psig.

To perform the Network Solver calculation, click on | Network Solver from the main screen.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 700 GAP

Set the value of ‘Pressure 1’ to 200 psig. If required, up to 10 values for pressure can be
entered into the boxes. To run the network solver click on | Next, select No Optimisation mode
and then Calculate to perform the calculation

To view the results, click on | Main to go back to the main screen. From the main screen, click
on | Results | Summary | All Wells

From the screen, the total amount of oil produced for the system is about 31500 stb/d.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 701

(menu Results/Summary/All Wells)

Clicking |Plot will show the results graphically:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 702 GAP

Under |Variables menu, the different available system variables can be plotted.

3.7.5 Optimising production

The final question 678 to answer consists in assessing if anything can be done in the filed in
order to maximise oil production.

To achieve that, the same network solver calculation will be performed, but the optimiser will
be allowed to change the ESP’s frequency within a range, in order to distribute the power
(ESPs) among the wells and achieve the maximum oil production allowable honouring the
established constraints. This is to show how the same power required by the ESPs can be
optimised.

The steps to follow (see previous example 651 ) will be to:

Set the constraint on the maximum power in the field
Set well controls (in this case, on pump frequency)
Run Solve Network with Optimisation

3.7.5.1 Constraint on maximum power

In order to do this a system maximum power constraint should be set first.

Click on | Constraints | System Constraints and enter a maximum power of 1700 hp (got from
the previous section):

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 703

3.7.5.2 Well Controls

Before performing the calculations, the ESP’s frequency control should be set to ‘calculated’
and the range of variation specified.

In the well’s summary screen, click on the green box labelled ‘Not Set’, that is located to the
right of the ‘ESP Control’ text and set the frequency control to ‘calculated’:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 704 GAP

And enter the minimum and maximum frequency:

It is possible to input the minimum and maximum frequencies by clicking on the green tab
labelled ‘Constraints’ at the bottom of the screen and then the green tab labelled ‘Pump’ as

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 705

shown in the following screen shot:

Set the Maximum ESP Frequency to 70 Hz and the Minimum ESP Frequency to 50 Hz.

Repeat the procedure for all the wells.

3.7.5.3 Solve Network with Optimisation
Click on | Solve Network and check that the Separator pressure is set to 200 psig.
Click on | Next and select the ‘Optimise and honour constraints’ mode. Click | Calculate to
perform the calculation.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 706 GAP

To view the results, click on | Main to go back to the main screen. From the main screen, click
on | Results | Summary | All Wells.

From the screen, the total amount of oil produced for the system is around 32500 stb/day.
Clicking | Plot will show the graphical results.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 707

Conclusion:
The total oil production has increased to 32500 stb/day, around 1000 stb/day extra if
compare to the previous run.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 708 GAP

Note also that the total power supplied to the ESPs is still 1700 hp but the distribution
among the wells is different from what we have specified before.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 709

3.8 Example 7 - Associated Water Injection System

3.8.1 Objectives
Definition of the problem
Two oil reservoirs (reservoir 1 and 2) have been in production from early year 2000.
Reservoir 1 is produced currently by one well that has been planned to be enhanced with gas
lift from January 2008.
The reservoir pressure in reservoir 1 has declined down to around 4860 psig by the end of the
history (July 2005) and it has been required to re-pressurise reservoir 1 by injecting water to
achieve a value of reservoir pressure of 5300 psig, which is the pressure correspondent more
or less to the natural water gradient for that reservoir.
It is required to:
Determine how much water is required to achieve the pressure support objectives
Determine how many injection wells are necessary to achieve the target
Determine the recovery factor from reservoir 1 in 10 years from the end of history to
July 2015
The injection pressure available from the pumping system is 1000 psig

Learning topics
The objectives of this example are to learn how to:
Use GAP pressure support options to determine the amount of water required to
achieve a certain voidage target
Use the existing injection network model to estimate the number of wells required
Link the GAP production to the injection network model and run the prediction with the
two coupled models

Executive Summary
The steps followed will be to:
1. Run a Prediction in the GAP production network using the Target Pressure option to
estimate the amount of water required
2. Use the injection network model (initially with only one injector) to determine the
minimum number of water injection wells required to achieve the pressure support
target
3. Associate the production to the water injection model
4. Run the Prediction with the two coupled models

The files to start this example can be found in the following

directory:
~\samples\GAP\Water Injection\Initial files
and the final model can be found in the GAP archive file:
~\samples\GAP\Water Injection\production_model_final.gar
Extract 533 the archive file to an appropriate directory

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 710 GAP

3.8.2 Data available

The data to start the example are in the folder Initial Files.
The data available are:
Initial GAP model for the production network production_model.gar
Initial GAP model for the water injection network waterinj_model.gar
Extract both archives before starting the exercise.
3.8.3 Prediction to determine water injection requirement
The first objective to achieve is to determine the amount of water required to maintain the
reservoir pressure in reservoir 1 to 5300 psig.
To accomplish the task, a prediction will be run and one of the voidage replacement options in
GAP will be used. These options can be found in the Prediction / Run Prediction section and
further details cab be found in the user Guide 457 .

Starting from the production model, set up and run a Prediction:

from the end of production history (1/7/2005) to the 1/7/2015
2 months time step
set the voidage replacement option Target Pressure for reservoir 1 and set a
target of 5300 psig using 0% gas (which means: injected fluid is 100% water)
set the Optimisation mode to Optimise with All Constraints

When running the prediction, the program will inject as much water in reservoir 1 as to
maintain the pressure to 5300 psig.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 711

At the end of the prediction various results can be viewed, in particular the results for reservoir
1. This can be achieved in various ways, for example by double clicking on the tank and
accessing the Results section or accessing the menu Prediction / Plot Tanks Prediction
Results.
Plot the reservoir pressure and the Average Water Injection together:

Also useful is the liquid production profile:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 712 GAP

Note that the reservoir pressure climbs up to 5300 psig, from around 4860 psig of end of
history (start of prediction). To achieve the voidage replacement, a big amount of water is
initially required. Note that this is because a virtual source of water is used and in reality if the
water capacity is less, the target pressure would be achieved at later time.
After the target is reached, the water to inject declines, as it has to fill the voidage of the
production only, which declines. In early 2008 the water to inject goes to almost zero, as the
field is shut down (as the production profile shows)
The water amount required to maintain the pressure constant is around 16000/17000 STB/d.
To summarise:
To achieve the target quite a high rate of water is required (around 40000 STB/d)
To maintain the pressure constant after that, a rate of around 16000/17000 STB/d is
required
Sizing the injection system for the highest rate would not have sense, as that amount is
theoretical to achieve the target instantaneously. This means that if one sizes the injection
system to deliver less than the 40000 STB/d, but higher than 16000 STB/d, that means that
most likely the target will be achieved and much less water used.
In the following it will be assumed that the design water injection rate is 18000 STB/d. This
amount will be used to decide how many injection wells will be used.

Save the prediction results by accessing the menu Prediction / Save Prediction Results As,
then Add to save the results and enter a title just like in the figure below:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 713

Save the production model.

3.8.4 Determine number fo injection wells
After opening the water injection system waterinj_model.gap, it is possible to see that there is
only one well at the moment in the model the well Inflow performance section is already
accounting for a pressure of 5300 psig, which is the target reservoir pressure.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 714 GAP

This means that running a Solve Network calculation will allow to determine how much water
the one injection well can inject when the target pressure is already achieved.
Run a Solve Network with optimisation for an injection manifold pressure of 1000 psig.
Checking the results, it is possible to see that the system can deliver a rate of around 6530
STB/d:

As the design water rate is 18000 STB/d, as seen before, it is required to have at least 3
wells to achieve the voidage replacement target.

Modify the model by adding two more wells with their devoted flowlines. The new wells can be
creating by Copy/Paste the existing well (the assumption here is that the same wel template is
used). In the same way, the pipelines can be copied from the existing pipe1:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 715

Running again Solve Network it is possible to verify that the system now can deliver around
18670 STB/d

Note that one well alone can deliver around 6530 STB/d,
whilst 3 wells 18670 STB/d, in other words, each well
injects less (6220 STB/d). This is because increasing the
rate the pressure losses along the shared pipeline main
increase too, causing the wellhead pressure to decrease,
with consequent decrease of injection

When downtime is applied for injection wells, the Instantaneous rates are
corrected accordingly to obtain Average Rates that are reported at the
Well and Tank level. The injection manifold will not take well downtime
into account and will still report the average rates as the sum of the
instantaneous rates from the wells.

This is because the solver for an injection system works from the injection
manifold to the tanks unlike the production system which is the other way
round where the separator can properly account for the total average
rates from the producing wells.
However, note that the tanks will indeed have the average rates being
injected into them and the cummulative injection volumes will be updated
accordingly. In essence, the injection calculations will be correct. However,

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 716 GAP

the injection manifold results should not be referred to in terms of the

average rates and if required, the well average rates can be exported to
Excel and summed up to obtain the total.

Save the model as waterinj_model_final.gap.

3.8.5 Associate production to water injection model
At this point the water injection model needs to be linked to the production model.
To achieve that, the same steps as seen in the gas lift injection network example 671 will be
followed:

Open up the production model

Access the main GAP program Options (menu Options / Method)
At the bottom of the screen, in the Associated Models section tick the box for the Water
Injection and Browse the previously saved waterinj_model_final.gap model

Once OK is pressed, the program will open the water injection system along with the
production system
Arranging the windows by selecting the menu Windows / Tile Vertically will allow to see
both models together:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 717

The two models are now linked at the reservoir 1 level, as reservoir 1 is the same MBAL
model in both models.

In order for the two models to be linked, it is paramount to

make sure that reservoir 1 in the two models corresponds
to the same MBAL model. If not, the program will produce
from one tank and inject in a different one

Save the model naming the production model as production_model_final.gap.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 718 GAP

3.8.6 Run Prediction with coupled models

The models are now ready to be run.
Run a prediction with the same set up as before 710 :
from the end of production history (1/7/2005) to the 1/7/2015
2 months time step
set the voidage replacement option Target Pressure for reservoir 1 and set a target of
5300 psig using 0% gas (which means: injected fluid is 100% water)
set the Optimisation mode to Optimise with All Constraints

It is important make a consideration on the voidage replacement options:

If no injection system is included, the voidage replacement options make use of a virtual
source of water/gas for injection, which means the target will always be achieved
If an injection system in included in the model, as it is now, the voidage replacement options
become constraints for the injection system, which means that the achievement of the target
is subordinate to the physics of the injection system: if the system cannot physically deliver
the amount required, the target will not be achieved

When running the two coupled models, the program will:

solve first the production system, determine the production
from the production the voidage is determined, which is then translated into amount of
water to inject
the amount of water to inject is passed to the injection system as constraint and the
injection system is solved and the cycle restarts

The figure below shows the model while running. In the System area the program will show
the sequence of calculations switching from Production to Injection system:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 719

Once the calculation is finished, save the prediction results again:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 720 GAP

It is then possible to view the results:

Any result concerning the production can be accessed by making the production network
model screen active
Any result concerning the injection can be accessed by making the injection network model
screen active

Checking the results for the injection system (click anywhere in the injection system screen), it
is possible to view the results for reservoir 1 in terms of reservoir pressure and average water
injections:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 721

The target pressure is reached in September 2006. The target is reached later that when not
considering the injection system (see above 711 , where an infinite source of water was used),
as now it is dependent on the physics of the injection network.
From the plot it is also possible to see the water injection delivered by the injection network.

As the results were saved for both scenarios, it is possible to plot them together, for example,
the reservoir pressure:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 722 GAP

This confirms the considerations done above.

From the tank results it is possible to plot also the recovery factor for the current prediction

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 723

results:

The double slope is due to the work-over at the beginning of 2008, when well1 starts gas lift
injection and production is enhanced.
Conclusion: The final oil recovery at the end of 10 years of production is about 12.8%.

Save the model.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 724 GAP

3.9 Example 8 - Prosper On-line Pipeline

3.9.1 Objectives
Definition of the problem
The field is composed by an oil well linked to the separator through a long wavy pipeline. Here
is a schematic of the pipeline deviation, from the wellhead to the separator:

It is required to study in detail the pipeline. In particular:

Pressure and temperature drops
Slug report

Learning topics
The example is a review example that shows all the steps to achieve the model calibration.
The objectives of this example are to learn how to:
To convert a pipeline into “PROSPER online”
To set the Temperature model in the PROSPER online pipeline
How to import a PROSPER pipeline model in GAP

Executive Summary

1. The GAP network is already available

2. Convert the pipeline to PROSPER on line
3. Run Solve Network for current network status
4. View the pipeline results

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 725

5. at the end it is

The files for this example and the final model can be found
in the GAP archive file format in the following directory.
~\samples\GAP\PROSPER online\PROSPER-Online.gar.
Extract 533 the archive file to an appropriate directory

NOTE: please refer to the previous example 619 and the

related comments 624 for general comments on running
detailed pipeline calculations.

3.9.2 Data Available

The Pipe flowing diameter is 5-in. A 2-in restriction is set 1000 ft from the wellhead.

The Multiphase flow correlation used for the pressure drops is “Petroleum Experts 4”. This is
a mechanistic correlation. For more information on this correlation, please refer to the
PROSPER user Guide.

The temperature model is the “Improved Approximation”, which is a full Enthalpy Balance
model. More information on this temperature model can be found in the PROSPER user Guide.

3.9.3 Convert the pipe to PROSPER on line

The GAP file is provided. The option “GAP internal correlation” has initially been set in the
pipeline.
To convert the Pipeline model into “PROSPER online”:
Open the GAP file called “PROSPER-online.gap” and select the pipeline using the “Select”
option as illustrated below. The pipeline should become “blue circled”.

Select “Edit | Selected Pipes | Convert to PROSPER Online” from the main menu bar.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 726 GAP

Click “Yes” on the screen popping in, and the pipeline should become “dashed”:

Access the Pipeline inputs double clicking on the pipeline icon, and Click “Edit Pipe” from
the pipeline Summary screen:

· The Multiphase Flow Correlation used is “Petroleum Experts 4”.

· Please click on “Options” to set up the temperature model to be used for the
calculations.
Set the Temperature model in the PROSPER online pipeline

· The pipeline being onshore, the “Predict” option is set to “Pressure and
Temperature (on land)”, as shown below.
· The “Improved Approximation” temperature model is selected, as illustrated

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 727

below.

· The rest of the options are set by default.

·
The information on the pipeline diameter and deviation has already been input in the
example file. These can be accessed from the Equipment | Surface Equipment Screen as
shown below.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 728 GAP

3.9.4 Run calculation and read results

Going back to the main screen of GAP, we can now Run the model and analyse the results
Run the model (solve the network) without optimisation. The separator pressure is 200 psig.

Once the network is solved, access the main GAP screen clicking on “Main”.
To analyse the pipeline results double-click on the pipeline icon and access the Results
screen. The basic results are summarized as shown below:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 729

Scroll to the right of the results window, and click on the “Gradient” button. This allows
accessing the PROSPER online results:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 730 GAP

The Pressure and Temperature gradients along the pipeline are displayed, as well as some
information about:
the flow regime along the pipeline
the PVT properties along the pipeline (fluids’ density, fluids’ FVF, …)
the fluids’ flow rates
the slug properties (if any slug)

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 731

The results can be plotted using the “Plot” button.

The “variable” button can be used to change the variables plotted on the X and Y axis. On the
plot hereafter, pressure and temperature are plotted against the pipe length. One can notice
the pressure drop induced by the choke, as well as a slight temperature drop at the choke
level due to the Joule-Thompson effect.

The “Extended” button can be used to extend the choice of variables to plot:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 732 GAP

SLUG RESULTS (this information can also be found in the PROSPER Online Help Guide):

When steady-state flow occurs in a pipeline, time-averaged mass flow rate at the pipeline inlet
and outlet are constant.
If slug flow occurs through this pipeline, gas and liquid rates and pressures are NOT constant:
liquid slugs and following gas bubbles will vary in velocity and length.

Two slug calculations method can be applied in PROSPER: Brill, and RCS Mechanistic

The Brill method is the most common one, and a more detailed description of the parameters
used to describe the slug characteristics can be found below.

The slug model is assuming that the slug period includes:

- A gas bubble included within a liquid film.
- A liquid slug containing small gas bubbles.

The association of the gas bubble and the liquid slug forms the slug period.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 733

The following assumptions have been taken to develop the hydrodynamic model:
1. Small gas bubbles and liquid in the liquid slug travel at the same velocity.
2. The Liquid film does not contain any gas bubbles.
3. Negligible liquid droplets exist in the gas bubble.

The hydrodynamic model is based on mass balance relationships for both the liquid and the
gas phase.

This will state for instance that the mass of liquid flowing out of the pipe section considered
during one specific period of time is equal to the sum of:
- the mass of liquid in the liquid slug : m1.
- the mass of liquid in the liquid film associated with the gas bubble : m2.
- the mass of liquid that is bypassed by the gas bubble following the liquid slug m3.
mtotal m1 m2 m3

An equivalent mass balance principle will be applied to the gas phase flowing out of the pipe
section considered.

Empirical correlations relating the holdups in the different sections of the slug period
considered to the phase velocities as well as empirical correlations relating the slug lengths to
the mixture velocity are then used to estimate the slug properties.

The output variables that can be found in PROSPER are the following:

Mean Slug Length and 1/1000 Mean Slug Length

Mean Bubble Length and 1/1000 Mean Bubble Length
Slug Liquid Rate and Slug Gas Rate
Bubble Liquid Rate and Bubble Gas Rate
Mean Slug Frequency and 1/1000 Slug Frequency:
Slug Hold-up (HLS) and Equilibrium Hold-up (HLE):
Slug Surge Factor (Liquid) and Slug Surge Factor (Gas)

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 734 GAP

Bubble Surge Factor (Liquid) and Bubble Surge Factor (Gas)

These are standard characteristics parameters for slug analysis, and their description can be
found in the following references:

The Taitel-Dukler flow map that is used in PROSPER to assess the extent of the slugging
phenomenon in the system. This flow map is accessible for each calculation row by clicking on
the row number in the gradient calculation.

A description of these slug calculation methods can be found for instance in the following
publications:

Beggs, H.D. and Brill, J.P. – A study of two phase flow in inclined pipes – Journal of
Petroleum technology, 13 (October 1973). p.607

Brill, J.P. and Beggs, H.D. – Two phase flow in pipes – Tulsa: University of Tulsa (1978)

Beggs, H.D. – Production Optimization using Nodal Analysis – OGCI publications (1991).
p.88-90.

Brown, K.E. - The technology of artificial lift methods- vol.4 - p83-85.

Crowley C.J. and Sam R.G. – Investigation of Two-Phase Flow in Horizontal and Inclined
Pipes at Large Pipe Size and High Gas Density – AGA report TN-399 (Feb. 1986).

Crowley C.J. and Rothe P.H. – State of the Art Report on Multiphase Methods for Gas and
Oil Pipelines, Volume 2, Guide to Computerised Calculations – Creare Inc. Report TN-409
vol.2 (1986).

Hill, T.J. and Wood D.G. – A new approach to the prediction of slug frequency – SPE 20629.
(1990). (i.e. RCS Mechanistical Slug Method).

3.9.5 Importing an existing PROSPER model

If an existing PROSPER model is available for the pipeline, it is possible to import it directly in
GAP.

From the ‘Main’ pipeline Summary screen, click on the Import button and select the PROSPER
file called ‘Main Pipeline.OUT’

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 735

The different screens (PVT matching, correlation matching, etc.) can be inspected from the
menu shown below.

The flow correlation (PE4) has been matched to measured data (the matching parameters
can be seen next to the correlation name)

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 736 GAP

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 737

3.10 Example 9 - Programmable inline element

3.10.1 Objectives
Definition of the problem
A treatment facility is present in the network just before the main pipeline. The facility has got
the following objective:
To de-hydrate the fluid stream (90% water removed)
To cool down the fluid down to a temperature of 60 ºF
The pressure drop across the units is overall 12 psi.

Learning topics
The objectives of this example are to learn how to:
Model non-conventional equipment like heat exchangers using the Inline
Programmable element

Executive Summary
The steps followed will be:
1. To model all the units using one Inline Programmable element writing its code
2. Run the calculation Solve Network and view the results

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 738 GAP

The files for this example and the final model can be found in the
GAP archive file format in the following directory.
Initial file:
~\samples\GAP\inline\progelem.gar
Completed example:
~\samples\GAP\inline\progelem_final.gar
Extract 533 the archive file to an appropriate directory

For details about the Inline Programmable (called also Inline

General), please refer to the Inline General topic 360 in the
user Guide.

3.10.2 Data available

The progelem.gar archive contains all the files required to work with with example.
The red circle around the programmable element means that this element has not been
defined, in other words, this element is invalid.

It is assumed that the user is familiar with building a simple network. The above production
network is already built and can be found from the sample directory as progelem.gap.

The production system consists of two wells, producing into a looped pipeline. The fluid exit
from the looped and enter into a heat exchanger and a water separator before it enters the
riser.
3.10.3 Define the Inline Programmable
First open the file “progelem.GAP”.

The model has been build. The only task is to write the program script.

Double-click on the inline element and click on the red button labelled “invalid” that is located to
the right of the ‘Script’ text.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 739

The following Input Screen will be opened.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 740 GAP

As default, the script screen contains some information as well as an example at the bottom
of it, as the figure above illustrates.
Clear the screen (the variables information can be left but make sure the sample at the bottom
is cleared).
Any line starting with “//” will be ignored when running the script.

The syntax for the script is similar to the C programming language. For more information on
the inlet and outlet variables and other functions of the programmable element, please refer to
the user manual.

The variable for outlet temperature is TEMPOUT. Hence, to set the outlet temperature to 60
degree F, the following line should be written:
TEMPOUT = 60;

The variables for inlet and outlet pressure are PRESIN and PRESOUT respectively. To set a
pressure drop of 12 psi:
PRESOUT = PRESIN – 12;
if (PRESOUT < 11) PRESOUT = 11;

The variables for inlet and outlet water flow rate are QWATIN and QWATOUT respectively.
To remove 90% of the water:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 741

QWATOUT = 0.1 * QWATIN;

Hence, the complete script is:

TEMPOUT = 60;

PRESOUT = PRESIN – 12;

if (PRESOUT < 11) PRESOUT = 11;

QWATOUT = 0.1 * QWATIN;

3.10.4 Run calculation and view results

To run the solver, save the script, return to the main screen. Click on |SolveNetwork. Set the
separator pressure to 500 psig and click on |Next |Calculate to solve the next work.

The results
To see the results of the inline element, compare the properties of nodes MP1 and MP2.
Observe the temperature change, pressure change and the water cut / water rate change.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 742 GAP

The results should be as below (approximately):

Temperatur Pressure Water rate Water cut

e
MP1 119.98 oF 549.3.8 2711.2 stb/ 21 %
psig day
MP2 60 oF 537.3 psig 271.1 stb/day 2.6 %

This completes the Programmable Inline Element Example.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 743

3.11 Example 10 - Smart Well Modelling in GAP

3.11.1 Objectives
Definition of the problem
The reservoir under investigation is composed by multiple layers and has been drilled by
means of multi-layered completions ("smart wells").
One of the wells perforates at the same time a gas layer and an oil layer. The gas layer has a
downhole controllable choke (inflow controllable valve) that can limit or increase the flow of
gas in the well.

It is renown that flowing more gas along with oil decreases the pressure losses by gravity, but
increases the pressure losses by friction. This is the principle of natural gas lift.
The question that is asked is the following: what would be the optimum flow of gas that would
maximize the amount of oil from the system?

Learning topics
The IPM Suite has been developed over the years to be able to handle multi-layer situations in
the best possible way and allows to model and optimise very complicated downhole
completions, like "intelligent" (or "smart") completions.
The objectives of this example are in more detail to learn how to:
Building a model for a multilayer well completion
Optimise the oil production by regulating the amount of gas flowing along with the
oil

Executive Summary
The steps followed will be to:
1. Build the GAP network
- Setup the system in GAP
- Create a PROSPER file for the VLPs

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 744 GAP

- Add an inflow model and a well model

- Convert the well into inflow and outflow
- Link all the elements of the system
- Set the controls for the gas layer
2. Solve the network (Multilayer well effectively)
3. Solve the network using the optimiser.

The files for this example and the final model can be found in the
GAP archive file format in the following directory.
~\samples\GAP\Multilayer\Multilayer1.gar
Extract 533 the archive file to an appropriate directory
3.11.2 Data Available
Description of the wells
The PROSPER files listed in Table 1 are located in the same GAP model directory where the
archive has been extracted.
These files can be linked to each respective inflow via the Summary Screen so GAP can use
the files to automatically pass the PROSPER IPR and PVT data directly to the inflow IPR
section via Generate | Generate Well IPR's with PROSPER.

Layer 1 Layer 2
PROSPER File GAS IPR.OUT OIL IPR.OUT
Table 1 - PROSPER files

Description of the layers

Layer 1 Layer 2
Fluid type Gas Oil
IPR Model Forcheimer Straight line
Table 2 - Layers parameters

3.11.3 Build the GAP Network

The steps to set up a GAP model can be found in previous examples 537 , which it is
recommended to look at.
The procedure below goes straight to building the GAP model.

The well schematic present in the previous section 743 can be translated in a simpler form
below:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 745

TVD
wellhead A 0 ft

Layer 1 B 9900 ft
(Gas)
C 10000 ft

D 10450 ft
Layer 2
(Oil) E 10500 ft

To model the system above, one can decompose it in several elements:

The two reservoir layers of the well can be described using IPR elements (Inflow
elements)
The completion (in this case, tubing) section CD can be described using using a pipe
element and
The completion corresponding to the section AB can be described by means of an
outflow (VLP) element which will account the pressure drop from the top of the first
layer up to the wellhead
The wellhead is instead modeled by a separator (point of the system at a fixed
pressure).

The final aspect of the model is expected to be the following:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 746 GAP

3.11.3.1 Draw the GAP Network

From main menu select the IPR icon, and paste it on the white-board screen. This will display
an icon shape element, which represents an IPR.

Then place two Joints, a Well and a Separator and link all the elements as shown below:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 747

Once connected the system should look like the following:

(the various elements have been renamed as opportune by double clicking on each of them
and entering the Label).
Right-click on the well and select Split into Outflow and Inflow from the pop-up menu:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 748 GAP

This command converts the well into two icons representing inflow and outflow:

Link the outflow icon with the separator (wellhead) and the Inflow icon with the joint “J1”.

Then, link joint “J1” with the Outflow icon and delete the pending joint of the Outflow icon.

NOTE: Links to new nodes can be automatically created by simply re-linking the element to
the new node.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 749

The extra joint can be deleted.

At this point we can re-arrange the icons in an opportune way and name each element as
below:

It is now possible to fill all the data in the different parts of the model.

To keep things simple, we suppose the well to be vertical, so that TVD=MD, and the
completion is supposed to be a single 3.995” ID tubing. This information can be used to enter
the information for the pipe section between the two layers.
3.11.3.2 Define the IPR elements
1. Associate Layers' files
For each layer associate the corresponding PROSPER file as per Table 1 744 , for example:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 750 GAP

In the IPR section select the layer fluid type and IPR model:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 751

Repeat this for the Oil Layer, to be associated to the Oil IPR.out file.

2. Generate Layer IPRs

Follow the same steps as see in previous examples 549 to generate the layers IPR.

NOTE: alternative to having an already prepared PROSPER

model is to enter the data manually in the IPR section

At the end, looking at the well IPR section, it is possible to verify that the data have been
entered.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 752 GAP

3.11.3.3 Define the Pipe CD

The tubing between layers will be defined with a pipeline element.
Enter in the pipeline description section (accessible double-clicking on the element) the related
data:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 753

Petroleum Experts 2 flow correlation is selected.

In the Environment section enter a temperature of 240 deg F.
3.11.3.4 Define the Outflow AB
In order to model this completion segment, the outflow will have to be defined with the VLP
curves are required. It is possible to generate these curves building a PROSPER model for the
piece of completion AB.
The steps that will be followed are:
Associate the PROSPER model for the section AB
Generate the VLP curves for GAP using the PROSPER model

1. Associate the PROSPER model

Double click on the outflow icon and associate the OUTFLOW.out PROSPER file in the well
Summary screen.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 754 GAP

2. Generate the Well VLPs with PROSPER

To accomplish this task refer to previous examples 587 .

These are the values used for the sensitivity parameters in the VLPs:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 755

3.11.3.5 Making the gas inflow controllable

Once the VLP generation is finished, the next step is set the Gas Inflow model "controllable",
in order to model the inflow controllable valve and allow the optimiser control the gas inflow by
choking back this only layer.

To do so, click on the mouse right button on Layer 1, and a drop down menu will pop up,
scroll down and select the option Controllable (Inflow Choke can be changed by the
optimiser). This will display a red circle around the gas inflow icon.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 756 GAP

Alternative to that, double click on the inflow, access the Controls section and set the dP
choke to Controllable.
3.11.4 Solve Network with no Optimisation
Once the model has been set up, the next step is solving the network to evaluate the entire
response of the system to evaluate how much the well produces if the two layers are fully
open.

From main menu select Solve Network and enter 200 psig as separator pressure. (This will
represent the WHP), click on Next/ and then on Calculate without optimisation:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 757

Hover the mouse over the separator icon, the well production can be evaluated; Under these conditions
the well can approximately produce around 8100 STB/d of oil and 48 MMscf/d of gas (of which 44
MMscf/d come from the gas layer).

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 758 GAP

3.11.5 Solve Network with Optimisation

Since both layers are producing to its maximum potential, the gas layer can be controlled to increase
the oil production; solve the network again but using the option Optimise and honour Constraints.

In this case the oil production is increased significantly to around 13180 stb/d and the gas production
has been controlled to 15.4 MMscf/d.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 759

It is possible to verify that a choke dp of around 800 psi has been applied to the Gas Layer:

Conclusion: comparing with the previous results, it is possible to conclude that reducing the
production of gas from the gas layer will increase the oil production by 5000 STB/day. This is
because the effect of the gas is on one side to decrease the pressure drop in the wellbore, as
the gravity term decreases, but on the other side to increase the pressure drop in the
wellbore, as the friction term increases.
The Optimisation feature of GAP is able to determine the optimum amount of gas to flow from
the top layer in order to achieve the maximum oil production in the well.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 760 GAP

This completes the Multilayer Example.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 761

3.12 Example 11 - GAP Fully Compositional

3.12.1 Objectives
Definition of the problem
A new retrograde gas condensate field has been discovered with four appraisal wells. A
simple surface configuration has been defined for gathering all the fluid to a common manifold.
The produced fluid is to be delivered 5 km away from the main manifold to the separator.

The objectives are to:

1. Calculate the production at for the wells fully open. It is also required to assess if in the
pipeline there may be problems concerning deposition of solids (hydrates or waxes)
2. Generate a production profile from 01/01/2007 to 01/01/2012 operating at full production to
evaluate the changes in the composition of the fluid, especially evolution of the C1, C2 and
C3. The delivery pressure at the separator is fixed to 1000 psig until 01/01/2010 and from
this date onward the separator will operate at 500 psig.

Learning topics
The objectives of this example are in more detail to learn how to:
Set-up a GAP model for a retrograde condensate field using the fully compositional
method
Export and import compositional model in GAP
How to run a prediction using GAP and MBAL
How to evaluate changes in the composition fluid.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 762 GAP

Executive Summary
The steps to follow will be to:
1. Build the GAP network
- Draw the GAP network
- Define a reservoir in GAP
- Define the MBAL model as compositional and Import the composition in MBAL
from PVTP
- Define wells in GAP
- Generate Well IPRs in GAP using PROSPER
- Import Well VLPs in GAP
- Import the composition in GAP from PVTP
- Define the pipeline and eventual surface equipment
2. Run Solve Network (no optimisation) to determine the actual production for the
current network status
3. Run the prediction and checking the results

The files to build this example can be found in the directory:

~\samples\GAP\Compositional\Initial files\*.*
The final model can be found in the GAP archive file format
in the following directory:
~\samples\GAP\Compositional\Gap fully compositional1.gar
Extract 533 the archive file to an appropriate directory

Click here 795 to set the model to Compositional lumping/delumping

Click here 816 to set the model to Black Oil compositional lumping/delumping

IMPORTANT NOTE:
When modeling gas lifted systems (or any artificial lift systems where a
hydrocarbon fluid is mixed to the main fluid) in compositional mode, it is strongly
recommended to use the compositional Tracking mode.
This is because when using Fully Compositional or Black Oil Compositional modes, a full
Equation of State model is used to determine the fluid composition and PVT properties.
The assumption the EOS model takes is that if two fluids are blended, immediate and
perfect mixing occurs and a new fluid is generated. This means that after the mixing it is
not possible to physically differentiate between the gas lift gas and the reservoir fluid
and separate the gas lift gas from the reservoir fluid, hence it is not possible to have a
consistent reporting of the gas lift injected throughout the network, nor to use the gas lift
gas rate as a constraint.
Compositional Tracking is recommended for gas lifted systems, as it is based on the
black oil assumption that the various phases are kept separate throughout the system,
hence it is possible to determine and report consistently the amount of gas lift gas at any
point in the system and use it for constraint purpose.
The black oil assumption behind the Tracking model, though considering separation of
the various phases, has been found to be quite reliable, also related to the physical fact

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 763

that at the relatively low pressure and temperature conditions occurring in pipeline
networks mixing of fluids becomes possibly unlikely.

3.12.2 Data Available

Description of the wells
A well is described with an Inflow Performance relationship and Vertical Lift Performance
curves.

In this example, the Forcheimer Pseudo Pressure Method will be used for the description of
the IPRs.

The file names containing the pre-generated lift curves corresponding to each well are shown
in the table below.

Well Name Start of Well Model Lift Curves

production
- dd/mm/yyy -
Well 1 01/01/2007 Well 1 Well 1.tpd
Well 2 01/01/2007 Well 2 Well 2.tpd
Well 3 01/01/2007 Well 3 Well 3.tpd
Well 4 01/01/2007 Well 4 Well 4.tpd
Table 1 - Well data

Description of the pipelines

In this example, all the depth reference is set to zero depth for the TVDs

Pipe Pipe Upstrea Downstre Overall Multiphase

Lengt ID m TVD am TVD Heat Correlation
h Transfer
Coefficien
t
km Inch m m Btu/h/ft2/ -
es F
Manifold 5 8 0 0 3 Petroleum
to Experts 4
Top Riser
WH1 to 3 6 0 0 3 Petroleum
Manifold Experts 4
WH2 to 4 6 0 0 3 Petroleum
Manifold Experts 4
WH3 to 8 6 0 0 3 Petroleum
Manifold Experts 4

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 764 GAP

WH4 to 5 6 0 0 3 Petroleum
Manifold Experts 4
Table 2 - Pipeline data

Description of the reservoir

Initial Reservoir pressure at 5320psig
datum:
Reservoir Temperature: 255 degF
Initial Gas in Place: 500 Bscf
Associated MBAL file: Reservoir.mbi

Description of the PVT

The PVT Equation of State data are in the PVTP model PVT model.pvi.

The files for this example can be found in the following

directory:
~\samples\GAP\Compositional\Initial files\*.*
3.12.3 Build the GAP model
This section can be used as a general step-by-step procedure to build any GAP model.
The sketch illustrated in the Objectives 761 will be used as reference.
3.12.3.1 Draw the GAP network
1. Getting Started
Begin by starting the program.
From the GAP entry screen, select File New to reinitialise GAP.

2. Defining the global system options

To begin setting up the system options, select Options | Method and make the following
selections:

System Type : Production

Optimisation Method : Production
PVT Model : Fully Compositional
Prediction: On
Prediction Method : Pressure and Temperature
Water Vapour: No Calculations
Temperature model: Rough Approximation

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 765

Then click EOS Model Set up to access the general set up of the EOS model.
For this example the EOS options that will be used are:
EOS Model Peng Robinson
Volume Shift Yes
Lumping mode set to No. In this case we will use the original composition, without
lumping it in a shorter one
The reference data represent the surface standard conditions. In this example
we are using 60 F and 0 psig
The path to Surface will be set to Flash Straight to Stock Tank
The rest will be kept as default and will be changed, whenever necessary, when
importing the EOS

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 766 GAP

Then Click on OK to accept the changes.

This completes the system set-up and reinitialises the program.

3. Drawing the system

It is assumed that the user is familiar with the basics of GAP and so able to construct the
network 761 without further instructions. If help is required, please refer to any of the previous
examples ( click here 537 )

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 767

Note that when defining wells and reservoirs, by default they are considered to produce oil.
When describing reservoir and wells later on, the elements will be correctly defined.

3.12.3.2 Define the Reservoir

To define the reservoir, the corresponding MBAL file will be associated to the tank in GAP. To
do that, double-click on the reservoir icon to visualize the Tank Summary screen and Browse
the reservoir model reservoir_start.mbi, as shown below:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 768 GAP

3.12.3.3 Setting up MBAL as compositional

In this section the existing MBAL model reservoir_start.mbi will be modified in order to have
the PVT defined as Fully Compositional.
To achieve that:
From GAP access the tank Summary screen (see above 767 ) and click on Run MBAL to
open up the MBAL model

Access the main program Options and select the Compositional model as Fully
Compositional

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 769

Enter the EOS Model Setup options. Please note that when linking a fully compositional
MBAL model to GAP, MBAL will automatically use the EOS settings defined in GAP.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 770 GAP

3.12.3.3.1 Entering compositional PVT Data

The next step is to import in MBAL the Equation of State. The EOS will be exported from a
pre-existing PVTP model (PVT model.pvi) as a .PRP file and imported in MBAL.

These are the steps to follow:

Open up the PVT model.pvi in PVTP

The PVTP file includes an EOS that has already been matched to lab report data. The EOS
has been defined with 16 components and Volume Shift is in use.
From the main PVTP panel it is possible to access View Properties to view the table with the
composition and components' properties:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 771

Export the EOS model by accessing the menu File/Export and then EOS Composition :

Save the .PRP file and PVT model.prp, which contains the properties shown above

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 772 GAP

In MBAL access the PVT/Fluid Properties, access the Gas tab and then Edit Composition:

In the Gas Composition screen Import...PRP and recall the previously save .PRP file:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 773

The program will automatically apply the EOS options that were present in PVTP, included the
use of separator train as path to Stock tank conditions.

Click on OK and make sure to go though all the screens on the PVT section to validate all
the screens:

Note: In the case shown above, the gas composition has

been entered that contains vaporised oil. When the fluid
goes below the dew point, the program will automatically
determine the equilibrium oil composition, hence there is no
requirement to enter any oil PVT data.

In the Input/Tank data section enter an initial Oil leg equal to zero, as the reservoir is initially
above the dew point.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 774 GAP

With no production history, no history matching is possible.

This completes the set up of the tank model.

Select File | Save As to save the MBAL data. Enter the file name Reservoir.MBI in a
suitable directory.
Then click on GAP to return to GAP tank summary screen.

In GAP accept the change of file name:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 775

At this stage the GAP file should be saved. To do this click on |File |Save As and using the
browsing feature save the file as GAP Fully Compositional .gap.

3.12.3.4 Define the Wells

A well is described in GAP by means of an IPR and a VLP. Refer to the PROSPER manual for
more information about well modeling. For this exercise, VLP’s have been generated and
saved so that they can be imported into GAP. The IPR curves will instead be generated.
In order to describe the well “Well 1” double-click on the well icon. This will open the |Well
Data entry summary screen.
In the well Summary screen enter the following information:

Label: Well 1
Mask: Include in System (default)
Well Type: Retrograde Condensate
Gas
Model: VLP / IPR intersection

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 776 GAP

PROSPER well file: Well 1.OUT

In this example, the PROSPER and VLP files have

already been constructed for the user. This was done
to save time in completing the exercise, as it is
assumed that the users are already familiar with the
basics of the IPM Suite.
For information about the generation of the VLPs,
please refer to previous examples 587 .

Complete the definition of all the wells.

Note that the well models have been defined with black
oil model to save time. This is because in PROSPER the
user can model the fluid as black oil or as
compositional. In order to be able to work with black
oil, the black oil model has to be validated against the
results of the EOS (refer to the PROSPER manual for

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 777

details about the validation process)

3.12.3.5 Generate Well IPRs

Once all the wells have been created and the associated PROSPER well models selected, the
IPRs can be generated in GAP in a batch mode.
The steps are exactly the same as seen in previous examples 549 :
Select |Generate|Generate Well IPRs from PROSPER in the main menu
Then select |All and |Generate.

After the generation access the IPR section, tab More and set Relative Permeability curves
used for fractional flow to From Tank Model:

3.12.3.6 Import VLPs

To import the VLP curves in GAP (ref. VLP generation 402 ) the user can either:

Access the VLP section in the well input area and Browse the VLP sets already generated
for this example (after that, skip to the next step) (this is a much faster option in the case of
this example, being the VLP already available; of course, in all real cases the VLPs need to
be generated), or

Generate them Access the menu Generate/Generate Well VLPs with PROSPER., then
then All, then Data to enter the ranges of sensitivity variables.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 778 GAP

Please refer to the VLP generation 402 for guidelines on the ranges to use.

As the second method has been widely demonstrated in previous examples 587 , as VLP curves
have been already generated, the first method will be followed here.
Lift Curve Import

In order to import the pre-generated lift curve access the VLP section, as shown in the
previous example 690 , select Import and recall the correspondent .TPD file

The same procedure is done for the three other wells.

3.12.3.7 Import EoS Composition in GAP
When the compositional option is used, the EOS needs to be Imported in the IPR screen to
allow solving the Network.
When running the model in Prediction mode, the composition entered at the IPR level will be
updated with the one coming from the reservoir model (MBAL or other).

In this case the .PRP file to be imported for all the wells is the same imported for the reservoir
model (all wells producing from the same tank).

To import the EOS in the IPR section two main method are available:
Accessing the Composition button in the well IPR section (see figure below) and follow the
same procedure described for the importing the EOS in Mbal 772 .

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 779

Accessing the menu Edit \ Import Compositions, then selecting all the wells and Import
EOS Options:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 780 GAP

Then Continue and recall the .PRP file previously exported from PVTP. Accespt all changes to
the EOS options

Following either method will allow to import the EOS in all wells. Accessing the IPR section,
the Composition will allow to verify that the EOS has been correctly input:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 781

3.12.3.8 Define the Pipelines

Enter the Pipeline data according to Table 2 763 and following the same steps as seen in
previous examples 694 .

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 782 GAP

To keep it simple, the pipelines are considered horizontal.

3.12.3.9 Completing the model
A controllable choke is placed at the well head to control the production rate of each individual
well. To add a make the well controllable, point with the mouse cursor the well icon displayed
in the GAP main screen board and click the right mouse button, this will display a drop down
menu scroll down and select the option Controllable (Wellhead choke can be changed by
optimizer).

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 783

Also, enter in the Separator the Schedule to change the separator pressure to 500 psig on
1/1/2010 (ref. previous example for details about entering Schedules 610 ):

The model is now complete and ready to run.

Save the model as GAP fully compositional.gap.

3.12.4 Solve Network and viewing results

Once the model has been set up, the next step is solving the network to evaluate the entire
response of the system.

From main menu select Solve Network and enter 1000 psig as separator pressure. Click on

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 784 GAP

Next/ and then on Calculate without optimisation:

Before looking at the results, one can increase the amount of information visualised in the main
fly-over by accessing the menu View / Select Info Displayed and enabling the viewing of
compositions:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 785

Pointing the cursor on the separator, it is possible to see that the wells fully open produce
overall around 169 MMscf/day of gas and 213000 STB/day of oil:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 786 GAP

The results also show the composition in each point of the system.

3.12.4.1 Viewing the detailed compositional results

Note that one can obtain the composition everywhere and if necessary extract the composition
and use it in other tools (like MBAL, PROSPER or PVTP).
To access the details of the composition:

Double click on the desired element (for example, in this case, Well 1)
Access the Results section, scroll all the way to the right hand side and select Composition
View:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 787

This will display the composition results for the fluid flowing through that given element:

Note that the EOS can be exported from this screen using the Export...PRP button. The .PRP
file can then be imported and used in the other tools of the IPM Suite.

The same results can be obtained accessing the various Results menus (for example, Results

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 788 GAP

\ Detailed \ All Separators and Injection Manifolds).

From the screen above the user has the possibility to view the Phase Envelope by selecting
Phase Envelope and the Plot:

Also, in the Phase envelope utility selecting Calculate Hydrate...Wax and then Plot will display
on the plot the curves of formation of Hydrates and the Wax appearance temperature:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 789

If the Calculate Hydrate...Wax option is used on a pipeline, the program will

automatically enter in View Profile the profile of P vs T along the pipeline and display it
in the plot. In this way it is possible to verify if the pipeline at any point operates at
conditions of formation of hydrates or waxes:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 790 GAP

The green curve in the plot represents the pipeline P vs T profile.

The effect of hydrate inhibitors can be found by entering a

percentage inhibitor and selecting the inhibitor type from
the combo box provided.

In the main Options (menu Options / Menu) it is

possible to enable the Wax or Hydrate Warning 303 . In
this way the program will report in the pipeline results,
under Status, if the pipeline has risk of formation of
solids or not.

3.12.5 Prediction and viewing results

One of the objectives of the exercise is to evaluate the evolution of C1 and C2 in a production
profile of 5 years considering changes in the separator pressure.

The prediction (no optimisation) can be run for 5 years (starting 1/1/2007) with 2 month time
step, with an initial separator pressure of 1000 psig.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 791

As with some previous chapters 567 , no further details will be provided on how the forecast is
run. Focus will be placed instead on viewing the results.

Please refer to previous example 606 for the various ways of inspecting results.

From main menu Prediction select the option Plot Nodes Prediction Results as shown below
and plot the Separator results:

Click on plot, in the plot generated select from the plot main menu the option Variables. Within
variable select as avriable 1 the gas rate and as variable 2 the GOR:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 792 GAP

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 793

The plot shows that the gas rate is declining along the time and at the beginning of 2010 it
increases, due to the decrease of separator pressure.
It is interesting to see that the GOR initially in constant, as the reservoir pressure is above the
dew point, then it increases as the reservoir pressure decreases below the dew point.

From the Variables menu it is possible to plot the evolution of C1:

The profiles of C2 and C3 can also be plot in the same way.

In the case of the C3, it is interesting to note that the produced C3 decreases, this being due
to the fact that as liquid condensed in the reservoir, the produced gas becomes lighter and
lighter (C1 increases in fact), causing the molar % of C3 to decrease:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 794 GAP

As seen above, it is possible to view and export the details of the compositional results by
accessing the Results sections and selecting the button View Composition ( above 786 ).

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 795

3.13 Example 12 - Compositional Lumping/Delumping

3.13.1 Objectives
Definition of the problem
In the case of the system described in the previous example 761 the compositional model was
defined with 16 components and was used throughout the system from reservoir to separator.
In is now required to import in the integrated model GAP a compositional pair, one with 16
components (the "full" composition) and the other with 6 pseudo components (the "lumped"),
equivalent to the first.
This is to prepare the GAP model to be linked to reservoir numerical simulation models where
one would like to use a small number of components, and to process simulation models,
where one would like to use a bigger number of components (ref. Technical Overview 6 ).
The GAP model itself (as well as the MBAL model) will be run using the Full composition. This
is recommended, as having a bigger composition makes the calculation of the fluid thermal
properties more accurate, leading to accurate temperature calculations in the network model.
This is very important in cases where one wants to perform solid (hydrates or waxes)
precipitation estimations.

A production prediction in the same conditions as the previous example 761 is required.

Learning topics
The objectives of this example are in more detail to learn how to:
Set the GAP model to work with lumping/de-lumping of compositions
Export the lumped and de-lumped compositions from PVTP and import them in MBAL
and GAP
Look at the results concerning the lumped and the de-lumped composition

Executive Summary
The starting point is the model 761 built in the previous example.
The steps to follow will be to:
1. In PVTP, create the lumped composition from the original 16-components one (the
de-lumped composition) and export both to a .PRP file
2. Set the MBAL model to work with the Lumping/De-lumping
3. Set the GAP model to work with the Lumping/De-lumping and to use the de-lumped
composition
4. Run the prediction in GAP and check the results

The files to build this example can be found in archive:

~\samples\GAP\Compositional\Gap fully compositional1.gar
The final model can be found in the GAP archive file format
in the following directory:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 796 GAP

~\samples\GAP\Compositional\Gap Lumping_Delumping.gar
Extract 533 the archive file to an appropriate directory

Click here 816 to look at the example of Black Oil compositional lumping/delumping

IMPORTANT NOTE:
When modeling gas lifted systems (or any artificial lift systems where a
hydrocarbon fluid is mixed to the main fluid) in compositional mode, it is strongly
recommended to use the compositional Tracking mode.
This is because when using Fully Compositional or Black Oil Compositional modes, a full
Equation of State model is used to determine the fluid composition and PVT properties.
The assumption the EOS model takes is that if two fluids are blended, immediate and
perfect mixing occurs and a new fluid is generated. This means that after the mixing it is
not possible to physically differentiate between the gas lift gas and the reservoir fluid
and separate the gas lift gas from the reservoir fluid, hence it is not possible to have a
consistent reporting of the gas lift injected throughout the network, nor to use the gas lift
gas rate as a constraint.
Compositional Tracking is recommended for gas lifted systems, as it is based on the
black oil assumption that the various phases are kept separate throughout the system,
hence it is possible to determine and report consistently the amount of gas lift gas at any
point in the system and use it for constraint purpose.
The black oil assumption behind the Tracking model, though considering separation of
the various phases, has been found to be quite reliable, also related to the physical fact
that at the relatively low pressure and temperature conditions occurring in pipeline
networks mixing of fluids becomes possibly unlikely.

When an MBAL model is linked to GAP and both use

lumping/delumping, MBAL will use the composition
(lumped or full) according to what is defined in the GAP
main program options
3.13.2 Data Available
The data available are:
Initial GAP model present in archive ~\samples\GAP\Compositional\Gap fully
compositional1.gar
PVTP model PVT model.pvi present in folder *\samples\gap\Compositional\Initial
files
3.13.3 Create and export the Lumped and the De-lumped
compositions
In this section it is assumed that the fundamentals of EOS modelling and matching, as well as
the procedure to build a compositional lumping/de-lumping set, are known.
If necessary, illustration of these topics can be found in the PVTP user Guide.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 797

Note that it is possible to define manually a lumping

rule in GAP, however, it is recommended to make use
of PVTP, as it has all the required features to build and
QC EOS models

The starting point is an already matched EOS (PVT model.pvi, present in the folder
*\samples\gap\Compositional\Initial files).
In the PVT model file a lumping rule has already been defined.

To create the lumped composition from the de-lumped one access the menu Data /
Lumping/Delumping for IPM

Then select
- Lumping Method as Lump From Rule and then
- Lump Stream

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 798 GAP

The already present lumping rule will lump the 16-components original composition to 6
components and will at the same time match the saturation pressure, GOR and density of
oil.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 799

Selecting Quick Calc will allow to quality check the lumping by comparing some important
properties obtained with the two lumped and de-lumped composition
For example: Phase Envelope:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 800 GAP

Flash through separator stages:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 801

It is possible to verify that running other calculations (like CCE, depletion study, etc.)
the two compositions give very close answers.

When comparing the lumped to the de-lumped

composition, if the overall objective is to deliver the
EOS to a process model, like Hysys or Unisim, then it
is important to verify the Costald density obtained with
the two models, as this density is the default method
used by those process simulators

At this point, exporting the .PRP from PVTP using the menu File/Exprot (just like seen in
the previous example 771 ) will export the pair lumped and de-lumped compositions.
Just before creating the .PRP file the program will ask if the Lump Rule is to be exports along
with the composition. Select Yes.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 802 GAP

The Lump Rule contains the logic used to lump the

composition and should be used in MBAL and GAP to
pass from the lumped to the de-lumped composition
and vice-versa as desired

The PVTP file can be saved as PVT model1.pvi.

3.13.3.1 Enter the lumped/de-lumped composition in MBAL

The next step is to introduce the lumped/delumped composition in MBAL.
The process to follow will be to enable the MBAL model to work with lumping/de-lumping and
then import the two lumped and de-lumped compositions.

Access the MBAL model in the GAP fully compositional.gap model and go to the EOS
Model Set up options

Select the options Allow Lumping and Use Lumped Composition and enter the separator
train data as shown below:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 803

The objective of the Optimisation mode set to medium is to speed up the calculations without
penalising the accuracy the results. The Medium mode is the fastest (up to 80 times) and also
default and this should be selected unless any problems are detected in the calculations.
Leave all the remaining options as default. When importing the .PRP the program will reset
some of the options based on the ones coming from PVTP.

Access the PVT / Fluid Properties section, then in the Gas tab import the .PRP file
previously exported by using the Import...PRP button:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 804 GAP

This will set the Volume Shift in the options to be used with the Lumped composition and will
import the compositions and the Lump Rule too.
In the Gas compositions section it is possible to see that both the lumped and the de-lumped
compositions have been imported, and it is possible to skip from one to the other by using the
above highlighted View dialog.
Selecting the Properties button will show the results of a flash to standard conditions using the
previously defined path:

The two compositions are very close.

Enter the More Lumping section to set up the lumping options

From the Gas Composition screen select Change to access the EOS options. Alternatively,
access the main EOS Model Setup options form the main program Options.
Select the More Lumping section:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 805

In this section select all the defaults and make sure to lump and delump using the separator
train by selecting in the box Seps the opportune option:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 806 GAP

3.13.3.2 Enter the lumped/de-lumped composition in GAP

The example objectives 795 require to be able to pass from a lumped to a de-lumped
composition, so that it is possible to use in the MBAL reservoir model a reduced composition
and in the GAP model an extended composition.
To do that, it is necessary to enable GAP to work with lumping/de-lumping and to import the
two lumped and de-lumped compositions.

Access the GAP main Options (menu Options / Method) and as done in MBAL access the
EOS Model Set up options and enable the use of Lumping / De-Lumping and use the Full
Composition, as shown below:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 807

To import the composition, any of the method showed in the previous example 778 can be
adopted. Alternatively, in GAP it is possible to import in batch model compositions for
multiple wells.
This can be achieved by following the menu Edit / Import Compositions, select all wells and
allow to import the lumping rule.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 808 GAP

The Continue and recall the previously exported .PRP file. This will import the compositions
and the rule. Accept all the changes.

Access the Options / Method / EOS Model Set up section and make sure to select the
Lump Master Rule as PVT1, the Path to Surface as Separator Train and the Volume shift
for both compositions

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 809

Enter the More Lumping section

In this section select all the defaults and make sure to lump and delump using the separator
train by selecting in the box Seps the opportune option. Also, set the model to Use Full
Composition:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 810 GAP

Validate with OK.

Accessing the well IPR section, Composition button, it is possible to see that the lumped
and the de-lumped compositions have been correctly imported in all wells.

To summarise: the de-lumped and the equivalent lumped compositions have been
imported in MBAL and in GAP. MBAL has been set up to run calculations using the
lumped composition, whilst GAP has been set up to run with the de-lumped

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 811

composition.

Save the model as GAP Lumping-Delumping.gap.

3.13.4 Prediction and viewing the results
Run the prediction as in the previous base case example 790 .
The prediction (no optimisation) can be run for 5 years (starting 1/1/2007) with 2 month time
step, with an initial separator pressure of 1000 psig.

As with some previous chapters 567 , no further details will be provided on how the forecast is
run. Focus will be placed instead on viewing the results.

Please refer to a previous example 606 for the various ways of inspecting results.

From main menu Prediction select the option Plot Nodes Prediction Results as shown below
and plot the Separator results:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 812 GAP

Click on plot, in the plot generated select from the plot main menu the option Variables. Within
variable select as variable 1 the gas rate and as variable 2 the GOR:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 813

As well as the evolution of C1 and the other components:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 814 GAP

The rest of the results can be viewed as seen in the previous example 790 .
In particular, accessing each single element's Results section, it is possible to View and export
all the compositional data to another software by means of a .PRP file :

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 815

Comparing these results with the ones obtained in the previous example 790 , it is possible to
see that they are practically the same.

To conclude, in order to use the Lumping / De-Lumping feature of GAP, a lumping rule
has to be developed. This can be obtained by defining it by hand in GAP itself or,
better, developed in PVTP. Once the lumping rule is available, it is possible to export
the two compositions and import them in GAP, MBAL and PROSPER.
In each program the user can specify if to use the lumped or the de-lumped
composition and then the model can be used as any other ordinary model.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 816 GAP

3.14 Example 13 - Black Oil Compositional

Lumping-Delumping

3.14.1 Objectives
Definition of the problem
In the case of the system described in the previous example 761 it is still required to know the
composition of the produced fluid at any point in time.
However, instead of using the EOS for the network calculation, to reduce the run time (but still
making sure to use a realistic PVT model) it is suggested to use an equivalent black oil model.
In other words, the requirements are:
To use a black oil model to speed up calculations
To determine the composition (EOS) in any point of the network at any point in time
The black oil model has to be at any point in time consistent with the EOS composition
A production prediction in the same conditions as the previous example 761 is required.

Learning topics
The objectives of this example are in more detail to learn how to:
Set the GAP model to work with Black Oil compositional lumping/de-lumping
Look at the results concerning obtained using Black Oil compositional and Fully
Compositional

Executive Summary
The starting point is the model 761 built in the previous example.
The steps to follow will be to:
1. Set the GAP model to work with the Black Oil compositional Lumping/De-lumping
and to use the de-lumped composition
2. Run Solve Network (no optimisation) to determine the actual production for the
current network status
3. Run the prediction in GAP and check the results
Note that in this example MBAL will still run Fully compositional.

The files to build this example can be found in archive:

~\samples\GAP\Compositional\Gap Fully Compositional1.gar
The final model can be found in the GAP archive file format
in the following directory:
~\samples\GAP\Compositional\Gap
BO_COMP_Lumping_delumping.gar
Extract 533 the archive file to an appropriate directory

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 817

IMPORTANT NOTE:
When modeling gas lifted systems (or any artificial lift systems where a
hydrocarbon fluid is mixed to the main fluid) in compositional mode, it is strongly
recommended to use the compositional Tracking mode.
This is because when using Fully Compositional or Black Oil Compositional modes, a full
Equation of State model is used to determine the fluid composition and PVT properties.
The assumption the EOS model takes is that if two fluids are blended, immediate and
perfect mixing occurs and a new fluid is generated. This means that after the mixing it is
not possible to physically differentiate between the gas lift gas and the reservoir fluid
and separate the gas lift gas from the reservoir fluid, hence it is not possible to have a
consistent reporting of the gas lift injected throughout the network, nor to use the gas lift
gas rate as a constraint.
Compositional Tracking is recommended for gas lifted systems, as it is based on the
black oil assumption that the various phases are kept separate throughout the system,
hence it is possible to determine and report consistently the amount of gas lift gas at any
point in the system and use it for constraint purpose.
The black oil assumption behind the Tracking model, though considering separation of
the various phases, has been found to be quite reliable, also related to the physical fact
that at the relatively low pressure and temperature conditions occurring in pipeline
networks mixing of fluids becomes possibly unlikely.

3.14.2 Data Available

The data available for this example can be found in the archive Gap Fully Compositional1.
gar.
3.14.3 Set up GAP as Black Oil compositional Lumping/Delumping
Starting from the model GAP fully compositional1.gap , to switch the model to Black Oil
Compositional Lumping/Delumping access the main program options and select the required
PVT model:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 818 GAP

In the case of this example No Lumping is selected, therefore the original composition is going
to be used to determine at any point the black oil model, then used for the network pressure
drop calculations.

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 819

Note that in the EOS Model Setup options it is possible to enable the Lumping options (in case
a pair lumped/de-lumped compositions is available, see further 825 ).

Checking the wells' IPR section, it is possible to see that the Fluid Properties (black oil
properties) have been determined on the basis of the EOS present under the Composition
section.

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 820 GAP

Note that in this example the MBAL model will still run
Fully compositional.
However, if desired, it is possible to set MBAL to Black
Oil compositional Lumping/Delumping, by accessing the
main EOS options ( Click here 768 )
IPM allows full flexibility by enabling to set MBAL in one
mode (fully compositional/ black oil and/or Lumped/De-
lumped) and GAP in the other. However, note that if
GAP is set to work with Lumping/Delumping, MBAL will
use the same mode as GAP (Full or Lumped)

3.14.4 Solve Network and results

The next step is solving the network to evaluate the entire response of the system to evaluate
how much the well produces if the two layers are fully open.

From main menu select Solve Network and enter 1000 psig as separator pressure. Click on
Next/ and then on Calculate without optimisation:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 821

Pointing the cursor on the separator, it is possible to see that the wells fully open produce
overall around 168 MMscf/day of gas and 21190 STB/day of oil:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 822 GAP

Comparing with the results obtained in the previous example ( Click here 785 to inspect
), it is possible to see that the results are very close.
Note also that the run time has considerably decreased from around 6 seconds (fully
compositional) to around 3 seconds.
NOTE: The time is given only as reference, as it depends on the hardware used to run
the software.
3.14.5 Prediction and viewing the results
Run the prediction as in the previous base case example 790 .
The prediction (no optimisation) can be run for 5 years (starting 1/1/2007) with 2 month time
step, with an initial separator pressure of 1000 psig.

As with some previous chapters 567 , no further details will be provided on how the forecast is
run. Focus will be placed instead on viewing the results.

Please refer to a previous example 606 for the various ways of inspecting results.

From main menu Prediction select the option Plot Nodes Prediction Results as shown below
and plot the Separator results:

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 823

Click on plot, in the plot generated select from the plot main menu the option Variables. Within
variable select as variable 1 the gas rate and as variable 2 the GOR:

And profile of C1:

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 824 GAP

Comparing these results with the ones obtained with Fully Compositional calculation (
Click here 811 to inspect), it is possible to verify that they are practically the same.

Save the model as GAP BO_COMP_Lumping_delumping.gap

GAP User Guide February, 2011

 Examples Guide 825

3.14.6 Black Oil - Lumping/Delumping

When working in Black Oil compositional Lumping/Delumping mode, it is possible to allow
Lumping and then import a pair of lumped/de-lumped compositions, and then to choose which
composition to choose to use to generate the black oil model.
Setting up the model with lumping/delumping is straight forward and follows the same steps as
seen in the previous example 796 .
Just to summarise, these are the steps:
In the main GAP PVT options (menu Options/Method/EOS Model Setup) enable the use of
Lumping
Import in MBAL and GAP the .PRP containing the lumped and de-lumped compositions

When using Black Oil compositional Lumping/Delumping,

the model will be considerably faster than using Fully
Compositional, therefore it is possible to use the full
composition (de-lumped) for the calculations

1990-2011 Petroleum Experts Limited

 826 GAP

GAP User Guide February, 2011